Geometry Modeling, Patran

C O N T E N T S
MSC.Patran Reference Manual

MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 2: Geometry Modeling Part 2: Geometry Modeling
CHAPTER
1
Introduction to ■ Overview of Capabilities, 2
Geometry ■ Concepts and Definitions, 4
Modeling
❑ Parameterization, 5
❑ Topology, 10
- Topological Congruency and Meshing, 12
❑ Connectivity, 15
❑ Effects of Parameterization, Connectivity and Topology in MSC.Patran, 17
❑ Global Model Tolerance & Geometry, 18
■ Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran, 19

❑ Trimmed Surfaces, 20
❑ Solids, 24
❑ Parametric Cubic Geometry, 25
- Limitations on Parametric Cubic Geometry, 25
❑ Matrix of Geometry Types Created, 27
■ Building An Optimal Geometry Model, 30

❑ Building a Congruent Model, 31
❑ Building Optimal Surfaces, 33
❑ Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces, 37
❑ Building B-rep Solids, 40
❑ Building Degenerate Surfaces and Solids, 41
2
Accessing, ■ Overview, 46
Importing & ■ Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry, 47
Exporting
❑ Accessing Geometry Using MSC.Patran Unigraphics, 47
Geometry
❑ Accessing Geometry Using MSC.Patran ProENGINEER, 55
■ PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry, 57
3
Coordinate ■ Coordinate Frame Definitions, 60
Frames ■ Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames, 63
■ Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate Frames, 66
4
Create Actions ■ Overview of Geometry Create Action, 70
■ Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 74
❑ Create Points at XYZ Coordinates or Point Locations (XYZ Method), 74
❑ Create Point ArcCenter, 79
❑ Extracting Points, 81
- Extracting Points from Curves and Edges, 81
- Extracting Single Points from Surfaces or Faces, 84
- Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces, 86
- Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces, 88
- Parametric Bounds for Extracting Points from a Surface, 90
❑ Interpolating Points, 91
- Between Two Points, 91
- Interpolating Points on a Curve, 94
❑ Intersecting Two Entities to Create Points, 97
❑ Creating Points by Offsetting a Specified Distance, 107
❑ Piercing Curves Through Surfaces to Create Points, 109
❑ Projecting Points Onto Surfaces or Faces, 112
❑ Creating Curves Between Points, 117
- Creating Curves Through 2 Points, 117
❑ Creating Arced Curves (Arc3Point Method), 128
❑ Creating Chained Curves, 131
❑ Creating Conic Curves, 133
❑ Extracting Curves From Surfaces, 137
- Extracting Curves from Surfaces Using the Parametric Option, 137
- Extracting Curves From Surfaces Using the Edge Option, 142
❑ Creating Fillet Curves, 144
❑ Fitting Curves Through a Set of Points, 148
❑ Creating Curves at Intersections, 150
- Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Surfaces, 150
- Creating Curves at the Intersection of a Plane and a Surface, 154
- Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form, 157
- Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Planes, 158
❑ Manifold Curves Onto a Surface, 160
- Manifold Curves onto a Surface with the 2 Point Option, 160
- Manifold Curves onto a Surface With the N-Points Option, 164
- Manifold Parameters Subordinate Form, 167
❑ Creating Curves Normally Between a Point and a Curve (Normal
Method), 168
❑ Creating Offset Curves, 171
- Creating Constant Offset Curve, 171
- Creating Variable Offset Curve, 173
- Parameterization Control for Variable Offset Curve, 174
❑ Projecting Curves Onto Surfaces, 176
- Project Parameters Subordinate Form, 182
❑ Creating Piecewise Linear Curves, 183
❑ Creating Spline Curves, 185
- Creating Spline Curves with the Loft Spline Option, 185
- Creating Spline Curves with the B-Spline Option, 189
❑ Creating Curves Tangent Between Two Curves (TanCurve Method), 193
❑ Creating Curves Tangent Between Curves and Points
(TanPoint Method), 195
❑ Creating Curves, Surfaces and Solids Through a Vector Length (XYZ
Method), 199
❑ Creating Involute Curves, 203
- Creating Involute Curves with the Angles Option, 203
- Creating Involute Curves with the Radii Option, 206
❑ Revolving Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 208
❑ Creating Orthogonal Curves (2D Normal Method), 214
- Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Input Length Option, 214
- Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Calculate Length Option, 218
❑ Creating 2D Circle Curves, 222
❑ Creating 2D ArcAngle Curves, 226
❑ Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc2Point Method), 229
- Creating Arced Curves with the Center Option, 229
- Creating Arced Curves with the Radius Option, 233
- Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form, 236
❑ Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc3Point Method), 237
❑ Creating Surfaces from Curves, 240
- Creating Surfaces Between 2 Curves, 240
- Creating Surfaces Through 3 Curves (Curve Method), 243
- Creating Surfaces Through 4 Curves (Curve Method), 246
- Creating Surfaces from N Curves (Curve Method), 248
❑ Creating Composite Surfaces, 250
❑ Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces, 255
❑ Creating Surfaces from Edges (Edge Method), 257
❑ Extracting Surfaces, 260
- Extracting Surfaces with the Parametric Option, 260
- Extracting Surfaces with the Face Option, 264
❑ Creating Fillet Surfaces, 266
❑ Matching Adjacent Surfaces, 270
❑ Creating Constant Offset Surface, 272
❑ Creating Ruled Surfaces, 274
❑ Creating Trimmed Surfaces, 278
- Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Surface Option, 280
- Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Planar Option, 281
- Auto Chain Subordinate Form, 282
- Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Composite Option, 284
❑ Creating Surfaces From Vertices (Vertex Method), 287
❑ Extruding Surfaces and Solids, 289
❑ Gliding Surfaces, 294
- Gliding Surfaces with the 1 Director Curve Option, 294
- Gliding Surfaces with the 2 Director Curve Option, 296
❑ Creating Surfaces and Solids Using the Normal Method, 298
❑ Creating Surfaces from a Surface Mesh (Mesh Method), 305
- Created Tessellated Surface from Geometry Form, 306
❑ Creating Midsurfaces, 307
- Creating Midsurfaces with the Automatic Option, 307
- Creating Midsurfaces with the Manual Option, 309
❑ Creating Solid Primitives, 311
- Creating a Solid Block, 311
- Creating Solid Cylinder, 314
- Creating Solid Sphere, 317
- Creating Solid Cone, 320
- Creating Solid Torus, 323
- Solid Boolean operation during primitive creation, 326
❑ Creating Solids from Surfaces (Surface Method), 327
- Creating Solids from Two Surfaces, 327
- Creating Solids from Three Surfaces (Surface Method), 330
- Creating Solids from Four Surfaces (Surface Method), 333
- Creating Solids with the N Surface Option, 336
❑ Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid, 338
❑ Creating a Decomposed Solid, 340
❑ Creating Solids from Faces, 343
❑ Creating Solids from Vertices (Vertex Method), 346
❑ Gliding Solids, 348
■ Creating Coordinate Frames, 350
❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 3Point Method, 350
❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Axis Method, 353
❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Euler Method, 355
❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Normal Method, 358
❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 2 Vector Method, 361
❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the View Vector Method, 362
■ Creating Planes, 363

❑ Creating Planes with the Point-Vector Method, 363
❑ Creating Planes with the Vector Normal Method, 365
❑ Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method, 367
- Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method - Point Option, 367
- Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method-Parametric
Option, 369
❑ Creating Planes with the Plane Normal Method, 371
❑ Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method, 372
- Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method - Uniform Option, 372
- Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method - Nonuniform Option, 374
❑ Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method, 375
- Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Point Option, 375
- Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Curve Option, 377
- Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Surface Option, 379
❑ Creating Planes with the Offset Method, 381
❑ Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method, 383
- Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method - Point Option, 383
- Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method - Parametric
Option, 385
❑ Creating Planes with the 3 Points Method, 387
■ Creating Vectors, 389

❑ Creating Vectors with the Magnitude Method, 389
❑ Creating Vectors with the Interpolate Method, 391
- Between Two Points, 391
❑ Creating Vectors with the Intersect Method, 393
❑ Creating Vectors with the Normal Method, 395
- Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Plane Option, 395
- Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Surface Option, 397
- Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Element Face Option, 399
❑ Creating Vectors with the Product Method, 402
❑ Creating Vectors with the 2 Point Method, 404
5
Delete Actions ■ Overview of the Geometry Delete Action, 408
■ Deleting Any Geometric Entity, 409
■ Deleting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes or Vectors, 410
■ Deleting Coordinate Frames, 411
6
Edit Actions ■ Overview of the Edit Action Methods, 414
■ Editing Points, 416
❑ Equivalencing Points, 416
■ Editing Curves, 418

❑ Breaking Curves, 418
- Breaking a Curve at a Point, 418
- Breaking a Curve at a Parametric Location, 422
- Breaking a Curve at a Plane Location, 425
❑ Blending a Curve, 426
❑ Disassembling a Chained Curve, 429
❑ Extending Curves, 431
- Extending a Curve With the 1 Curve Option, 431
- Extending a Curve Using the Through Points Type, 436
- Extending a Curve Using the Full Circle Type, 438
- Extending a Curve With the 2 Curve Option, 440
❑ Merging Existing Curves, 443
❑ Refitting Existing Curves, 447
❑ Reversing a Curve, 448
❑ Trimming Curves, 451
- Trimming a Curve With the Point Option, 451
- Trimming a Curve Using the Parametric Option, 454
■ Editing Surfaces, 457
❑ Surface Break Options, 457
- Breaking a Surface With the Curve Option, 457
- Breaking a Surface With the Surface Option, 461
- Breaking a Surface With the Plane Option, 463
- Breaking a Surface With the Point Option, 465
- Breaking a Surface Using the 2 Point Option, 469
- Breaking a Surface With the Parametric Option, 471
❑ Blending Surfaces, 475
❑ Disassembling Trimmed Surfaces, 478
❑ Matching Surface Edges, 481
- Matching Surface Edges with the 2 Surface Option, 481
- Matching Surface Edges with the Surface-Point Option, 484
❑ Extending Surfaces, 486
- Extending Surfaces with the 2 Surface Option, 486
- Extending Surfaces to a Curve, 488
- Extending Surfaces to a Plane, 490
- Extending Surfaces to a Point, 492
- Extending Surfaces to a Surface, 494
- Extending Surfaces with the Percentage Option, 496
- Extending Surfaces with the Fixed Length Option, 498
❑ Refitting Surfaces, 500
❑ Reversing Surfaces, 501
❑ Sewing Surfaces, 503
❑ Trimming Surfaces to an Edge, 505
❑ Adding a Fillet to a Surface, 507
❑ Removing Edges from Surfaces, 508
- Removing Edges from Surfaces with Edge Option, 508
- Removing Edges from Surfaces with Edge Length Option, 509
❑ Adding a Hole to Surfaces, 510
- Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Center Point Option, 510
- Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Project Vector Option, 512
- Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Inner Loop Option, 514
❑ Removing a Hole from Trimmed Surfaces, 516
❑ Adding a Vertex to Surfaces, 518
❑ Removing a Vertex from Trimmed Surfaces, 520
■ Editing Solids, 522
❑ Breaking Solids, 522
- Breaking Solids with the Point Option, 522
- Breaking Solids with the Parametric Option, 526
- Breaking Solids with the Curve Option, 531
- Breaking Solids with the Plane Option, 533
- Breaking Solids with the Surface Option, 535
❑ Blending Solids, 538
❑ Disassembling B-rep Solids, 541
❑ Refitting Solids, 543
- Refitting Solids with the To TriCubicNet Option, 543
- Refitting Solids with the To TriParametric Option, 544
- Refitting Solids with the To Parasolid Option, 545
❑ Reversing Solids, 546
❑ Solid Boolean Operation Add, 548
❑ Solid Boolean Operation Subtract, 550
❑ Solid Boolean Operation Intersect, 552
❑ Creating Solid Edge Blends, 554
- Creating Constant Radius Edge Blends from Solid Edges, 554
- Creating Chamfer Edge Blend from Solid Edges, 556
❑ Imprinting Solid on Solid, 558
❑ Solid Shell Operation, 560
■ Editing Features, 562

❑ Suppressing a Feature, 562
❑ Unsuppressing a Feature, 563
❑ Editing Feature Parameters, 564
❑ Feature Parameter Definition, 565
7
Show Actions ■ Overview of the Geometry Show Action Methods, 568
❑ The Show Action Information Form, 569
■ Showing Points, 570

❑ Showing Point Locations, 570
❑ Showing Point Distance, 571
- Showing Point Distance with the Point Option, 571
- Showing Point Distance with the Curve Option, 573
- Showing Point Distance with the Surface Option, 575
- Showing Point Distance with the Plane Option, 577
- Showing Point Distance with the Vector Option, 579
❑ Showing the Nodes on a Point, 581
■ Showing Curves, 582
❑ Showing Curve Attributes, 582
❑ Showing Curve Arc, 583
❑ Showing Curve Angle, 584
❑ Showing Curve Length Range, 586
❑ Showing the Nodes on a Curve, 587
■ Showing Surfaces, 588

❑ Showing Surface Attributes, 588
❑ Showing Surface Area Range, 589
❑ Showing the Nodes on a Surface, 590
❑ Showing Surface Normals, 591
■ Showing Solids, 593

❑ Showing Solid Attributes, 593
■ Showing Coordinate Frames, 594

❑ Showing Coordinate Frame Attributes, 594
■ Showing Planes, 595

❑ Showing Plane Attributes, 595
❑ Showing Plane Angle, 596
❑ Showing Plane Distance, 598
■ Showing Vectors, 599

❑ Showing Vector Attributes, 599
8
Transform Actions ■ Overview of the Transform Methods, 602
■ Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 605
❑ Translating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 605
❑ Rotating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 619
❑ Scaling Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids and Vectors, 629
❑ Mirroring Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 640
❑ Moving Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors by Coordinate
Frame Reference (MCoord Method), 648
❑ Pivoting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 656
❑ Positioning Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 665
❑ Vector Summing (VSum) Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 674
❑ Moving and Scaling (MScale) Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 683
■ Transforming Coordinate Frames, 690

❑ Translating Coordinate Frames, 690
❑ Rotating Coordinate Frames, 693
9
Verify Actions ■ Verify Action, 698
❑ Verifying Surface Boundaries, 698
❑ Verifying Surfaces for B-reps, 700
- Update Graphics Subordinate Form, 701
❑ Verify - Surface (Duplicates), 702
10
Associate Actions ■ Overview of the Associate Action, 704
❑ Associating Point Object, 705
❑ Associating Curve Object, 707
11
Disassociate ■ Overview of the Disassociate Action Methods, 710
Actions ❑ Disassociating Points, 711
❑ Disassociating Curves, 712
❑ Disassociating Surfaces, 713
12
The Renumber ■ Introduction, 716
Action... ■ Renumber Forms, 717
Renumbering Geo
❑ Renumber Geometry, 718
metry
INDEX ■ MSC.Patran Reference Manual, 719

Part 2: Geometry Modeling
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling
CHAPTER
Introduction to Geometry Modeling
1
■ Overview of Capabilities
■ Concepts and Definitions
■ Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran
■ Building An Optimal Geometry Model

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
1.1 Overview of Capabilities

A powerful and important feature of MSC.Patran is its geometry capabilities. Geometry can be:
• Created.
• Directly accessed from an external CAD part file.
• Imported from an IGES file or a PATRAN 2 Neutral file.
Complete Accuracy of Original Geometry. MSC.Patran maintains complete accuracy of the
original geometry, regardless of where it came from. The exact mathematical representation of
the geometry (e.g., Arc, Rational B-Spline, B-rep, Parametric Cubic, etc.) is consistently
maintained throughout the modeling process, without any approximations or conversions.
This means different versions of the geometry model are avoided. Only one copy of the
geometry design needs to be maintained by the engineer, whether the geometry is in a separate
CAD part file or IGES file or the geometry is part of the MSC.Patran database.
Below are highlights of the geometry capabilities:
Direct Application of Loads/BCs and Element Properties to Geometry. All loads,

boundary conditions (BC) and element property assignments can be applied directly to the
geometry. When the geometry is meshed with a set of nodes and elements, MSC.Patran will
automatically assign the loads/BC or element property to the appropriate nodes or elements.
Although you can apply the loads/BCs or element properties directly to the finite element mesh,
the advantage of applying them to the geometry is if you remesh the geometry, they remain
associated with the model. Once a new mesh is created, the loads/BC and element properties
are automatically reassigned.
For more information, see Introduction to Functional Assignment Tasks (Ch. 1) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.
Direct Geometry Access. Direct Geometry Access (DGA) is the capability to directly access
(or read) geometry information from an external CAD user file, without the use of an
intermediate translator. Currently, DGA supports the following CAD systems:
• EDS/Unigraphics
• Pro/ENGINEER by Parametric Technology
• CATIA by Dassault Systemes
• EUCLID 3 by Matra Datavision
• CADDS 5 by Computervision
With DGA, the CAD geometry and its topology that are contained in the CAD user file can be
accessed. Once the geometry is accessed, you can build upon or modify the accessed geometry
in MSC.Patran, mesh the geometry, and assign the loads/BC and the element properties directly
to the geometry.
For more detailed information on DGA, see Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry
(p. 47).
Import and Export of Geometry. There are three file formats available to import or export
geometry:
• IGES
CHAPTER 1 3
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File

• Express Neutral File
In using any of the file formats, MSC.Patran maintains the original mathematical form of the
geometry. (That is, the geometry is not approximated into the parametric cubic form.) This
means the accuracy of the geometry in all three files is maintained.
For more information on the import and export capabilities for IGES, PATRAN 2 Neutral File,
and the Express Neutral File, see Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry (Ch. 2).
MSC.Patran Native Geometry. You can also create geometry in MSC.Patran (“native”
geometry). A large number of methods are available to create, translate, and edit geometry, as
well as methods to verify, delete and show information.
MSC.Patran’s native geometry consists of:
• Points
• Parametric curves
• Bi-parametric surfaces
• Tri-parametric solids
• Boundary represented (B-rep) solids
All native geometry is fully parameterized both on the outer boundaries and within the interior
(except for B-rep solids which are parameterized only on the outer surfaces).
Fully parameterized geometry means that you can apply varying loads or element properties
directly to the geometric entity. MSC.Patran evaluates the variation at all exterior and interior
locations on the geometric entity.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
1.2 Concepts and Definitions

There are many functions in MSC.Patran that rely on the mathematical representation of the
geometry. These functions are:
• Applying a pressure load to a curve, surface or solid.
• Creating a field function in parametric space.
• Meshing a curve, surface or solid.
• Referencing a vertex, edge or face of a curve, surface or solid.
For every curve, surface or solid in a user database, information is stored on its
Parameterization, Topology and Connectivity which is used in various MSC.Patran functions.
The concepts of parameterization, connectivity and topology are easy to understand and they
are important to know when building a geometry and an analysis model.
The following sections will describe each of these concepts and how you can build an optimal
geometry model for analysis.
CHAPTER 1 5
Parameterization
All MSC.Patran geometry are labeled one of the following:
• Point (0-Dimensions)
• Curve (1-Dimension)
• Surface (2-Dimensions)
• Solid (3-Dimensions)
Depending on the order of the entity - whether it is a one-dimensional curve, a two-dimensional
surface, or a three-dimensional solid - there is one, two or three parameters labeled ξ 1 , ξ 2 ,
ξ 3 that are associated with the entity. This concept is called “parameterization”.
Parameterization means the X,Y,Z coordinates of a curve, surface or solid are represented as
functions of variables or parameters. Depending on the dimension of the entity, the X,Y,Z
locations are functions of the parameters ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 .
An analogy to the parameterization of geometry is describing an X , Y location as a function of
time, t t. If X = X ( t ) and Y = Y ( t ) , as t changes, X and Y will define a path. Parameterization
of geometry does the same thing - as the parameters ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 change, it defines various
points on the curve, surface and solid.
The following describes how a point, curve, surface and solid are parameterized in MSC.Patran.
Point. A Point in MSC.Patran is a point coordinate location in three-dimensional global XYZ

space.
Since a point has zero-dimensions, it has no associated parameters, therefore, it is not
parameterized.
P
z (X,Y,Z)
x y
Figure 1-1 Point in MSC.Patran
Curve. A Curve in MSC.Patran is a one-dimensional point set in three-dimensional global XYZ

space. A curve can also be described as a particle moving along a defined path in space.
Another way of defining a curve is, a curve is a mapping function, Φ ( ξ 1 ) , from one-dimensional
parametric space into three-dimensional global XYZ space, as shown in Figure 1-3.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
A curve has one parametric variable, ξ 1 , which is used to describe the location of any given
point, P , along a curve, as shown in Figure 1-2.
P V2
ξ1
z V1
x y
Figure 1-2 Curve in MSC.Patran
The parameter, ξ 1 , has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , where at ξ 1 = 0 , P is at endpoint V1 and at

ξ 1 = 1 , P is at endpoint V2 .
A straight curve can be defined as:
P = ( 1.0 – ξ 1 )V1 + ξ 1 V2 Eq. 1-1
Φ(ξ1)
V2
0 ξ1 1
z
ξ1
0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1 V1
x y
Figure 1-3 Mapping Function Phi for a Curve
Eq. 1-1 of our straight curve can be represented as:
Φξ 1 = ( 1.0 – ξ 1 )V1 + ξ 1 V2 Eq. 1-2
The derivative of Φ ( ξ 1 ) in Eq. 1-2, would give us Eq. 1-3 which is the tangent of the straight
curve.
∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 = V2 – V1 Eq. 1-3
Because the curve is straight, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 is a constant value. The tangent, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ1 , also defines a
vector for the curve, which is the positive direction of ξ 1 .
CHAPTER 1 7
For any given curve, the tangent and positive direction of ξ 1 at any point along the curve can be
found. (The vector, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ1 , usually will not have a length of one.)
Surface. A surface in MSC.Patran is a two-dimensional point set in three-dimensional global

XYZ space.
A surface has two parameters, ξ 1 and ξ 2 , where at any given point, P , on the surface, P can be
located by ξ 1 and ξ 2 , as shown in Figure 1-4.
V2
ξ2
V1 P
ξ1
z V3
x y
V4
Figure 1-4 Surface in MSC.Patran
A surface generally has three or four edges. Trimmed surfaces can have more than four edges.
For more information, see Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20).
Similar to a curve, ξ 1 and ξ 2 for a surface have ranges of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 and 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 . Thus, at
ξ 1 = 0 , ξ 2 = 0 , P is at V1 and at ξ 1 = 1 , ξ 2 = 1 , P is at V3 .
A surface is represented by a mapping function, Φ ( ξ1 ,ξ 2 ) , which maps the parametric space into
the global XYZ space, as shown in Figure 1-5.
Φ(ξ1,ξ2)
(0,1) (1,1)
V2
ξ2
ξ2 V1
ξ1 z ξ1 V3
(0,0) (1,0)
0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1 x
V4
y
0 ≤ ξ2 ≤ 1
Figure 1-5 Mapping Function Phi for a Surface
The first order derivatives of Φ ( ξ 1 ,ξ 2 ) results in two partial derivatives, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ1 and ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 2 :
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 = T ξ1 and ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 2 = T ξ2 Eq. 1-4
where T ξ1 is the tangent vector in the ξ 1 direction and T ξ2 is the tangent vector in the ξ 2
direction.
At any point for a given surface, T ξ1 and T ξ2 which define the tangents and the positive ξ 1 and
ξ 2 directions can be determined.
Usually T ξ1 and T ξ2 are not orthonormal, which means they do not have a length of one and
they are not perpendicular to each other.
Solid. A solid in MSC.Patran is a three-dimensional point set in three-dimensional global XYZ

space.
A solid has three parameters, ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 , where at any given point, P , within the solid, P
can be located by ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 , as shown in Figure 1-6.
Note: The above definition applies to tri-parametric solids only. MSC.Patran can also create
or import a B-rep solid, which is parameterized on the outer surface only, and not
within the interior. See B-rep Solid (p. 24) for more information.
V6
V5
V2
ξ3 V7
P
ξ2
z V1
V3
ξ1
x y V4
Figure 1-6 Solid in MSC.Patran
A solid generally has five or six sides or faces. (A B-rep solid can have more than six faces.)
The parameters ξ 1 , ξ 2 and ξ 3 have ranges of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 , and 0 ≤ ξ 3 ≤ 1 . At (0,0,0) P
is at V1 and at (1,1,1), P is at V7 .
CHAPTER 1 9
A solid can be represented by a mapping function, Φ ( ξ 1 ,ξ 2 ,ξ 3 ) , which maps the parametric

space into the global XYZ space, as shown in Figure 1-7.
Φ(ξ1,ξ2,ξ3)
(0,1,1) V6
(0,0,1) (1,1,1)
V5
ξ3 (1,0,1)
ξ2 ξ3 V7
ξ2
ξ1 (1,1,0)
V1
(0,0,0)
(1,0,0)
ξ1 V3
V4
z
0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1
0 ≤ ξ2 ≤ 1
x y
0 ≤ ξ3 ≤ 1
Figure 1-7 Mapping Function Phi for a Solid
If we take the first order derivatives of Φ ( ξ1 ,ξ 2 ,ξ 3 ) , we get three partial derivatives, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 ,

∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 2 and ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ3 , shown in Eq. 1-5:
∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 = T ξ1 , ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 2 = T ξ2 , ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 3 = T ξ3 Eq. 1-5
Where T ξ1 is the tangent vector in the ξ 1 direction, T ξ2 is the tangent vector in the ξ 2 direction,
and T ξ3 is the tangent vector in the ξ 3 direction.
At any point within a given solid, T ξ1 , T ξ2 and T ξ3 , which define the tangents and positive ξ 1 ,
ξ 2 and ξ 3 directions can be determined.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Topology
Topology identifies the kinds of items used to define adjacency relationships between geometric
entities.
Every curve, surface and solid in MSC.Patran has a defined set of topologic entities. You can
reference these entities when you build the geometry or analysis model. Examples of this
include:
• Creating a surface between edges of two surfaces.
• Meshing an edge or a face of a solid.
• Referencing a vertex of a curve, surface or solid to apply a loads/BC.
Topology is invariant through a one-to-one bicontinuous mapping transformation. This means
you can have two curves, surfaces or solids that have different parameterizations, but
topologically, they can be identical.
To illustrate this concept, Figure 1-8 shows three groups of surfaces A-D. Geometrically, they
are different, but topologically they are the same.
A
A
B
B C
D
D
D* C
A* B
* Surface A is not connected to Surface D
Figure 1-8 Topologically Equivalent Surfaces
Topologic Entities: Vertex, Edge, Face, Body. The types of topologic entities found in
MSC.Patran are the following:
Vertex Defines the topologic endpoint of a curve, or a corner of a surface or a solid. A

vertex is separate from a geometric point, although a point can exist on a vertex.
Edge Defines the topologic curve on a surface or a solid. An edge is separate from a
geometric curve, although a curve can exist on an edge.
CHAPTER 1 1
Face Defines the topologic surface of a solid. A face is separate from a geometric surface,
although a surface can exist on a face.
Body A group of surfaces that forms a closed volume. A body is usually referenced as a B-
rep solid or a Volume solid, where only its exterior surfaces are parameterized. See
Solids (p. 24) for more information.
Vertex, Edge and Face ID Assignments in MSC.Patran. The connectivity for a curve,
surface and solid determines the order in which the internal vertex, edge and face IDs will be
assigned. The location of a geometric entity’s parametric axes defines the point where
assignment of the IDs for the entity’s vertices, edges and faces will begin.
Important: Generally, when modeling in MSC.Patran, you do not need to know the topologic
entities’ internal IDs. When you cursor select a topologic entity, such as an edge of
a surface, the ID will be displayed in the appropriate listbox on the form.
Figure 1-9 and Figure 1-10 show a four sided surface and a six sided solid with the internal
vertex, edge and face IDs displayed. If the connectivity changes, then the IDs of the vertices,
edges and faces will also change.
V7
ED7
V2 ED2 V3 ED6 ED11 V8
F6 F2
V6 ED8
F4 ED12
ED5 V3 100
ED3 ED3
ED1 11 V5 F3
ED10 V4
ED2 F1
ξ2 F5 ED9
ξ3 ED4
V2
V1 ED4 V4 ED1 ξ1
ξ1 ξ2 V1
Figure 1-9 Vertex & Edge Numbering Figure 1-10 Face Numbering for a Solid
for a Surface
For example, in Figure 1-9, the edge, ED3, of Surface 11 would be displayed as:
Surface 11.3
The vertex, V4, in Figure 1-9 would be displayed as:

Surface 11.3.1
V4 has a vertex ID of 1 that belongs to edge 3 on surface 11.

The face, F1, of Solid 100 in Figure 1-10 would be displayed as:
Solid 100.1
The edge, ED10, in Figure 1-10 would be displayed as:

Solid 100.1.3
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
ED10 has an edge ID of 3 that belongs to face 1 on solid 100.

The vertex, V6, in Figure 1-10 would be displayed as:
Solid 100.1.2.2
V6 has a vertex ID of 2 that belongs to edge 2 on face 1 on solid 100.
Topological Congruency and Meshing

When meshing adjacent surfaces or solids, MSC.Patran requires the geometry be topologically
congruent so that coincident nodes will be created along the common boundaries.
Figure 1-11 shows an example where surfaces 1 through 3 are topologically incongruent and
surfaces 2 through 5 are topologically congruent. The outer vertices are shared for surfaces 1
through 3, but the inside edges are not. Surfaces 2 through 5 all have common edges, as well as
common vertices.
There are several ways to correct surfaces 1 through 3 to make them congruent. See Building a
Congruent Model (p. 31) for more information.
2 4 2
1
3 5
3
Topologically Incongruent Topologically Congruent
Figure 1-11 Topologically Incongruent and Congruent Surfaces
For a group of surfaces or solids to be congruent, the adjacent surfaces or solids must share
common edges, as well as common vertices.
(MSC.Software Corporation’s MSC.Patran software product required adjacent surfaces or solids
to share only the common vertices to be considered topologically congruent for meshing.)
CHAPTER 1 1
Gaps Between Adjacent Surfaces. Another type of topological incongruence is shown in

Figure 1-12. It shows a gap between two pairs of surfaces that is greater than the Global Model
Tolerance. This means when you mesh the surface pairs, coincident nodes will not be created
along both sides of the gap.
Incongruent Surfaces
Gap > Global Model

Tolerance
Vertices are Shared, Edges are Not
Figure 1-12 Topologically Incongruent Surfaces with a Gap
MSC recommends two methods for closing surface gaps:

• Use the Create/Surface/Match form. See Matching Adjacent Surfaces (p. 270).
• Use the Edit/Surface/Edge Match form. See Matching Surface Edges (p. 481).
For more information on meshing, see Introduction to Functional Assignment Tasks (Ch. 1)
in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.
Non-manifold Topology. Non-manifold topology can be simply defined as a geometry that is

non-manufacturable. However, in analysis, non-manifold topology is sometimes either
necessary or desirable. Figure 1-13 shows a surface model with a non-manifold edge.
Figure 1-13 Non-manifold Topology at an Edge

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
This case may be perfectly fine. A non-manifold edge has more than two surfaces or solid faces
connected to it. Therefore, two solids which share a common face also give non-manifold
geometry (both the common face and its edges are non-manifold).
In general, non-manifold topology is acceptable in MSC.Patran. The exception is in the creation
of a B-rep solid where a non-manifold edge is not allowed. The Verifying Surface Boundaries
(p. 698) option detects non-manifold edges as well as free edges.
CHAPTER 1 1
Connectivity
In Figure 1-2, Figure 1-4, and Figure 1-6 in Parameterization (p. 5), the axes for the
parameters, ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 , have a unique orientation and location on the curve, surface and
solid.
Depending on the orientation and location of the ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 axes, this defines a unique
connectivity for the curve, surface or solid.
For example, although the following two curves are identical, the connectivity is different for
each curve (note that the vertex IDs are reversed):
V2 V1
ξ1 ξ1
V1 V2
Figure 1-14 Connectivity Possibilities for a Curve
For a four sided surface, there are a total of eight possible connectivity definitions. Two possible
connectivities are shown in Figure 1-15. (Again, notice that the vertex and edge IDs are different
for each surface.)
V2 V3
ED1 ED2
ξ2 ED2 ED3
V1 V2
ξ1
V3 ξ2 ξ1
V4
ED4 ED1
ED3 ED4
V4 V1
Figure 1-15 Two Possible Connectivities for a Surface

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
For a tri-parametric solid with six faces, there are a total of 24 possible connectivity definitions
in MSC.Patran - three orientations at each of the eight vertices. Two possible connectivities are
shown in Figure 1-16.
V6 V6
V5 V5
V2
ξ3 V7
V2
ξ2
V8 V8 ξ3
ξ1
V1 V3 V1
ξ1 V3
ξ2
V4 V4
Figure 1-16 Two Possible Connectivities for a Solid
Plotting the Parametric Axes. MSC.Patran can plot the location and orientation of the
parametric axes for the geometric entities by turning on the Parametric Direction toggle on the
Geometric Properties form, under the Display/Display Properties/Geometric menu. See
Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions for
more information.
Modifying the Connectivity. For most geometric entities, you can modify the connectivity by
altering the orientation and/or location of the parametric axes by using the Geometry
application’s Edit action’s Reverse method. See Overview of the Edit Action Methods (p. 414).
For solids, you can also control the location of the parametric origin under the
Preferences/Geometry menu and choose either the MSC.Patran Convention button or the
PATRAN 2.5 Convention button for the Solid Origin Location.
CHAPTER 1 1
Effects of Parameterization, Connectivity and Topology in

MSC.Patran
The geometry’s parameterization and connectivity affect the geometry and finite element
analysis model in the following ways:
Defines Order of Internal Topologic IDs. The parameterization and connectivity for a curve,
surface or solid define the order of the internal IDs of their topologic entities. MSC.Patran stores
these IDs internally and displays them when you cursor select a vertex, edge or face. See Vertex,
Edge and Face ID Assignments in MSC.Patran (p. 11) for more information.
Defines Positive Surface Normals. Using right hand rule by crossing a surface’s ξ 1 direction
with its ξ 2 direction, it defines the surface’s positive normal direction ( ξ 3 direction). This affects
many areas of geometry and finite element creation, including creating B-rep solids. See
Building An Optimal Geometry Model (p. 30) for more information.
Defines Positive Pressure Load Directions. The parameterization and connectivity of a

curve, surface or solid define the positive direction for a pressure load, and it defines the
surface’s top and bottom locations for an element variable pressure load. See Create Structural
LBCs Sets (p. 19) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments for more
information.
Helps Define Parametric Field Functions. If you reference a field function that was defined
in parametric space, when creating a varying loads/BC or a varying element or material
property, the loads/BC values or the property values will depend on the geometry’s
parameterization and the orientation of the parametric axes. See Fields Forms (p. 144) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments for more information.
Defines Node and Element ID Order For IsoMesh. The MSC.Patran mapped mesher,
IsoMesh, will use the geometric entity’s parameterization and connectivity to define the order of
the node and element IDs and the element connectivity. (The parameterization and connectivity
will not be used if the mesh will have a transition or change in the number of elements within
the surface or solid.) See IsoMesh (p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite
Element Modeling for more information.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Global Model Tolerance & Geometry

MSC.Patran uses the Global Model Tolerance when it imports or accesses geometry, when it
creates geometry, or when it modifies existing geometry.
The Global Model Tolerance is found under the Preferences/Global menu. The default value is
0.005.
When creating geometry, if two points are within a distance of the Global Model Tolerance, then
MSC.Patran will only create the first point and not the second.
This rule also applies to curves, surfaces and solids. If the points that describe two curves,
surfaces or solids are within a distance of the Global Model Tolerance, then only the first curve,
surface or solid will be created, and not the second.
Important: For models with dimensions which vary significantly from 10 units, MSC
recommends you set the Global Model Tolerance to .05% of the maximum model
dimension.
For more information on the Global Model Tolerance, see (p. 57) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
CHAPTER 1 1
1.3 Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran

Generally, there are four types of geometry objects in MSC.Patran:1
• Point (default color is cyan)
• Parametric Curve (default color is yellow)
• Bi-Parametric Surface (default color is green)
• Tri-Parametric Solid (default color is dark blue)
MSC.Patran also can access, import, and create Trimmed Surfaces, B-rep Solids and Volume
Solids. See Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20) and Solids (p. 24) for more information.
You also can create parametric cubic curves, surfaces and solids, which are recognized by the
PATRAN 2 neutral file. See Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) for more information.
For more information on the types of geometry that can be created, see Matrix of Geometry
Types Created (p. 27).
1The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on
the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Trimmed Surfaces
Trimmed surfaces are a special class of bi-parametric surfaces. Trimmed surfaces can be
accessed from an external CAD user file; they can be imported from an IGES or Express Neutral
file; and they can be created in MSC.Patran.
Unlike other types of bi-parametric surfaces, trimmed surfaces can have more than four edges,
and they can have one or more interior holes or cutouts.
Also, trimmed surfaces have an associated parent surface that is not displayed. A trimmed
surface is defined by identifying the closed active and inactive regions of the parent surface. This
parent surface defines the parameterization and curvature of the trimmed surface.
You can create three types of trimmed surfaces in MSC.Patran:1
• General Trimmed Surface (default color is magenta)
• Simply Trimmed Surface (default color is green)
• Composite Trimmed Surface (default is magenta)
• Ordinary Composite Trimmed Surface (default color is green)
(Green is the default color for both a simply trimmed surface and a general, bi-parametric
surface.)
Important: Simply trimmed surfaces and ordinary composite trimmed surfaces can be
meshed with IsoMesh or Paver. General trimmed surfaces and composite
trimmed surfaces can only be meshed with Paver. See Meshing Surfaces with
IsoMesh or Paver (p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite
Element Modeling for more information. Also note that some geometric operations
are not currently possible with a general trimmed surface, e.g., a general trimmed
surface can not be used to create a triparametric solid.
General Trimmed Surface. A general trimmed surface can have any number of outer edges
and any number of inner edges which describe holes or cutouts. These outer and inner edges are
defined by a closed loop of chained curves. (Chained curves can be created with the
Create/Curve/Chain form. See Creating Chained Curves (p. 131).) An example is shown in
Figure 1-17.
All general trimmed surfaces, whether they are accessed, imported or created, have a default
color of magenta.2
CHAPTER 1 2
Inner Edges or
Holes
Outer Surface Edges
Figure 1-17 General Trimmed Surface
Simply Trimmed Surface. A simply trimmed surface can only have four outer edges. It cannot
have any inner edges, or holes or cutouts. A simply trimmed surface reparametrizes the
bounded region of the parent and is called an overparametrization. An example is shown in
Figure 1-18. (A simply trimmed surface can have three sides, with one of the four edges
degenerating to a zero length edge.)
Like a general trimmed surface, a simply trimmed surface’s outer edges are defined by a closed
loop of chained curves. See Creating Chained Curves (p. 131).
All simply trimmed surfaces, whether they are accessed, imported or created, have a default
color of green. 1
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Four Outer Edges
Underlying Invisible Parent Surface
Figure 1-18 Simply Trimmed Surface
Sometimes a three of four sided region which define a trimmed surface will be created as a
general trimmed surface instead. This occurs when the overparametrization distorts the
bounded region of the parent to such an extent that it would be difficult to mesh and use for
analysis.
Composite Trimmed Surface. The composite trimmed surface is a kind of supervisor surface
that allows a collection of surfaces to be considered as one surface defined within a specific
boundary. This surface can also have holes in it. Evaluations on the composite trimmed surface
is similar to evaluations on the MSC.Patran trim surface (General Trimmed Surface). The big
difference is that it is three to five times slower than ordinary surfaces.
The composite trimmed surface should be considered a tool. Once the surface is built, it is a
single entity, yet processes on multiple surfaces, relieving the applications of the task of
determining where and when to move from one surface to another.
APPLICATION: The composite trimmed surface supervisor is a bounded PLANAR trim surface.
It acquires its name from the type of service it performs. Let us, for a moment, consider the
composite trimmed surface to be a cloud in the sky. The sun, being the light source behind the
cloud, creating a shadow on planet earth only in the area blocked by the cloud. The same is true
with the composite trimmed surface, except a view vector is given to determine the light
direction. “Under Surfaces” replace planet earth. The valid region on the “Under Surfaces” is
defined by where the outline of the composite trimmed surface appears.
CHAPTER 1 2
STEPS_BUILDING: There are three basic steps in building a composite trimmed surface.
Step 1 Creating the outer perimeter curve. In most cases this is a MSC.Patran curve
chain entity.
Step 2 Selecting an acceptable view direction for the view vector and planar
Composite trimmed surface entity. The view vector is the most important
aspect of building a composite trimmed surface. The resulting view vector
must yield only one intersection solution at any position on the “Under
Surfaces”. The user must select the proper view for the location of the
composite trimmed surface with some forethought and eliminate the
possibility of any of the underlying surfaces wrapping around in back of one
another. In some cases this may not be possible! The user must then create
more than one composite trimmed surface.
Additionally, since the composite trimmed surface supervisor is PLANAR, it
cannot encompass more than a 180 degree field of view. An example of this
would be a cylindrically shaped group of surfaces. It would probably take
three properly placed composite trimmed surface to represent it; one for every
120 degrees of rotation.
Step 3 Determines which currently displayed surfaces will be become part of the
composite trimmed surface domain (“Under Surfaces”). The user may
individually select the correct underlying surfaces or, if wanting to select all
visible surfaces, the user must place into “ERASE” all surfaces which might
cause multiple intersections and then select the remaining visible surfaces.
RULES:
1. The composite trimmed surface domain must not encompass any dead space. If any
portion has a vacancy (no “Under Surface” under it), unpredictable results will occur.
2. Processing along the view vector must yield a single intersection solution at any
position on the underlying surfaces within the composite trimmed surface’s domain.
Ordinary Composite Trimmed Surface. The only difference between an Ordinary Composite
Trimmed Surface and the Composite Trimmed Surface is that this type will have only four edges
comprising the outer loop and no inner loops.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solids
There are three types of solids that can be accessed or imported, or created in MSC.Patran:1
• Tri-Parametric Solid (default color is dark blue)
• B-rep Solid (default color is white)
• Volume Solid (default color is pink or light red)
on (p. 2) lists the types of solids created with each Geometry Application method.
Tri-Parametric Solid. All solids in MSC.Patran, except for B-rep solids and volume solids, are
tri-parametric solids. Tri-parametric solids are parameterized on the surface, as well as inside
the solid. Tri-parametric solids can only have four to six faces with no interior voids or holes.
Tri-parametric solids can be meshed with IsoMesh or TetMesh.
Important: IsoMesh will create hexagonal elements if the solid has five or six faces, but some
wedge elements will be created for the five faced solid. IsoMesh will create a
tetrahedron mesh for a four faced solid. See Meshing Solids (p. 17) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling.
B-rep Solid. A B-rep solid is formed from a group of topologically congruent surfaces that
define a completely closed volume. Only its outer surfaces or faces are parameterized and not
the interior. An example is shown in Figure 1-19.
The group of surfaces that define the B-rep solid are its shell. A B-rep shell defines the exterior
of the solid, as well as any interior voids or holes. Shells can be composed of bi-parametric
surfaces and/or trimmed surfaces.
B-rep solids can be created with the Create/Solid/B-rep form. See Creating a Boundary
Representation (B-rep) Solid (p. 338) on using the form.
Figure 1-19 B-rep Solid in MSC.Patran
B-rep solids are meshed with TetMesh. See Meshing Solids (p. 17) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling for more information.
CHAPTER 1 2
Parametric Cubic Geometry

Parametric cubic geometry is a special class of parameterized geometry. Parametric cubic
geometry is supported in MSC.Patran by the PATRAN 2 neutral file and the IGES file for import
and export.
You have the option to create parametric cubic curves, bi-parametric cubic surfaces and tri-
parametric cubic solids, by pressing the PATRAN 2 Convention button found on most
Geometry application forms.
Important: Unless you intend to export the geometry using the PATRAN 2 neutral file, in
most situations, you do not need to press the PATRAN 2 Convention button to
create parametric cubic geometry.
Parametric cubic geometry can also be created in MSC.Patran, which are referred to as “grids”,
“lines”, “patches” and “hyperpatches.”
Parametric cubic geometry is defined by a parametric cubic equation. For example, a parametric
cubic curve is represented by the following cubic equation:
3 2
Z ( ξ1 ) = S1 ξ1 + S2 ξ1 + S3 ξ1 + S4 Eq. 1-6
where Z ( ξ 1 ) represents the general coordinate of the global coordinates X,Y, and Z; S 1 , S 2 , S 3 ,
and S 4 are arbitrary constants; and ξ 1 is a parameter in the range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 .
For more information on parametric cubic geometry, see MSC.Patran Reference Manual.
Limitations on Parametric Cubic Geometry

There are some limitations on parametric cubic geometry.
Limits on Types of Curvature. There are limits to the types of curvature or shapes that are
allowed for a parametric cubic curve, surface or solid (see Figure 1-20).
Eq. 1-7 and Eq. 1-8 below represent the first and second derivatives of Eq. 1-6:
2
Z′ ( ξ 1 ) = 3S 1 ξ 1 + 2S 2 ξ 1 + S 3 Eq. 1-7
Z″ ( ξ 1 ) = 6S 1 ξ 1 + 2S 2 Eq. 1-8
Eq. 1-7 shows that a parametric cubic curve can only have two points with zero slope and Eq. 1-
8 shows that it can only have one point of inflection, as shown in Figure 1-20.
YES YES YES YES
NO NO
YES NO
Figure 1-20 Limitations of the Parametric Cubic Curvature

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Limits on Accuracy of Subtended Arcs. When you subtend an arc using a parametric cubic
curve, surface or solid, the difference between the true arc radius and the arc radius calculated
by the parametric cubic equation will increase. That is, as the angle of a subtended arc for a
parametric cubic entity increases, the accuracy of the entity from the true representation of the
arc decreases.
Figure 1-21 shows that as the subtended angle of a parametric cubic entity increases, the percent
error also increases substantially beyond 75 degrees.
When creating arcs with parametric cubic geometry, MSC recommends using Figure 1-21 to
determine the maximum arc length and its percent error that is acceptable to you.
For example, if you create an arc length of 90 degrees, it will have an error of 0.0275% from the
true arc length.
For most geometry models, MSC recommends arc lengths represented by parametric cubic
geometry should be 90 degrees or less. For a more accurate model, the parametric cubic arc
lengths should be 30 degrees or less.
Percent Error = 100*(Computed Radius - Actual Arc Radius) / Actual Radius

3.0
Percent Error in the Radius (x 10-2)
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
0 15 30 45 60 75 90
Total Subtended Angle in Degrees
Figure 1-21 Maximum Percent Error for Parametric Cubic Arc
CHAPTER 1 2
Matrix of Geometry Types Created

All Geometry Application forms use the following Object menu terms:
• Point
• Curve
• Surface
• Solid
• Plane
• Vector
• Coordinate Frame
MSC.Patran will create a specific geometric type of the parametric curve, bi-parametric surface
and tri-parametric solid based on the method used for the Create action or Edit action.
Table 1-1, and list the types of geometry created for each Create or Edit action method. The
tables also list if each method can create parametric cubic curves, surfaces or solids by pressing
the PATRAN 2 Convention button on the application form. (Parametric cubic geometry is
recognized by the PATRAN 2 neutral file for export.)
For more information on each Create or Edit action method, see Overview of Geometry Create
Action (p. 70) and/or Overview of the Edit Action Methods (p. 414).
Table 1-1 Types of Curves Created in MSC.Patran
PATRAN 2
Create or Edit Method Type of Curve Convention?
(Parametric Cubic)
XYZ Parametric Cubic Not Applicable
Arc3Point Arc Yes
2D Arc2Point Arc Yes
2D Arc3Point Arc Yes
2D Circle Circle Yes
Conic Parametric Cubic N/A
Extract Curve On Surface Yes
Fillet Parametric Cubic N/A
Fit Parametric Cubic N/A
Intersect PieceWise Cubic Polynomial Yes
Involute Parametric Cubic N/A
Normal Parametric Cubic N/A
2D Normal Parametric Cubic N/A
2D ArcAngles Arc Yes
Point Parametric Cubic N/A
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Table 1-1 Types of Curves Created in MSC.Patran (continued)
PATRAN 2
Create or Edit Method Type of Curve Convention?
(Parametric Cubic)
Project Curve On Surface Yes
PWL Parametric Cubic N/A
Revolve Arc Yes
Spline, Loft Spline option PieceWise Cubic Polynomial Yes
Spline, B-Spline option PieceWise Rational Polynomial Yes
Spline, B-Spline option NURB* Yes
TanCurve Parametric Cubic N/A
TanPoint Parametric Cubic N/A
Chain Composite Curve No
Manifold Curve On Surface Yes
* NURB splines are created if the NURBS Accelerator toggle is pressed OFF (default is
ON) on the Geometry Preferences form, found under the Preferences/Geometry menu.
This is true whether you create the spline in MSC.Patran or if you import the spline from
an IGES file. See Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 2: Basic Functions for more information. If the NURBS Accelerator is ON, PieceWise
Rational Polynomial splines will be created instead.
Table 1-2 Types of Surfaces Created in MSC.Patran
PATRAN 2
Create or Edit Method Type of Surface Convention?
(Parametric Cubic)
XYZ Parametric Bi-Cubic Not Applicable
Curve Curve Interpolating Surface Yes
Decompose Trimmed Surface Yes
Edge Generalized Coons Surface Yes
Extract Surface On Solid Yes
Extrude Extruded Surface Yes
Fillet Parametric Bi-Cubic N/A
Glide Parametric Bi-Cubic N/A
Match Parametric Bi-Cubic N/A
Normal Sweep Normal Surface N/A
Revolve Surface of Revolution Yes
CHAPTER 1 2
Table 1-2 Types of Surfaces Created in MSC.Patran (continued)
PATRAN 2
Create or Edit Method Type of Surface Convention?
(Parametric Cubic)
Ruled Ruled Surface No
Vertex Curve Interpolating Surface Yes
Trimmed (Surface Option) Trimmed Surface No
Trimmed (Planar Option) Trimmed Surface No
Trimmed (Composite Composite Trimmed Surface No
Option)
Table 1-3 Types of Solids Created in MSC.Patran
PATRAN 2
Create or Edit Method Type of Solid Convention?
(Parametric Cubic)
XYZ Parametric Tri-Cubic Not Applicable
Extrude Extruded Solid Yes
Face Solid 5Face, Solid 6Face Yes
Glide Glide Solid Yes
Normal Sweep Normal Solid Yes
Revolve Solid of Revolution Yes
Surface Surface Interpolating Solid Yes
Vertex Parametric Tri-Cubic N/A
B-rep Ordinary Body No
Decompose Tri-Parametric Yes
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
1.4 Building An Optimal Geometry Model

A well defined geometry model simplifies the building of the optimal finite element analysis
model. A poorly defined geometry model complicates, or in some situations, makes it
impossible to build or complete the analysis model.
In computer aided engineering (CAE) analysis, most geometry models do not consist of neatly
trimmed, planar surfaces or solids. In some situations, you may need to modify the geometry to
build a congruent model, create a set of degenerate surfaces or solids, or decompose a trimmed
surface or B-rep solid.
The following sections will explain how to:
• Build a congruent model.
• Verify and align surface normals.
• Build trimmed surfaces.
• Decompose trimmed surfaces into three- or four-sided surfaces.
• Build a B-rep solid.
• Build degenerate surfaces or solids.
CHAPTER 1 3
Building a Congruent Model

MSC.Patran requires adjacent surfaces or solids be topologically congruent so that the nodes will
be coincident at the common boundaries. See Topological Congruency and Meshing (p. 12)
for more information.
For example, Figure 1-22 shows surfaces 1, 2 and 3 which are incongruent. When meshing with
Isomesh or Paver, MSC.Patran cannot guarantee the nodes will coincide at the edges shared by
surfaces 1, 2 and 3.
Figure 1-22 Incongruent Set of Surfaces
To make the surfaces in Figure 1-22 congruent, you can:

• Use the Edit/Surface/Edge Match form with the Surface-Point option. See Matching
Surface Edges (p. 481) on using the form.
• Or, break surface 1 with the Edit/Surface/Break form. See Surface Break Options
(p. 457) on using the form.
The following describes the method of using the Edit/Surface/Break form.
To make surfaces 1 through 3 congruent, we will break surface 1 into surfaces 4 and 5, as shown
in Figure 1-23:
4 2
5
3
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Figure 1-23 Congruent Set of Surfaces
The entries for the Edit/Surface/Break form are shown below:
◆ Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Break
Option: Point
Delete Original Surfaces Pressing this button will delete surface 1,

after the break.
Surface List: Surface 1 Cursor select or enter the ID for surface 1.
Break Point List Point 10 Cursor select or enter the ID for point 10,
as shown in Figure 1-24.
Since Auto Execute is ON, we do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Cursor select
Surface 1 for the
Surface List on 2
the form.
1
10 Cursor select Point
10 for the Point List
on the form.
3
Figure 1-24 Cursor Locations for Surface Break

CHAPTER 1 3
Building Optimal Surfaces

Building optimal surfaces will save time and it will result in a better idealized finite element
analysis model of the design or mechanical part.
Optimal surfaces consist of a good overall shape with no sharp corners, and whose normal is
aligned in the same direction with the other surfaces in the model.
Avoid ing Sharp Corners. In general, MSC.Software Corporation (MSC) recommends that
you avoid sharp inside corners when creating surfaces. That is, you should generally try to keep
the inside corners of the surfaces to 45 degrees or more.
The reason is that when you mesh surfaces with quadrilateral elements, the shapes of the
elements are determined by the overall shape of the surface, see Figure 1-25. The more skewed
the quadrilateral elements are, the less reasonable your analysis results might be.
Note: You can use the surface display lines to predict what the surface element shapes will
look like before meshing. You can increase or decrease the number of display lines
under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric. See Geometric Attributes
(p. 257) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
For further recommendations, please consult the vendor documentation for your finite element
analysis code.
1 1
2
4 2
4
3
3
Surfaces With Sharp Corners Optimal Surface Shapes
Figure 1-25 Surfaces With and Without Sharp Corners

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Verifying and Aligning Surface Normals Using Edit/Surface/Reverse. MSC.Patran can

determine the positive normal direction for each surface by using right hand rule and crossing
the parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2 axes of a surface. Depending on the surface’s connectivity, each
surface could have different normal directions, as shown in Figure 1-26.
ξ1
ξ2
ξ2
ξ1
Figure 1-26 Opposing Normals for Two Surfaces
Important: In general, you should try to maintain the same normal direction for all surfaces
in a model.
The normal direction of a surface affects finite element applications, such defining the positive
pressure load direction, the top and bottom surface locations for a variable pressure load, and
the element connectivity.
Use the Edit/Surface/Reverse form to display the surface normal vectors, and to reverse or align
the normals for a group of surfaces. See Reversing Surfaces (p. 501) on using the form.
CHAPTER 1 3
Example of Verifying and Aligning Surface Normals. For example, Figure 1-27 shows a
group of eight surfaces that we want to display the normal vectors, and if necessary, reverse or
align the normals. To display the surface normals without reversing, do the following:
◆ Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Reverse
Surface List Surface 1:8 Make sure you turn Auto Execute OFF
before cursor selecting surfaces 1-8.
Draw Normal Vectors And do not press Apply. Apply will
reverse the normals.
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Figure 1-27 Group of Surfaces to Verify Normals
You should see red arrows drawn on each surface which represent the surface normal vectors,
as shown in Figure 1-28.
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Figure 1-28 Surface Normal Vectors

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Align the normals by reversing the normals for surfaces 1 through 4:
Surface List Surface 1:4

-Apply-
Draw Normal Vectors This will plot the updated normal vector
directions.
Figure 1-29 shows the updated normal directions which are now aligned.
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Figure 1-29 Aligned Surface Normal Vectors

CHAPTER 1 3
Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces

Trimmed surfaces are preferred for modeling a complex part with many sides. However, there
may be areas in your model where you may want to decompose, or break, a trimmed surface
into a series of three or four sided surfaces.
One reason is that you want to mesh the surface area with IsoMesh instead of Paver. (IsoMesh
can only mesh surfaces that have three or four edges.) Another reason is that you want to create
tri-parametric solids from the decomposed three or four sided surfaces and mesh with IsoMesh.
To decompose a trimmed surface, use the Geometry application’s Create/Surface/Decompose
form. See Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces (p. 255) on using the form.
When entered in the Create/Surface/Decompose form, the select menu that appears at the
bottom of the screen will show the following icons:
Point/Vertex/Edge Point/Interior Point. This will select a point for decomposing in

the order listed. If not point or vertex is found, the point closest to edge will be used
or a point will be projected onto the surface.
Use cursor select or directly input an existing point on the surface. If point is not on
the surface, it will be projected onto the surface.
Use to cursor select a point location on an edge of a trimmed surface.
Use to cursor select a point location inside a trimmed surface.
Use to cursor select a vertex of a trimmed surface.
Example. Figure 1-30 shows trimmed surface 4 with seven edges. We will decompose surface
4 into four four-sided surfaces.
20
21
26
25
24 22
23
Figure 1-30 Trimmed Surface to be Decomposed

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Our first decomposed surface will be surface 3, as shown in Figure 1-31. The figure shows
surface 3 cursor defined by three vertex locations and one point location along an edge. The
point locations can be selected in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.
4
Use
Use
to cursor select
to cursor select this point
these three location along
vertices. the edge.
Figure 1-31 Point Locations for Decomposed Surface 4
Figure 1-32 shows the remaining decomposed surfaces 5, 6 and 7 and the select menu icons
used to cursor define the surfaces. Again, the point locations can be selected in a clockwise or
counterclockwise direction.
Use
to cursor select this
Use point along the edge
to cursor select these for Surface 5.
three vertices for
Surface 5.
5
6 Use
Use to cursor select these
to cursor select these four vertices for
three vertices for Surface 7.
Surface 6.
Use
to cursor select this
point along the edge
for Surface 6.
CHAPTER 1 3
Figure 1-32 Point Locations for Decomposed Surfaces 5, 6 and 7
Use Surface Display Lines as a Guide. Generally, the surface display lines are a good guide
to where the trimmed surface can be decomposed. MSC recommends increasing the display
lines to four or more. The display lines are controlled under the menus Display/Display
Properties/Geometric. See Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 2: Basic Functions for more information.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Building B-rep Solids

Boundary represented (B-rep) solids are created by using the Geometry application’s
Create/Solid/B-rep form. See Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid (p. 338) for
more information on the form.
There are three rules to follow when you create a B-rep solid in MSC.Patran:
1. The group of surfaces that will define the B-rep solid must fully enclose a volume.
2. The surfaces must be topologically congruent. That is, the adjacent surfaces must share
a common edge.
3. The normal surface directions for the exterior shell must all point outward, as shown
in Figure 1-33. That is, the normals must point away from the material of the body.
This will be done automatically during creation as long as rules 1 and 26 are satisfied.
B-rep solids created in MSC.Patran can only be meshed with TetMesh.
Important: At this time, MSC.Patran can only create a B-rep solid with an exterior shell, and
no interior shells.
9
8
4 7
3 10
1
6
2 5
Y Z
1
X
Figure 1-33 Surface Normals for B-rep Solid

CHAPTER 1 4
Building Degenerate Surfaces and Solids

A bi-parametric surface can degenerate from four edges to three edges. A tri-parametric solid
can degenerate from six faces to four or five faces (a tetrahedron or a wedge, respectively).
The following describes the best procedures for creating a degenerate triangular surface and a
degenerate tetrahedron and a wedge shaped solid.
Important: IsoMesh will create hexahedron elements only, if the solid has six faces. Some
wedge elements will be created for a solid with five faces. IsoMesh will create
tetrahedron elements only, for a solid with four faces. TetMesh will create
tetrahedron elements only, for all shaped solids.
Building a Degenerate Surface (Triangle). There are two ways you can create a degenerate,
three-sided surface:
• Use the Create/Surface/Edge form with the 3 Edge option. See Creating Surfaces
from Edges (Edge Method) (p. 257) on using the form.
• Or, use the Create/Surface/Curve form with the 2 Curve option. See Creating
Surfaces Between 2 Curves (p. 240) on using the form.
Figure 1-34 illustrates the method of using the Create/Surface/Curve form with the 2 Curve
option. Notice that the apex of the surface is defined by a zero length curve by using the Curve
select menu icon shown in Figure 1-34.
Cursor select this point twice
using this icon:
Cursor select this in the Curve select menu for the

edge or curve for the Starting or Ending Curve List.
Starting or Ending
Curve List.
Figure 1-34 Creating a Degenerate Surface Using Create/Surface/Curve
Building a Degenerate Solid
Four Sided Solid (Tetrahedron). A four sided (tetrahedron) solid can be created by using the
Create/Solid/Surface form with the 2 Surface option, where the starting surface is defined by a
point for the apex of the tetrahedron, and the ending surface is an opposing surface or face, as
shown in Figure 1-35.
Five Sided Solid (Pentahedron). A five sided (pentahedron) solid can be created by using:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
• The Create/ Solid/Face form with the 5 Face option. See Creating Solids from Faces
(p. 343) on using the form.
• The Create/Solid/Surface form with the 2 Surface option. See Creating Solids from
Surfaces (Surface Method) (p. 327) on using the form.
Figure 1-36 and Figure 1-37 illustrate using the Create/Solid/Surface form to create the
pentahedron and a wedge.
For the Starting Surface List,
highlight and
in the select menu, and cursor

select this point twice for the
first edge of the surface.
Highlight again,
then, cursor select this same

point twice again.
Cursor select this surface or face for the

Ending Surface List.
Figure 1-35 Creating a Tetrahedron Using Create/Solid/Surface
highlight and

select this point twice for the
first edge of the surface.
Highlight again,
then, cursor select this same

point twice again.

Figure 1-36 Creating a Pentahedron Using Create/Solid/Surface

CHAPTER 1 4
highlight

select this curve twice.

Figure 1-37 Creating a Wedge Using Create/Solid/Surface

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
CHAPTER
Accessing, Importing & Exporting
2 Geometry
■ Overview
■ Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry
■ PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
2.1 Overview
MSC.Patran can access geometry from an external CAD system user file. Geometry can also be
imported (or read) from a PATRAN 2 Neutral file or from an IGES file. MSC.Patran can export
(or write) some or all geometry to an external PATRAN 2 Neutral file or IGES file.
Geometry can be accessed or imported into the user database either by using the File/Import
menus or by using the File/CAD Model Access menus on the MSC.Patran main form. Geometry
can be exported from the database using the File/Export menus.
For more information on executing the File/Import and File/Export forms, see Importing
Models (p. 26) and Export (p. 110) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
For more information on accessing CAD models, see Direct Geometry Access of CAD
Geometry (p. 47).
For more information on import and export support of geometry for the PATRAN 2 Neutral file,
see PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57).
For more information on which IGES entities are supported by MSC.Patran for importing and
exporting, see Supported IGES Entity Types - Import (p. 51) and Supported IGES Entity
Types -Export (p. 116) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
CHAPTER 2 4
Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry
2.2 Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry

MSC.Patran can directly access geometry from an external CAD file for the following CAD
systems that are listed in Table 2-1.
This unique Direct Geometry Access (DGA) feature allows you to access the CAD geometry and
its topology that are contained in the CAD file. Once the geometry is accessed, you can build
upon or modify the accessed geometry in MSC.Patran, mesh the geometry, and assign the loads
and boundary conditions as well as the element properties directly to the geometry.
You can execute a specific MSC.Patran CAD Access module by using the File/Importing Models
menus on the main form. See Importing Models (p. 26) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 2: Basic Functions for more information.
For more information on using MSC.Patran ProENGINEER, see Importing Pro/ENGINEER
Files (p. 118) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
For more information on using MSC.Patran Unigraphics, see Importing Unigraphics Files
Table 2-1 Supported CAD Systems and Their MSC.Patran CAD Access Modules
MSC.Patran CAD Access

Supported CAD System
Module *
EDS/Unigraphics MSC.Patran Unigraphics
Pro/ENGINEER by Parametric Technology MSC.Patran ProENGINEER
CATIA by Dassault Systemes MSC.Patran CATIA
EUCLID 3 by Matra Datavision MSC.Patran EUCLID 3
CADDS 5 by Computervision MSC.Patran CADDS 5
* Each MSC.Patran CAD Access module must be licensed before you can access the appro-
priate external CAD file. You can find out which MSC.Patran products are currently li-
censed by pressing the MSC.Software Corporation (MSC) icon on the main form, and
then pressing the License button on the form that appears.
Accessing Geometry Using MSC.Patran Unigraphics

If MSC.Patran Unigraphics is licensed at your site, you can access the geometric entities from an
external EDS/Unigraphics part file.
Features of MSC.Patran Unigraphics

• Unigraphics part file can be accessed in MSC.Patran using one of two methods. The
first method is express file based import. The second method is direct parasolid
transmit file based import. In both cases, Unigraphics geometry is imported and stored
in a MSC.Patran database.
• MSC.Patran uses the original geometry definitions of the accessed entities, without any
approximations. Parasolid evaluators are directly used for entities imported via the
direct parasolid method.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
• CAD Access filters are provided that can be selected based on the defined
EDS/Unigraphics entity types, levels, and layers.
• You can automatically create MSC.Patran groups when accessing the geometry based
on the defined entity types, levels, or layers.
For more information on using MSC.Patran Unigraphics, see Importing Unigraphics Files
Tips For Accessing EDS/Unigraphics Geometry for Express File Based Import
1. When you execute EDS/Unigraphics, make sure the solid to be accessed is
topologically congruent with no gaps (see Figure 2-1). For more information, see
Topological Congruency and Meshing (p. 12).
Verify that the edges of the solid’s adjacent faces share the same end points or vertices,
and that there are no gaps between the faces.
2. You can improve MSC.Patran Unigraphics’ performance by reducing the number of
entities to be processed by using the Entity Type filter on the MSC.Patran Import form
and unselect or un-highlight all entities of a particular type that you do not want, before
you access the part file. For example, you can unselect the entity type, “Bounded-
Plane”, to eliminate all bounded plane entities. For the direct parasolid import option,
the entity type filter can be used for wire body/sheet body/solid body only.
3. Put those entities in EDS/Unigraphics that you want to access into specific layers. Then
select to only those layers in the MSC.Patran Import form before importing the part.
4. Make sure the MSC.Patran Global Model Tolerance is reset to an appropriate value if
you will be accessing long thin surfaces and solids with small dimensions (default is
0.005). For example, set the tolerance value so that it is smaller than the smallest edge
length (greater than 10.0E-6) in the model. This will improve model usability on some
models.
Face 1 Gap Face 1 Zero Gap
Face 2 Face 2
NOT Topologically Valid Topologically Valid

(lacking congruent edge) (with congruent edge)
Figure 2-1 Topologically Congruent Surfaces for MSC.Patran Unigraphics

CHAPTER 2 4
Tips For Accessing Parasolid Geometry. This section provides helpful hints and
recommendations regarding the usage of MSC.Patran as it pertains to Parasolid integration.
Solid Geometry Guidelines

Disassembling The Edit/Solid/Disassemble function in the Geometry Application can
Solids be used to create simply trimmed surfaces (green 4-sided) with one
command. This can be a big timesaver if the B-rep Solid is being
disassembled to eventually create tri-parametric solids (blue) for Hex
meshing. This command will convert all 4-sided B-rep Solid faces into
simply trimmed surfaces (green) which then can be used to construct
tri-parametric solids.
Solids Break If difficulties are encountered in breaking a solid:
1. First disassemble the original solid (Edit/Solid/Disassemble).
2. Try to reconstruct a new solid using Create/Solid/B-rep. If
this is unsuccessful due to gaps between surfaces, use the
Edit/Surface/Sew and try again. If a solid is created, continue
with the break operation.
3. If steps (a) and (b) were unsuccessful:
• Break the trimmed surfaces from the disassembled solid (step (a)).
If this operation is slow, refit the surfaces (Edit/Surface/Refit)
before the break operation.
• Create the additional surfaces in the interior required to enclose
the individual solid volumes.
• Create the new individual solids using Create/Solid/B-rep. If the
B-rep can not be created due to surface gaps, use
Edit/Surface/Sew and try again.
Global Model After successful access of Unigraphics geometry via the Parasolid
Tolerance Direct method, the Global Model Tolerance will be set relative to the
models geometric characteristics. This tolerance is the recommended
tolerance for MSC.Patran applications to use for best results.
Solids - Group transform for solids is not supported. For information about
Group Transform transforming solids in pre-release format, see (p. 50).
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Meshing Guidelines
Hybrid The Hybrid tetmesher only accepts global edge lengths for mesh criteria if
TetMesher - attempting to directly mesh a solid. If you encounter difficulties, decrease
Global Edge the global edge length.
Lengths
Hybrid The Hybrid tetmesher does not write nodes that lie on solid edges into the
TetMesher - mesh seed table. This limits the ability of the Hybrid tetmesher to recognize
Mesh Control existing meshes. For example, if your requirements are: (1) to match
adjacent meshes (i.e., multiple solids); (2) that the mesh be able to recognize
a hard curve/point; or (3) to define mesh seed prior to solid meshing,
follow these steps:
• Define any desired hard points/curves and mesh seeds.
• Surface mesh the geometry using the paver, creating triangular
elements which completely enclose the desired geometric volume.
• Invoke the Hybrid tetmesher, using the previously created triangular
elements as input.
Paver If the paver exhibits difficulties meshing some geometry or making
congruent meshes:
• Delete any existing mesh on the problematic geometry.
• Perform an Edit/Surface/Refit.
• Do an Edit/Surface/Edge Match if congruency is an issue.
• Mesh again.
CHAPTER 2 5
PRE-RELEASE CAPABILITY: Solid Geometry Guidelines

Solids - Group Group transform for solids is not supported. If a transformed solid is
Transform required, consider the following alternatives: (1) Perform the
transformation in the native CAD system and then again access the
desired geometry in MSC.Patran; (2) Enable an environment variable
before executing MSC.Patran. At the system prompt, type:
setenv P3_UG_ENTITY_FILTER 1
which allows the transformation of Parasolid solid geometry and perform
the transformation. If a solid is successfully constructed, continue as
planned. If not, either:
• Mesh the original solid and transform the resulting finite element
mesh, with the limitation being that element properties and
loads/boundary conditions will have to be assigned directly to the
finite elements; or
• Try to reconstruct a B-rep solid from the constituent surfaces that
result from the transformation, by first using Geometry tools such as
Edit/Surface/Sew, Edit/Surface/Edge Match, etc., to reconnect the
surfaces and then use Create/Solid/B-rep.
• Initially access the original geometry (Unigraphics only) using the
Express Translation method. If a solid is successfully imported, a
transformation of the geometry is supported.
Surface/Curve Geometry Guidelines

Surface Unigraphics does not automatically enforce surface congruency.
Congruency Typically, CAE applications require congruent meshes; therefore,
geometric surfaces must usually be congruent. Accessing geometry
through Parasolid simply retrieves the Unigraphics geometry exactly
as it is defined; an explicit action must be taken to sew geometric
surfaces, otherwise they will not be congruent.
It is recommended that models with surfaces be sewn up in
Unigraphics prior to access by MSC.Patran. MSC.Patran offers the
ability to also invoke the Unigraphics surface sew tool; in fact, this is
the default operation when accessing Sheet Bodies.
Unigraphics Sew “Unigraphics Sew” and “Verify Boundary” toggles are, by default, ON
With Verify During during import. The Verification entails placement of markers at all
Geometry Access incongruent surface edges, thus allowing a user to quickly identify
whether the Unigraphics Sew was completely (or partially) successful.
The markers may be removed using the Broom icon.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Problem MSC.Patran detects three different types of anomalies during
Unigraphics Unigraphics part file import:
Entities From a) Suspect939 Entities: Sometimes Unigraphics needs to take special
Import actions to convert surfaces from earlier version parts. These surfaces
are attributed with “Suspect939.” Although for the most part these
surfaces are usable, Unigraphics recommends that these surfaces be
replaced. As such, MSC.Patran will not attempt to include these
surfaces in the Unigraphics sewing, and we recommend that these
surfaces be refitted once imported into MSC.Patran. You will find
these surfaces in a group named, <model_name>_UG_SUSPECT.
b) Invalid Entities: Before importing the Unigraphics model,
MSC.Patran will check each surface and curve entities to ensure
consistency and validity. Occasionally, some entities do not pass the
checks. These invalid entities will be excluded from both UG sewing
and MSC.Patran import. If you see such a message in the invoke
window, you should go back to UG to ensure the model is valid. Please
reference the next section, Unigraphics Model Checks (p. 52) for
steps to do this check. One recommended way is to refit/reconstruct
the surface in Unigraphics and then reimport it into MSC.Patran.
If UG sewing is turned on for the MSC.Patran import, there is a chance
that invalid entities are created by the UG sew. These entities will be
brought into MSC.Patran and put into a group named,
<model_name>_UG_INVALID. As there is no guarantee that entities
in this group will work with any applications, we strongly recommend
you first commit/save the MSC.Patran database and then reconstruct
these bodies if possible.
c) Gap Surfaces: Sometimes surfaces, that are degenerate or are/close
to being zero area, appear in the model. These surfaces are called “gap
surfaces.” If there are any such gap surfaces, they will be in a group
named, <model_name>_GAP_SURFACE. Please inspect the imported
model and determine if these gap surfaces should be removed from the
model.
Unigraphics Unigraphics provides geometry evaluation tools which are extremely
Model Checks useful in judging the quality of a model. Here are some
geometry/topology checks Unigraphics can perform and provide
results with any UG part: (1) In Unigraphics V13.0, “Info” is available
at the top menu bar, under Info/Analysis/Examine Geometry. If you
use this on surfaces and any are ill-defined, they will be flagged as
“suspect”. (2) In Unigraphics V13.0, Info is available at the top menu
bar. To run all checks:
• Use Info->Analysis->Examine Geometry...
• Choose “Set All Checks”, then “OK”.
• Choose “Select All” to check the entire model currently selectable.
NOTE: Default Distance tolerance is 0.001 units and Default Angle
tolerance is 0.5 units.
CHAPTER 2 5

MSC.Patran In addition to accessing the Unigraphics surface sew tool, MSC.Patran
Surface Sew offers an additional capability to sew surfaces beyond what
Unigraphics supports (e.g., resolution of T-edges). If the Unigraphics
surface sew does not resolve all incongruences, try using the
MSC.Patran surface sew as well. This capability can be accessed
through Edit/Surface/Sew in the Geometry application. If both the
Unigraphics and MSC.Patran surface sew tools cannot remove all of
the gaps and incongruencies, then two options are available. The first
option is to refit all of the surfaces (Edit/Surface/Refit). Sometimes,
after this operation, these surfaces can be sewn together
(Edit/Surface/Sew).
The other option for sewing the model using MSC.Patran surface
sewing is to increase the global tolerance in MSC.Patran and sew the
model again. Changing the global tolerance in MSC.Patran is generally
not recommended, but in this case may be necessary. The necessity of
increasing the global tolerance is determined by checking the
incongruent edges of the model (Verify/Surface/Boundary) to see if
they share vertices, or by the gap closure operation when gaps cannot
be closed between surface since the edge curves are too far apart. The
tolerance value should be set to a value just larger than the distance
between the vertices to be equivalenced (vertices which should be
shared at the ends of incongruent curves), or just larger than the
“allowable gap closure tolerance” which is issued by the sewing (or
edge match) operation.
(Note that there are cases where sewing will report that gaps exist
which are not really gaps. This is because the operation of checking for
gaps does not necessarily know about the engineering intent of the
model. We suggest that the user check the gaps reported to make sure
that they are gaps. Furthermore, we suggest that the global tolerance
be increased conservatively, e.g., double the tolerance instead of
increasing it by an order of magnitude.)
Refitting The technique of refitting geometry has been identified as a potentially
Geometry viable method of removing problematic geometry that prevents
subsequent meshing, application of LBC’s, editing, transforming, etc.
Edit/Curve/Refit and Edit/Surface/Refit are available under the
Geometry application. These functions will more regularly
parameterize poorly parameterized geometry (for surfaces, this
typically involves those with compound curvature), which can
currently lead to difficulties in successfully building CAE models.
Congruency and boundary definitions are retained.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Edit/Surface/Refit As previously mentioned, the Edit/Surface/Refit function in the
Geometry application can be used to successfully handle problematic
Sheet Body geometry. The situations where this applies include:
• Accessing geometry with the Unigraphics Sew option disabled
with subsequent attempts to make the surfaces congruent by
using MSC.Patran’s surface sew, edge match, etc.
• Difficulties rendering, meshing, edge matching, disassembling,
transforming, etc.
• Surfaces that result from disassembling solid geometry (i.e., for
regioning).
Curves Wire Bodies coincident with Sheet Body and Solid Body edges are not
Coincident With equivalenced. This is a different behavior from what occurs if the
Surface and Solid “Express Translation” method is used. If coincident curves are not
Edges detected by the user, they may, for example, apply a Loads/Boundary
Condition to what they believe is a surface or solid edge, when in fact
they are applying it to a curve. To avoid this situation:
• Move all Wire Bodies to a separate group and post only when
required.
• If Wire Bodies are accessed, use the new Geometry function
Edit/Point/Equivalence to connect the curve and surface/solid
vertices.
• Disable access of Wire Bodies and only access when needed.
CHAPTER 2 5
Accessing Geometry Using MSC.Patran ProENGINEER

If MSC.Patran ProENGINEER is licensed at your site, you can access the geometric entities from
an external Pro/ENGINEER part file.
You can execute MSC.Patran ProENGINEER either from MSC.Patran or from Pro/ENGINEER
by doing one of the following:
Executing MSC.Patran ProENGINEER From MSC.Patran. Execute MSC.Patran

ProENGINEER from MSC.Patran by using the File/Import... menu and make sure the
Pro/ENGINEER button is pressed on the Import form. See Importing Pro/ENGINEER Files
(p. 118) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions for more information.
Executing MSC.Patran ProENGINEER From Pro/ENGINEER
Important: Make sure MSC.Patran ProENGINEER has been properly installed by following
the instructions in Selecting Products (Ch. 3) in the MSC.Patran Installation and
Operations Guide.
Execute MSC.Patran ProENGINEER from Pro/ENGINEER by doing the following:

1. Execute Pro/ENGINEER by entering:
p3_proe
p3_proe will ask for the command name to run Pro/ENGINEER. Press <CR> if you
want to accept the default command pro.
Enter the command name for running Pro/ENGINEER.
[pro]?: <cr>
2. Open the Pro/ENGINEER assembly file or part file. Then, select the Pro/ENGINEER
menus in the following order:
File
Export
Model
Patran Geom
The MSC.Patran menu will list four options:
Filter
Run MSC.Patran
Create .db
Create .geo
You can select any one of the above four options.
If Filter is selected:
• A menu appears which allows the user to select:
Datum Points
Datum Curves
Datum Surfaces
Datum Planes
Coordinate System Datums
for output to the intermediated .geo file. (Default = no datum entities).
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
If Run MSC.Patran is selected:

• A MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file will be created from the
current Pro/ENGINEER object in memory.
• MSC.Patran will automatically be executed and a database will be created and
opened.
• The MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file containing the
Pro/ENGINEER geometry will be loaded into the MSC.Patran database, and
both Pro/ENGINEER and MSC.Patran will remain executing.
If Create .db is selected:
• A MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file will be created from the
current Pro/ENGINEER object in memory.
• A batch job will be submitted in background mode that will:
One, execute MSC.Patran and create and open a database.
Two, load the.geo file into the MSC.Patran database.
And, three, close the database and exit MSC.Patran.
If Create .geo is selected, a MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file will be
created from the current Pro/ENGINEER object in memory.
For more information on the MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file, see Executing
MSC.Patran ProENGINEER From Pro/ENGINEER (p3_proe) (p. 122) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
CHAPTER 2 5
2.3 PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic

Geometry
The PATRAN 2 Neutral file is supported by MSC.Software Corporation’s MSC.Patran.
With the PATRAN 2 neutral file, MSC.Patran can import or export only parametric cubic
geometry by executing the File/Import menus on the main form.
MSC.Patran cannot export non-parametric cubic geometry using the PATRAN 2 Neutral file.
Instead, you may use export the entire geometry model using the IGES file.
Depending on Geometry application methods used to create the geometry, you may or may not
be able to create parametric cubic curves, surfaces or solids. Also, some geometry Create action
methods can generate only parametric cubic geometry.
For information on how to import or export a PATRAN 2 Neutral file, see Importing PATRAN
2.5 Neutral Files (p. 76) and Exporting a PATRAN 2.5 Neutral File (p. 110) in the MSC.Patran
For the definition of parametric cubic geometry, see Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25).
For information on what types of curves, surfaces and solids you can create in MSC.Patran, see
Table 1-1, and starting on (p. 27).
For more information on how to export an IGES file, see Exporting an IGES File (p. 115) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
CHAPTER
Coordinate Frames
3
■ Coordinate Frame Definitions
■ Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames
■ Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate

Frames
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
3.1 Coordinate Frame Definitions

MSC.Patran can create and support three types of coordinate frames:
• Rectangular (X,Y,Z)
• Cylindrical (R, Theta, Z)
• Spherical (R, Theta, Phi)
MSC.Patran also has a default global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Coord 0 is the
default reference coordinate frame for many application forms (which can be changed to another
coordinate frame). Also, Coord 0 cannot be deleted, even if specified.
Each coordinate system defined in MSC.Patran has three principal axes. These axes define how
spatial locations are determined in that coordinate system, and are internally numbered 1, 2 and
3. The meaning of each principal axis depends on if the coordinate frame is rectangular,
cylindrical or spherical.
When a coordinate frame is created, its principal axes and its orientation are displayed at the
appropriate location on the model. The ID of the coordinate frame is also displayed at the
coordinate frame’s origin.
Important: Coordinate frame angles for the cylindrical and spherical coordinate frames (that
is, θ and Φ ) are expressed in degrees. Special conditions apply when defining
spatial functions in cylindrical or spherical coordinate frames. For more
information, see Procedures for Using Fields (p. 133) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.
Rectangular Coordinate Frame. Figure 3-1 shows the principal axes of a rectangular
coordinate frame and a point, P, in rectangular space. In a rectangular frame, the principal axes
1, 2 and 3 correspond to the X, Y and Z axes, respectively. Points in space specified in a
rectangular coordinate frame are entered in the order: x-coordinate, y-coordinate and z-
coordinate.
Axis 3 P = (X, Y, Z)
Axis 2
Y
X
Axis 1
Y
X
Figure 3-1 Rectangular Coordinate Frame

CHAPTER 3 6
Coordinate Frames
Cylindrical Coordinate Frame. Figure 3-2 shows a cylindrical frame in which the principal
axes 1, 2 and 3 correspond to the R, T ( θ ) and Z axes, respectively. Points specified in a
cylindrical coordinate frame are entered in the order: radial-coordinate, theta-coordinate and z-
coordinate.
Axis 3 P = (R,θ, Z)
Axis 2
T(θ)
R
Axis 1
θ
R
Figure 3-2 Cylindrical Coordinate Frame
Spherical Coordinate Frame. Figure 3-3 shows a spherical frame in which the principal axes
1, 2 and 3 correspond to the R, T ( θ ) and P ( Φ ) axes, respectively. Points specified in a spherical
coordinate frame are entered in the order: radial-coordinate, theta-coordinate, and phi-
coordinate.
A node’s local directions (1, 2, 3) can vary according to its position within the spherical
coordinate frame. For example:
If node lies along R direction, then dir 1 of node is along +R

If node lies along R direction, then dir 2 of node is along -P
If node lies along R direction, then dir 3 of node is along +T
If node lies along T direction, then dir 1 of node is along +T
If node lies along T direction, then dir 2 of node is along -P
If node lies along T direction, then dir 3 of node is along -R
If node lies along P direction, then dir 1 of node is along +P
If node lies along P direction, then dir 2 of node is along +T
If node lies along P direction, then dir 3 of node is along -R
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
See Input LBCs Set Data (Static Load Case) (p. 22) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5:
Functional Assignments.
P (Φ)
Axis 3 P = (R,θ, φ)
R
Axis 2
T(θ)
Axis 1
φ
R
Figure 3-3 Spherical Coordinate Frame Definition

CHAPTER 3 6
Coordinate Frames
3.2 Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames

There are six ways you can create a local rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame
in MSC.Patran. They are listed as separate methods under the Geometry Application’s Create
action:
• 3Point
• Axis
• Euler
• Normal
• 2Vector
• View Vector
For more information on using the application forms for the Create methods, see Creating
Coordinate Frames (p. 350).
You can also create coordinate frames using the Transform action’s Translate and Rotate
methods. For more information, see Transforming Coordinate Frames (p. 690).
The following sections briefly discuss the Create methods for coordinate frames.
3 Point Method. Figure 3-4 illustrates using the Create action’s 3 Point method for creating a
coordinate frame by specifying three points:
3
A point location, using the other two A point location on axis 3.
points, that defines a plane formed
by axis
1 and 3.
A point location at the origin.
Figure 3-4 Coordinate Frame Creation Using the 3 Point Method

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Axis Method. Figure 3-5 illustrates using the Axis method to create a coordinate frame by
specifying a point location at the origin, a point location on axis 1, 2, or 3, and a point location on
one of the two remaining axes.
Second, a point location on axis 1, 2,

or 3 (you may choose which one).
Third, a point location on one of First, a point location at the origin.

the two remaining axes (you may
choose
which one).
Figure 3-5 Coordinate Frame Creation Using the Axis Method
Euler Method. The Euler Create action creates a new coordinate frame through three rotations
from an existing coordinate frame. Specifically, the following steps are performed in the order
shown:
1. Input the reference coordinate frame ID.
2. Enter the point location of the coordinate frame’s origin.
3. Enter the axis and rotation angle for Rotation 1.
The final orientation of the new coordinate frame depends on the order of rotations that are
made.
CHAPTER 3 6
Coordinate Frames
Normal Method. Figure 3-6 illustrates using the Normal method to create a coordinate frame,
where its origin is at a point location on a surface. The positive axis 3 direction is normal to the
surface by using right-hand rule and crossing the surface’s ξ 1 parametric direction with the ξ 2
direction. The axis 1 direction is along the surface’s ξ 1 direction and the axis 2 direction is
orthogonal to axis 1 and 3.
For more information on the definition of the parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2 axes, see Parameterization
(p. 5).
Y
X Z
ξ2
ξ1
Figure 3-6 Coordinate Frame Creation Using the Normal Method

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
3.3 Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear

Coordinate Frames
You can translate or scale geometry in MSC.Patran by using the Transform action’s Translate
method or Scale method. For information and examples on using either form, see Translating
Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors (p. 605) or Scaling Points, Curves,
Surfaces, Solids and Vectors (p. 629).
On either form, you can choose either the Cartesian in Refer. CF toggle or the Curvilinear in
Refer. CF toggle.
If Curvilinear in Refer. CF is chosen, you can specify either an existing cylindrical or spherical
coordinate frame as the reference, and the translation vector or the scale factors will be
interpreted as R, θ , Z for the cylindrical system, and as R, θ , Φ for the spherical system. (Both
the θ axis and Φ axis are measured in degrees.)
Figure 3-7 throughFigure 3-10 are examples of using the Translate and Scale methods with the
Curvilinear in Refer. CF toggle.
3
1 4
2 1
T R
2
1
Z
Y 5
6
X
Z
Figure 3-7 Translate Method where Surface 1 is Translated <1 90 0> within Cylindrical
Coordinate Frame 1
CHAPTER 3 6
Coordinate Frames
2
3
1
2 1
T R
1
Z
X
Z 4
Figure 3-8 Scale Method where Curve 1 is Scaled <2 1 1> within Cylindrical Coordinate
Frame 1
3
4 1
2 1
Y T R
1
Z
X
Z
Frame 1
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
2
1
2 1 3
4
Y T R
1
Z
X
Z
Frame 1
Points along the z-axis of a cylindrical coordinate system and at the origin of a spherical
coordinate system cannot be transformed uniquely in the θ (cylindrical) or θ and φ (spherical)
coordinates respectively. This is due to the fact that there is no unique θ for points on the z-axis
of a cylindrical coordinate system or θ and φ coordinates at the origin of a spherical coordinate
system. Therefore, in MSC.Patran, any point on the z-axis of a cylindrical coordinate system or
at the origin of a spherical coordinate system is not transformed.
CHAPTER
Create Actions
4
■ Overview of Geometry Create Action
■ Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids
■ Creating Coordinate Frames
■ Creating Planes
■ Creating Vectors
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
4.1 Overview of Geometry Create Action

Select any method to obtain detailed help.
Object Method Description

Point ❏ XYZ Creates points from their cartesian coordinates or from existing nodes
or vertices.
❏ ArcCenter Creates a point at the center of curvature of the specified curves.
❏ Extract Creates points on existing curves at a parametric coordinate location.
❏ Interpolate Creates one or more points between two existing point locations that
are uniformly or nonuniformly spaced apart.
❏ Intersect Creates points at the intersection of any of the following pairs of
entities: Curve/Curve, Curve/Surface, Curve/Plane, Vector/Curve,
Vector/Surface, Vector/Plane.
❏ Offset Creates a point on an existing curve.
❏ Pierce Creates a point at the location where a curve intersects or pierces a
surface or solid face.
❏ Project Creates points from an existing set of points or vertices that are either
projected normally or projected through a defined vector or projected
through the current view angle, onto an existing surface or solid face.
Curve ❏ Point Creates curves through two, three or four point locations.
❏ Arc3Point Creates arced curves through a starting, middle and ending point
locations.
❏ Chain Creates a chained composite curve from two or more existing curves.
Usually used for creating trimmed surfaces.
❏ Conic Creates a conic curve based on a defined altitude and focal point and a
starting and ending points.
❏ Extract Creates a curve on an existing surface either at a parametric coordinate
location or on an edge of the surface.
❏ Fillet Creates a fillet curve with a defined radius between two existing
curves or edges.
❏ Fit Creates a curve that passes through a set of point locations based on a
least squares fit.
❏ Intersect Creates a curve at the intersection of two surfaces or solid faces.
❏ Manifold Creates a curve on a a surface or solid face that is between two or more
point locations.
❏ Normal Creates a curve that is normal from an existing surface or solid face to a
point location.
❏ Offset Creates either constant or variable offset curves from an existing curve.
CHAPTER 4 7
Create Actions

Curve ❏ Project Creates curves from an existing set of curves or edges that is projected
(cont.) onto a surface either normally or from a defined plane or vector or
based on the current view angle.
❏ PWL Creates contiguous straight curves between two or more point
locations.
❏ Spline Creates a spline curve that passes through two or more point locations.
❏ TanCurve Creates a curve that is tangent between two curves or edges.
❏ TanPoint Creates a curve from a point location to a tangent point on a curve.
❏ XYZ Creates a curve at a defined origin based on a vector that defines its
length and orientation.
❏ Involute Creates involute curves either using an Angles option or a Radii
option.
❏ Revolve Creates curves that are rotated from point locations about a rotation
axis for a defined angle.
❏ 2D Normal Creates straight curves that are perpendicular to an existing curve or
edge and that lies within a defined plane.
❏ 2D Circle Creates a circle within a defined plane.
❏ 2D ArcAngles Creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane.
❏ 2D Arc2Point Creates an arced curve that lies within a defined plane and that uses a
starting, ending and center point locations.
❏ 2D Arc3Point Creates an arced curve that lies within a defined plane and that passes
through a starting, middle and ending point locations.
Surface ❏ Curve Creates surfaces that passes through either two, three, four or N curves
or edges.
❏ Composite Create surfaces that are composed from multiple surfaces.
❏ Decompose Creates surfaces from an existing surface (usually a trimmed surface)
based on four cursor defined vertices that lie on the existing surface.
❏ Edge Creates surfaces from three or four curves or edges.
❏ Extract Creates a surface within a solid based on either the parametric
coordinate location or on the face of the solid.
❏ Fillet Creates a filleted surface with one or two defined radii between two
existing surfaces or faces.
❏ Match Creates a surface that is topologically congruent with one of the two
specified surfaces.
❏ Offset Creates constant offset surfaces from an existing surface.
❏ Ruled Creates a surface that is created between two existing curves or edges.
❏ Trimmed Creates a trimmed surface that consist of an outer chained curve loop
and optionally, an inner chained curve loop.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Surface ❏ Vertex Creates a surface from four point locations.
(cont.)
❏ XYZ Creates a surface at a defined origin based on a vector that defines its
❏ Extrude Creates a surface from an existing curve or edge that is extruded
through a vector and is optionally scaled and rotated.
❏ Glide Creates a surface that is created from a specified director curve or
edge, along one or more base curves or edges.
❏ Normal Creates surfaces from existing curves through a defined thickness.
❏ Revolve Creates surfaces that are rotated from curves or edges about a rotation
❏ Mesh Creates a surface from a congruent 2-D mesh (shell mesh).
Solid ❏ Primitive Creates a solid (block, cylinder, cone, sphere or torus) with user input a
point, length, width, height, and reference coordinate frame. It also
provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target
solid using the created block, cylinder, cone, sphere or torus as the tool
solid.
❏ Surface Creates solids that pass through two, three, four or N surfaces or faces.
❏ B-rep Creates a B-rep solid from an existing set of surfaces that form a closed
volume.
❏ Decompose Creates solids from two opposing solid faces by choosing four vertex
locations on each face.
❏ Face Creates solids from five or six surfaces or faces.
❏ Vertex Creates solids from eight point locations.
❏ XYZ Creates a solid at a defined origin based on a vector that defines its
❏ Extrude Creates a solid from an existing surface or face that is extruded
through a vector and is optionally scaled and rotated.
❏ Glide Creates a solid that is created from a specified director curve or edge,
along one or more base surfaces or faces.
❏ Normal Creates solids from existing surfaces through a defined thickness.
❏ Revolve Creates solids that are rotated from surfaces or faces about a rotation
CHAPTER 4 7
Create Actions

Coord ❏ 3Point Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame based
on defined point locations for its origin, a point on Axis 3 and a point
on Plane 1-3.
❏ Axis Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame based
on point locations that define the original and either points one Axis 1
and 2, Axis 2 and 3, or Axis 3 and 1
❏ Euler Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame based
on three rotation angles about Axes 1, 2 and 3.
❏ Normal Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame whose
Axis 3 is normal to a specified surface or solid face, and whose origin is
at a point location.
Plane ❏ Vector Normal Creates a plane from a specified point as the plane origin and a
specified direction as the plane normal.
❏ Curve Normal Creates a plane from a point on or projected onto a specified curve as
the plane origin and the curve tangent at that point as the plane
normal.
❏ Interpolate Creates a plane from the interpolating points on a specified curve as
the plane origins and the curve tangents at those points as the plane
normals.
❏ Least Squares Creates a plane from the least square based on three and more
specified non-colinear points.
❏ Offset Creates a plane that is parallel to a specified plane with a specified
offset distance.
❏ Surface Creates a plane from a specified point on or projected to a specified
Tangent surface as the plane origin and the surface normal at that location as
the plane normal.
❏ 3 Points Creates a plane from three specified non-colinear points. The plane
origin is located at the first point.
❏ Point-Vector Creates planes at a point and normal to a vector.
Vector ❏ Magnitude Creates a vector by specifying the vector base point, the vector
direction and the vector magnitude of the desired vector.
❏ Intersect Creates a vector along the intersecting line of two specified planes. The
vector base point is the projection of the first plane origin on that
intersecting line.
❏ Normal Creates a vector that has the direction parallel to a specified plane and
the base point at a specified point on or projected onto that plane.
❏ Product Creates a vector that is the cross product of two specified vectors and
has its base point located at the base point of the first vector.
❏ 2 Point Creates a vector that starts from a specified base point and pointing to
a specified tip point.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
4.2 Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Create Points at XYZ Coordinates or Point Locations (XYZ Method)
The XYZ method creates points from their cartesian coordinates or at an existing node, vertex or
other point location as provided in the Point select menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: XYZ
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to
Point ID List be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
5
Functions.
Refer. Coordinate Frame Used to express the coordinate values entered in the
Point Coordinate List, within the reference frame. Default
Coord 0 is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0.
Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran

Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
Point Coordinates List means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
[0 0 0]
Specify the existing cartesian coordinates or point

location for the new points, either by entering the
-Apply- coordinates from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the
point location. Examples: [ 10 0 0], Surface 10.1.1, Node
20, Solid 10.4.3.1.
The Point Select menu that appears can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.
☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• Topology (p. 10)
• Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
CHAPTER 4 7
Create Actions
Point XYZ Method Example

Creates Point 6 using the Create/XYZ method that is located at the global rectangular
coordinates X = 10, Y = 5 and Z = 3.125.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create 3
Object: Point
Method: XYZ 2
Point ID List
6 1
Refer. Coordinate Frame

Coord 0
Auto Execute 4
Y
Point Coordinates List
[10 5 3.125] Z X
5
-Apply- After:
3
Y 4
6
Z X
5
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point XYZ Method On a Surface Example

Creates Point 5 using the Create/XYZ/Point select menu icons listed below which locates Point
5 on Surface 1, whose exact location is cursor defined.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point 2 3
Method: XYZ
Point ID List
5
1
Coord 0
Auto Execute 1 Y 4
Point Coordinates List Z X
Construct Point Surface Point
-Apply-
After:
2 3
1
5
1 Y 4
Z X
Point Select Menu Icons

CHAPTER 4 7
Create Actions
Point XYZ Method At Nodes Example

Creates Points 1 through 4 using the Create/XYZ/Point select menu icon listed below which
locates the points at Nodes 10 through 13.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
10 11
Object: Point
Method: XYZ
Point ID List
1

12 13
Coord 0
Auto Execute Y
Z X
Node 10:13
-Apply-
After:
1 2
3 4
Z X
Point Select Menu Icon

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point XYZ Method At Screen Location Example

Creates Points 1 through 5 using the Create/XYZ/Point select menu icon listed below which
locates Points 1 through 5 by cursor defining them on the screen.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: XYZ
Point ID List
1

Coord 0
Auto Execute Y

Z X
[1.596433 0.096824 0.000000]
-Apply-
After:
1
2
5
Y
Z X

CHAPTER 4 7
Create Actions
Create Point ArcCenter

The ArcCenter method creates a point at the center of curvature of the specified curves which
have a non-zero center/radius of curvature.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Arc Center
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Point ID List
48
Auto Execute By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
Curve List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the existing curves or edges either by cursor selecting

-Apply- them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example:
Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve Select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate curves or edges.
☞ More Help:
Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point ArcCenter Method Example

Creates point 3 using Create/Point/Arc Center which locates point 3 in the center of the arc.
Before:
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point 1
Method: Arc Center
Point ID List
2
3
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 1 Y
Z X
-Apply- 1
After:
Y 3
Z X
1
CHAPTER 4 8
Create Actions
Extracting Points
Extracting Points from Curves and Edges
Creates points on an existing set of curves or edges at the parametric ξ 1 coordinate location of
the curve or edge, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 .
Geometry
Select the curve icon to extract a point from a curve.
Action: Create
Object: Point Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be
Method: Extract Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
If Equal Arc Length is ON, MSC.Patran will create the

point(s) based on the arc length parameterization of the
Point ID List curve. If Equal Parametric Values is ON, MSC.Patran will
5 create the point(s) based on the equal parametric values of
the curve.
Parameterization Method Specify the curve’s or edge’s ξ 1 ( u ) coordinate value, where

◆ Equal Arc Length ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , either by using the slide bar
or by entering the value in the databox. The direction of ξ 1 is
◆
◆ Equal Parametric Values defined by the connectivity of the curve or edge. You can plot
the ξ 1 direction by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle
on the Geometric Properties form under the menus
Parametric Position
Display/Display Properties/Geometric.
0.0 1.0
0.5 By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
u Parametric Value need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Auto Execute ☞ More Help:

Curve List • Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
• Connectivity (p. 15)
• Geometric Attributes (p. 257) in the
-Apply-
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2:
Basic Functions
Specify the existing curves or edges to extract points from, either

by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve
Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Extract Method Example

Creates Point 7 using the Create/Extract method, where the point is located at ξ 1 ( u ) is equal to
0.75, on Curve 1. Notice that the curve’s parametric direction arrow is displayed.
Before:
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Extract 6
1
1
Point ID List
7
5
Parameterization Method
Y
◆ Equal Arc Length
◆
◆ Equal Parametric Values Z X
Parametric Position
0.0 1.0
0.75
After:
u Parametric Value
Auto Execute
Curve List
6
Curve 1
1
-Apply- 1
5
Y
Z X
CHAPTER 4 8
Create Actions
Point Extract Method Example

Creates Point 5 using the Create/Extract method, where the point is located at ξ 1 ( u ) is equal to
0.75, on the edge of Surface 1.
Before:
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
2 3
Method: Extract
Point ID List
5
Parameterization Method Y
1 4
◆ Z X
◆ Equal Parametric Values
Parametric Position
0.0 1.0
0.75 After:
u Parametric Value
2 5 3
Auto Execute
Curve List
Surface 1.4
1
-Apply-
1 Y 4
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extracting Single Points from Surfaces or Faces

Creates single points on an existing set of surfaces or faces at a specified u,v parametric location
on the surface.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Extract
Select the icon to create a Single Point.
Point ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be
1 created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Parametric Position
0.0 1.0 Specify the surface or faces’s ξ 1 ( u ) or ξ 2 ( v ) coordinate
value , which have a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , either by using the
0.5 slide bar or by entering the value in the databox. The ξ 1 and
u Parametric Value ξ 2 directions are defined by the connectivity of the surface
or face. You can plot the ξ 1 , ξ 2 directions by choosing the
0.0 1.0 Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties
0.5 form under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric.
v Parametric Value
Surface List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the existing surfaces or faces to create points on,

either by cursor selecting the surfaces or faces or by
-Apply- entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1
or Solid 5.1 The Surface Select menu that appears can be
used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate surfaces or faces.
CHAPTER 4 8
Create Actions
Point Extract from Surfaces or Faces Method Example

Creates Point 5 using the Create/Extract Point from Surface or Face method, where the point is
located at ξ 1 ( u ) is equal to 0.333 and ξ 2 ( v ) is equal to 0.666, on Surface 1.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create 2 3
Object: Point
Method: Extract
Point ID List
1
Parametric Position
0.0 1.0
Y
0.333 1 4
u Parametric Value Z X
0.0 1.0
0.666 After:
v Parametric Value 2 3
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1 5
1
-Apply-
Y
1 4
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces

Creates multiple points on an existing set of surfaces or faces where the bounds of the grid of
points is defined by a diagonal of two points.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Extract
Select the icon to create Multiple Points.
1
Number of Points
u Direction Specify the number of points to create in the u and v direction
of the surface.
2
v Direction
2
Bounds
Specify the Bounds as Diagonal Points when two point
Diagonal Points locations are to be used to define the boundary for the points
to be extracted from the surface.
Parametric
Point 1 List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the two points to define the diagonal for the points,
either by cursor selecting the points or by entering the IDs from
Point 2 List the keyboard. Example: Point 1 or Curve 1.1, Surface 1.1.1.
The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how
you want to cursor select the appropriate points.
Surface List
Specify the existing surface or face to create points on, either
by cursor selecting the surface or face by entering the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 or Solid 5.1 The Surface
Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want
-Apply- to cursor select the appropriate surface or face.
CHAPTER 4 8
Create Actions
Multiple Point Extract from Surfaces or Faces Diagonal Method Example

Creates Points 7 through 28 on Surface 1 in the bounds defined by points 5 and 6.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create 2 3
Object: Point
Method: Extract
5
Point ID List
7
Number of Points Y
1 4
u Direction Z X
4
v Direction After:
6 2 3
Bounds
Diagonal Points
Parametric 26 27 28 6
22 23 24 25
Auto Execute 18 19 20 21
1
14 15 16 17
Point 1 List 10 11 12 13
Point 5 5 7 8 9
Point 2 List
Point 6
Y
Surface List 1 4
Z X
Surface 1
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces

Creates multiple points on an existing set of surfaces or faces where the bounds of the grid of
points is defined by a parametric ξ , ξ 2 diagonal.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Extract
Select the icon to create Multiple Points.
Number of Points
u Direction Specify the number of points to create in the u and v direction
of the surface.
2
v Direction
2
Specify the Bounds as Parametric when two parametric

Bounds locations are to be used to define the boundary for the points
to be extracted from the surface.
Diagonal Points
Parametric
Display the Parametric Bounds form to define the u,v
parametric locations to define the bounds of the points.
[Parametric Bounds...]
need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Surface List
Specify the existing surface or face to create points on, either
by cursor selecting the surface or face by entering the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 or Solid 5.1 The Surface
Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want
-Apply- to cursor select the appropriate surface or face.
CHAPTER 4 8
Create Actions
Multiple Point Extract from Surfaces or Faces Parametric Method Example

Creates Points 5 through 28 on Surface 1 in the bounds defined by u-min=0.333, u-max=0.666, v-
min=0.333, and v-max=0.666.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create 2 3
Object: Point
Method: Extract
Point ID List
5
Y
Number of Points 1 4
u Direction Z X
4
After:
v Direction
2 3
6
Bounds
Diagonal Points
25 26 27 28
Parametric
21 22 23 24
17 18 19 20
1
[Parametric Bounds...] 13 14 15 16
9 10 11 12
Surface List
Surface 1
Y
1 4
Z X
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Parametric Bounds for Extracting Points from a Surface
Parametric Bounds Specify the surface’s x1 (u) and x2 (v) coordinate values for the
u v Bounds definition of the bounds of the points, either by using the slide
bar or by entering the value in the databox. The x1and x2
0.0 1.0 directions are defined by the connectivity of the surface or face.
0.0 (x1 has a range of 0 £ x1 £ 1 and x2 has a range of 0 £ x2 £ 1)
u-Min You can plot the x1 and x2 directions by choosing the
Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form
0.0 1.0 under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.
1.0
u-Max
0.0 1.0
0.0
v-Min
0.0 1.0
1.0
v-Max
Reset
OK Cancel
CHAPTER 4 9
Create Actions
Interpolating Points
Between Two Points
The Interpolate method using the Point option will create n points of uniform or nonuniform
spacing between a specified pair of point locations, where n is the number of interior points to
be created. The point location pairs can be existing points, vertices, nodes or other point location
provided by the Point select menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Interpolate
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to
Point ID List be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
5 Functions.
Option: Point
Enter the number of interior points you want to create
Number of Interior Points between the specified point locations in the Point 1 and
Point 2 Coordinates List.
1
Point Spacing Method Select either button for Uniform or Nonuniform point
◆ Uniform spacing for the new interior points. If Nonuniform is ON,
then enter the value for L2/L1, where L2/L1 is 0 ≤ L2/L1
◆
◆ Nonuniform ≤ 1.0 or L2/L1 ≤ 1.0.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran

means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify in the Point 1 Coordinates listbox, the starting

Auto Execute point location to begin the interpolation. Specify in the
Point 2 Coordinates listbox, the ending point location to
Point 1 Coordinates List end the interpolation.
You can express the point location either by entering the
location’s cartesian coordinates from the keyboard, or by
Point 2 Coordinates List using the Point Select menu to cursor select the
appropriate points, vertices, nodes or other point
locations. Examples: [ 10 0 0], Surface 10.1.1, Node 20,
Solid 10.4.3.1.
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Interpolate Method With Point Option Example

Creates five interior points starting with Point 3 that are between Points 1 and 2, using the
Create/Interpolate/Point option. The spacing is nonuniform at L2/L1 = 2.0.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Interpolate
Point ID List
3
1 2
Option: Point
Number of Interior Points
5
Number of Spacing Method Y

◆ Uniform
Z X
◆
◆ Nonuniform
L1 L2
After:
L2/L1 = 2.0
Auto Execute
Point 1 Coordinates List
Point 1
1 3 4 5 6 7 2
Point 2 Coordinates List
Point 2
-Apply-
Y
Z X
CHAPTER 4 9
Create Actions
Point Interpolate Method With Point Option Example

Same as the previous example, except the five new points are uniformly spaced between Nodes
1 and 2, by using the Point select menu icon listed below.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point 2
Method: Interpolate
Point ID List
1
1
Option: Point
5
Number of Spacing Method

◆ Uniform Y
◆
◆ Nonuniform
Z X
After:
Auto Execute 5
4
Point 1 Coordinates List 3
Node 1 2
1
Point 2 Coordinates List 1
Node 2
-Apply-
Z X

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Interpolating Points on a Curve

The Interpolate method using the Curve option creates n points along an existing curve or edge
of uniform or nonuniform spacing where n is the number of interior points to be created.
Enter the number of interior points you want to create along the
curves or edges that are specified in the Curve listbox.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to
be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
Method: Interpolate MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions.
Point ID List
5 If Equal Arc Length is ON, MSC.Patran will create the
point(s) based on the arc length parameterization of the
Option: Curve curve. If Equal Parametric Values is ON, MSC.Patran
will create the point(s) based on the equal parametric
Number of Interior Points values of the curve.
Choose either button for Uniform or Nonuniform point

Parameterization Method spacing for the new interior points.
◆ Equal Arc Length If Nonuniform is ON, then enter the value for L2/L1,
where L2/L1 is 0 ≤ L2/L1 ≤ 1.0 or L2/L1 ≤ 1.0. The
◆
◆ Equal Parametric Values starting point of where L1 and L2 is measured from is at
the curve’s or edge’s parametric origin, which is defined
Point Spacing Method by its connectivity. You can plot the ξ1 direction by
choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the
◆ Uniform Geometric Properties form under the menus
◆
◆ Nonuniform Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

execute the form.
Specify the existing curves or edges to create points on,
either by cursor selecting the curves or edges or by
Auto Execute entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1
Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve Select menu that
Curve List appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate curves or edges.
-Apply- ☞ More Help:

• Geometric Attributes (p. 257) in the
Functions
CHAPTER 4 9
Create Actions
Point Interpolate Method With Curve Option Example

Creates five uniformly spaced interior points, starting with Point 6 on Curve 1, using the
Create/Point/Interpolate/Curve option.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Interpolate
Point ID List 5
6
1
Option: Curve
1
5
Y
◆ Equal Arc Length Z X
◆
Point Spacing Method

◆ Uniform
◆
◆ Nonuniform After:
6 7 5
Auto Execute
1 8
Curve List 1
10
Curve 1 9
Y
-Apply-
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Interpolate Method With Curve Option Example

Creates Points 5 through 9 that are nonuniformly spaced by using the Create/Interpolate/Curve
option, where the points are created on an edge of Surface 1.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Interpolate 2 3
Point ID List
5
Option: Curve
1
5
Parameterization Method 2
◆ Equal Arc Length 1 Y 1 4
◆
Z X
Point Spacing Method

◆ Uniform
◆
◆ Nonuniform After:
L1 L2
2 5 6 7 8 9 3
L2/L1 = 2.0
Auto Execute
Curve List 1
Curve 1
-Apply- 2
1 Y 1 4
Z X
CHAPTER 4 9
Create Actions
Intersecting Two Entities to Create Points

The Intersect method creates points at the intersection of any of the following pairs of entities:
Curve/Curve, Curve/Surface, Curve/Plane, Vector/Curve, Vector/Surface, Vector/Plane.
One point will be created at each intersection location. The pair of entities should intersect within
a value defined by the Global Model Tolerance. If the entities do not intersect, MSC.Patran will
create a point at the closest approach on each specified curve, edge, or vector for the
Curve/Curve and Vector/Curve intersection options.
Geometry Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be
Action: Create Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Object: Point
Options for 1st entity to intersect:
Method: Intersect 1. Curve (or edge of a surface)
2. Vector
Point ID List
24
Options for 2nd entity to intersect:
Option: <Type> 1. Curve (or edge of a surface)
2. Surface
Option: <Type> 3. Plane

<Type> List means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
<Type> List
The <Type> list changes depending on the option selected.
Specify in List 1 and List 2 the pair of intersecting entities at
which to create points, either by cursor selecting them or by
entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1
-Apply- Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1.
The Select menus that appear can be used to define how
you want to cursor select the appropriate entities.
The Global Model Tolerance that defines the tolerance
value within which the two entities can intersect is defined
on the Global Preferences form under the
Preferences/Global menu.
☞ More Help:
• Global Preferences (p. 290) in the
Basic Functions
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Intersect Method At An Edge Example

Creates Point 17, using the Create/Intersect method, at the intersection of Curve 3 and an edge
of Surface 1.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point 12
Method: Intersect
16
3
Point ID List 15
17 13
Option: Curve
1
Option: Curve
11
Auto Execute
Curve List Y
Curve 3 X
Z
14
Curve List
Surface 1.2
After:
-Apply- 12
16
3 17
15
13
11
Z X
14
CHAPTER 4 9
Create Actions
Point Intersect Method with Two Curves Example

Creates Points 1 and 2, using the Create/Intersect method, at the intersection of Curves 1 and 2.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect
Point ID List
1
1
Option: Curve
Option: Curve
Auto Execute
Curve List Y 2
Curve 1 Z X
Curve List
Curve 2
After:
-Apply-
Y 2
2
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Intersect Method with Two Curves Example

Creates Points 1 and 2, using the Create/Intersect method. Because the curves do not intersect,
Points 1 and 2 are created at the closest approach of the two curves.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect
Point ID List
1
1 2
Option: Curve
Option: Curve
Auto Execute
Curve List
Y
Curve 1
Z X
Curve List
Curve 2
After:
-Apply-
1 2
1 2
Y
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Point Intersect Method with a Curve and a Surface Example

Creates Points 1, 2 and 3 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Curve 6 with
Surface 1.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
6
Method: Intersect 11
Point ID List
1
Option: Curve
Option: Surface
Auto Execute
Z
Curve List Y
Curve 6 X
Surface List
Surface 1
After:
-Apply-
6
1 1
2 1
Z
Y
X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Intersect Method with a Curve and a Plane Example

Creates Points 1, 2, and 3 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Curve 2 with
Plane 1.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect
Point ID List
1 2
Option: Curve
1
Option: Plane
Auto Execute
Curve List Y
Curve 2 Z X
Plane List
Plane 1
After:
-Apply- 1
2 2
3
Y
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Curve Example

Creates Points 1, 2, and 3 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Vector 1 with
Curve 2.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect
Point ID List
1
2
Option: Vector
Option: Curve 1
Auto Execute
Vector List Y
Vector 1 Z X
Curve List
Curve 2
After:
-Apply-
1
2 2
3
Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Curve Example

Creates Point 1 on Vector 1 and Point 2 on Curve 2, using the Create/Intersect method. Since the
entities do not intersect, Points 1 and 2 are created at the closest approach between the Vector
and the Curve.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect
Point ID List
1 2
Option: Vector
Option: Curve
Auto Execute 1
Vector List Y
Vector 1 Z X
Curve List
Curve 2
After:
-Apply-
2
1 2
Y
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Surface Example

Creates Points 1 and 2 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Vector 1 and
Surface 1.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect
Point ID List
1
1
Option: Vector
Option: Surface
1
Auto Execute
Vector List Y
Vector 1 Z X
Surface List
Surface 1
After:
-Apply-
1 1
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Plane Example

Creates Point 1 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Vector 2 and Plane 1.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Intersect
Point ID List 2
1
1
Option: Vector
Option: Plane
Y
Auto Execute X
Z
Vector List
Vector 2
Plane List
Plane 1
After:
-Apply-
1 1
Y
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Creating Points by Offsetting a Specified Distance

The Offset method creates a point on an existing curve by offsetting a specified model space
distance from an existing point on the same curve.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Offset
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be
Point ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1
Offset Distance Input the Model Space offset distance from an existing point
on a curve (curve to be input).
Auto Execute Specify the existing points on the curve either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Reference Point List
Example: Point 1 Curve 5.1. The Point Select menu that
the appropriate points or vertices.
Curve/Point List
Specify in Curve/Point List, the existing curve or edge, along
with a point on the curve which indicates the direction in
which the offset will be taken. For each listbox, the Curve
-Apply- Select menu and the Point Select menu will appear at the
bottom to allow you to cursor define the appropriate curves or
edges, and the points, vertices, nodes, or other appropriate
endpoint locations.
☞ More Help:
Functions
Basic Functions
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Offset Method Example

Creates point 3 on curve one, .75 units from point 1 using Create/Point/Offset.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Offset 1
Point ID List
3
Offset Distance
0.75
1 2
Auto Execute
Reference Point List Y
Point 1
Z X
Curve/Point List
Geometry (Curve 1)
After:
-Apply-
1 2
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Piercing Curves Through Surfaces to Create Points

The Pierce method creates points at the intersection between an existing curve or edge and a
surface or solid face. The curve or edge must completely intersect with the surface or solid face.
If the curve or edge intersects the surface or face more than one time, MSC.Patran will create a
point at each intersection.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Point Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be
Method: Pierce Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Point ID List
1 By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Auto Execute need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Curve List
Specify in Curve List the existing curves or edges that

Surface List intersect the surfaces and faces listed in the Surface listbox.
Specify in Surface List the existing surfaces or faces that
intersect with the curves and edges.
You can either cursor select the existing entities or enter the
IDs from the keyboard. Example: For curves - Curve 1
-Apply- Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1; for surfaces - Surface 10 Solid 5.1.
The Curve Select menu and Surface Select menu that appears
can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate curves, edges, surfaces or faces.
☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the
Basic Functions
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Pierce Method Example

Creates Point 15, using the Create/Pierce method at the location where Curve 3 intersects
Surface 1.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point 14
Method: Pierce
Point ID List
1
15
11
Auto Execute 3 5
Curve List 1 12
Curve 3
Y
Surface List
Surface 1 Z X
13
-Apply-
After:
14
11
3 5
15
1 12
Z X
13
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Point Pierce Method Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except the curve is defined by Points 13 and
14 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
14
Method: Pierce
Point ID List
1
15
11
Auto Execute 5
Curve List 1 12
Construct 2 Point Curve
Y
Surface List
Surface 1 Z X
13
-Apply-
After:
14
11
5
15
1 12
Z X
13
Curve Select Menu Icon

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Projecting Points Onto Surfaces or Faces

The Project method creates points by projecting an existing set of points onto a surface or solid
face through a defined Projection Vector. New points can be projected from other points,
vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be created. See
Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Basic Functions.
Geometry
Action: Create Normal to Surf option will project the existing points by using
Object: Point the normal direction of the specified surface or face.
Define Vector option allows you to specify the coordinates of
Method: Project the Projection Vector and the Refer. Coordinate Frame to
express the vector within. (Example: <1 1 0>). The Vector
Point ID List Select menu will appear to allow you alternate ways to cursor
5 define the vector direction.
View Vector option will project the existing points by using the
Project onto: Surface view angle of the current viewport. MSC.Patran will project the
existing points using the normal direction of the screen.
Option:Normal to Surf
Projection Vector
<0 0 0>
Refer. Coordinate Frame Projection Vector and Refer. Coordinate Frame is used if the
Define Vector option is chosen.
Coord 0
Delete Original Points If ON, after Project completes the existing points specified in
Point List will be deleted from the database.
Auto Execute
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference

CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Projection Vector
<0 0 0>

Coord 0
Specify in Point List the existing points, vertices, nodes or

Delete Original Points other point locations that you want to project onto the surfaces
or faces specified in the Surface List box.
Auto Execute Specify in Surface List, the existing surfaces or faces that the
points will be projected onto.
Point List
IDs from the keyboard. Example: For points - Point 1:10,
Curve 5.1 Surface 5.1.1; For surfaces - Surface 10 Solid 5.1.
Surface List The Point Select menu and Surface Select menu that appears
appropriate points, vertices, nodes, surfaces or faces.
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
• Viewing Menu (p. 219) in the MSC.Patran
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Project Method With Normal to Surf Option Example

Creates Points 21 through 28, using the Create/Project/Normal to Surf option. Points 13:16,
18:20 and Node 1 are all projected normally onto Surface 1. Notice Delete Original Points is
pressed in.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
10
Object: Point
Method: Project
11
15
Point ID List 16
21 14
Project onto: Surface 1 1

13
Option: Normal to Surf
18
Projection Vector Y 209
19
<0 0 0> ZX
12
Coord 0
After:
Delete Original Points
Auto Execute 10
Point List
11
Point 13:16 18:20 Node 1 23
24
Surface List 22
Surface 10
1
21
-Apply-
26
Y 28 9
27
ZX
12
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Point Project Method With Define Vector Option Example

Creates Points 21 through 28, using the Create/Point/Project/Define Vector option. The points
are projected onto Surface 1 through the vector <-1 0 1> that is expressed within the Refer.
Coordinate Frame, Coord 1. Notice that Delete Original Points is pressed in.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
Method: Project 10 11
15
Point ID List 16 14
13 Y
Project onto: Surface 1

17 1
Z X 13
Option: Define Vector

18 20
Y 19
Projection Vector
9 12
<-1 0 1> Z X

Coord 1
After:
Auto Execute
Point List 10 11
23
Point 13:20
24 22
Surface List
Y
Surface 1
25 21 1 1
Z X
-Apply-
26 28
Y 27
9 12
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Project Method With View Vector Option Example

Creates Points 21 through 28, using the Create/Project/View Vector option. The points are
projected onto Surface 1 using the view angle of the current viewport. Notice that Delete
Original Points is pressed in and Points 13 through 20 are deleted.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Point
10 11
Method: Project
15
Point ID List 16 14
21 Y
1
17 1
Z X 13
Project onto: Surface
Option: View Vector 18 20

Y 19
Projection Vector 9 12
Z X
<0 0 0>

Coord 0
After:
Auto Execute
10 11
Point List
23
Point 13:20
24 22
Surface List Y
Surface 1 1
25 1
Z X 21
-Apply- 26 28
Y 27
9 12
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Creating Curves Between Points

Creating Curves Through 2 Points
The Point method using the 2 Point option creates straight parametric cubic curves between two
existing point locations. The point locations can be existing points, vertices, nodes, or other point
locations provided on the Point select menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Point Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Curve ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1
Option: 2 Point Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
Auto Execute
Starting Point List
Specify the starting and ending point locations for the new
curves. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs
from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20,
Ending Point List
Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used
to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points,
vertices, nodes, or other point locations.
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Point Method With 2 Point Option Example

Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Point/2 Point option, which is between Point 1 and Node 10.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Point
10
Curve ID List
3
Option: 2 Point
Auto Execute
Starting Point List
1
Point 1 Y
Ending Point List Z X

Node 10
-Apply-
After:
2
10
1
Y
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

The Point method using the 3 Point option creates parametric cubic curves that pass through
three existing point locations where the starting point defines the curve at ξ 1 = 0 and the
ending point defines the curve at ξ 1 = 1 . The point locations can be existing points, vertices,
nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Point
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Curve ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
1
Option: 3 Point
◆ Parametric Position Parametric Position allows you to specify the ξ 1 ( u )
parametric position of the middle point for the new curve, either
◆
◆ Chord Length by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox
where 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . The direction of ξ 1 is defined by the order
0.0 1.0 of the point locations specified in the Starting Point List and
0.5
Ending Point List, which defines the new curve’s connectivity.
u Value of Middle Point You can plot the curve’s ξ 1 direction by selecting the
under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric.
Chord Length will disable the slide bar and databox. Instead,
MSC.Patran will calculate the parametric coordinates of the
points along the curve, based on the chord length distances
relative to the locations of the curve’s interior points. This means
the curve may or may not be uniformly parameterized,
depending on where the interior points are located.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
◆ Parametric Position
◆
◆ Chord Length
0.0 1.0
0.5
u Value of Middle Point By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Auto Execute means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Starting Point List
Middle Point List Specify the starting, middle and ending point locations for the
new curve to pass through. Either cursor select the point
locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1,
Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that
Ending Point List appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
• PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric
Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
• Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Point/3 Point option, which is created through Points 1 and
2 and Node 10. Point 2 is located on the curve at x1(u) =0.5.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
10
Object: Curve
Method: Point
Curve ID List
1
Option: 3 Point
◆
◆ Chord Length 1
Y
0.0 1.0
0.5
Z X
u Value of Middle Point
Auto Execute
Starting Point List After:
Point 1
Middle Point List 10
Point 2
Ending Point List
Node 10
-Apply-
1
2
1
Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

This example is the same as the previous example, except Point 2 is located on the curve at ξ 1 ( u )
=0.75, instead of 0.5.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
10
Object: Curve
Method: Point
Curve ID List
1
Option: 3 Point
2
1
◆
◆ Chord Length Y
0.0 1.0
0.75 Z X
u Value of Middle Point
Auto Execute
After:
Starting Point List
Point 1 10
Middle Point List
Point 2
Ending Point List
Node 10
-Apply- 2
1
Y
1
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

The Point method using the 4 Point option creates parametric cubic curves that pass through
four existing point locations where the starting point defines the curve at ξ 1 = 0 and the ending
point defines the curve at ξ 1 = 1 . The point locations can be existing points, vertices, nodes, or
other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Point
Curve ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference
1
Option: 4 Point
◆ Parametric Position Parametric Position allows you to specify the ξ 1 ( u ) parametric
◆ position of the second and third points on the new curve, where
◆ Chord Length
0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . Press the Parametric Positions button to enter the ξ 1
locations for both points. The direction of ξ 1 is defined by the order
[Parametric Positions...] of the point locations specified in the Starting Point List and Ending
Point List, which defines the new curve’s connectivity. You can plot
Auto Execute the curve’s ξ 1 direction by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle
on the Geometric Properties form under the menus Display/Display
Starting Point List Properties/Geometric.
Chord Length will disable the slide bar and databox. Instead,
MSC.Patran will calculate the parametric coordinates of the points
Second Point List along the curve, based on the chord length distances relative to the
locations of the curve’s interior points. This means the curve may or
may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the interior
points are located.
Third Point List
Ending Point List
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Option: 4 Point
◆
◆ Chord Length
[Parametric Positions...]
Starting Point List
Second Point List Specify the starting, second, third and ending point locations for
the new curve to pass through. Either cursor select the point
locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1,
Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that
Third Point List appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.
Ending Point List
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
• Display Attributes (p. 243) in the
Functions
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Point/4 Point option, which is created through Points 1, 2 and
3 and Node 10. Point 2 is located at ξ 1 ( u ) =0.333 and Point 3 is located at ξ 1 ( u ) =0.667.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve 10
Method: Point
Curve ID List
3
1
Option: 4 Point
◆
◆ Chord Length 1
Y
Z X
Auto Execute
Starting Point List
Point 1 After:
Second Point List
10
Point 2
Third Point List

Point 3
3
Ending Point List
Node 10 1
2
-Apply-
1
Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

This example is the same as the previous example, except that Point 2 is located at x1(u) =0.25
and Point 3 is located at x1(u) =0.80.
Geometry Before
Action: Create
Object: Curve 10
Method: Point
Curve ID List
3 3
Option: 4 Point
◆
◆ Chord Length Y
1
Z X
Auto Execute
Starting Point List
Point 1 After:
Second Point List
10
Point 2
Third Point List

Point 3
3
Ending Point List
Node 10
1
2
-Apply-
1
Y
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Curve 4 Point Parametric Positions Subordinate Form

This subordinate form is displayed when the Parametric Positions button is pressed on the
Geometry Application’s Create/Curve/Point form for the 4 Point option.
Enter the ξ 1 (C1) parametric position for

Curve 4 Point Parametric Positions the second and third point locations that are
0.0 1.0 specified in the Second Point List and Third
0.333 Point Listboxes, where 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . This
defines where these two points will occupy
u Parametric Value of second point on the new curve. Either use the slide bars
or enter the ξ 1 value in each databox.
Moving the slidebar will automatically
0.0 1.0 0.667 update the databox value.
Press OK to update the ξ 1 values.
Press Cancel if you want to exit the form
u Parametric Value of third point and not change the specified ξ 1 values.
The direction of ξ1 is defined by the order of
OK Cancel the point locations specified in the Starting
Point List and Ending Point List, which
defines the new curve’s connectivity. You
can plot the ξ1 direction of the new curves
by pressing the Parametric Direction toggle
on the Geometric Properties form under the
☞ More Help: menus Display/Display
Properties/Geometric.
Basic Functions
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Arced Curves (Arc3Point Method)

The Arc3Point method creates true arced curves that pass through three specified point
locations. MSC.Patran calculates the arc’s center point location and the radius and angle of the
arc. The three point locations can be points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations that are
provided on the Point select menu.
If ON, MSC.Patran will create a point at

the center location of the arc.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Method: Arc3Point
Curve ID List
1
If PATRAN 2 Convention is pressed, enter the number of curves
Curves per Arc to be created for each arc definition. Otherwise, the Curves pre
1 Arc databox is disabled.
Create Center Point

Auto Execute Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
Starting Point List
Middle Point List

Specify the starting, middle and ending point locations for the
new arc to pass through. Either cursor select the point
Ending Point List locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point
1, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu
that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point
locations.
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
• Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Curve Arc3Point Method Example

Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Arc3Point method, which creates a true arc through Points 1
through 3. Notice that Create Center Point is pressed which created Point 4.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
2
Method: Arc3Point
Curve ID List
3
Curves per Arc

1
Create Center Point Y

3 1
Auto Execute Z X
Starting Point List
Point 1
Middle Point List

Point 2 After:
Ending Point List
Point 3
2
-Apply-
Y
3 4 1
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Arc3Point Method Example

This example is similar to the previous example, except that the point locations for the arc are
specified with point coordinate locations.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Arc3Point
Curve ID List
3
Curves per Arc

1
Create Center Point

Y
Auto Execute
Z X
Starting Point List
[-1 0 0]
Middle Point List

[0 1 0] After:
Ending Point List
[1 0 0]
2
-Apply-
Y
3 4 1
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Creating Chained Curves

The Chain method creates a chained composite curve from one or more existing curves or edges.
The existing curves and edges must be connected end to end. If a chained curve is used to create
planer or general trimmed surfaces for an inner loop, they must form a closed loop. Chained
curves are used to create planar or general trimmed surfaces using the
Create/Surface/Trimmed form.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Chain created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Curve ID List
1
If selected, the Auto Chaining form is displayed to enable
Auto Chain... auto chaining of existing curves.
Delete Constituent Curves

If ON, after Chain completes, the existing curves specified in
the Curve List will be deleted from the database.
Curve List
Specify the existing curves or edges to chain either by cursor

-Apply- Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve Select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
☞ More Help:
• Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20)
• Creating Trimmed Surfaces (p. 278)
• Disassembling a Chained Curve (p. 429)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Chain Method Example

Creates Curve 11, using the Create/Chain method, which is created from Curves 3 through 10.
Notice that Delete Constituent Curves is pressed and Curves 3 through 10 are deleted.
Before:
Geometry
Action: Create
8 9 7 4 5 3
Object: Curve
Method: Chain 8 6
Curve ID List 5
6 7
11 10 4
Auto Chain...
Curve List 1 3 2
Curve 3:10
Y
-Apply- Z X
After:
8 7 4 11 3
6 5
1 2
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Creating Conic Curves

The Conic method creates parametric cubic curves representing a conic section (that is,
hyperbola, parabola, ellipse, or circular arc), by specifying point locations for the starting and
ending points of the conic and the conic’s focal point. The point locations can be points, vertices,
nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Conic created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Curve ID List
1
Used by the Focal Point List and the Starting and Ending Point
Refer. Coordinate Frame Lists to express the point’s coordinate values that may be entered
Coord 0 within the specified coordinate frame. Example: Coord 5. Default
is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0.
Conic Section Classification

0.0 1.0
0.5 Enter a value for the altitude of the conic either by using the slide
bar or by entering the value in the databox.
Conic Altitude for Parabola
Focal Point
Conic Conic Curve

Altitude
Starting Point Ending Point

PART 2
Geometry Modeling

0.0 1.0
0.5
Conic Altitude for Parabola
Focal Point List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Starting Point List
Specify the focal point location, and the starting and ending point
locations that defines a conic section. Either cursor select the
Ending Point List point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example:
Point 1, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Curve Conic Method Example

Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Conic method whose focal point is Point 3, the starting and
ending points are Points 1 and 2, and the conic altitude is 0.50.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create 3
Object: Curve
Method: Conic
Curve ID List
1

Coord 0
Conic Section Classification Y

0.0 1.0
0.5 Z X
Conic Altitude for Parabola 1 2
Auto Execute
After:
Focal Point List
Point 3 3
Starting Point List

Point 1
Ending Point List

Point 2
1
-Apply-
Z X
1 2
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Conic Method Example

This is the same as the previous example, except that the conic altitude is increased to 0.75 from
0.50 for Curve 2.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
3
Object: Curve
Method: Conic
Curve ID List
2
Refer. Coordinate Frame 1
Coord 0

0.0 1.0 Y
0.75
Z X
Conic Altitude for Parabola 1 2
Auto Execute
Focal Point List After:
Point 3
3
Starting Point List
Point 1
Ending Point List 2
Point 2
1
-Apply-
Z X
1 2
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Extracting Curves From Surfaces

Extracting Curves from Surfaces Using the Parametric Option
The Extract method creates curves on an existing set of surfaces or solid faces by specifying the
surface’s or face’s parametric ξ 1 or ξ 2 coordinate location where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1
and ξ 2 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 .
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Extract
Curve ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
1 Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Option: Parametric
Curve Direction
◆ u Direction
Choose either Constant u Direction or Constant v
◆
◆ v Direction Direction. The curves will either be created along either
the ξ 1 ( u ) direction for Constant u Direction or along the
Curve Position ξ 2 ( v ) direction for Constant v Direction.
0.0 1.0
0.5
v Parametric Value Specify the surface’s ξ 1 ( u ) or ξ 2 ( v ) coordinate value for

the location of the curve, either by using the slide bar or by
entering the value in the databox. The ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions
are defined by the connectivity of the surface or face. You can
plot the ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions by choosing the Parametric
Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the
menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Direction
◆ u Direction
◆
◆ v Direction
Curve Position
0.0 1.0
0.5
v Parametric Value By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran

means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
Auto Execute the form.
Surface List
Specify the existing surfaces or faces for the curves to be

created on, either by cursor selecting them or by entering the
-Apply- IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The
Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how
you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Curve Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example

Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Extract/Parametric option. The curve is created on Surface 2
at ξ 2 ( v ) = 0.75. Notice that the parametric direction is displayed.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
7 1
Object: Curve 2
Method: Extract
Curve ID List
1
8
Option: Parametric 2
10
Curve Direction
◆
◆ u Direction
◆ v Direction Y
Curve Position X
Z 9
0.0 1.0
0.75
v Parametric Value
After:
Auto Execute
7 1
Surface List 2
Surface 2
11
-Apply- 1
8
2
10
1
Y
12
X 9
Z
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

This example is the same as the previous example, except that Curve X is created at ξ 1 ( u ) = 0.75,
instead of ξ 2 ( v ) = 0.75.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
7 1
Object: Curve 2
Method: Extract
Curve ID List
1
8
10
Curve Direction
◆ u Direction
◆ v Direction
◆ Y
Curve Position Z
X 9
0.0 1.0
0.75
v Parametric Value After:
Auto Execute
7 1
Surface List 2
Surface 2
-Apply-
8
2 11
1 10
Y
12
X 9
Z
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Creates Curve 3 which is at ξ 2 ( v ) = 0.25 on a surface defined by Curve 2 and an edge of Surface
1 by using the Surface select menu icons listed below.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
3
Object: Curve
Method: Extract
Curve ID List
1 2
3
Option: Parametric
5
Curve Direction 6
1
◆ u Direction
◆
2
◆ v Direction
Y
Curve Position Z X
0.0 1.0 7
0.25
v Parametric Value
After:
Auto Execute 3
Surface List
Construct2CurveSurface(Ev
8
1 2
-Apply-
3
5
6
1 9
2
Y
Z X
7
Surface Select Menu Icons

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extracting Curves From Surfaces Using the Edge Option

The Extract method creates curves on specified edges of existing surfaces or solid faces.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Extract Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Option: Edge
Auto Execute Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
Edge List the form.
Specify in Edge List, the existing edges of the surfaces or solid

faces for the curves to be created on, either by cursor selecting
-Apply- them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example:
Surface 1.1 Solid 5.1.1.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Curve Extract Method With Edge Option Example

Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Extract/Edge option. The curve is created on one of the edges
of Surface 1.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve 5
Method: Extract
Curve ID List
3
6
1
2 1
Option: Edge 2
1
Auto Execute
Edge List
Surface 1.2 Y
3
X 4
-Apply- Z
After:
1
5
6
1
2 1
2
1
Y
3
X 4
Z
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Fillet Curves

The fillet method is intended for use with 2D construction. The created curve is a circular arc.
For this reason, the method will not work if the provided curves are not co-planar. The Patran
2.5 switch overrides this requirement and places no restriction on coplanarity. The result is a
single cubic line so that it is more like a slope continuous blend between the 2 curves.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Fillet created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Method: Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Curve ID List
1
Curves per Fillet specifies the number of curves you want to
Fillet Parameters create for each defined fillet arc. This is only used in conjunction
with the Patran 2 Convention.
Curves per Fillet
Fillet Radius specifies a real value for the radius of the fillet arc.
1 Only one radius value is allowed which is applied to all specified
curves or edges/points that are entered in the Curve/Point 1 and
Fillet Radius
2 Lists.
Fillet Tolerance specifies the accuracy MSC.Patran uses when
Fillet Tolerance it subdivides the geometry to calculate the fillet position.
Decreasing the value helps when the fillet is very small
0.005 compared to the geometry. This is only used in conjunction with
the Patran 2 Convention.
Trim Original Curves
Auto Execute If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the original curves specified in the
Curve/Point 1 and 2 Lists. Each curve is trimmed from the
Curve/Point 1 List tangent point of the fillet to the end of the original curve.
Curve/Point 2 List
-Apply-
Calculated Curve 1 Endpoint
Center
Radius
New Fillet
Curve Portions to Trim
Curve 2
Endpoint
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Fillet Parameters
Curves per Fillet
1
Fillet Radius
Fillet Tolerance
0.005

need to Press the Apply button to execute the form.
Curve/Point 1 List
Curve/Point 2 List Specify in Curve/Point 1 List and Curve/Point 2 List, the existing
pair of curves or edges, along with their endpoints that the fillet will
be created between. For each listbox, the Curve Select menu and
the Point Select menu will appear at the bottom to allow you to
cursor define the appropriate curves or edges, and the points,
-Apply- vertices, nodes, or other appropriate endpoint locations.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Fillet Method Example

Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Fillet method. The fillet curve is created between Curve 1 and
Point 4 and Curve 2 and Point 5, with a radius of 0.5. Notice Trim Original Curves is pressed.
Before:
Geometry
Action: Create 1
Object: Curve
Method: Fillet 6
Curve ID List
3
1 2
Fillet Parameters
Curves per Fillet
5
1
Fillet Radius
0.5 Y 4
Fillet Tolerance
Z X
0.005

After:
Auto Execute
1
Curve/Point 1 List
ConstructPointCurveUOnCurve
6
Curve/Point 2 List
ConstructPointCurveUOnCurve
-Apply- 8 3
2
7
5
1
Y 4
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Curve Fillet Method Example

Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Fillet method. The fillet curve is created between Curve 1 and
Point 2 and Curve 2 and Point 3, with a radius of 0.25.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve 3
Method: Fillet
2
1
Curve ID List
3 4
Fillet Parameters
Curves per Fillet
1
Fillet Radius
2 Y
0.25
X Z
Fillet Tolerance 1
0.005

Auto Execute After:
Curve/Point 1 List
ConstructPointCurveUOnCurve 3 6
Curve/Point 2 List
3 2
ConstructPointCurveUOnCurve 1
5 4
-Apply-
2 Y
X Z
1
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Fitting Curves Through a Set of Points

The Fit method creates a parametric cubic curve by fitting it through a set of two or more point
locations. MSC.Patran uses a parametric least squares numerical approximation for the fit. The
point locations can be points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point
select menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Curve Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Object:
Method: Fit Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Curve ID List
1 Number of Curves to Create specifies the number of curves to
create to represent the fit through the specified points.
Fit Parameters Convergence Tolerance is used when the Number of Iterations
Number of Curves to Create is greater than zero. This value, measured in model units,
defines the maximum the interior points will deviate from a
1 calculated spline of the original curves that are used in the
synthesis of the new curves. Default is .005.
Convergence Tolerance
Number of Iterations is zero by default. If zero, MSC.Patran will
0.005 create smooth, evenly parameterized curves. If it is greater than
zero, as the value increases, the curve fit will be more accurate,
Number of Iterations
but they will become more nonuniformly parameterized and they
0 may have unwanted kinks or oscillations.
Point List Specify the existing points, vertices, nodes or other point
locations to fit the curve through, either by entering the IDs from
the keyboard or by cursor selecting the point locations.
Examples: Point 1:10, Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select
menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
-Apply- appropriate point locations.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Curve Fit Method Example

Creates three curves starting with Curve 1, using the Create/Fit method. The curve is created
through Points 1 through 6.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Fit 6
2
Curve ID List
1 3
5
Fit Parameters
1
Number of Curves to Create 4
3
Y
Convergence Tolerance
0.005 Z X
Number of Iterations
0
Point List After:

Point 1: 6
-Apply-
6
2
7
3 3
5
1 2
8
4
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Curves at Intersections

Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Surfaces
The Intersect method using the 2 Surface option creates curves at the intersection of two surfaces
or solid faces. The two surfaces or faces must completely intersect each other.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Intersect
Option: 2 Surface
If pressed, the Intersect Parameters subordinate form will
appear. See Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form
Option:
Intersect Parameters... (p. 157) for more information.
Auto Execute
Surface 1 List By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
execute the form.
Surface 2 List
Specify the existing pair of intersecting surfaces or solid

faces either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by
-Apply- cursor selecting them. Examples: Surface 10 Solid 10.1.
The Surface Select menu can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Curve Intersect Method With 2 Surface Option Example

Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Intersect method with the 2 Surface option. The curve is
located at the intersection of Surfaces 1 and 2.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve 4 6
2
Method: Intersect
Curve ID List
1 2
1
Option: 2 Surface
Intersect Parameters...
3
Auto Execute Y
Surface 1 List
5
Surface 1 Z X
1
Surface 2 List
Surface 2 After:
-Apply- 4 6
2
2
1
7
3
Y
5
Z X
1
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

This example is similar to the previous example, except the second surface is instead defined by
Curves 2 and 3 by using the Surface select menu icon and selecting Curves 2 and 3 to create
Surface 2.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve 3
8
Method: Intersect 4
2
Curve ID List
4
Option: 2 Surface
1
Auto Execute
Surface 1 List Y
2 3
Surface 1
Z 7
X
Surface 2 List 1
Construct 2CurveSurface
After:
-Apply- 3
8
4
2
9 1
Y
2 3
Z 7
X
1
Surface Select Menu Icon
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Intersect/2 Surface option. The curve is located at the
intersection of Surfaces 1 and 4.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Intersect
Curve ID List
1 4
1
Option: 2 Surface
Auto Execute
Y
Surface 1 List
Surface 1 Z X
Surface 2 List
Surface 4
After:
-Apply-
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Curves at the Intersection of a Plane and a Surface

The Intersect method with the Plane-Surface option creates curves at the intersection of a defined
plane and a surface or a solid face. The plane and the surface or face must completely intersect
each other.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Intersect
1
If pressed, the Intersect Parameters subordinate form will
appear. See Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form
Option: Plane-Surface (p. 157) for more information.
Intersect Parameters... By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran

the form.
Plane List
Specify in Plane List, one or more plane definitions that

intersect with the specified surfaces or faces, either by
Surface List entering the vector coordinates or by cursor defining them
using the Vector Select menu. Examples: {[0 0 0][0 0 1]},
Coord 0.1.
Specify in Surface List, the existing surfaces or solid faces
either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor
-Apply- selecting them. The Surface Select menu can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces
or faces.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Curve Intersect Method With Plane-Surface Option Example

Creates Curve 1 which is located at the intersection of Surface 1 and a plane whose normal is
defined at {[0 2.5 0][0 3.5 0]}.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
2
Object: Curve
Method: Intersect
Curve ID List
3
1
Option: Plane-Surface 1
Intersect Parameters... 1
Auto Execute
Plane List Y
{[0 2.5 0][0 3.5 0]}

Z X 4
Surface List
Surface 1
After:
-Apply- 2
5 3
1 6
Z X 4
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Intersect Method With the Plane-Surface Option Example

Creates Curve 1 which is located at the intersection of Surface 2 and a plane whose normal is
defined by the Z axis of Coord 1, Coord 1.3, by using the Axis select menu icon listed below.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve 6
Method: Intersect
Curve ID List
1
Z
2 T
Option: Plane-Surface 1 R
Auto Execute
Y
Plane List
Coord 1.3 Z X
Surface List 5
Surface 2
After:
-Apply- 6
Z
2
1
1 TR
7
Z X
5
Axis Select Menu Icon
3
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form

The Intersect Parameters subordinate form appears when the Intersect Parameters button is
pressed on the Create/Curve/Intersect application form.
Intersect Parameters
Curves per Intersection Active if PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is ON, on the
Create/Curve/Intersect application form. Specify the
0 number of parametric cubic curves to create at each
intersection.
Max. Deviation Tolerance
0.005
Used by MSC.Patran to approximate the curve
Intersect Tolerance intersection using a tolerance based cubic spline.
0.05
Used by MSC.Patran to determine how many points to
create to represent the curve intersection.
OK Cancel
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Planes

This form is used to create a curve from the intersection of two planes.
Geometry Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
Geometry
Action: Create Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Object: Curve If ON, MSC.Patran will create parametric cubic curves.

Method: Intersect Otherwise, the new curves will be a Straight Line geometry
type. Parametric cubic geometry is supported by the PATRAN
Curve ID List 2 Neutral File for import or export.
1
If Input Length is ON, enter the length of the new curve, in
Curve Type model units. By default, the length is calculated from the
current viewport limits to simulate an infinite construction entity.
PATRAN 2 Convention If Calculate Length is ON, a small subordinate form called
Length Calculation Points will appear. You must enter the point
Option: 2 Plane locations in the Point 1 and 2 databoxes that the curve length
will be calculated from.
Curve Length Once the points have been entered, press the Calculate
Curve Length button to display the curve length in the databox
Input Length based on Distance, Deltax, Deltay, Deltaz selections
Calculate Length
6.9282 Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
the form.
Distance Deltay
Specify in Plane 1 List, one or more plane definitions that
Deltax Deltaz intersect with the specified planes in Plane 2 List, either by
entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting
Calculate Curve Length them. The Plane Select menu can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the appropriate planes. Examples:
Coord 0.1, Plane 1
Auto Execute
Specify in Plane 2 List, one or more plane definitions that
Plane 1 List intersect with the specified planes in Plane 1 List, either by
them. The Plane Select menu can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the appropriate planes.
Plane 2 List
☞ More Help:
-Apply- • Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Creating Curve Intersect from Two Planes Example

Create curve 1 with a length of 0.334 from the intersection of plane 1 and 2.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Create Before:
Object: Curve
Method: Intersect
Curve ID List 1
1
Curve Type
PATRAN 2 Convention
2
Option: 2 Plane
Curve Length
Input Length
Y
Calculate Length
Z X
0.334
Distance Deltay After:

Deltax Deltaz
Calculate Curve Length
Auto Execute
Plane 1 List
Plane 1
1
Plane 2 List
Plane 2 2
-Apply-
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Manifold Curves Onto a Surface

Manifold Curves onto a Surface with the 2 Point Option
The Manifold method with the 2 Point option creates curves directly on an existing set of
surfaces or solid faces by using two point locations on the surface. The point locations must lie
on the surface or face. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Manifold
1
Option:
Manifold Parameters...
Active if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. When this toggle is
Option: 2 Point pressed, the Manifold Parameters subordinate form will
appear. See Manifold Parameters Subordinate Form
Auto Execute (p. 167) for more information.

the form.
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Option: 2 Point
Auto Execute
Surface List
Starting Point List Specify in Surface List, the existing surfaces or faces that the
new curves will lie on, either by entering the IDs from the
keyboard or by cursor defining them using the Surface Select
menu. Examples: Surface 1 10, Solid 5.2.
Ending Point List Specify in Starting Point List and Ending Point List, the
existing point locations either by entering the IDs from the
keyboard or by cursor selecting them. Examples: Point 10,
Surface 5.2.1, Solid 10.3.2.1. The Surface Select menu can be
used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
-Apply- surfaces or faces.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Manifold Method With the 2 Point Option Example

Creates three curves starting with Curve 1 using the Create/Manifold/2 Point option. The
curves are created on Surface 1 between Point 7 and Points 2,5 and 8.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Manifold 5
Curve ID List 2
8
1
4
Option:
Manifold Parameters... 1
6
Option: 2 Point
Auto Execute
Y 7
Surface List
X
Surface 1 Z
Starting Point List

Point 7
After:
Ending Point List
Point 2 5 8
5
-Apply-
2
8
4
1
6
4 2
Y 7
X
Z
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Curve Manifold Method With the 2 Point Option On a Face Example

Creates Curve 1 using the Manifold/2 Point option on a face of Solid 1 that is between Points 5
and 12.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
6
Method: Manifold
Curve ID List 12
1 9 7
1
Option:
Manifold Parameters... 1
Option: 2 Point 10
8 5
Auto Execute Y
Z
X
Surface List
Surface 1.5
11
Starting Point List
Point 5
After:
Ending Point List
Point 12
6
-Apply-
12
9 7
1
1
1
10
8 5
Y
Z
X
11
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Manifold Curves onto a Surface With the N-Points Option

The Manifold/N-Points option creates curves directly on a set of surfaces or solid faces by using
two or more point locations on the surface. The point locations must lie on the surface or face
and they can be existing points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point
select menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Manifold
Curve ID List
4
Option:
Manifold Parameters... Active if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. When the Manifold
Parameters... button is pressed, the Manifold Parameters
Option: N-Points subordinate form will appear. See Manifold Parameters
Subordinate Form (p. 167) for more information.
Surface
Specify in Surface List, the existing surfaces or faces that you

want to create curves on, either by entering the IDs from the
Point List keyboard or by cursor defining them using the Surface Select
menu. Examples: Surface 1 10, Solid 5.2.
Specify in Point List the existing point locations either by entering
the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting them. Examples:
Point 10, Surface 5.2.1, Solid 10.3.2.1. The Surface Select menu
-Apply- can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Curve Manifold Method With N-Points Option Example

Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Manifold/N-Points option. The curve is created on Surface 1
through Points 5, 8, 17, 18 and 4.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Manifold 5
8
Curve ID List
6
1 17
1
Option:
18 4
Option: N-Points
7
Surface Y
Surface 1
Z X
Point List
Point 5 8 17 18 4
After:
-Apply-
5
8
6
17
1
1
18 4
7
Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Manifold Method With N-Points Option On a Face Example

Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Manifold/N-Points option. The curve is created on the top
face of Solid 1, through Points 6, 12, 13 and 5.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve 6
Method: Manifold
12
Curve ID List
9 7
1
1
13
1
Option:
Option: N-Points 10
8 5
Surface
Solid 1.5 Y
Z
X
Point List 11
Point 6 12 13 5
After:
-Apply-
12
9 1 7
1
13
1
10
8 5
Y
Z
X
11
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Manifold Parameters Subordinate Form

The Manifold Parameters subordinate form appears when the PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is
ON and the Manifold Parameters button is pressed on the Create/Curve/Manifold application
form.
Manifold Parameters
Curves per Manifold
0 Specify the number of parametric cubic curves to create
between each pair of points (for the 2 Point option) or
Manifold Tolerance through a set of given points (for the N-Points option).
0.005
Used by MSC.Patran to approximate the manifold using
a tolerance based cubic spline.
OK Cancel
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Curves Normally Between a Point and a Curve (Normal

Method)
The Normal method creates straight parametric cubic curves from a point location, normally to
a curve or an edge. The point location can be points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Normal
1
Auto Execute
Specify in Point List, the existing point locations, either by
Point List entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor defining
them using the Point Select menu. Examples: Point 1 10,
Curve 5.2.
Curve List Specify in Curve List, the existing curves or edges either by
them. Examples: Curve 10, Solid 5.2.1. The Curve Select
menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate curves or edges.
-Apply-
Point
New Curve
Original Curve
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Curve Normal Method Example

Creates Curve 6 using the Create/Normal method. The curve is created from Point 13 normally
to the edge of Curve 5.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Normal 13
Method:
Curve ID List
6
12
Auto Execute
Point List
Point 13
Curve List 5
Y
Curve 5
Z X
-Apply-
After:
13
14 12
5
Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Normal Method From An Edge Example

Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Normal method. The curve is created from Point 20 normally
to an edge of Surface 4 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
17
Object: Curve 16
Method: Normal
Curve ID List
1
Auto Execute
4
Point List
Point 20
Curve List 20
Y
Curve 4
Z X 19
18
-Apply-
After:
17
16
20
Y
1
Z X 19
18 21
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Creating Offset Curves

Creating Constant Offset Curve
This form is used to create a constant offset curve.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Offset
Specify the Offset Curve type to create:
1. Constant Offset
2. Variable Offset
Offset Parameters
Constant Offset Value
Specify the constant offset value of the curve.
1.0
Repeat Count Specify the number of copies of the offset curve to create using
the Repeat Count parameter.
1
Curve List the form.
Specify the curve used to create an offset curve from either
keyboard. Example: Curve 10 11. The Curve select menu
Draw Direction Vector that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate curves.
Reverse Direction
Draws the direction vector of the curve to create the offset
Reset Graphics
curve from.
Reverses the direction vector of the curve to create the

-Apply- offset curve from.
☞ More Help:
Part 1: Basic Functions
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Constant Offset Curve Example

Create offset curves 2 thru 4 by offsetting a distance of .5 from curve 1 using a repeat count of 3.
Geometry
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Offset
1
Curve ID List
2
Offset Parameters
.5
Repeat Count Y
3 Z X
Auto Execute
After:
Curve List
Curve 1
Draw Direction Vector

Reverse Direction
4
Reset Graphics
3
-Apply-
2
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Creating Variable Offset Curve

This form is used to create a variable offset curve.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve Specify the Offset Curve type to create:
Method: Offset 1. Constant Offset
2. Variable Offset

1
Specify the start offset value of the curve.
Offset Parameters Specify the end offset value of the curve.
Start Value Specify the number of copies of the offset curve to create using
1.0 the Repeat Count parameter.
End Value Specify the Parameterization Control of the offset curve.

1.0 Parameter Value: Defines the parametric values of the start
and end offset distances.
Repeat Count Arc Length: Function of arc length.
1
[Parameterization Control...] means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Auto Execute Specify the curve used to create an offset curve from either
Curve List keyboard. Example: Curve 10 11. The Curve select menu
Draw Direction Vector Draws the direction vector of the curve to create the offset
curve from.
Reverse Direction
Reverses the direction vector of the curve to create the
Reset Graphics offset curve from.
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Parameterization Control for Variable Offset Curve

This form is used to define the parameterization control for the offset curve. There are two types;
Arc Length and Parameter Value.
Parameterization Control
Arc Length Select the Parameterization Method for the
Parameter Value offset curve. (Arc Length is Default )
0.0 1.0 0.0
Start Parameter Value
0.0 1.0 1.0
End Parameter Value
OK Cancel
Define the start and end Parameter Values for the start and end distance of
the offset curve by using the slidebar or entering the value in the databox.
The start Parameter Value must be less than the End Parameter Value.
(Used for when the Parameterization Method is Parameter Value.
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Creating Variable Offset Curve Example

Create curves 2 thru 3 from curve 1 by offsetting a start distance of .25 and an end distance of 1.
Use parameter values of .5 and 1.0.
Geometry
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Offset
Curve ID List
2
Offset Parameters
Start Value
0.25
End Value Y
1.0 Z X
Repeat Count
1
After:
[Parameterization Control...]
Auto Execute
Curve List
3
Curve 1
Draw Direction Vector 2
Reverse Direction
Reset Graphics 1
-Apply- Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Projecting Curves Onto Surfaces

The Project method creates curves by projecting a set of curves or edges along a defined
projection vector, onto a surface or solid face.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Project
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to
Curve ID List
be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Option:
Project Parameters...
Option: Normal to Plane

If pressed, the Project Parameters subordinate form will
appear. See Project Parameters Subordinate Form
(p. 182) for more information.
Available options are:

Normal to Plane - The curves or edges in Curve List will be projected
through a vector that is normal to at least one of the curves or edges that
define a plane.
Normal to Surf - The curves or edges in Curve List will be projected
through a vector that is normal to the surface or solid face specified in
Surface List.
Define Vector - The project direction is defined by the vector coordinates
entered in the Projection Vector databox which is expressed within the
Refer. Coordinate Frame. Example: <1 1 0>. The Vector Select menu will
appear to allow you alternate ways to cursor define the vector definition.
View Factor - The project direction is defined by the view angle in the
current viewport. MSC.Patran will project the existing points using the
normal direction of the screen.
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
If ON, after Project completes, the existing curves specified in Curve

List will be deleted from the database.
Projection Vector
Used if the Define Vector option is chosen. Either enter the
<0 0 0> vector coordinates that are expressed in the Refer.
Coordinate Frame, or use the Vector Select Menu that
Refer. Coordinate Frame appears to cursor define the projection vector.
Coord 0
Delete Original Curves means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Auto Execute
Curve List Specify in Curve List, the existing curves or edges that you
want to project onto the surfaces or faces listed in Surface
List.
Surface List Specify in Surface List, the surfaces or faces that the curves
or edges will be projected onto.
IDs from the keyboard. Example: For curves - Curve 1:10,
Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1; for surfaces - Surface 10 Solid 5.1.
-Apply- The Curve Select menu and Surface Select menu that
the appropriate curves or edges, and surfaces or faces.
☞ More Help:
• Viewing Menu (Ch. 5) in the MSC.Patran
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Project Method With the Normal to Plane Option Example

Creates Curve 7 using the Create Project/Normal to Plane option. The curve is projected from
Curve 6 onto Surface 2 that is normal to the plane defined by Curve 6.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
13
Object: Curve
Method: Project
Curve ID List 5
2
7 15
6
Option:
Projection Vector
Y
<0 0 0>
Z X
14
Coord 0
Delete Original Curves After:
Auto Execute 13
Curve List
Curve 6
5
Surface List 15
2 16
Surface 2
6 7
-Apply-
Z X
12
14
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Curve Project Method With the Normal to Surf Option Example

Creates Curve 8 using the Create/Project/Normal to Surf option. The curve is projected from
Curve 6 normally onto Surface 2. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed and Curve 6 is
deleted.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create 13
Object: Curve
Method: Project
Curve ID List 5
2
15 16
8
6 7
Option:
Option: Normal to Surf
Projection Vector
Y
<0 0 0>
Z X
14
Coord 0
Auto Execute 13
Curve List
Curve 6
5
Surface List 2 16
Surface 2
7
17
8
-Apply-
Z X
12
14
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Project Method With Define Vector Option Example

Creates Curve 7 with the Define Vector option. The curve is projected from Curve 6 onto Surface
2 through the vector that is defined by Points 19 and 20 by using the Vector select menu icon
listed below.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create 13
Object: Curve
Method: Project
Curve ID List 2
7
19
6 20
Option:
Option: Define Vector
Projection Vector
Y
Construct2PointVector
Refer. Coordinate Frame Z X 12

14
Coord 0

Auto Execute 13
Curve List
Curve 6
Surface List 2
Surface 2 19 21
20
7
-Apply-
Z X 12
14
Vector Select Menu Icon

CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Curve Project Method With View Vector Option Example

Creates Curve 7 with the View Vector option. The curve is projected from Curve 6 onto Surface
2 through the view angle of the current viewport. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed
and Curve 6 is deleted.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create 13
Object: Curve
Method: Project
Curve ID List
2
7
Option: 6
Option: View Vector
Projection Vector
Y
Construct2PointVector
Refer. Coordinate Frame Z X

12
14
Coord 0

Auto Execute 13
Curve List
Curve 6
Surface List 2
15
Surface 2
7
-Apply-
Z X
12
14
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Project Parameters Subordinate Form

The Project Parameters subordinate form appears when the Project Parameters button is pressed
on the Create/Curve/Project application form.
Project Parameters
Curves per Projection
Disabled if the PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is OFF on
0 the Create/Curve/Project form. If PATRAN 2 Convention
is ON, specify the number of parametric cubic curves to
Projection Tolerance create for a given projection location.
0.005
Used by MSC.Patran to approximate the curve
projection location using a tolerance based cubic spline.
OK Cancel
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Creating Piecewise Linear Curves

The PWL method will create a set of piecewise linear (or straight) parametric cubic curves
between a set of existing point locations. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or
other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: PWL
Curve ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve
to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
1 MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic
Functions.
Point List
Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point

-Apply- locations to connect the curves between, either by
entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor
selecting the point locations. Examples: Point 1:10,
Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select menu can be
used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate point locations.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve PWL Method Example

Creates seven curves starting with Curve 5 using the Create/PWL method. The straight curves
are created through Points 12 through 18 and Node 1.
Before:
Geometry
Action: Create 17 18
13 14
Object: Curve
Method: PWL
15
16
Curve ID List
5
Point List 12 1
Point 12: 18 Node 1
Y
-Apply-
Z X
After:
17 10 18
13 6 14
7 9
15 8 16 11
5
12 1
19
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Creating Spline Curves

Creating Spline Curves with the Loft Spline Option
The Spline method using the Loft Spline option creates piecewise cubic polynomial spline curves
that pass through at least three point locations. MSC.Patran processes the slope continually
between the point segments. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Spline Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to
Method:
Curve ID List
Functions.
1
Option: Loft Spline

Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number
Curves per Spline of parametric cubic curves to compose the spline.
0
End Point Slope Control
Auto Execute
If ON, End Point Slope Control allows you to use the Start and
End Point Tangent Vector databoxes to define the tangent
vector for the slopes at the spline’s start point and end point
locations.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

End Point Slope Control Used if End Point Slope Control toggle is ON.
Specify in Start Point Tangent Vector, the vector definition
Auto Execute of the slope at the first point listed in Point List.
Start Point Tangent Vector Specify in End Point Tangent Vector, the vector definition of
the slope at the last point listed in Point List.
You can either enter the vector coordinates that are
expressed in the global rectangular frame, Coord 0
End Point Tangent Vector (Example: <1.5 0 0>); or you can use the Vector Select menu
that appears to cursor define the slope’s vector.
Point List
Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations to
define the spline, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard
or by cursor selecting the point locations. Examples: Point
-Apply- 1:10, Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select menu can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate point
locations.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Curve Spline Method With Loft Spline Option Example

Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Spline method with the Loft Spline option. The curve is
created through Points 1 through 5. Notice that since End Point Slope Control are not pressed in,
Start and End Point Tangent Vector are disabled.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve 2
1
Method: Spline
Curve ID List 3
1
5
Option: Loft Spline
Curves per Spline

4
0
Y
Auto Execute Z X
Start Point Tangent Vector
End Point Tangent Vector After:
2
1
Point List
Point 1:5 3
1
-Apply- 5
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Spline Method With Loft Spline Option Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except that Curve 2 is created with End Point
Slope Control is pressed in. The Start Point Tangent Vector is defined by Points 1 and 2, and the
End Point Tangent Vector is defined by Points 4 and 5, using the Vector select menu icon listed
below.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
2
Object: Curve
1
Method: Spline
Curve ID List 3
1
1
Option:Loft Spline 5
Curves per Spline

0 4

Y
Auto Execute
Start Point Tangent Vector Z X
Construct 2PointVector
End Point Tangent Vector

Construct 2PointVector After:
2
Point List
1
Point 1:5
3
-Apply-
21
5
Z X

CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Creating Spline Curves with the B-Spline Option

The Spline/B-Spline option creates spline curves that pass through at least three point locations.
MSC.Patran processes the slope continually between the point segments. The point locations can
be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Spline Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to
Curve ID List MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1
Option: B-Spline
Curves per Spline Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number
of parametric cubic curves to compose the spline.
B-Spline Parameters
2 10
Specify for Order, the B-Spline’s order of the polynomials. As Order
increases, MSC.Patran will create an increasingly smoother spline.
Order MSC.Patran will not create the spline if Order is greater than the
number of points listed in Point List.
Interpolation If Interpolation is ON, MSC.Patran will force the spline through the
given points. If it is OFF, the spline will only pass through the first
Closed
and last points.
If Closed is ON, MSC.Patran will created a closed spline. If it is
OFF, the spline will be open ended.
Parametrization Method
◆ Chord Length If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points
◆
◆ Uniform along the B-spline is based on the chord length distances relative to
the locations of the spline’s interior points. This means the curve may
or may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the
Point List interior points are located.
If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points along the
B-spline will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the specified
points in the Point List are located. That is, the curve will be always
uniformly parameterized.
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
Specify the points, vertices, nodes or • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
other point locations to define the spline,
either by entering the IDs from the
keyboard or by cursor selecting the point
locations. Examples: Point 1:10, • Topology (p. 10)
Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
menu can be used to define how you • Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran
want to cursor select the appropriate Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Spline Method With B-Spline Option Example

Creates Curve 1 with the B-Spline option. The B-spline has an order of 3 and uses Points 1
through 5. Since Interpolation is not pressed, the curve is not forced to pass through all the
points.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
2
Object: Curve
1
Method: Spline
Curve ID List 3
1
5
Option: B-Spline
Curves per Spline
0 4
B-Spline Parameters Y
3 10
Z X
Order
Interpolation
After:
Closed
Parametrization Method 2
◆ Chord Length 1
◆
◆ Uniform
3
Point List 1
Point 1:5 5
-Apply- 4
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions

This example is the same as the previous example, except that the order for Curve 2 is three,
instead of five.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve 2
Method: Spline 1
Curve ID List
3
2
1
Option: B-Spline 5
Curves per Spline
0
4
B-Spline Parameters
5 10 Y
Z X
Order
Interpolation
Closed After:
Parametrization Method
2
◆ Chord Length
1
◆
◆ Uniform
Point List 3
1
Point 1:5
5
-Apply-
4
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

This example is the same as the previous example, except Interpolation is pressed and Curve 3
is forced to pass through Points 1 through 5.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
2
Method: Spline 1
Curve ID List
3 3
1
Option: B-Spline 5
Curves per Spline
0
4
B-Spline Parameters
5 10 Y
Z X
Order
Interpolation
Closed After:
Parametrization Method 2
◆ Chord Length 1
◆
◆ Uniform
3
Point List
1
Point 1:5
5
-Apply-
4
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Creating Curves Tangent Between Two Curves (TanCurve Method)

The TanCurve method creates straight parametric cubic curves that are tangent between two
existing curves or edges. The curves or edges cannot be straight, or else MSC.Patran will not be
able to find the tangent location on each curve.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Method: TanCurve
Curve ID List
1 If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the curves listed in the Curve/Point 1
and 2 Lists. Each curve is trimmed from the tangent point to the
end of the original curve.

Curve/Point 1 List means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Curve/Point 2 List
Specify in Curve/Point 1 List and Curve/Point 2 List, the
pair of curves or edges, along with their endpoints that the
new curve will be created between.
For each listbox, the Curve Select menu and the Point Select
-Apply- menu will appear at the bottom to allow you to cursor define
the appropriate curves or edges, and the points, vertices,
nodes, or other appropriate endpoint locations.
New Curve
Original Curve 1
Portions To Be Trimmed
Original Curve 2
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve TanCurve Method Example

Creates Curve 10 using the Create/TanCurve method. The curve is tangent between Curves 9
and 8 with Points 26 and 25 as the endpoints selected in the Point 1 and 2 Lists. Notice that Trim
Original Curves is pressed.
Before:
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: TanCurve 8
9
Curve ID List
10
23 25
Auto Execute
26 28
Curve/Point 1 List
ConstructPoint CurveUOn Curve Y
Curve/Point 2 List Z X
ConstructPoint CurveUOnCurve
-Apply- After:
30
10
29 8
9
23 25
26 28
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Creating Curves Tangent Between Curves and Points

(TanPoint Method)
The TanPoint method creates straight parametric cubic curves that are tangent between a point
location and a curve or an edge. The curve or edge cannot be straight, or else MSC.Patran will
not be able to find the tangent location. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other
point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: TanPoint created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Curve ID List
1
If Closest Tangent Only is chosen, the new curve will be
created at the closest tangent point to the existing point
location.
Closest Tangent Only
If All Tangents is chosen, MSC.Patran will preview each
Trim Original Curves curve to be created at all possible tangent points and ask if you
want to create a curve at each possible location.
Auto Execute
If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the curves listed in the Curve List.
Point List Each curve is trimmed from the tangent point to the end of the
original curve.
Curve List
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Auto Execute
the form.
Point List
Specify in Point List, the points, vertices, nodes or other point
locations either by entering the IDs from the keyboard
Curve List (Examples: Point 1 10, Curve 10.1, Node 20); or by cursor
selecting the location using the Point Select menu.
Specify in Curve List, the curves or edges either by entering
the IDs or by cursor selecting them using the Curve Select
menu. Examples: Curve 1:10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1.
-Apply-
New Curve
Original Curve
Portion to trim
Point
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Curve TanPoint Method Example

Creates Curve 10 using the Create/TanPoint method. The curve is tangent between Point 25 and
Curve 9. Notice that Trim Original Curves is pressed in and Curve 9 is trimmed.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: TanPoint 9
Curve ID List
10
25
Closest Tangent Only 26 28
Trim Original Curves Y
Auto Execute
Z X
Point List
Point 25
Curve List
Curve 9 After:
-Apply-
29
9 10
25
26 28
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve TanPoint Method Example

Creates Curve 1 using the Create/TanPoint method. The curve is tangent between Point 9 and
an edge of Surface 1.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: TanPoint 1
1
Curve ID List
1
5 2

Trim Original Curves 9
Auto Execute Y 6
Point List
Z X
Point 9
Curve List
Curve 1.2 After:
-Apply-
1
1
10
2
5
1
Y 6
Z X
CHAPTER 4 1
Create Actions
Creating Curves, Surfaces and Solids Through a Vector Length

(XYZ Method)
The XYZ method creates parametric cubic curves, surface, or solids from a specified vector
length and origin. The origin can be expressed by cartesian coordinates or by an existing vertex,
node or other point location provided by the Point select menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: <Type> Set <Type> to either: Curve, Surface or Solid.
Method: XYZ
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve,
<Type> ID List surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in
1 the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Refer. Coordinate Frame Used to express the coordinate values entered in the Vector
Coordinates List and the Point Coordinate List, within the
Coord 0 specified coordinate frame. Default is the global rectangular
frame, Coord 0.
Vector Coordinates List Enter the vector coordinates to define the lengths and direction
for the new curves, surfaces or solids. Enter the coordinates
<1 0 0>
either from the keyboard (example: <10 0 0>); or cursor define
the vector using the Vector Select menu that appears.
Origin Coordinates List
[0 0 0] the form.
Specify the origin or starting point location of the new curve,

surface or solid. You can express the origin’s point location
-Apply- either by entering the cartesian coordinates from the
keyboard, or by using the Point Select menu to cursor select
the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point
locations. Examples: [ 10 0 0], Surface 10.1.1, Node 20, Solid
10.4.3.1.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve XYZ Method Example

Creates Curve 3 using the Create/XYZ method, whose origin is located at Point 6 and whose
vector orientation and length is <20 10 0>.
Before:
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: XYZ
Curve ID List
3

6
Coord 0
Vector Coordinates List

Y
<20 10 0>
X
Auto Execute Z

Point 6 After:
-Apply-
Z X
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Surface XYZ Method Example

Creates Surface 3 using the Create/XYZ method, whose origin is located at Point 6 and whose
vector orientation and length is <20 10 5>.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: XYZ
Surface ID List
3

6
Coord 0

Y
<20 10 5>
Z X
Auto Execute
Point 6 After:
7
-Apply-
8
3
6
Z X
9
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid XYZ Method Example

Creates Solid 1 whose origin is located at Point 6 and whose vector orientation and length is <20
10 5> which is expressed within the Reference Coordinate Frame, Coord 0.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: XYZ
Solid ID List
1

Coord 0

Y
<20 10 5>
Z X
Auto Execute
Point 6 After:
7
-Apply-
11
1 12
6
10
Y
9
Z X
13
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Creating Involute Curves

Creating Involute Curves with the Angles Option
The Involute/Angles option creates parametric cubic curves from a point location. The point
location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Involute curves are like the unwinding of an imaginary string from a circular bobbin. Intended
for gear designers, the Angles option requires the angle of the unwinding and the starting angle.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Involute
1
Option: Angles
Involute Parameters
Angle to unwind the involute
0.0
Starting angle for involute Specify in Angle to unwind the involute, the angle in degrees
0.0 to unwind the involute.
Curves per Point Specify in Starting angle for involute, the starting angle in
degrees of the involute curve.
1
Specify in Curves per Point, how many curves will compose the
total involute. This is only used in conjunction with the Patran 2
Refer. Coordinate Frame Convention.
Coord 0
Involute Axis
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} Define in Involute Axis, a vector that is perpendicular to the
plane the involute curve will be in.
Either enter the vector coordinates that will be expressed in the
Auto Execute
Refer. Coordinate Frame (default is the global rectangular
Point List frame, Coord 0). Example: {[0 0 0][1 0 0]. Or, use the Vector
Select menu and cursor define the vector definition.
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Involute Parameters
0.0
Starting angle for involute
0.0
Curves per Point
1

Coord 0
Involute Axis Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Auto Execute
Point List Specify the existing point, vertex, node or other point
location that defines the starting point of the involute, either
by entering the ID from the keyboard or by cursor selecting
the point location. Examples: Point 1, Surface 10.1 Node
-Apply- 20. The Point Select menu can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the appropriate point location.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Curve Involute Method With the Angles Option Example

Creates four curves starting with Curve 5 using the Create/Involute/Angles option, where the
curve is unwound 360 degrees about the involute axis {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}, from Point 13.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Involute
Curve ID List
5 13
Option: Angles
Involute Parameters
360
Y
Starting angle for involute
0.0 Z X
Curves per Point
4

After:
Coord 0
Involute Axis 15
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} 6
7
Auto Execute 14
Point List 5
13
Point 13
16
-Apply-
Y 8
Z X
17
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Involute Curves with the Radii Option

The Involute/Radii option creates parametric cubic curves from a point location. The point
location can be a point, vertex, node or other point location provided on the Point select menu.
Involute curves are like the unwinding of an imaginary string from a circular bobbin. Intended
for the material modeling community, the Radii option requires the base radius of the bobbin
and the radius of the stop of the curve.
Geometry ☞ More Help:

Action: Create • Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Object: Curve
Method: Involute • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Curve ID List • Topology (p. 10)
1 • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
Option: Radii
Involute Parameters created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Base radius of the bobbin Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
0.0
Radius of the stop
0.0 Specify in Base radius of the bobbin, the base radius, in model
units, of the bobbin.
Curves per Point
Specify in Radius of the Stop, the radius of the stop of the
1 involute curve.
Specify in Curves per Point, how many curves will compose the
Refer. Coordinate Frame total involute.
Coord 0
Involute Axis Define in Involute Axis, a vector that is perpendicular to the plane
the involute curve will be in.
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Either enter the vector coordinates that will be expressed in the
Refer. Coordinate Frame (default is the global rectangular frame,
Auto Execute Coord 0). Example: {[0 0 0][1 0 0]. Or, use the Vector Select menu
and cursor define the vector definition.
Point List
-Apply-
Specify the point, vertex, node or other point location that
defines the starting point of the involute, either by entering the
ID from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the point location.
Examples: Point 1, Surface 10.1 Node 20. The Point Select
menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate point location.
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Curve Involute Method With the Radii Option Example

Creates six curves starting with Curve 5 using the Create/Involute/Radii option, where the
curve is unwound starting with a base radius of 0.1 and a stop radius of 2, about the involute
axis {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}, starting from Point 13.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Involute
Curve ID List
5 13
Option: Radii
Involute Parameters
Base radius of the bobbin
0.1
Radius of the stop Y
2
Z X
Curves per Point
6

After:
Coord 0
Involute Axis 18 9
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
14
Auto Execute
6 5
Point List
10 17
Point 13
13
-Apply-
15
8
Y
19
Z X 7
16
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Revolving Curves, Surfaces and Solids

The Revolve method creates curves, surfaces or solids by the rotation of a point, curve or surface
location, respectively. The new geometric entity is rotated about a defined axis. Point locations
can be points, vertices, or nodes, Curve locations can be curves or edges. Surface locations can
be surfaces or solid faces.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: <Type> Set <Type> to either: Curve,
Surface or Solid.
Method: Revolve
<Type> ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next entity type to
1 be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran

Coord 0
Specify in Axis, the coordinate values of the rotation vector
Axis that will be expressed within the Refer. Coordinate Frame
(default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord 0). Example:
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} {[10 0 0][10 0 1]}.
You can instead use the Vector Select menu that appears, to
Revolve Parameters cursor define the rotation vector in the Axis databox.
Total Angle
90.0 Specify in Total Angle, the total positive or negative rotation
angle, in degrees, using “right-hand” rule.
Offset Angle
Specify in Offset Angle, an optional offset angle in degrees.
0.0 (Default is no offset.)
<Type> per <Type> If PATRAN 2 Convention is ON, specify in <Type> per
<Type>, the number of curves, surfaces or solids to create
1 within the specified Total Angle. Otherwise if PATRAN 2
Convention is OFF, <Type> per <Type> is disabled.
Auto Execute
Specify the points, curves or surfaces either by cursor selecting
<Type> List them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point
5 10, Curve 10, Surface 1:10.
The Select menu that appears at the bottom can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points,
vertices, nodes, curves, edges, faces or solids.
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25)
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
Functions is ON which means you do not need Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
to press the Apply button to execute the form. • Topology (p. 10)
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Curve Revolve Method Example

Creates Curves 5 and 6 using the Create/Revolve method, where the curves are created from
Points 12 and 13 about the axis, {[0 0 0][0 0 1]} for 180 degrees, with an offset of 30 degrees.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: Revolve
Curve ID List
5
12 13

Coord 0
Axis
Y
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Z X
Revolve Parameters
Total Angle
180.0
Offset Angle After:
30.0
Curves per Point
1 6
Auto Execute
Point List 5 16
Point 12 13
14
-Apply-
12 13
Y 15
Z X
17
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Revolve Method Example

Creates Surface 1 where the surface is created from a curve defined by Points 1 and 2 using the
Curve select menu icon listed below. The surface is revolved 45 degrees about the axis {Point 1
[x1 y1 1]}.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Revolve
Surface ID List
1

Coord 0 1 2
Axis
Y
{Point 1 [x1 y1 1]}
Z X
Sweep Parameters
Total Angle
45.0
Offset Angle
After:
0.0
Surfaces per Curve
1
Auto Execute 3
Curve List
1
-Apply-
1 2
Z X

CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Surface Revolve Method Example

Creates four surfaces starting with Surface 2 using the Create/Revolve method, where the
surfaces are created from Curves 9 through 12 about the axis, {[0 0 0 ] [ 1 0 0 ]} for 360 degrees.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Revolve 21
Surface ID List 12
2 20
11
19
17 9 18
Coord 0
Axis
{Point 1 [x1 y1 1]}
Y
Sweep Parameters Z X
Total Angle
360.0
After:
Offset Angle
0.0
21
Surfaces per Curve
12
1 20
11
Auto Execute 19
10
Curve List 18
17 9
Curve 9:12
-Apply-
Y 2 3
X 4
5
Z
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Revolve Method

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Revolve method, where the solid is created from Surface 2. The
axis is defined by the Points 15 and 12 using the Axis select menu icon listed below, for a rotation
of 90 degrees.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid 13 14
Method: Revolve
Solid ID List
1
2
Coord 0
Axis Y
12 15
Construct2PointAxis
Z X
Sweep Parameters
Total Angle
90.0
Offset Angle After:
0.0
Solids per Surface 14
1
13
Auto Execute
Surface List
2
Surface 2
1
16
-Apply-
Y 15
17
X
Z 12

CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Solid Revolve Method

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Revolve method, where the solid is created from Surface 1
about the X axis of Coord 1 (by using the Axis select menu listed below) for 90 degrees.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
2
Object: Solid
3
Method: Revolve
1
Solid ID List 1
1 4

Coord 0
Axis
Coord 1.1 Y
Y
1 X
Sweep Parameters X Z
Total Angle Z
90.0
Offset Angle After:
0.0
2
Solids per Surface
3
1
1
1
Auto Execute
4
Surface List
Surface 1 1
-Apply- Y
1 X
Z
Y 5
6 8
X
Z 7
1
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Orthogonal Curves (2D Normal Method)

Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Input Length Option
The 2D Normal/Input Length option creates straight parametric cubic curves that lie on a
defined 2D plane and is perpendicular to a curve or an edge. The curve is defined from a
specified point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: 2D Normal
Curve ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference
1 Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Curve Length
◆ Input Length
◆
◆ Calculate Length
If Input Length is ON, enter the length of the new curve, in
0.0
model units. See Creating Orthogonal Curves with the
Calculate Length Option (p. 218) for information on the
◆ Distance◆
◆ Deltay Calculate Length button.
◆
◆ Deltaic ◆ Deltaz
◆
Project to Plane
Construction Plane List Enter in Construction Plane List, either the coordinate values of a
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} vector that is normal to the 2D plane that the new curve will lie in
(example: {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}); or cursor define the vector using the
Vector Select menu.
Flip Curve Direction
Auto Execute
Point List
Curve List
-Apply-
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Construction Plane List

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Flip Curve Direction If Flip Curve Direction is ON, MSC.Patran will reverse the new
curve’s parametric ξ1 direction, relative to the curve length and
Auto Execute the normal direction of the construction plane. The ξ1 direction
Point List is defined by the curve’s connectivity.
Curve List Enter in Point List, the point, vertex, node or other point
location the curve will be created from.
Enter in Curve List, the curve or edge that the new curve will
be perpendicular to. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard or
-Apply- use the Point Select menu and the Curve Select menu to
cursor define the locations.

☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve 2D Normal Method With the Input Length Option

Creates Curve 1 with the Input Length option, where the curve is 1 unit long; it lies within the
plane whose normal is the Z axis of Coord 3; it is perpendicular to the top edge of Surface 1; and
its starting point is near Point 3.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create 2
Object: Curve 3
Method: 2D Normal
Z
Curve ID List
1 X Y
Curve Length
1
◆ Input Length
◆
1.0
Y
◆ Distance◆
◆ Deltay
1
◆ Deltax ◆ Deltaz
◆ ◆ Z X
4
Project to Plane
After:
Cord 3.3
2
3
Auto Execute
Z
Point List
6
Point 3 1
5 X Y
Curve List 1
Surface 1.4
-Apply-
Y 1
4
Z X
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Curve 2D Normal Method With the Input Length Option

This example is the same as the previous example, except that Flip Curve Direction is pressed.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create 2
Object: Curve 3
Method: 2D Normal
Z
Curve ID List
1 X Y
Curve Length
1
◆ Input Length
◆
0.0
Y
◆ Distance◆
◆ Deltay
1
◆ Deltax ◆
◆ ◆ Deltaz Z X
4
Project to Plane
After:
Cord 3.3 2
3
Auto Execute Z
Point List
Point 3 5 X Y
1
6
Curve List
1
Surface 1.4
-Apply-
Y
1
Z X
4
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Calculate Length Option

The 2D Normal/Calculate Length option, creates straight parametric cubic curves that lie on a
defined 2D plane and is perpendicular to an existing curve or edge. The curve is defined from
specified point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: 2D Normal
Curve Length
◆
◆ Input Length
◆ Calculate Length If Calculate Length is ON, a small subordinate form called
Length Calculation Points will appear (shown below). You must
0.0 enter the point locations in the Point 1 and 2 databoxes shown
below that the curve will be created between.
◆ Distance◆
◆ Deltay
◆ Deltax ◆
◆ ◆ Deltaz Press Calculate Curve Length first to update the curve length
displayed in the databox above, before you complete the
Calculate Curve Length remainder of the form (if Auto Execute is ON), or before you
press the Apply button.
Project to Plane
Coord 0.3
Length Calculation Points
Flip Curve Direction Auto Execute
Auto Execute Point 1
Point List
Curve List Point 2
-Apply- Length Calculation Points Subordinate Form

CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the input point, and thus the resulting curve, are
projected directly onto the plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the input point, and
the projection is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle
simply indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified, or an offset of that plane, driven
by the input point(s).
◆ Distance◆
◆ Deltay
◆ Deltax ◆
◆ ◆ Deltaz
The default construction plane now comes from the
Calculate Curve Length global preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the
default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane
select menus also have a new entry to restore the
Project to Plane
databox value to the default coordinate
Construction Plane List frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate. Default
Coord 0.3
Flip Curve Direction If Flip Curve Direction is ON, MSC.Patran will reverse the
new curve’s parametric ξ1 direction, relative to the curve
Auto Execute
length and the normal direction of the construction plane.
Point List The ξ1 direction is defined by the curve’s connectivity.
Curve List Enter in Point List, the point, vertex, node or other point
location the curve will be created from.
Enter in Curve List, the curve or edge that the new curve will
be perpendicular to.
-Apply- Either enter the IDs from the keyboard or use the Point
Select menu and the Curve Select menu to cursor define the
locations.

execute the form.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve 2D Normal Method With the Input Length Option Example

Creates Curve 1 with the Input Length option. The distance of Curve 1 is 1.0; it lies within the
plane whose normal is the global coordinate frame’s X axis, Coord 0.1; and it is starts from a
point that is closest to Point 6.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: 2D Normal
1
Curve ID List 1
1
Curve Length
◆
◆ Input Length 2
◆ Calculate Length 5
0.0
◆ Distance◆
◆ Deltay Y
◆ Deltax ◆
◆ ◆ Deltaz 6
Z X
Project to Plane
Construction Plane List After:
Coord 0.1
8

Auto Execute 1
Point List
1
Point 6
1
Curve List
Surface 1.3 2
5
-Apply-
7
Y
6
Z X
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Curve 2D Normal Method With the Calculate Length Option Example

Creates Curve 1 with the Calculate Length option. The distance of Curve 1 is the distance
between Points 3 and 4; it lies within the plane whose normal is the Z axis of Coord 3; and it starts
from a point that is closest to Point 3.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
2
Object: Curve
3
Method: 2D Normal
Curve ID List Z
1
X3 Y
Curve Length
◆
◆ Input Length 1
1.41421
Y
◆ Distance◆
◆ Deltay
◆ Deltax ◆
◆ ◆ Deltaz
X
1
Z
Calculate Curve Length 4
Project to Plane
Construction Plane List After:
Cord 3.3

Auto Execute 2
Point List 3
Z
Point 3 6
1
Curve List
5 X3 Y
1
Surface 1.4
-Apply- 1
Y 4
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating 2D Circle Curves

The 2D Circle method creates circular curves of a specified radius that is within a defined 2D
plane, based on a center point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other
point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: 2D Circle
1
Curves per Circle
Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number of
4 parametric cubic curves to compose the circle.
Circle Radius
◆ Input Radius
If Input Radius is ON, enter the value of the circle’s radius in
◆
◆ Calculate Radius model units.
If Calculate Radius is ON, specify the point location in
Radius Point List that the radius will be measured to, from the
specified center point. Either enter the ID from the keyboard
(example: Point 10, Surface 3.1.1, Node 30); or cursor select
Project to Plane the point, vertex, node or other point location using the Point
Select menu.
Coord 0.3
Auto Execute
Center Point List
[0 0 0]
-Apply-
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
The default construction plane now comes from the global preferences. So, if
unchanged by the user, the default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane
select menus also have a new entry to restore the databox value to the default
coordinate frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate.
Default
Circle Radius
◆ Input Radius
◆
◆ Calculate Radius
Project to Plane If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the center point,
and thus the resulting curve, are projected directly onto the
Construction Plane List plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the
Coord 0.3 center point, and the projection is done with respect to that
new plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle simply
indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified,
Auto Execute or an offset of that plane, driven by the input point(s).
Center Point List

[0 0 0] Specify the point location that defines the center of the
circle, either by entering the ID from the keyboard
(examples: Point 1, Surface 10.1 Node 20); or by cursor
selecting the location. The Point Select menu can be used
-Apply- to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
point location.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the

Basic Functions is ON which means you do
not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form. ☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve 2D Circle Method With the Input Radius Option Example

Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Circle method with the Input Radius option, where the
circle has a radius of 1.0, its center point is at Node 1, and it lies within the plane whose normal
is the Z axis of Coord 0.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: 2D Circle
1
Curve ID List
5
Curves per Circle

4
Circle Radius
Y
◆ Input Radius
◆
◆ Calculate Radius Z X
1.0
Project to Plane
After:
Cord 0.3
Auto Execute
Center Point List
12
Node 1
-Apply- 1
5
Y
Z X
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Curve 2D Circle Method With the Calculate Radius Option Example

Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Circle/Calculate Radius option, where the radius is
measured from Point 12 to Node 1, its center point is at Node 1, and it lies within the plane whose
normal is the Z axis of the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: 2D Circle
Curve ID List
5
1 12
Curves per Circle
4
Circle Radius
◆
◆ Input Radius
Y
◆ Calculate Radius
Z X
Radius Point List

Point 12
After:
Project to Plane
Cord 0.3
Auto Execute
Center Point List
5 1 12
Node 1
-Apply-
Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating 2D ArcAngle Curves

The 2D ArcAngles method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane. The Arc parameter
inputs are Radius, Start Angle and End Angle. The point location for the arc’s center is to be
input.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: 2D ArcAngles
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to
Curve ID List be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
1 MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Curves per Arc

1
Arc Parameters
Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number
Radius of parametric cubic curves to compose the arc.
1.0
Start Angle
0.0 Enter the Arc parameters defined as Radius, Start Angle
and End Angle (degrees).
End Angle
360.0
Project to Plane If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the input point,
and thus the resulting curve, are projected directly onto the
Construction Plane List plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the input
point, and the projection is done with respect to that new
Coord 0.3 plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle simply
indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified,
or an offset of that plane, driven by the input point(s).
Auto Execute
Center Point List
[0 0 0]
-Apply-
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Arc Parameters
Radius
1.0
Start Angle
0.0
End Angle
360.0
Project to Plane The default construction plane now comes from the
global preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the
Construction Plane List default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane select
menus also have a new entry to restore the databox
Coord 0.3 value to the default coordinate frame/construction plane,
whichever is appropriate.
Auto Execute Default
Center Point List
[0 0 0] Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point
locations for the arc’s center point, by entering the IDs
from the keyboard. Examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1,
-Apply- Surface 10.1.1, Node 20. Or cursor define the point
locations using the Point Select menu.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the

Functions is ON which means you do not need
to press the Apply button to execute the form.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve 2D ArcAngle Method Example

Creates Curve 1 using Create/Curve/2D ArcAngles.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: 2D ArcAngles
Curve ID List
1
Curves per Arc

1
Arc Parameters Y
Radius
1.0 X
Z
Start Angle
0.0
End Angle
160.0 After:
Project to Plane
1
Coord 0.3
2
Auto Execute
Center Point List
[0 0 0]
Y
-Apply-
Z X 1
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc2Point Method)

Creating Arced Curves with the Center Option
The 2D Arc2Point method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane. Two options are
provided. The Center option inputs are point locations for the arc’s center and the arc’s starting
and ending points. The Radius option inputs are the radius and point locations for the arc’s
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: 2D Arc2Point created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Curve ID List
1
Option: Center
Option Menu to select between Options Center and Radius.
Arc2Point Parameters... (Center parameters are displayed.)
If pressed, the Arc2Point Parameters subordinate form will

appear. See Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form (p.
?) for more information.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the center point, and thus the resulting curve, are
projected directly onto the plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the center point,
and the projection is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane. This
toggle simply indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified, or an offset of that
plane, driven by the input point(s).
Project to Plane
Construction Plane List The default construction plane now comes from the global
Coord 0.3 preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the default is Coord
0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane select menus also have a new
entry to restore the databox value to the default coordinate
frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate.
Auto Execute
Center Point List
Default
Starting Point List

Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations for
the arc’s center and arc’s starting and ending points, by entering
Ending Point List the IDs from the keyboard. Examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1,
Surface 10.1.1, Node 20. Or cursor define the point locations
using the Point Select menu.
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Curve 2D Arc2Point Method With Center Min. Angle Option Example

Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Arc2Point method, where the Minimum Angle is chosen;
the arced curve is between Point 13 and Node 1; its center point is Point 12; and the curve lies
within the plane whose normal is {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
1
Method: 2D Arc2Point
Curve ID List
5
Option: Center
Arc2Point Parameters... 12 13
Project to Plane
Construction Plane List Y
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}

Z X
Auto Execute
Center Point List After:
Point 12
5
Starting Point List
114
Point 13
Ending Point List

Node 1
-Apply-
12 13
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve 2D Arc2Point Method With Center Max. Angle Option Example

Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Arc2Point method, where the Maximum Angle is chosen;
the arced curve is between Point 13 and Node 1; its center point is Point 12; and the curve lies
within the plane whose normal is {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
1
Method: 2D Arc2Point
Curve ID List
5
Option: Center
12 13
Arc2Point Parameters...
Project to Plane
Construction Plane List Y
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Z X
Auto Execut e
Center Point List After:
Point 12
114
Starting Point List
Point 13
Ending Point List

Node 1
12 13
-Apply-
Z X
5
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Creating Arced Curves with the Radius Option

The 2D Arc2Point method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane. Two options are
provided. The Center option inputs are point locations for the arc’s center and the arc’s starting
and ending points. The Radius option inputs are the radius and point locations for the arc’s
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method: 2D Arc2Point Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be
1
Option Menu to select between Options Center and Radius.

Option: Radius (Center parameters are displayed.)
Project to Plane
If pressed, the Arc2Point Parameters subordinate form will
Construction Plane List appear. See Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form
Coord 0.3
Arc Radius
1.0
Create Center Point

Flip Center Point
Auto Execute
Starting Point List
Ending Point List
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the center point, and thus the resulting curve, are projected
directly onto the plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the center point, and the
projection is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle simply
indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified, or an offset of that plane, driven by the
input point(s).
Project to Plane
The default construction plane now comes from the global
Construction Plane List preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the default is Coord
Coord 0.3 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane select menus also have a new
entry to restore the databox value to the default coordinate
frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate.
Arc Radius
1.0
Default
Create Center Point
Flip Center Point
If Create Center Point is ON, the arc center point will be created.
Auto Execute
If Flip Center Point is ON, the arc center point will be flipped to
Starting Point List create arc.
Ending Point List

Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations for the
arc’s starting and ending points, by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Surface 10.1.1, Node
-Apply- 20. Or cursor define the point locations using the Point Select menu.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Curve 2D Arc2Point Method with Radius Option Example

Creates Curve 1 by creating an arc with a radius of 1.5 using [-1 -.5 -1] and [1 1 1] as start/end
points and in the Z construction plane.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Curve
Method:2D Arc2Point
Curve ID List
1
Option: Radius
Y
Project to Plane
Construction Plane List Z X
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Arc Radius
1.5
After:
Create Center Point
Flip Center Point
Auto Execute 2
Starting Point List
[-1 -.5 -1]
Ending Point List

[1 1 1]
1
-Apply- 1
Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form

The Arc2Point Parameters subordinate form appears when the Arc2Point Parameters button is
pressed on the Create/Curve 2D Arc2Point application form.
Arc2Point Parameters Disabled if the PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is OFF on

Curves per Arc the Create/Curve/2D Arc2Point form. If PATRAN 2
Convention is ON, specify the number of parametric
1 cubic curves to create per Arc.
Arc Angle:Minimum Angle
If Minimum Angle is ON, MSC.Patran will create the arc

based on the smallest angle possible between the specified
OK Cancel
If Maximum Angle is ON, MSC.Patran will create the arc
based on the largest angle possible between the specified
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc3Point Method)

The 2D Arc3Point method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane, based on point
locations for the arc’s starting, middle and ending points. The point locations can be points,
vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Method: 2D Arc3Point Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Curve ID List
1
Curves per Arc Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number
1 of parametric cubic curves to compose the arc.
Project to Plane
If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the center point, and thus
the resulting curve, are projected directly onto the plane; otherwise,
the plane is first translated out to the center point, and the projection
is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane.
This toggle simply indicates whether the working plane is the plane
specified, or an offset of that plane, driven by the input point(s).
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
The default construction plane now comes from the global preferences. So, if
unchanged by the user, the default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane
select menus also have a new entry to restore the databox value to the default
coordinate frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate.
Default
Project to Plane
Coord 0.3
Create Center Point

Starting Point List
Middle Point List

Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations for the
arc’s starting, middle and ending points, by entering the IDs from
the keyboard (examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Surface 10.1.1,
Ending Point List Node 20); or cursor defining the point locations using the Point
Select menu.
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
If ON, MSC.Patran will create a point at the Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
calculated center of the arc. • Topology (p. 10)
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Curve 2D Arc3Point Method Example

Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Arc3Point method. The arced curve is created through the
Points 13, 14 and Node 1 and it lies within the plane whose normal is {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}. Notice that
Create Center Point is pressed in and Point 16 is created.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Curve 14
Object:
Method: 2D Arc3Point 1
Curve ID List
5
Curves per Arc

1
Project to Plane

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} Y
13
Z X
Create Center Point
Auto Execute
Starting Point List After:
Point 13
145
Middle Point List
Point 14 1
15
Ending Point List

Node 1
-Apply-
Y 16 13
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Surfaces from Curves

Creating Surfaces Between 2 Curves
The Curve method using the 2 Curve option creates surfaces between two curves or edges.
Degenerate three-sided surfaces can be created. See Building a Degenerate Surface (Triangle)
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Curve
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to
Surface ID List
1
Option: 2 Curve
◆
◆ Chord Length Deactivated and not used for the 2 Curve option.
◆ Uniform
If the Manifold toggle is ON, enter the manifold surface or
Manifold face for the new surface, either by entering the ID from the
keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor
Manifold Surface selecting it with the Surface Select menu.

Starting Curve List the form.
Ending Curve List

Specify in Starting and Ending Curve Lists, the curves

or edges for the new surfaces, either by entering the
IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve 10, Surface
10.1, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor defining the curve
locations using the Curve Select menu.
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Surface Curve Method With the 2 Curve Option Example

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Curve/2 Curve option. The curve is created between Curves
5 and 6.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Curve
17
Surface ID List
2
6
12
Option: 2 Curve 5
◆
◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform
Y 16
Manifold
X
Manifold Surface Z
After:
Auto Execute
Starting Curve List
Curve 5
17
Ending Curve List
Curve 6
12 6
2
5
-Apply-
18
Y 16
X
Z
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Curve Method With the 2 Curve Option Example

Creates Surface 2 that is degenerate with the 2 Curve option which is between an edge of Surface
1 and a zero length curve defined by Point 5, twice.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Curve 2 3
Surface ID List
2
1
Option: 2 Curve 5
◆
◆ Chord Length 1 4
◆ Uniform Y
Manifold Z X
Manifold Surface
Auto Execute After:

Starting Curve List
Surface 1.3
Ending Curve List 2 3

1
-Apply- 2
5
1 4
Z X
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Creating Surfaces Through 3 Curves (Curve Method)

The Curve method using the 3 Curve option creates surfaces that pass through three existing
curves or edges.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Curve Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to
Method: be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
Surface ID List
1
If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the
points on the surface is based on the chord length distances
Option: 3 Curve
relative to the location of the surface’s middle curve. This
Parameterization Method means the surface may or may not be uniformly
parameterized, depending on where the middle curve is
◆
◆ Chord Length located.
◆ Uniform If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points on
the surface will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the
middle curve is located. That is, the surface will be always
Auto Execute uniformly parameterized.
Starting Curve List
Middle Curve List
the form.
Ending Curve List Specify in the Starting, Middle and Ending Curve Lists, the
curves or edges that the new surfaces will pass through,
either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples:
Curve 10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor defining
the curve locations using the Curve Select menu.
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Curve Method With 3 Curve Option Example

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Curve/Curve option. The curve is created through Curves
5, 6 and 8.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Curve 19
Method: 8
21
Surface ID List
2 17
5 6
12
Option: 3 Curve 18
◆
◆ Chord Length Y
◆ Uniform
X
Z
Auto Execute
Starting Curve List
Curve 5
Middle Curve List After:

Curve 6
Ending Curve List

19
Curve 8 8
21
17
-Apply- 5 6
2
12
18
16
X
Z
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Creates Surface 2 through Curves 2, 3 and an edge of Surface 1.
Before:
Geometry
Action: Create
10
Object: Surface
Method: Curve 3
Surface ID List 11
8
2
2
Option: 3 Curve
1
◆
◆ Chord Length 6
1
◆ Uniform 1
Y 5
Auto Execute Z X
7
Starting Curve List
Surface 1.4
Middle Curve List

After:
Curve 2
Ending Curve List 10
Curve 3
3
-Apply- 8 11
2
1
9
6 1
1
5
Y
7
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Surfaces Through 4 Curves (Curve Method)

The Curve method using the 4 Curve option creates surfaces that pass through four existing
curves or edges.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Curve Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Surface ID List Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1
If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points
Option: 4 Curve that describe the surface is based on the chord length distances
relative to the location of the surface’s second and third curves.
Parameterization Method This means the surface may or may not be uniformly
parameterized, depending on where the interior curves are
◆
◆ Chord Length located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the
◆ Uniform points on the surface will be uniformly spaced, regardless of
where the interior curves are located. That is, the surface will be
always uniformly parameterized.
Auto Execute
Starting Curve List By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Second Curve List
Third Curve List

Specify in the Starting, Second, Third and Ending Curve Lists,
the curves or edges that the new surfaces will pass through,
Ending Curve List either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve
10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor defining the curve
locations using the Curve Select menu.
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Curve/4 Curve option. The curve is created through Curves
5,6 and 8 and the edge of Surface 2 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Curve 24
Surface ID List 22 2 2
3
23
Option: 4 Curve 19
8
17
◆
◆ Chord Length
6
◆ Uniform 12 5
18
Y
Auto Execute 16
Starting Curve List X
Z
Curve 5
Second Curve List

After:
Curve 6
Third Curve List

Curve 8
24
Ending Curve List
22 2
Surface 2.4 2
23
-Apply- 19
8
21
17 3
12 6
5
18
Y
16
X
Z

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Surfaces from N Curves (Curve Method)

The Curve method using the N-Curves option creates surfaces that pass through any number of
curves or edges.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
Method: Curve Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Surface ID List
1
If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the
points that describe the surface is based on the chord length
Option: N-Curves distances relative to the location of the surface’s second and
third curves. This means the surface may or may not be
uniformly parameterized, depending on where the interior
◆
◆ Chord Length curves are located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric
coordinates of the points on the surface will be uniformly
◆ Uniform spaced, regardless of where the interior curves are located.
That is, the surface will be always uniformly parameterized.
Curve List
Specify in Curve List, two or more curves or edges that the
surface will pass through. Either enter the IDs from the
keyboard (examples: Curve 1:10, Surface 10.2 11.1, Solid
10.1.1 12.1.1), or cursor select the curves or edges using the
Curve Select menu that appears on the bottom.
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Surface Curve Method With N-Curves Option Example

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Curve/N-Curves option. The curve is created through
Curves 5,6,8,9 and 10.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Curve 24
22
9 10
Surface ID List 19
8 23 25
2 21
17
Option: N-Curves 12 6
5
18
16
◆
◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform Y
Curve List X
Z
Curve 5 6 8:10
After:
-Apply-
22 24
9 10
19
8
2 23 25
21
17
12 6
5
18
16
X
Z
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Composite Surfaces

Figure 4-1 The Composite method creates surfaces that are composed from multiple
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
surfaces.
When toggled ON, uses all the boundary vertices from the Surface List. When toggled OFF, will enable
vertex selection. If the Vertex List is left empty the original surface edges will be automatically merged
until a slope change is encountered in the boundary. The slope change criteria is specified by the "Node-
Edge Snap Angle" in the Finite Elements form under Preferences in the main menu. If vertices are
specified, they will be graphically marked. This option is probably the most powerful as it will allow the
mesher to ignore unimportant details on the boundary.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method:Composite
Allows the user to define larger surface regions within a model,
Surface ID List typically when existing surfaces are too detailed for mesh
2 creation. Composite surfaces may be meshed using a larger
element edge length than supported on the more detailed,
Delete Constituent Surfaces underlying surfaces. A composite surface is initially defined by
selecting the existing surfaces to be combined. The surfaces
Surface List will be graphically highlighted when picked or when the mouse
focus is put on the surface list by picking in the listbox.
Defines where geometric vertices, and subsequently finite

Use All Edge Vertices element nodes are to be placed on the Composite Surface
boundary.
Vertex List
There are three Inner Loop Options:
All will use all closed loops to identify the interior boundary of the
composite surface.
Vertex
Options... List None will create a surface with no internal holes.
Inner Loop Option: All Select will enable the user to identify existing interior holes to be
part of the new surface. If the inner loop is defined by more than
one edge, selection of any one of those will be enough. To add a
hole which is not part of a surface, the Preview Boundary option
Preview Boundary must be used. In this case all curves have to be selected to
identify the inner loop.
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
Highlights the current outer and inner
boundary free edges and enables the
Modify Boundary Frame. • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Appears either when the Preview Boundary option is selected or if the Composite Surface
Builder was not able to identify a clean boundary from the Surface List. The free edges will be
highlighted and marked as follows:
White: Free edges within the Surface List.
Dark Blue: Free edges shared by one other surface not in the Surface List.
Cyan: Free edges shared by more than one surface not in the Surface List.
Red: Free edges that have not been processed due to either a gap or a multiple branch path in
the Surface List.
Vertex
Options... List
Modify Boundary:
Add/Remove toggles allow edges or curves to be added
◆
◆ Add ◆ Remove or removed from the Surface List boundary. Add places
selected curves and edges in the Edge List databox and
also supports curve creation on-the-fly. Remove operates
Edge List
in Autoexecute mode whereby previously highlighted
Surface 1.3 curves or edges are simply unhighlighted.
Reset can be used to start over again. If Surface List

Reset contains a previous used surface and the boundary has
been modified, the previous modification list can be used
again.
-Apply- Apply will initiate the Composite Surface Builder to use
the Edge List in conjunction with the Surface List to build
a new surface. If the proposed boundary is incorrect, the
problem location will be marked and a message will
appear.
General Comments
If valid boundary loops are identified and any of the vertices in the vertex list are not part of a boundary, the
location will be marked red and the user will be prompted to “ignore and continue” or “stop”.
The Surface Builder always computes the optimal view plane based on the Surface List. In most cases this
is satisfactory; however, in some instances, it can create a very distorted parametrization of the new
surface, leading to poor finite element mesh quality. Sometimes the view selected by the user as “best” is
more successful than the recommended optimal plane (i.e., answer “No” to the prompt asking permission
to reorient the model to a better view); otherwise, the proposed Composite Surface will have to be
represented by multiple composite surfaces.
If the Composite Surface Builder often fails because of unresolved boundary edges, the gap and clean-up
tolerances are most likely too small. If edges disappear the tolerances are probably too large. The default
gap and clean-up tolerances are set equal to the global model tolerance and can be changed on the
Options form.
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Composite Surface Options
Used to create the boundary loops. This value has to be increased to

automatically close existing gaps larger than the tolerance value.
Cleanup Tol. 0.005 Only used in the Surface Builder to ignore gaps
between surface edges.
Gap Distance 0.005
Will zoom on the model location where the builder has
detected a boundary gap or branch. This is useful for
Auto Zoom In Problem large Composite Surfaces.
Detailed Information Display

Controls the appearance of warning messages when
gaps or branches are encountered. For the experienced
Auto Select Outer Boundary
user, they may rather not see the warning messages but
simply rely on graphical feedback as previously
Erase Original Surfaces described.
Ok Defaults
Erases (not deletes) the original surfaces upon successful construction of a

Composite Surface. This is identical to using the Plot/Erase functionality
under Display.
If toggled OFF, the user will be prompted to identify the outer

boundary via a query process. This is needed if the default method of
Auto Select fails.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Composite Method Example

Creates Surface 2 from the surfaces in the viewport.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Composite
Z
Surface ID List
2 1 Y
X
Delete Constituent Surfaces
Surface List
Surface 1T#
Z
X Y
Use All Edge Vertices
Vertex List
After:
Options...
Vertex List
Inner Loop Option: All
Z
1 Y
X
Preview Boundary
-Apply-
Z Y
X
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces

The Decompose method creates four sided surfaces from an existing surface or solid face by
choosing four vertex locations. This method is usually used to create surfaces from a multi-sided
trimmed surface so that you can either mesh with IsoMesh or continue to build a tri-parametric
solid.
See Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces (p. 37) for more information on how to use the
Decompose method.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to
Method: Decompose Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Surface ID List
1
Surface Enter the trimmed surface to decompose either by

entering the ID from the keyboard (example: Surface 10);
or by cursor selecting the surface.

Surface Vertex 1 List means you do not need to chose the Apply button to
execute the form.
Surface Vertex 2 List Enter in the Surface Vertex 1,2,3 and 4 listboxes, the four
vertices that will define the new surface. Use the Vertex
Select menu that appears on the bottom to cursor select
the vertices.
Surface Vertex 3 List

☞ More Help:
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Decompose Method Example

Creates Surfaces 3, 4 and 5 using the Create/Decompose method. The surfaces are created from
Trimmed Surface 2 and they are defined by the cursor selected vertices listed in the Surface
Vertex databoxes on the form.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create 17 15
Object: Surface
Method: Decompose
14
Surface ID List
3
2
Surface
12
Surface 2
Y
Auto Execute Z X
Surface Vertex 1 List 18 16

Surface 2(u 0.000000)(v 1.0000
Surface Vertex 2 List After:

Surface 2(u 0.000000)(v 0.0000 17 15
Surface 2(u 0.516341)(v 0.0000 3

14
Surface 2(u 0.331216)(v 1.0000
19
4 2
-Apply-
20
12
Y
5
Z X
18 16
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Creating Surfaces from Edges (Edge Method)

The Edge method creates three or four sided surfaces that are bounded by three or four
intersecting curves or edges, without manifolding the surface to an existing surface or face.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
Method: Edge created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Surface ID List
1 Set this option to either 3 Edge or 4 Edge. The 3 Edge option
will create a degenerate three sided surface.
Option: 4 Edge
If the Manifold toggle is ON, enter the manifold surface or face for
Manifold the new surface, either by entering the ID from the keyboard
(examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor selecting it with
the Surface Select menu.
Manifold Surface

Auto Execute
Surface Edge 1 List
Enter in the Surface Edge 1,2, 3 and/or 4 Lists, the three or four
curves or edges that will bound the new surface, either by
Surface Edge 2 List entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve 10, Surface
10.2, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor selecting them with the Curve
Select menu that appears on the bottom.
Surface Edge 3 List
Surface Edge 4 List

☞ More Help:
-Apply- • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Edge Method With the 3 Edge Option Example

Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Edge/3 Edge option. The degenerate surface is created from
Curves 5 and 6 and the edge of Surface 2. See Building a Degenerate Surface (Triangle) (p. 41).
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface 13 14
Method: 5
Edge
16 2
Surface ID List
6
3
12 15
Option: 3 Edge
Manifold
Y
Manifold Surface
Z X
Auto Execute
Surface Edge 1 List
After:
Curve 5
Surface Edge 2 List

Curve 6 13 14
5
Surface Edge 3 List
16 3 2
Surface 2.1
6
-Apply- 12 15
Z X
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Surface Edge Method With the 4 Edge Option Example

Creates Surface2 using the Create/Edge/4 Edge option. The surface is created from Curves 5
through 8.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Edge 18 6
7
12 5
Surface ID List
2
Option: 4 Edge 19
8
Manifold 17
Y
Manifold Surface
Z X
Auto Execute
Surface Edge 1 List
After:
Curve 5
Surface Edge 2 List

Curve 6
Surface Edge 3 List 18 6

7 2
Curve 7 12 5
Surface Edge 4 List
Curve 8
19
8
-Apply- 17
Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extracting Surfaces
Extracting Surfaces with the Parametric Option
The Extract method creates surfaces by creating them from within or on a solid, at a constant
parametric ξ 1 ( u ) , ξ 2 ( v ) , or ξ 3 ( w ) coordinate location, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , ξ 2
has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 , and ξ 3 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 3 ≤ 1 . One surface is extracted from each
solid.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Extract
Surface ID List
1 Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
Option: Parametric
Surface Plane
◆ Constant u Plane
◆
◆ Constant v Plane Select either Constant u Direction, Constant v Direction, or
Constant w Direction. The surfaces will either be created
◆
◆ Constant w Plane either along the ξ 1 ( u ) direction for Constant u Direction;
along the ξ 2 ( v ) direction for Constant v Direction; or along
Surface Position the ξ 3 (w) direction for Constant w Direction.
0.0 1.0
0.5
u Parametric Value Specify the solid’s ξ 1 ( u ) , ξ 2 ( v ), or ξ 3 ( w ) coordinate

value for the location of the surface, either by using the slide
bar or by entering the value in the databox. The directions of
Auto Execute ξ 1 , ξ 2 and ξ 3 are defined by the connectivity of the solid.
Solid List You can plot the parametric directions by choosing the
under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.
-Apply-
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Surface Plane
◆ Constant u Plane
◆
◆ Constant v Plane
◆
◆ Constant w Plane
Surface Position
0.0 1.0
0.5
u Parametric Value
Solid List execute the form.
Specify in Solid List, the solids that you want to extract

-Apply- surfaces from. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard
(example: Solid 1:10), or cursor select the solids using
the Solid Select menu that appears on the bottom.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Extract/Parametric option. The surface is created at
ξ 3 ( w ) = 0.75 within Solid 1. Notice the parametric direction is displayed near Point 19.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
20
Object: Surface 2
19 1 21
Method: Extract 3 22
Surface ID List
2 1
Option: Parametric
Surface Plane
17
◆
◆ Constant u Plane Y
◆
◆ Constant v Plane 12 18
Z X
◆ Constant w Plane 16
Surface Position
0.0 1.0
0.75 After:
w Parametric Value 20
2 21
Auto Execute 19 1
Solid List 3 22
Solid 1
1
-Apply-
26
2 2
1 25
23
17
Y 24
12 18
Z X
16
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Surface Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example

Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Extract/Parametric option. The surface is created at
ξ 3 ( w ) = 0.75 within a solid that is defined by Surfaces 1 and 2 by using the Solid select menu
icons listed below.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create 10
Object: Surface
2 9
Method: Extract 7
Surface ID List 8
3
Surface Plane
◆
◆ Constant u Plane 1 Y 6
1
◆
◆ Constant v Plane
◆ Constant w Plane Z X
4
Surface Position
0.0 1.0
0.75 After:
Auto Execute
2 9
Solid List 7
Construct 2SurfaceSolid (Eva

8
14
-Apply-
5
11 3 13
1 Y 1 6
12
Solid Select Menu Icons Z X

4
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extracting Surfaces with the Face Option

The Extract method creates surfaces by creating them on a specified solid face. One surface is
extracted from each solid face.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Extract
Surface ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1
Option: Face
Face List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify in Face List, the solid faces to create surfaces on, either by
-Apply- entering the IDs from the keyboard (example: Solid 10.2 11.1); or
by cursor selecting the faces.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Surface Extract Method With the Face Option Example

Creates Surfaces 2 and 3 using the Create/Extract/Face option. The surface is created on two
faces of Solid 10.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
20
Object: Surface 2
1 21
19
Method: Extract 3 22
Surface ID List
2 1
Option: Face
Auto Execute
17
Face List Y
12 18
Solid 1.1 1.2 Z X
16
-Apply-
After:
1
20
12 2 21
19 1
23 22
3
1
2
17
Y
12 18
Z X
16
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Fillet Surfaces

The Fillet method creates a parametric bi-cubic surface between two existing surfaces or solid
faces. The existing surfaces or faces do not need to intersect. If they do intersect, the edges of the
surfaces or faces must be aligned, and they must intersect so that a nondegenerate fillet can be
created.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Fillet Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
1
Fillet Radius 1 is the fillet radius. This is either a constant fillet
Fillet Parameters radius (if Fillet Radius 2 is left blank) or part of a varying radius.
Fillet Radius 1 Only one radius value is allowed for all pairs of surfaces or faces
specified in Surface/Point 1 and 2 List.
Fillet Radius 2 is optional. If a value is entered, MSC.Patran will
Fillet Radius 2 create a fillet with a varying radius, with the first edge beginning
at Radius 1 and gradually varying to Radius 2 at the opposite
edge.
Fillet Tolerance Fillet Tolerance is used to control the accuracy of the fillet when
MSC.Patran subdivides the geometry to calculate the fillet
0.005
position. Decreasing the tolerance helps when the fillet is very
small compared to the geometry model. Default is .005.
Trim Original Surfaces
Auto Execute
Surface/Point 1 List
Points 1 and 2 Surface 2

Radius 1
Fillet Patch
-Apply- Area To Be
Surface 1 Trimmed
Radius 2
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Fillet Radius 1
Fillet Radius 2
If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the original surfaces specified in
the Surface/Point 1 and 2 listboxes. Each surface is trimmed
Fillet Tolerance from the tangent point of the fillet to the end of the original
0.005 surface.

Trim Original Surfaces Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
Auto Execute execute the form.
Specify in Surface/Point 1 List and Surface/Point 2 List,
the existing pair of surfaces or faces, along with their
corner points that the fillet will be created between. For
Surface/Point 2 List each listbox, the Surface Select menu and the Point Select
menu will appear at the bottom to allow you to cursor define
the appropriate surfaces or faces, and the points, vertices,
nodes, or other appropriate corner point locations provided
on the Point Select menu.
-Apply-
Points 1 and 2 Surface 2
Radius 1
Fillet Patch
Area To Be
Surface 1 Trimmed
Radius 2
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Fillet Method Example

Creates Surface 4 using the Create/Fillet method that is between Surfaces 1 and 3 with the fillet’s
endpoints, Points 2 and 10, cursor selected. Surface 4 has a varying fillet radius of 0.25 to 0.5.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface 2
Method: Fillet
Surface ID List 3
4 1
Fillet Parameters 1
Fillet Radius 1 10
0.25 3
4
Fillet Radius 2 Y
0.5 X
Z
9
Fillet Tolerance
0.005
Trim Original Surfaces After:

Auto Execute
Surface/Point 1 List 15
Construct PointSurfaceUVOnSu
1
1
14
-Apply- 11 1
10 4
3
Y
12
Z X
9
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Surface Fillet Method Example

Creates Surface 5 using the Create/Fillet method that is between Surfaces 3 and 4 with the fillet’s
endpoints, Points 19 and 25, cursor selected. Surface 5 has a constant fillet radius of 0.75.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create 24
Object: Surface
Method: Fillet
4
20 25
Surface ID List
5
Fillet Parameters 16
Fillet Radius 1 18 23
0.75 5
Y 3
Fillet Radius 2 6
17
Z X
Fillet Tolerance 19
0.005
After:
Trim Original Surfaces
30
Auto Execute
28 4
31
-Apply- 27 5 29
18
Y 3
6
Z X 26
19
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Matching Adjacent Surfaces

The Match method creates parametric bi-cubic surfaces with common boundaries (or matched
edges) from a pair of topologically incongruent surfaces or solid faces that have two consecutive
common vertices but unmatched edges. The surface pair need not have matching parametric
orientations. MSC.Patran requires geometry to be topologically congruent for IsoMesh and
Paver to create coincident nodes at the common boundaries. See Topological Congruency and
Meshing (p. 12) for more information.
You can also match incongruent surfaces with the Edit action’s Edge Match method. See
Matching Surface Edges (p. 481) for more information.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
Surface created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Method: Match
Surface ID List
If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the surfaces specified in Surface 1
1
and 2 List from the database.
Delete Original Surfaces By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Surface 1 List
Specify in Surface 1 List, the surface or face to which the new
surface will be matched. Specify in Surface 2 List, the surface or
Surface 2 List face to match with Surface 1. Either enter the IDs from the
keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or cursor select them
using the Surface Select menu.
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
• Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or
Paver (p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Surface Match Method Example

Creates Surface 4 using the Create/Match method that is topologically congruent with Surface
2. Notice that Delete Original Surfaces is pressed in and Surface 3 is deleted.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Match 13 14 18
Surface ID List
4 2 3
Delete Original Surfaces
Auto Execute 12 15 17
Y
Surface 1 List
Surface 2 Z X
Surface 2 List
Surface 3
-Apply- After:
13 14 18
2 4
12 15 17
Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Constant Offset Surface

This form is used to create a constant offset surface.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Offset created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Surface ID List
1 Specify the constant offset value of the surface.
Offset Parameters Specify the number of copies of the offset surface to create
using the Repeat Count parameter.
1.0
Repeat Count By default, Do not use a guiding surface is set to use the
surface normal or the direction vector, if reversed from the
1
surface normal for the offset direction. If this toggle is
changed to Use first surface as guiding surface, then the
offset direction for all surfaces to be created will the same as
Do not use a the first surface in the Surface List.
guiding surface By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
Surface List the form.
Specify the surface used to create an offset surface from
either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Surface 10 11. The Surface select
cursor select the appropriate surfaces.
Reverse Direction
Draws the direction vector of the surface to create the offset
Reset Graphics
surface from.
-Apply- Reverses the direction vector of the surface to create the

offset surface from.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Creating Constant Offset Surface Example

Create surfaces 2 and 3 by offsetting from surface 1, a distance of 0.5 with a repeat count of 2 and
reversing the direction vector of surface 1.
Geometry
Geometry
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Offset
Surface ID List
2 1
Offset Parameters
0.5
Repeat Count
2
Y
Do not use a X Z
guiding surface
Auto Execute
After:
Surface List
Surface 1
Reverse Direction 3
Reset Graphics 2
1
-Apply-
Y
X Z
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Ruled Surfaces

The Ruled method creates ruled surfaces between a pair of curves or edges.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Ruled
Surface ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
1
Surface Parameterization
◆
If Equal Arc Length is ON, MSC.Patran will define the ruled
surface’s ξ 1 and ξ 2 parametric directions based on the arc
length parameterizations of the ξ 1 direction for the curves or
edges in Curve 1 List, and the ξ 2 direction for the curves or
Avoid Bow Tie Surface edges in Curve 2 List. If Equal Parametric Values is ON, the
curves or edges in Curve 1 List define the surface’s ξ 1 direction
Auto Execute and the curves or edges in Curve 2 List define the surface’s ξ 2
direction. The ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions are defined by the curve and
Ruling Curve 1 List surface’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions by
choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric
Properties form under the menu Display/Display
Ruling Curve 2 List
-Apply-
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions

If Avoid Bow Tie Surface is ON, MSC.Patran will optimize

the ruled surface, so that the two curves ξ 1 directions do not
need to be aligned or be in the same direction. The resulting
Avoid Bow Tie Surface
ruled surface will not be twisted or bow tied. This is the
Auto Execute default setting. If Allow Bow Tie Surface is ON, if the ξ 1
direction of the curves or edges in Ruling Curve 1 and 2 List
Ruling Curve 1 List are not aligned, a bow tie ruled surface will be created.
Ruling Curve 2 List
Specify in Ruling Curve 1 and 2 List, the two curves or edges

to create the ruled surface between. Either enter the IDs from
the keyboard (examples: Curve 10, Surface 10.1); or cursor
-Apply-
select them using the Curve Select menu.
☞ More Help:
• Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or Paver (p. 15)
in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite
Element Modeling
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Ruled Method Example

Creates Surface 1 using the Create/Ruled method which is created between Curves 1 and 2.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
6
Object: Surface
2
Method: Ruled
5
Surface ID List
1
Surface Parameterization
◆
1 Y
Z X 1
4
Auto Execute
Ruling Curve 1 List
After:
Curve 1
6
Ruling Curve 2 List
Curve 2 2
5
-Apply-
1 Y
Z X 1
4
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Surface Ruled Method Example

Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Ruled method which is created between Curve 5 and an edge
of Surface 2 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below. Notice that since Equal Parametric
Values was pressed in, Surface 3’s parametric ξ 1 direction is the same as for Curve 5.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create 18
Object: Surface
Method: Ruled 19
Surface ID List
2
3
2
Surface Parameterization 17 1
◆
1
◆ Equal Parametric Values 12
Y 20
5
Z X
16
Auto Execute
Ruling Curve 1 List After:
Curve 5
18
Ruling Curve 2 List
Surface 2.4
19
-Apply-
2
2
17 1
1
21
12 3
Y 20
5
Curve Select Menu Icon Z X

16
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Trimmed Surfaces

The Trimmed method creates a trimmed surface. You must first create at least one chained curve
for the surface’s outer loop or boundary by using the Create/ Curve/Chain form before using
this form, or by bringing up the Auto Chain form from within this form. (Note that an outer loop
must be specified, and the inner loop being specified is not necessary.) Trimmed surfaces can be
meshed by Paver.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
Method: Trimmed
Surface ID List Options for creating trimmed surfaces:

1 1. Surface: Creates a trimmed surface that has the same curvature
as a specified parent surface. The parent surface must be simply
trimmed (default color is green).
Option: Surface
2. Planar: Creates a flat or planar trimmed surface.
Auto Chain... 3. Composite: Combines surfaces into a single trimmed surface,
where the parent trimmed surfaces may have gaps or overlaps of
Use All Edge Vertices a specified length, and are not required to be topologically
congruent.
Delete Outer Loop
Use the Auto Chain feature to chain existing curves or surface
Outer Loop List edges into closed loops, defining the trim region.
If ON, MSC.Patran will determine the new trimmed surface’s

edge and vertex locations directly from the loop or chained
Delete Inner Loops curve’s definition. That is, the edges and vertices are defined
by the links in the chained curve. If OFF, MSC.Patran will
Inner Loop List determine the edge and vertex locations of the new trimmed
surface by the slope discontinuities in the chain.
Delete Constituent Surface
Surface List
-Apply-
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Specify in Outer Loop List, one chained curve to represent the outer boundary of the
trimmed surface either by entering the ID from the keyboard (example: Curve 10), or by
cursor selecting the curve.
Delete Outer Loop If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the chained curves specified in
the Outer Loop List listbox.
Outer Loop List
Delete Inner Loops If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the chained curve specified in
Inner Loop List.
Inner Loop List
Specify in Inner Loop List, one or more optional chained curves
to represent holes or cutouts in the trimmed surface, either by
entering the IDs from the keyboard (example: Curve 10 12), or
Delete Constituent Surface by cursor selecting the curves.
Surface List
Specify in Surface List, the surfaces that will be the parent
surface whose curvature will be used by the trimmed surface,
either by entering the IDs from the keyboard, or by cursor
-Apply- selecting the surface. The parent surface must be simply
trimmed (default color is green).
Note: A Surface List is not required for the Planar option.
If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the surfaces

specified in Surface List below from the ☞ More Help:
database.
• Creating Chained Curves (p. 131)
• Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or Paver
(p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 3: Finite Element Modeling
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Surface Option

Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Surface/Trimmed/Surface option which is created from
chained Curve 22 for the outer loop, chained Curve 21 for the inner loop and Surface 2 for the
parent surface. Notice that Delete Outer and Inner Loop and Delete Constituent Surface are
pressed in and Curves 21 and 22 and Surface 2 are deleted.
Before:
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: 16
Surface
Method: Trimmed
19
3
21 22
12
Option: Surface
Auto Chain...
Use All Edge Vertices Y
X Z 17
Delete Outer Loop
Outer Loop List

Curve 22
After:
Delete Inner Loops
Inner Loop List

16
Curve 21
23
Delete Constituent Surface 24

19 25
20 30 3
Surface List 26
29
Surface 2 27 22
28
12
-Apply-
21
Y
X Z
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Planar Option

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Surface/Trimmed/Planar option which is created from
chained Curve 14 for the outer loop and chained Curve 13 for the inner loop. Notice that Delete
Outer Loop and Delete Inner Loop are pressed in and Curves 13 and 14 are deleted.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create 14
Object: Surface
Method: Trimmed
Surface ID List
2
13 12
Option: Planar
Auto Chain.. .
Use All Edge Vertices Y
Delete Outer Loop
Z X
16
Outer Loop List
Curve 14
After:
Delete Inner Loops
18 17
Inner Loop List
Curve 13
22
-Apply-
21 2 12
20
Z X
19 16
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Auto Chain Subordinate Form

The Auto Chain form provides a more interactive, user-controllable way of creating Chain
Curves. A start curve is selected for the chain and then during the creation of the chain, if
necessary, the user will be prompted to make decisions on how to proceed by selecting the
appropriate buttons. Toggles are provided for additional control of the chain curve creation.
This subordinate form is accessible from either the Create/Curve/Chain or the
Create/Surface/Trimmed forms.
If ON, the start point of the start curve can be switched from one end of the curve to the other.
Auto Execute must be OFF. A start curve should be selected and then toggle ON and OFF to see
a white marker designating the start point.
Auto Chain Specify the existing curve or edge to use for the start curve
of a chain either by cursor selecting them or by entering the
Auto Execute IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid
Select a Start Curve 5.1.1. A Curve/Edge Select menu that appears can be used
to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
curve or edge.
If ON, a Point select box allows to specify an end point for

the chain curve. A chain curve will be created, if it reaches
Specify End Point
the end point. If OFF, the default end point is the start point.
Switch Start Point
Pause At Every Point If ON, only curves in the Current Group are selectable
Current Group Only for creating a chain.
Free Edges Only

If ON, only curves in the Current Group are selectable
Highlight Chain Creation for creating a chain.
If ON, after chain completes, the constituent curves used to
create the chain will be deleted from the database.
If ON, the created chain curve will be highlighted. Either changing the value to OFF or
picking another start curve will erase the highlight.
If ON, the OK button must be selected for each constituent curve that is
identified as the next curve in the chain. If OFF, it will automatically continue
as.far as possible before user-intervention is necessary.
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Choose Curve to Continue Identifies the curve which is chosen to continue

the chain.
Next OK
Previous Quit
Backup Stop
Delete Break
-Apply- Cancel
Next: Used to update the "Choose Curve OK: Used to finalize the selection on the curve
to Continue" databox when multiple echoed in the "Choose Curve to Continue"
choices are possible, i.e. a branch. databox and continue the auto chain
process.
Previous: Used to update "Choose Curve to Quit: Used to end the auto chain process without
Continue" databox when more than attempting to creating a chain.
two curves form a branch. Use in
conjunction with the Next button.
Backup: Used to backup one curve at a time Stop: Used to end the auto chain process and
in the list of curves that have been attempt to create a chain from the
previously selected as constituents constituent curves. (Only necessary when
for the resulting chain. pressing the Apply button did not create a
chain.)
Delete: Used to delete the curve in the Break: Used to break the curve in the "Choose
"Choose Curve to Continue" Curve to Continue" databox.
databox from the database.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Composite Option

The Create/Surface/Trimmed/Composite option provides a tool for combining surfaces into a
single trimmed surface, where the parent trimmed surfaces may have gaps or overlaps of a
specified distance, and are not required to be topologically congruent. Though the constituent
surfaces are used for all evaluations without any approximation, the resulting composite surface
is seen as a single trimmed surface by all operations that reference it, such as the Paver.
Shadow Surface Method. The method used to create a composite trimmed surface is called a
Shadow Surface Method. The best way to describe a shadow surface is to use a real life analogy.
Consider a cloud in the sky to be a shadow surface. Then the sun, being the light source behind
the cloud, creates a shadow on the planet Earth, only in the area blocked by the cloud. The same
is true of the shadow surface, except a view vector is used to determine the light direction. The
shadow itself is called an Under Surface, whose valid region is defined by where the outlines of
the shadow surface appear with respect to a given view.
The Shadow Surface itself is a collection of specified surfaces, which may have gaps or overlaps
of a specified distance, and may or may not be topologically congruent. It is bounded by outer
and inner loops, defined as closed chains of curves or surface edges.
During surface evaluations, the Under Surface is used to classify the point relative to which
constituent surface (amongst the Shadow Surface) contains it. The point is mapped to the
parameter space of that constituent surface, and the evaluation is done directly on that surface.
Creating Composite Surfaces. The steps in creating composite surfaces are, for the most part,
the same as those for creating a normal trimmed surface, with the following exceptions:
• More than one surface is specified to define the curvature (multiple parent surfaces).
• A Gap Distance parameter must be specified to define the maximum length for gaps
or overlaps.
• An appropriate view must be obtained, satisfying the following:
• Double Intersections between the Shadow Surface and the view vector must not occur.
In other words, the Shadow Surface must not wrap around on itself relative to the
current view. This is because the Under Surface is flat, and there is not necessarily a
one-to-one mapping from the Shadow Surface to the Under Surface. Surfaces that
combine to create a cylinder, therefore, cannot be used to create a single composite
surface.
• No Dead Space. Unpredictable results will occur if any portion of the Shadow Surface
does not have an Under Surface counterpart. An example of dead space would be an
area on the Shadow Surface which runs parallel to the view vector. Since this portion
has no area with respect to its projection onto the Under Surface, it will not be
represented properly in the resulting composite surface. This can cause unwanted
holes or spikes in the geometry.
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Shadow
Plane
Not Acceptable
S2
S1
Acceptable
S2
S1
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Trimmed Method - Composite Option Example

Creates Surface 5 using the Create/Surface/Trimmed/Composite option which is created from
chained Curve 5 for the outer loop, chained Curve 4 for the inner loop and Surface 1:4 for the
parent surface. Notice that Delete Outer and Inner Loop and Delete Constituent Surface are
pressed in and Curves 1 and 2 and Surfaces 1:4 are deleted.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
2 3 5
Object: Surface 10 4 11
Method: Trimmed
12 13
2
1
Surface ID List
5
7 8
3
Option:Composite 1 4 6
Auto Chain... Y
Gap Distance
Z X
0.005
Use All Edge Vertices

Delete Outer Loop
Outer Loop List

Curve 5
After:
Delete Inner Loops 2 3 5

10 11
Inner Loop List 12 13
Curve 4
5
Delete Constituent Surface
Surface List 8
Surface 1:4 1 4 6
-Apply- Y
Z X
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Creating Surfaces From Vertices (Vertex Method)

The Vertex method creates four sided surfaces from four existing point locations that define the
surface’s vertices or corners. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Vertex created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Surface ID List
If ON, MSC.Patran will allow you to specify a surface or solid
1 face in the Manifold Surface databox to manifold the new surface
onto.
Manifold
If the Manifold toggle is ON, enter the manifold surface or face
Manifold Surface for the new surface, either by entering the ID from the keyboard
(examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor selecting it
with the Surface Select menu.
Auto Execute
Surface Vertex 1 List Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not

Specify in Surface Vertex 1,2,3 and 4 Lists, the four points,
vertices, nodes or other point locations that define the surface’s
Surface Vertex 3 List vertices or corners. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard
(examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.1.1); or
cursor select them using the Point Select menu.
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Vertex Method Example

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Vertex method which is created from Points 12, 13, 14 and
Node 1. Notice that since Manifold is not on, the Manifold Surface databox is disabled.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: 1 14
Surface
Method: Vertex
Surface ID List
2
Manifold
Manifold Surface
Auto Execute Y
12 13
Surface Vertex 1 List Z X
Point 12

After:
Point 13

15 14
Point 14

Node 1
-Apply- 2
Y
12 13
Z X
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Extruding Surfaces and Solids

The Extrude method creates surfaces or solids by moving a curve or edge, or a surface or solid
face, respectively, through space along a defined axis with the option of scaling and rotating
simultaneously. This method is convenient for adding depth to a cross section, or for more
complex constructions that require the full capabilities of this form.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: <Type> Set <Type> to either: Surface or Solid.
Method: Extrude
<Type> ID List
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface or solid to
1 be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Coord 0
Origin of Scale and Rotate

[0 0 0]
Refer. Coordinate Frame is used by the Origin of Scale and
Translation Vector Rotate databox and the Translation Vector databox to express
the coordinates of the origin and vector within a specific
<1 0 0> coordinate frame. Default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord
0. Enter in Origin of Scale and Rotate, the point location of the
Sweep Parameters origin of scaling and rotation. Either enter the coordinate values
(example: [10 0 0]); or use the Point Select menu to cursor
Scale Factor define alternate point locations. Enter in Translation Vector, a
1.0 vector definition defining the direction and distance that the curve
or surface is moved through space. Either enter the coordinate
Angle values (example: <10 10 1>); or use the Vector Select menu to
0.0 cursor define the translation vector.
<Type> per <Type>
1
Auto Execute
<Type> List
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Sweep Parameters
Scale Factor Enter in Scale Factor, a scaling factor value to be applied in
1.0 the two or three directions of the surface or solid, respectively.
A scale factor of one means no scaling will take place. Enter
Angle in Angle, an optional angle value in degrees to rotate the
0.0 curve or surface about the translation vector. <Type> per
<Type> is not active or used if the PATRAN 2 Convention
<Type> per <Type> toggle is OFF. If ON, enter how many parametric bi-cubic
1 surfaces per curve or how many parametric tri-cubic solids per
curve to create.
Auto Execute
<Type> List
Specify in <Type> List, the curves or edges, or surfaces or
solid faces that you want to extrude to create the surfaces or
solids, respectively. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard
-Apply- (examples: for curves - Curve 10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1;
for surfaces - Surface 10, Solid 10.1), or cursor select them by
using the Curve or Surface Select menu.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23)

in the MSC.Patran Reference
Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is
ON which means you do not need
to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Surface Extrude Method Example

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Extrude method which is created from Curve 5. The surface
is extruded +10 units in the global Y direction.
Before:
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Extrude
Surface ID List
1
12
Coord 0 5
Y
[0 0 0] 13
X
Z
Translation Vector
<1 0 0>
Sweep Parameters After:

Scale Factor
1.0 3
Angle 4
0.0
Surface per Curve
1
Auto Execute 1
Curve List
Curve 5
-Apply- Y
1
Z X 5
2
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Extrude Method Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except that Surface 1 is extruded +10 units in
the global Y direction about an angle of 90 degrees and with a scale factor of 2. The origin of the
scale and rotation is at Point 14.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Extrude
Surface ID List
1
12
Coord 0 14
5
Origin of Scale and Rotate Y
Point 14 13
X
Translation Vector Z
<0 10 0>
Sweep Parameters After:

Scale Factor
2.0 16
Angle
90.0
Surface per Curve
1
Auto Execute 15
Curve List
2
Curve 5
-Apply-
Y 12
14
Z X
13
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Solid Extrude Method Example

Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Extrude method which is created from a face of Solid 1. The
solid is extruded +10 units in the global Y direction, with a scale factor of 2. The origin of the scale
is at Point 21.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
12
Object: Solid
Method: Extrude
15 13
Solid ID List 21
2
14
Coord 0 17

Point 21 18Y 20
Translation Vector
Z X
<0 10 0> 19
Sweep Parameters
Scale Factor After:
2.0
22
Angle
0.0 25 23
Solids per Curve
24
1
Auto Execute
2
Surface List
Solid 1.5
-Apply- 12
15 21 13
Y
14
1
17
Z X 18 20
19
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Gliding Surfaces
Gliding Surfaces with the 1 Director Curve Option
The Glide method creates biparametric surfaces by sweeping base curve along a path defined by
a set of director curves or edges.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Glide
Option:1 Director Curve If Normal Project Glide is ON, MSC.Patran avoids twisting
the surface. One degree-of-freedom of motion is eliminated. If
Glide Input Options Fixed Glide is ON, MSC.Patran uses “fixed” logic which
basically drags the director curve along the base curve surface
◆ Fixed Glide
without rotating. Three degrees-of-freedom of motion are
◆
◆ Normal Project Glide eliminated.
Sweep Parameters Enter an optional scale factor value to be applied to the

director curve during the glide. A default of 1 means no
Scale Factor change will occur in the size of the director curve during the
1.0 glide.

Director Curve List means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Base Curve List Specify in Director Curve List, the curve or edge that will act
as the Glide’s director curve. Specify in Base Curve List, one
or more base curves or edges for surfaces. Either enter the
IDs from the keyboard (examples: for curves - Curve 1:10,
Surface 10.1 11.1; for surfaces - Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or
cursor select the curves or edges, or the surfaces or faces
-Apply- using the Curve or Surface Select menu.
☞ More Help:
• Gliding Surfaces with
the 2 Director Curve
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Surface Glide Method - 1 Director Curve Example

Creates Surfaces 2 through 4 using the Create/Glide method which is created from Curve 10 for
the Director Curve and Curves 11, 13 and 14 for the Base Curves. The scale is set to 1.0 and Fixed
Glide is pressed in.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create 16
Object: Surface
Method: Glide
10
Surface ID List
2
Option:1 Director Curve

12
Glide Input Options 11
18
13
◆ Fixed Glide 19
Y
◆
◆ Normal Project Glide 14
Z X
Sweep Parameters 17
Scale Factor
1.0 After:
Auto Execute 16
20
Director Curve List
21
Curve 10
Base Curve List 10

2 22
Curve 11 13 14 3
4
-Apply-
12
11
18
13
Y 19
14
Z X
17
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Gliding Surfaces with the 2 Director Curve Option

This option sweeps a base curve along a path defined by a pair of director curves. Automatic
scaling is optional.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Glide
2
If this toggle is ON, the base curve will automatically be scaled

Option:2 Director Curve to fit between the two director curves, If OFF, no scaling will
occur.
Scale Base Curve
Director Curve 1 List means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Director Curve 2 List Director Curve 1 List and Director Curve 2 List provide a
moving local coordinate system which provides for sweeping
and scaling of the base curve. The Base Curve is swept
along the two director curves. It does not need to be attached
Base Curve List
to either director. A copy will be transformed into its
appropriate position for exclusive used by the surface.
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Surface Glide Method - 2 Director Curve Example

Creates Surface 1 by using Curves 1 and 2 as the director curves and Curve 3 as the base curve
to glide along.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Glide
Surface ID List
3 1 2
1 4
2
6 5
1 3
Option:2 Director Curve
Scale Base Curve

Auto Execute
Y
Director Curve 1 List Z X
Curve 1
Director Curve 2 List
Curve 2
After:
Base Curve List
Curve 3
-Apply-
3 1
6 1
5
1 2
2 4
Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Surfaces and Solids Using the Normal Method

The Normal method creates parametric bi-cubic surfaces or solids which are defined by a set of
base curves or surfaces, respectively, and an offset distance from those curves or surfaces in the
direction of the curvature. The offset may be constant or have a varying thickness.
Geometry
Set <Type> to either Surface or Solid.
Action: Create
Object: Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface or solid
<Type>
to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Method: Normal Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. If more than one
ID is listed, the thickness of each surface or solid is based on
dividing the number of surfaces or solids into the thickness
<Type> ID List value.
1
If Constant Thickness is ON, a single thickness value is
Thickness Input Options entered in the Thickness databox below (not shown here) which
◆
◆ Constant Thickness represents a constant offset distance for the Normal.
◆ Varying Thicknesses
If Varying Thickness is ON, you must enter two thickness values
Thickness at u=0; v=0
for surfaces and four thickness values for solids at the parametric
1.0 ξ 1 ( u ) and ξ 2 ( v ) coordinate locations shown on the form. (The
Thickness at u=0; v=1 form here shows the thickness databoxes for creating a surface.)
1.0
<Type> per <Type>
1
CHAPTER 4 2
Create Actions
Shown only for creating surfaces.

If Frenet Frame is ON, MSC.Patran uses a Frenet Frame in which the surfaces are blended together across
the contiguous edges, provided the edges have the same ξ 1 ( u ) directions. If Construction Point is ON,
enter the point location in the Construction Point databox, which defines the offset or thickness direction.
The direction is measured from the first point of the first curve given in Curve List, to the construction point
location. Either enter the ID from the keyboard (examples: Point 10, Node 100, Curve 12.1); or cursor select
the point location by using the Point Select menu.

1.0
1.0
<Type> per <Type>
1 Active if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. If ON, specify the
number of parametric bi-cubic surfaces or parametric tri-cubic
Construction Point Options solids to create from each curve or surface specified in <Type>
List below.
◆ Frenet Frame
◆
◆ Construction Point
Construction Point If ON, MSC.Patran will reverse the parametric ξ1 direction for
the base curves listed in Curve List below.
Flip <Type> Normal

need to chose the Apply button to execute the form.
<Type> List
☞ More Help:
Specify in <Type> List, the curves or edges, or the • Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
surfaces or faces that you want to create surfaces or Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions
solids from, respectively. Either enter the IDs from • Topology (p. 10)
the keyboard (examples: for curves - Curve 10,
Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1; for surfaces - Surface 10,
Solid 10.1), or cursor select them by using the Curve
or Surface Select menu.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Normal Method Example

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Normal method which is created from Curve 5. It has a
varying thickness of 0.75 at ξ 1 = 0 and x2=0 and a thickness of 2.0 at x1=0 and x2=1. Notice that
the parametric direction is on.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
13
Object: Surface
Method: Normal
5
Surface ID List
2
Thickness Input Options

◆
◆ Constant Thickness
1
Thickness at u=0; v=0 Y
0.75
Thickness at u=0; v=1 Z X 12
2.0
Surfaces per Curve
1
After:
Construction Point Options 15

◆ Frenet Frame
◆
◆ Construction Point
Construction Point
Flip Curve Normal

Auto Execute 2
13
Curve List
Curve 5 5
Y
-Apply- Z X 11
122 14
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Surface Normal Method Example

Creates Surface 2 which is created from an edge of Surface 1. It has a constant thickness of 0.25
and the normal direction is defined by a construction point, Point 9. Notice that the normal
direction is measured from the first vertex of the edge (Point 5) to Point 9.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface 9
Method: Normal
Surface ID List 1
2
Thickness Input Options 1

◆ Constant Thickness 5
◆
Y 2
Thickness
0.25 6
Z
Surfaces per Curve X
1
Construction Point Options

After:
◆
◆ Frenet Frame
◆ Construction Point 9
Construction Point
2
Point 9
Flip Curve Normal 10 1
Auto Execute
Curve List
5 11
Surface 1.2
1
Y 6
2
Z
X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Normal Method Example

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Normal method which is created from Surface 1 and has a
thickness of 0.5. Notice that since PATRAN 2 Convention is not pressed in, the Solids per Surface
databox is disabled.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: 5
Normal
Solid ID List
1 1 6
1
◆
◆ Varying Thicknesses 4
Y
Thickness
0.5 Z X
Solids per Surface

1
After:
Flip Surface Normal
Auto Execute
8
Surface List
Surface 1
5
-Apply- 7 9
1
1 6
1
10
Y
4
Z X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
This example is similar to the previous example, except that the thickness is -0.5 instead of +0.5.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Normal 5
Solid ID List
1 1
1 6
◆
◆ Varying Thicknesses 4
Y
Thickness
Z X
-0.5
Solids per Surface

1
After:
Flip Surface Normal
5
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1 10
1 6
1
-Apply- 1
7 9
4
Y
8
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Normal Method From a Face Example

Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Normal method which is created from a face of Solid 1 and has
a thickness of 0.25.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
22
Object: Solid
Method: Normal 23
Solid ID List
3 2
2 20
1 1 18
21
◆ Constant Thickness 19
◆
12 Y
Thickness
0.25 Z X
17
Solids per Surface
1
After:
Flip Surface Normal
24
Auto Execute
322 2
Surface List 1 25
Solid 1.6
2 23
-Apply- 27
3 2
20
26 18
11
21
19
Y
12
Z X
17
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Surfaces from a Surface Mesh (Mesh Method)

The Mesh method creates a surface from a congruent 2-D mesh. Vertices can be defined on the
surface boundary by selecting nodes in the Outer Corner Nodes or Additional Vertex Nodes
listboxes.
Every edge of the surface will have at least one node. If no node is selected to identify a vertex,
then one will be selected automatically. The nodes entered in the Outer Corner Node listbox will
define the parametrization of the surface and will also be a vertex. If no nodes are selected, 4
appropriate nodes will be selected automatically. Also the 4 nodes selected should be on the
outer loop. Additional vertices can be defined by selecting nodes in the Additional Vertex Nodes
listbox.
The longest free edge loop will be the outer loop of the surface. The holes inside the mesh can be
preserved or closed by invoking the options in the Inner Loop Options pull-down menu. When
few of the inner holes need to be preserved Inner Loop Options is set to Select. Identify the holes
by selecting at least 1 node on the hole. If selected, nodes on the outer loop and those not on the
free boundary, will be ignored.
The parametrization of the surface can also be improved by setting Surface Creation Methods to
Better Parametrization. However, if speed were important and the mesh used to create the
surface is of poor quality, selecting the Fast option under the Surface Creation Methods pull-
down menu would create a better surface.
Tessellated Surface is a representation of the underlying mesh that is used to create it. Therefore
the surface is piecewise planar and the normals are not continuous. The surface is primarily
generated to facilitate the meshing operation on complex surface models. Though these surfaces
support most of the geometry operations, it has limitations due to the nature of the surface.
To create a tessellated surface the mesh should have the following characteristics:
• Congruent 2-D elements
• Should be one connected set of elements
• No more than 2 elements should share the same 2 nodes
• The outer or inner loop should not intersect.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Created Tessellated Surface from Geometry Form

Figure 4-2
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Mesh
Surface ID List
9
Delete Original Elements If toggled ON, the elements selected will be deleted when
the surface is created successfully.
Element List
Elm 1:322 364:445
Congruent element list that defines the surface.
Select four corner nodes that define the four vertices of

the resulting green surface or the parent surface of a
Outer Corner Nodes trimmed surface. If any of the boxes are left empty, one
1 Node 292 2 Node 288 will be selected automatically.
3 Node 273 4 Node 253

If there are more than four vertices for the surface, the
additional nodes can be listed in the Additional Vertex
Nodes listbox.
Additional Vertex Nodes
Node 50 34 303
By setting Inner Loop Options to All, None or Select, the
holes in the resulting surface can be defined.
Inner Loop Options: All Note: When the Inner Loop Options is set to Select, a
node listbox opens. Here the holes to be preserved can
be identified by the nodes on its edge. Any nodes not
Surface Creation Methods
on the hole edge or on the outer boundary will be
Fast ignored.
-Apply-
By selecting the surface creation option, emphasis can

be placed on parametrization or speed.
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Midsurfaces
Creating Midsurfaces with the Automatic Option
This form is used to create a Midsurface using the Automatic Method.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Method: Midsurface
Surface ID List
1 Specify the midsurface option:
1. Automatic
2. Manual
Max. Thickness Specify the maximum distance the solid face pairs can be apart
in order to calculate a midsurface between (wall thickness)
0.01
Solid List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the solid(s) to create a midsurface from either by cursor

Example: Solid 10 11. The Solid select menu that appears can
-Apply- be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
solid.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Create Midsurface Automatic Example

Create surfaces 1t6 by automatically computing the midsurfaces of solid 1 where the solid wall
thickness is less than 8.1.
Geometry
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Midsurface
Surface ID List
1
1
Max. Thickness
8.1
Auto Execute
Z
Solid List
Y
Solid 1 X
After:
-Apply-
5
3
1 6
4
1
Z
Y
X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Midsurfaces with the Manual Option

This form is used to create a Midsurface using the Manual Method. The resulting midsurface
will be trimmed to the domain of the parent surface pairs.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Surface created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Method: Midsurface
Surface ID List
Specify the midsurface option:
1 1. Automatic
2. Manual
First Surface Set
Specify the first surface set of the pair to create a midsurface

Offset Surface Set from either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Surface 1, Solid 1.1. The Surface
select menu that appears can be used to define how you want
to cursor select the appropriate surface.
-Apply- Specify the offset surface set of the pair to create a midsurface
from either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Surface 2, Solid 1.2. The Surface
select menu that appears can be used to define how you want
to cursor select the appropriate surface.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Create Midsurface Manual Example

Create surfaces 1t3 by manually selecting solid faces Solid 1.5 and Solid 1.9, Solid 1.4 and Solid
1.8, Solid 1.7 and Solid 1.10 as face pairs to create the midsurfaces from.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Surface
Method: Midsurface
Surface ID List
1
Auto Execute
Solid Face List
Solid 1.5 1.4 1.7
Y
Offset Solid Face List
Solid 1.9 1.8 1.10 Z X
After:
-Apply-
1 3
Z X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Solid Primitives

Creating a Solid Block
This form is used to create a solid block with user input a point, length, width, height, and
reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the
input target solid using the created block as the tool solid.
Geometry
Specify the Solid Primitive type to create:
Action: Create
1. Block
Object: Solid 2. Cylinder
Method: Primitive 3. Cone
4. Sphere
5. Torus
Solid ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
Block Parameters Specify the length, width, and height of the block.
X Length List
1.0
Y Length List
1.0
Z Length List
1.0 If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the
selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a
boolean operation on with the created block.
Modify Solid
Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the block.
Boolean Operation...
Default is the global coord 0.
Refer. Coordinate Frame By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Coord 0 Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
Auto Execute Specify the base origin point of the block. Under The Refer.
Coordinate Frame, the created block will start at this location
Base Origin Point List extending length in x-axis, width in y-axis, and height in z-axis. If
[0 0 0] the base origin point is an [x,y,z] definition, the origin of the
block will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate Frame.
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creates solid blocks 1 and 2 at [0 0 0] and [2 0 0] with parameters of X=1.0, Y=1.0, Z=1.0 and
X=2.0, Y=2.0, Z=2.0 respectively.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive
Solid ID List
1
Block Parameters
X Length List
1.0 2.0
Y
Y Length List
Z X
1.0 2.0
Z Length List
1.0 2.0 After:
Modify Solid

Coord 0
Auto Execute
Base Origin Point List
[0 0 0] [2 0 0]
Y
-Apply-
Z X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creates solid block 1 at [-1 .5 .5] with parameters of X=5.0, Y=1.0, Z=1.0 while performing a
boolean add operation with solid 1.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive
1
Solid ID List
2
Block Parameters
X Length List
5.0
Y Length List Y
1.0 Z X
Z Length List
1.0 After:
Modify Solid

Coord 0
Auto Execute
Base Origin Point List
[-1 .5 .5] Boolean Operation
Geometry
-Apply- Y
X
Target Solid List Z
Solid 1
Update Solid Mesh /LBC(ON)
OK Cancel
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Solid Cylinder

This form is used to create a solid cylinder with user input a point, height, radius, optional
thickness, and optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform
boolean operation with the input target solid using the created cylinder as the tool solid.
Geometry
Action: Specify the Solid Primitive type to create:
Create
1. Block
Object: Solid
2. Cylinder
4. Sphere
5. Torus
Cylinder Parameters Specify the height, radius, and optional thickness which is used
Height List to shell the cylinder.
1.0 Default = 0.0 which designates no shelling.
Radius List
1.0
[Thickness List]
0.0 If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the
boolean operation on with the created cylinder.
Modify Solid
Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the
cylinder. Default is the global coord 0.
Refer. Coordinate Frame By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Coord 0 need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Auto Execute Specify the base center point and the axis of the cylinder.
If the base center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of the
Base Center Point List cylinder will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate Frame.
The input Axis is not with reference to the Refer. Coordinate
[0 0 0]
Frame, therefore, the cylinder axis will be defined by the absolute
value of the Axis specified, where the default is the z axis of
Axis List Coord 0.
Coord 0.3
☞ More Help:
-Apply- • Select Menu (p. 31) in the
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creates solid cylinder 1 at point 1with parameters of Height=3.0, Radius=0.25, along X axis.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive
Solid ID List
1
1
Cylinder Parameters
Height List
3.0
Y
Radius List
0.25 Z X
[Thickness List]
0.0 After:
Modify Solid

Coord 0
Auto Execute
Base Center Point List
Point 1
Axis List
Y
Coord 0.1
Z X
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creates Solid Cylinder 1 at point 1 with parameters Height=3.0, Radius=0.25, a wall thickness =
0.125 along X axis while performing a boolean add operation with solid 1.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
8
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive 9
5
1
Solid ID List
2
Cylinder Parameters
6
Height List 3
3.0
Y 2
Radius List
Z X
0.25
[Thickness List]
0.125 After:
Modify Solid
8
9
5
4
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Base Center Point ListBoolean Operation
3
point 1 Geometry
2
Axis List
Y
Coord 0.1
Target Solid List Z X
Solid 1
-Apply-
OK Cancel
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Solid Sphere

This form is used to create a solid sphere with user input a point, radius, and optional reference
coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target
solid using the created sphere as the tool solid.
Geometry
Action: Create Specify the Solid Primitive type to create:
1. Block
Object: Solid
2. Cylinder
4. Sphere
5. Torus
Sphere Parameters
Specify the radius of the sphere
Radius List
1.0
Modify Solid
If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the
Boolean Operation... selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a
boolean operation on with the created sphere.
Refer. Coordinate Frame Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the
sphere. Default is the global coord 0.
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Center Point List Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
[0 0 0]
Axis List Specify the center point and the axis of the sphere.
Coord 0.3 If the center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of the
sphere will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate
Frame. The input Axis is not with reference to the Refer.
Coordinate Frame, therefore, the sphere axis will be defined by
-Apply- the absolute value of the Axis specified, where the default is the
z axis of Coord 0.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creates Solid Sphere 1 at [0 0 0] with a Radius of 1.0 along the Z axis.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive
Solid ID List
1
Sphere Parameters
Radius List
1.0
Y
Modify Solid Z X

After:
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Center Point List
[0 0 0]
Axis List
Coord 0.3
-Apply-
Z X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creates Solid Sphere 1 at point 1with a Radius of 0.5 along the Y axis while performing a boolean
add operation with solid 1.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive
Solid ID List
2
Sphere Parameters
Radius List
0.5
Y
Modify Solid Z X

After:
Coord 0
Auto Execute
Center Point List
Point 1
Axis List
Coord 0.2
Boolean Operation
Geometry
-Apply-
Target Solid List Z X
Solid 1
OK Cancel
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Solid Cone

This form is used to create a solid cone with user input a point, base radius, top radius, height,
optional thickness, and optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to
perform boolean operation with the input target solid using the created cone as the tool solid.
Geometry Specify the Solid Primitive type to create:

Action: Create 1. Block
Object: 2. Cylinder
Solid
3. Cone
Method: Primitive
4. Sphere
5. Torus
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be

Solid ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Cone Parameters Specify the height, top radius, bottom radius, and optional
Height List thickness. The optional thickness is used to create a hollow
cone.
1.0
Default = 0.0 which designates no hollowing.
Base Radius List
1.0
Top Radius List

0.5
If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the
[Thickness List] selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a
boolean operation on with the created cone.
0.0
Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the cone.

Modify Solid Default is the global coord 0.
Boolean Operation... By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Refer. Coordinate Frame need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Coord 0
Specify the base center point and the axis of the cone.
If the base center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of
Auto Execute the cone will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate
Frame. The input Axis is not with reference to the Refer.
Base Center Point List Coordinate Frame, therefore, the cone axis will be defined by
the absolute value of the Axis specified, where the default is
[0 0 0] the z axis of Coord 0.
Axis List
Coord 0.3
☞ More Help:
-Apply-
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creates Solid Cone 1 at [0 0 0] and Cone 2 at [3 0 0] along the Z axis with parameters Height=2.0,
Base Radius=1.0, Top Radius=0.5 and Thickness for Cone 1=0.0 and Thickness for Cone 2=0.125
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive
Solid ID List
1
Cone Parameters
Height List
2.0
Y
Base Radius List
1.0 Z X
Top Radius List

0.5 After:
[Thickness List]
0.0 0.125
Modify Solid

Coord 0
Auto Execute
Y
[0 0 0] [3 0 0]
Z X
Axis List
Coord 0.3
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creates Solid Cones 1 and 2 at [.5 1 .5] along the Y axis with parameters Height=-5.0, Base
Radius=0.25, Top Radius=0.0625 while performing a boolean add operation with Solid 1 and 2.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive 1
Solid ID List
1
Cone Parameters
Height List 2
2.0
Y
Base Radius List
Z X
1.0
Top Radius List

0.5 After:
[Thickness List]
0.0 0.125
Modify Solid

Coord 0
Boolean Operation
Auto Execute Geometry
[0 0 0] [3 0 0] Y
Axis List Target Solid List Z X
Coord 0.3 Solid 1 2

-Apply-
OK Cancel
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Solid Torus

This form is used to create a solid torus with user input a point, major radius, minor radius, and
optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation
with the input target solid using the created torus as the tool solid.
Geometry Specify the Solid Primitive type to create:

1. Block
Action: Create
2. Cylinder
Object: Solid 3. Cone
Method: Primitive 4. Sphere
5. Torus

Solid ID List
1
Specify the major radius and minor radius.
Torus Parameters
Major Radius List
1.0
Minor Radius List

0.5
Modify Solid If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the
Boolean Operation... boolean operation on with the created torus.
Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the torus.

Refer. Coordinate Frame Default is the global coord 0.
Coord 0
Center Point List
Specify the center point and the axis of the torus.
[0 0 0] If the center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of the torus
will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate Frame. The
Axis List input Axis is not with reference to the Refer. Coordinate Frame,
therefore, the torus axis will be defined by the absolute value of
Coord 0.3
the Axis specified, where the default is the z axis of Coord 0.
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creates Solid Torus 1 and 2 at [0 0 0] with parameters Major Radius=1.0, Minor Radius=0.5 and
Torus 1 along the X axis and Torus 2 along the Y axis.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive
Solid ID List
1
Torus Parameters
Major Radius List
1.0
Y
Minor Radius List
0.5 Z X
Modify Solid
After:

Coord 0
Auto Execute
Center Point List
[0 0 0]
Axis List
Coord 0.1 0.2
Y
-Apply-
Z X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creates Solid Torus 1 at [0 0 0] along the Z axis with parameters Major Radius=1.0, Minor
Radius=0.25 while performing a boolean add operation with Solid 1.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Primitive
Solid ID List
2
Torus Parameters
Major Radius List
1.0
Y
Minor Radius List
0.25 Z X
Modify Solid
After:

Coord 0
Auto Execute
Center Point List
[0 0 0]
Axis List Boolean Operation

Geometry
Coord 0.3
Y
-Apply-
Target Solid List
Z X
Solid 1
OK Cancel
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Boolean operation during primitive creation

This form is used to perform a Solid boolean operation on an existing solid during the creation
of a new primitive solid. This is a child form of the parent Create,Solid,Primitive form.
Boolean Operation Specify the boolean operation type:

Geometry
1. Add
2. Subtract
3. Intersect
Target Solid List
Specify the solid to perform a boolean operation on either by
cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
Update Solid Mesh /LBC(ON) solids.
Cancel This button, by default is disabled since updates of an existing

OK
mesh and LBC on a parasolid solid will occur automatically
after a boolean operation. If the Geometry Preference toggle,
Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off, then this button will
be enabled and the label will be, “Update Solid Mesh/LBC”.
Pressing this button after the boolean operation is complete will
update the existing mesh on the target solid.
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Solids from Surfaces (Surface Method)

Creating Solids from Two Surfaces
The Surface method with the 2 Surface option, creates solids between two surfaces or solid faces.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Surface Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
Solid ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1
Option: 2 Surface
Deactivated and not used for the 2 Surface option.
◆
◆ Chord Length If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ1 and ξ2
directions. The ξ1 and ξ2 directions are defined by the surface’s
◆ Uniform
connectivity. On the Geometric Properties form under the
menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric you can plot the ξ1
Auto Align Orientations direction of the new curves by turning the Parametric Direction
toggle ON.
Auto Execute
Starting Surface List Specify the surfaces or solid faces for the surfaces to be
created, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard
(examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1), or cursor define the
surface locations using the Select Menu (p. 31) in the
Ending Surface List MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the Cubic Geometry (p. 57)
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Basic Functions is ON which means you do Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions
not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Surface Method With 2 Surface Option Example

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Surface/2 Surface option. The solid is created between Surfaces
2 and 3.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
7
Object: Solid 10
11 6
Method: Surface
3
Solid ID List
1
9
2
Option: 2 Surface 12
◆
◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform Y
8
Z X
Auto Align Orientations
5
Auto Execute
Starting Surface List After:
Surface 2
7
Ending Surface List 10
11 6
Surface 3
3
-Apply-
1
9
2
12
Y
8
Z X
5
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Surface/2 Surface option. The solid is created between Surface
2 and a surface defined by Curves 5 and 6, using the Surface select menu icon listed below.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
22
6
Object: Solid
Method: 23
Surface
Solid ID List
1 20
5 18
19
◆
◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform 12 Y
Z X
17
Auto Execute
Starting Surface List
After:
Surface 2

6
Construct2CurvesSurface(Eval
23
-Apply-
20
5 1 18
21
19
2
12 Y
Surface Select Menu Icon Z X

17
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Solids from Three Surfaces (Surface Method)

The Surface method with the 3 Surface option creates solids that pass through three existing
surfaces or solid faces.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Surface

Option: 3 Surface defining the new solid is based on the chord length distances
Parameterization Method relative to the location of the solid’s starting, middle and ending
surfaces. This means the solid may or may not be uniformly
◆
◆ Chord Length parameterized, depending on where the surfaces are located. If
◆ Uniform Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points defining
the solid will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the
surfaces are located. That is, the solid will be always uniformly
Auto Align Orientations parameterized.
Auto Execute
If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ1 and ξ2
Starting Surface List directions before creating the solid. The ξ1 and ξ2 directions are
defined by the surface’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ1 direction
of the new curves by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on
Middle Surface List the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display
Ending Surface List
-Apply-
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Starting Surface List the form.
Middle Surface List Specify in Starting, Middle and Ending Surface Lists, the
surfaces or solid faces for the new solids to pass through,
either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples:
Ending Surface List Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor defining the surface
locations using the Surface Select menu.

PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Surface/3 Surface option. The solid is created between a face
of Solid 1, Surface 2 and a surface defined by Curves 5 and 6 by using the Surface select menu
icon listed below.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create 22 6
23
Object: Solid 20 5
21
Method: Surface 18
2 19
Solid ID List 12
17
2
30
◆ 26
◆ Chord Length
◆ Uniform Y 1
28
Auto Align Orientations Z X 29
24
25
Auto Execute
Solid 1.2 After:
Middle Surface List 22 6
23
Surface 2 20 5
21
Ending Surface List
18
Construct2CurveSurface(Eval 2 19
12
17
-Apply-
31
30
27
26
Y 1
Surface Select Menu Icon 28

Z X 29
24
25
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Solids from Four Surfaces (Surface Method)

The Surface method using the 4 Surface option creates solids that pass through four existing
surfaces or solid faces.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Surface
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created.
See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Solid ID List Part 1: Basic Functions.
1

Option: 4 Surface defining the new solid is based on the chord length distances
relative to the location of the solid’s starting, second, third and
Parameterization Method ending surfaces. This means the solid may or may not be
◆
◆ Chord Length uniformly parameterized, depending on where the surfaces are
located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the
◆ Uniform points defining the solid will be uniformly spaced, regardless of
where the surfaces are located. That is, the solid will be always
Auto Align Orientations uniformly parameterized.
Auto Execute
Starting Surface List If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ1 and ξ2
directions before creating the solid. The ξ1 and ξ2 directions are
Second Surface List of the new curves by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on
the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display
Third Surface List
Ending Surface List
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Starting Surface List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Second Surface List
Specify the surfaces or solid faces for the new solids to pass
Third Surface List through, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples:
Surface 10, Solid 10.1), or by cursor defining the surface
locations using the Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran
Ending Surface List

CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions

Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Surface/4 Surface option. The solid is created between a face
of Solid 1, Surface 2, a surface defined by Curves 5 and 6 and Surface 3.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create 35
3 34
Object: 32
Solid 33
Method: Surface
22 6
23
Solid ID List 20 5
21
2 18
2 19
12
30
◆
◆ Chord Length 27
26
◆ Uniform Y
1
28
Auto Align Orientations Z X 29
24
25
Auto Execute
After:
Solid 1.2
35
Second Surface List 3 34
32
Surface 2 33
Third Surface List

22 6
Construct2CurveSurface(Eval 23
20 5
21
18
Surface 3 2 19
12
17
-Apply- 31
30
27
26
Y
1
28
Z X 29
24
25
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Solids with the N Surface Option

The Surface method using the N-Surfaces option creates solids that pass through any number of
existing surfaces or solid faces.
Geometry
Action: Create
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created.
Object: Solid See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Basic Functions.
Method: Surface
Solid ID List
1 If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points
defining the new solid is based on the chord length distances
Option: N-Surfaces relative to the location of the surfaces specified in Surface List.
This means the solid may or may not be uniformly parameterized,
Parameterization Method depending on where the surfaces are located. If Uniform is ON,
◆
◆ Chord Length the parametric coordinates of the points defining the solid will be
uniformly spaced, regardless of where the surfaces are located.
◆ Uniform That is, the solid will be always uniformly parameterized.

If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ1 and ξ2
Surface List directions before creating the solid. The ξ1 and ξ2 directions are
of the new curves by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on
the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display
-Apply-
Specify in Surface List, two or more surfaces or faces that the solid
will pass through. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard
(examples: Surface 1:10, Solid 10.2 11.1), or cursor select the
surfaces or faces using the Surface Select menu.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Solid Surface Method with N-Surfaces Option Example

Creates Solid1 using the Create/Surface/N-Surfaces option. The solid is created between
Surfaces 2, 7, 8, 9 and 10.
Before:
Geometry 42
Action: Create 41
39
Object: Solid 38
Method: 36
Surface 10 35
Solid ID List 9
33
1
8 32
43
Option:N-Surfaces 40
14
28 13
7
Parameterization Method 24 37
Y 20
◆
◆ Chord Length 2 34
◆ Uniform X 16
Z
12 15
Surface List
After:
Surface 2 7:10
42
41
-Apply- 39
38
36
10 35
9
33
8 32
1
43
40
28 13
7 14
24 37
Y 20
2 34
X 16
Z
12 15
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid

The B-rep method creates boundary represented solids by specifying a list of surfaces or solid
faces that form a closed topologically congruent volume. B-rep solids can only be meshed with
MSC.Patran’s TetMesh. For more information, see Gliding Solids (p. 348).
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: B-rep Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
Solid ID List
1
If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the surfaces from the
database that are specified in Surface List.

Surface List means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
-Apply- Specify in Surface List, a set of surfaces or solid faces that

form a closed volume. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard
(examples: Surface 1:10, Solid 10.2 11.1), or cursor select the
surfaces or faces using the Surface Select menu that appears.
☞ More Help:
Functions
• B-rep Solid (p. 24)
• Building B-rep Solids (p. 40)
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Solid B-rep Method Example

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Solid/B-rep method which is created from Surfaces 2, 3, 4, and
8 through 14. Notice that since Delete Original Surfaces is pressed in, the surfaces are deleted.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: 4
Solid
2
8 3
Method: B-rep
Solid ID List
14
1 9
Delete Original Surfaces 11

13
Auto Execute 10
Surface List
Y
Surface 2 3 4 8:14 12
Z X
-Apply-
After:
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating a Decomposed Solid

The Decompose method creates solids from two opposing solid faces by choosing four vertex
locations on each face and then a solid is created from the two decomposed faces.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Decompose
Solid ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created.
See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
2
Part 1: Basic Functions.
Solid Faces
◆ Face 1
◆
◆ Face 2 The switch to select/show the two Solid Faces.
Solid Face 1
Enter the first solid face to decompose either by entering the ID
from the keyboard (example: Solid 1.1); or by cursor selecting
the solid face.
Auto Execute
Face Vertex 1 List
Face Vertex 2 List Enter in the Face Vertex 1,2,3 and 4 listboxes, the four vertices
that will define the surface from which the new solid will be created
from. Use the Vertex Select menu that appears on the bottom to
cursor select the vertices.
Face Vertex 3 List
Face Vertex 4 List

☞ More Help:
-Apply- • Topology (p. 10)
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Solid Decompose Method with Face 1 Option Example

Creates Solid 2 by selecting four points on solid face Solid 1.6 and four points on solid face Solid
1.5.
Geometry Step 1:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
2
Method: Decompose
3
Solid ID List 6
2 7
Solid Faces 1
◆ Face 1 1
◆
◆ Face 2
Y 4
5
Solid Face 1 Z X 8
Solid 1.6
Auto Execute
Face Vertex 1 List
1.6(u0.250000)(v0.750000)
Face Vertex 2 List

1.6(u0.788091)(v0.706851)
Face Vertex 3 List

1.6(u0.727486)(v0.239363)
Face Vertex 4 List

1.6(u0.239563)(v0.283655)
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Decompose Method with Face 2 Option Example

Creates Solid 2 by selecting four points on solid face Solid 1.6 and four points on solid face Solid
1.6.
Geometry
Step 2:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
2
Method: Decompose
3
6
Solid ID List
2 7
Solid Faces 1
◆ Face 1 1
◆
◆ Face 2
Y 4
5
Solid Face 2 Z X 8
Solid 1.5
Auto Execute
Face Vertex 1 List
Final Step:
1.5(u0.314087)(v0.722847)
Face Vertex 2 List

1.5(u0.707491)(v0.666261) 2
Face Vertex 3 List 3
1.5(u0.658263)(v0.286671) 6 13
16
Face Vertex 4 List 7
9 2
1.5(u0.291373)(v0.250680)
12 14 15
1
-Apply- 10
Y 11 4
5
Z X 8
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Solids from Faces

The Face method creates a solid from five or six surfaces or solid faces which define the solid’s
exterior faces. The surfaces or faces can be in any order and they can have any parametric
orientation, but they must define a valid exterior of a solid.
Geometry
Action: Create Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
Object: Solid Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Method: Face
Solid ID List
1
Set this option to 5 Face or 6 Face.

Option: 6 Face
Solid Face 1 List means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Solid Face 2 List

Specify in the Solid Face Lists, the list of surfaces or solid
faces that the solid will be created from. Depending if the form
is set to the 5 Face or 6 Face option, you will see five or six
Solid Face 3 List Solid Face List boxes. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard
(examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or cursor select them
using the Surface Select menu.
Solid Face 4 List
Solid Face 5 List
☞ More Help:
Solid Face 6 List • Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Face Method With 6 Faces Example

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Face method which is created from Surfaces 2 through 7. The
option is set to 6 Face.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
5
Method: Face
Solid ID List
1 4
7
6
Option: 6 Face
3
Auto Execute
Solid Face 1 List
Y
Surface 2 2
Solid Face 2 List Z X
Surface 6
Solid Face 3 List

After:
Surface 4
Solid Face 4 List

Surface 5
Solid Face 5 List

Surface 7
Solid Face 6 List

1
Surface 3
-Apply-
Z X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Solid Face Method With 5 Faces Example

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Face method which is created from Surfaces 1 through 5. The
option is set to 5 Face.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
3
Object: Solid
Method: Face 5
1
Solid ID List 4 3
1 2
1 2
5
Option: 5 Face
Y 4 6
Auto Execute
Solid Face 1 List Z X
Surface 1
Solid Face 2 List

Surface 3
Solid Face 3 List After:

Surface 2
3
Solid Face 4 List
Surface 4
5
Solid Face 5 List
Surface 5 1
1 2
-Apply-
Y 4 6
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Solids from Vertices (Vertex Method)

The Vertex method creates parametric tri-cubic solids by specifying a list of eight point locations
that represent the eight vertices of the new solid. The point locations can be points, vertices,
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Vertex created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Solid ID List
1

Solid Vertex 1 List
the form.
Solid Vertex 2 List
Solid Vertex 3 List

Specify in Solid Vertex 1-8 Lists, the list of points, vertices,
nodes or other point locations that the solid will be created
Solid Vertex 4 List from. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Point
10, Curve 10.1, Node 20); or cursor select them using the Point
Select menu.
Solid Vertex 5 List
Solid Vertex 6 List
Solid Vertex 7 List
Solid Vertex 8 List

☞ More Help:
-Apply-
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Solid Vertex Method Example

Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Vertex method which is created from Points 12 through 15 and
Nodes 34, 44, 254 and 264.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create 14
13
15
Object: Solid
12
Method: Vertex
Solid ID List
2
Auto Execute
Solid Vertex 1 List
Point 12
Solid Vertex 2 List Y

Point 13
Z X
Solid Vertex 3 List
Point 14
Solid Vertex 4 List After:

Point 15
13 14
Solid Vertex 5 List 15
Node 34
12
Solid Vertex 6 List
1
Node 44 19
Solid Vertex 7 List
Node 254 16
18
Solid Vertex 8 List
Node 264 17
Y
-Apply-
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Gliding Solids
The Glide method creates triparametric solids by sweeping a base surface curve along a path
defined by a set of director curves or edges.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Solid
Method: Glide Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be
Solid ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1
If Normal Project Glide is ON, MSC.Patran avoids
Glide Input Options twisting the solid. One degree-of-freedom of motion is
eliminated. If Fixed Glide is ON, MSC.Patran uses “fixed”
◆ Normal Project Glide logic which basically drags the director curve along the
◆
◆ Fixed Glide base curve or base surface without rotating. Three
degrees-of -freedom of motion are eliminated.
Sweep Parameters
Scale Factor Enter an optional scale factor value to be applied to the
director curve during the glide. A default of 1 means no
1.0 change will occur in the size of the director curve during
the glide.
Auto Execute
Director Curve List By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran
execute the form.
Base Surface List
Specify in Director Curve List, the curve or edge that will
act as the Glide’s director curve. Specify in Base Surface
List, a base surface or face for the Glide method for solids.
Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: for
curves - Curve 1:10, Surface 10.1 11.1; for surfaces -
-Apply-
Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or cursor select the curves or
edges, or the surfaces or faces using the Curve or Surface
Select menu.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Solid Glide Method Example

Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Glide method which is created from Curve 5 for the Director
Curve and Surface 2 for the Base Surface. The scale is set to 0.25 and Fixed Glide is pressed in.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Solid
16
Method: Glide 17
2
Solid ID List 12
1 18
Glide Input Options 5
◆
◆ Normal Project Glide 15
◆ Fixed Glide Z
Y
Sweep Parameters X
Scale Factor
0.25
Auto Execute After:

Director Curve List
Curve 5
16
Base Surface List
17
Surface 2
2
12
-Apply-
18
1
5
19
20
21 15
Z
Y
X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
4.3 Creating Coordinate Frames

Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 3Point Method
The 3Point method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame by specifying
three point locations. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations
provided on the Point select menu. For more information, see Overview of Create Methods For
Coordinate Frames (p. 63).
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method: 3Point Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate
frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
Coord ID List
1
Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical or Spherical.
Type: Rectangular
Specify the coordinate frame to express the coordinate values
Refer. Coordinate Frame of the three point locations, if coordinate values are entered.
Default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord 0.
Coord 0

Origin need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
[0 0 0]
Point on Axis 3
Specify three point locations for: 1 ) the new coordinate frame’s
[0 0 1] origin; 2) a point on the third axis; and 3) a point on the plane
formed by the coordinate frame’s first and third axes. Either
Point on Plane 1-3 enter the point locations’ coordinate values (example: [10 0 0])
or cursor select the point locations using the Point Select menu.
[1 0 0]
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Coordinate Frame 3Point Method Example

Creates a cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100, using the Create/3Point method. Its origin is
located at [0,0,0]; a point on its Z axis is at [0,0,1]; and a point on the R-Z plane is at [0,0,1]. The
coordinate values are expressed within the global coordinate frame, Coord 0.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method: 3Point
Coord ID List
100
2
Type: Cylindrical

Coord 0 Y
Z X
Auto Execute
Origin
[0 0 0]
Point on Axis 3 After:

[0 0 1]
Point on Plane 1-3

[1 0 0]
-Apply- T
2 Z R
100
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Coordinate Frame 3Point Method Example

Creates a cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 200. Its origin is located at Point 8; a point on its Z
axis is at [x8 y8 2] (which is at the X and Y coordinates of Point 8 and at Z=2); and a point on the
R-Z plane is at Point 6.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method: 3Point 1
1
Coord ID List
200
Type: Cylindrical 5

2
Coord 0 8
Y
Auto Execute 6
Z
Origin X
Point 8
Point on Axis 3
After:
[x8 y8 2]
Point on Plane 1-3

Point 6 1
1
-Apply-
T
2
Z8
200
R
Y
6
Z
X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Axis Method

The Axis method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame by specifying
three point locations for the coordinate frame’s origin, at the first, second or third axis and on
one of the remaining two axes. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point
locations provided on the Point select menu. See Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate
Frames (p. 63).
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate frame
Method: Axis to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Coord ID List
1 Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical or Spherical.
Type: Rectangular
Specify the coordinate frame to express the coordinate values of
Refer. Coordinate Frame the three point locations, if coordinate values are entered. Default is
the Global rectangular frame, Coord 0.
Coord 0
Set this option to Axis 1 and 2, Axis 2 and 3, or Axis 3 and 1.

Axis: Axis 1 and 2
Origin need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
[0 0 0]
Point on Axis 1
Specify three point locations for: 1) the new coordinate frame’s
[1 0 0] origin, 2) a point on axis 1, 2 or 3 and 3) a point on axis 2, 3 or 1.
Either enter the coordinate values (example: [10 0 0]) or cursor
Point on Axis 2 select the point locations by using the Point Select menu.
[0 1 0]
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Coordinate Frame Axis Method Example

Creates a rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 100, using the Create/Axis method. Its definition
is expressed within the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0; its origin is located at [0,0,0]; a
point on its X axis is at Point 20; and a point on its Y axis is at Point 12.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
16 19
Object: Coord
Method: Axis
Coord ID List
100
2 12
Type: Rectangular

Coord 0 Y
Axis: Axis 1 and 2 17 Z X 18
Auto Execute
Origin
[0 0 0]
After:
Point on Axis 1
Point 20 16 19
Point on Axis 2
Point 12
-Apply-
2 100 Y
Z 12
X
20
Y
17 Z X 18
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Euler Method

The Euler method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame through three
specified rotations about the axes of an existing coordinate frame. See Overview of Create
Methods For Coordinate Frames (p. 63).
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate
Method: frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
Euler MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Coord ID List
1 Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical or Spherical.
Type: Rectangular Specify the coordinate frame whose axes the three rotations
will be about. Default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord
Refer. Coordinate Frame 0.
Coord 0
When ON, a Rotation Parameters subordinate form appears
which is described on Rotation Parameters Subordinate
Axis:Rotation Parameters ... Form Example (p. 357).
Auto Execute
Origin Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which
[0 0 0] the form.
-Apply- Specify the point location for the origin of the new coordinate
frame, either by entering the coordinate values which are
expressed within the reference coordinate frame (example:
[10 0 0]); or by cursor defining the point location using the
Point Select menu.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Coordinate Frame Euler Method Example

Creates a spherical coordinate frame, Coord 200, using the Create/Euler method. Its definition
is expressed within the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 100; its origin is located at Point 14
and it is rotated 45 degrees about Coord 100’s X axis.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Coord 13
Method: Euler
Coord ID List
200
Type: Spherical
Refer. Coordinate Frame Y
Coord 100 100

Z X
Y
Axis:
Rotation Parameters ... 12
Z X
14
Auto Execute
Origin
Point 14 After:
-Apply-
13
100
Z X
Y 12
Y 200
X
Z X Z
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Rotation Parameters Subordinate Form Example

The Rotation Parameters subordinate form appears when the Rotation Parameters button is
pressed on the Geometry Application Create/Coord/Euler form. See Creating Coordinate
Frames Using the Euler Method (p. 355).
This form allows you to define up to three rotations to be performed about the specified
Reference Coordinate Frame axes. The rotations are performed in sequence from top to bottom
on the form.
Rotation Parameters
First Rotation
Axis: About Axis 3 Set this option to About Axis 1, About Axis 2 or About Axis 3.
Angle of Rotation
0.0 Specify an angle in degrees between -180° and +180° to
rotate about the indicated axis.
Second Rotation
Axis: About Axis 1 Set this option to About Axis 1, About Axis 2 or About Axis 3.
Angle of Rotation
Third Rotation
Axis: About Axis 3 Set this option to About Axis 1, About Axis 2 or About
Axis 3.
Angle of Rotation
OK Cancel
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Normal Method

The Normal method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame with its
origin at a point location on a specified surface or solid face, and its axis 3 direction normal to
the surface or face. The coordinate frame’s axis 1 direction can be aligned with the surface’s or
face’s parametric ξ 1 direction, and its axis 2 direction will be aligned with the ξ 2 direction or
visa versa. See Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames (p. 63) for more
information.
You can plot the parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions by pressing the Parametric Direction button
on the Geometric Properties form under the Display/Display Properties/Geometric menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method: Normal frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
Coord ID List
1
Create x-axis of the coordinate frame along the u-direction or
along the v-direction of the surface.
Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical or Spherical.

Type: Rectangular
Origin
[0 0 0] Specify in Origin, the point location for the origin of the new
coordinate frame, either by entering the coordinate values that
Surface are expressed within the global rectangular coordinate frame,
Coord 0 (example: [10 0 0]); or by cursor defining the point
location using the Point Select menu.
Specify in Surface, the surface or solid face that the new
coordinate frame will be created on, whose normal direction will
-Apply- define the coordinate frame’s axis 3 direction. Either enter the
ID from the keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or
cursor select it by using the Surface Select menu.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Coordinate Frame Normal Method Example

Creates a rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 1, using the Create/Normal method whose Z axis
is normal to Surface 2 and its origin is at Point 16. Notice that Coord 1’s X and Y axis are aligned
with Surface 2’s ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
13
Object: Coord 15
Method: Normal
16
Coord ID List
1 2
Type: Rectangular 2
Auto Execute
Y
1 12
Origin
Z
Point 16 X
14
Surface
Surface 2
After:
13
-Apply- 15
Y Z
16
1
X
Y
1 12
Z
X
14
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Coordinate Frame Normal Method On a Face Example

Creates rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 2 at Point 17, whose Z axis is normal to the top face
of Solid 1.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method: Normal
1
17
Coord ID List 13
2 9
16
10
T
Type: Rectangular Z 12
R 14
Auto Execute Y
11
15
Origin
Z
Point 17 X
Surface
solid 1.6
After:
-Apply-
Z
1
X2
17
13 Y
9
16
10
T
Z 12
R 14
Y
11
15
Z
X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 2 Vector Method

The 2 Vector method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame with its
origin at the designated location. Two of the through coordinate frame axes are defined using
existing vectors; their directions are imposed at the selected origin and the new coordinate frame
is then created.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method: 2Vector
Coord ID List MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1
Type: Rectangular Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical, or Spherical.

Refer. Coordinate Frame frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
Coord 0 MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Axis: Axis 1 and 2 Set this option to Axis 1 and 2, Axis 2 and 3, or Axis 3 and 1.
Auto Execute
Origin
[0 0 0] Defines the origin of the new coordinate frame.
Vector for Axis 1
Vector for Axis 2 Select the vectors that define two of the through coordinate
frame axes.
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Coordinate Frames Using the View Vector Method

The View Vector method creates a rectangular, cylindrical, or spherical coordinate frame at the
designated origin, using the Euler angles that define the current model orientation within the
graphics viewport.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Coord
Method:View Vector
1
Type: Rectangular Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical, or Spherical.
Select the reference coordinate frame from which the Euler

Refer. Coordinate Frame angles are to be computed and subsequently used to define the
Coord 0 new coordinate frame.
Auto Execute
Origin
[0 0 0] Defines the origin of the new coordinate frame.
-Apply-
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
4.4 Creating Planes

Creating Planes with the Point-Vector Method
The Point-Vector method creates planes at a point and normal to a vector.
Geometry
Action: Create Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
Object: Plane created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Method Point-Vector
Plane ID List
1

Point List
Specify the points from which the new planes will be created.
Either cursor select the points or enter the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Point1 5, Curve 1.1. The Point Select
Vector List menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate points.
Specify the vectors for the new planes. Either cursor select the
Apply vectors or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Vector 1
5. The Vector Select menu that appears can be used to define
how you want to cursor select the appropriate vectors.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point-Vector Method Example

Creates a plane at a point and normal to a vector.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Plane
Method Point-Vector
Plane ID List
1
1 1
Auto Execute
Point List
Point 1 Y
Vector List
Z X
Vector 1
Apply After:
1 1
Z X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Planes with the Vector Normal Method

The Vector Normal method creates Planes whose normal is in the direction of the specified
vector and crosses the vector at a specified offset.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Plane
Method Vector Normal
Plane ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
Plane Offset Distance

Used to define the plane offset from the vector base point.
0.0
Vector List the form.
Point 2
Specify the vectors from which the new planes will be created.
Either cursor select the vectors or enter the IDs from the
Apply keyboard. Example: Vector 1 5, Coord 1.2. The Vector Select
cursor select the appropriate vectors.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Vector Normal Option Example

Creates a plane from Vector 1. The normal of the plane is parallel to the Vector.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Plane
Method Vector Normal
Plane ID List
1
1

0.0
Auto Execute
Vector List Y
Vector 1
X
Z
Apply
After:
11
Z X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method

Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method - Point Option
The Point on Curve method using the Point option creates Planes normal to a tangent vector of
a point along a curve. The plane centroid will be the point location on the curve.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Plane
Method Curve Normal
Plane ID List Used to express the point type to create the plane from. Options
are Point and Parametric.
1

Option: Point
Auto Execute
Curve List
Specify the curves from which the new planes will be created.
Point 2 Either cursor select the curves or enter the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Curve 1 5, Surface 1.2. The Curve Select
Point List menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
Specify the point locations for the new planes. Either cursor
Apply select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The
Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or
other point locations.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point Option Example

Creates a plane whose normal is parallel to the tangent of Curve 1 on the location where Point 3
is projected on the curve.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Plane
Method Curve Normal 2
3
Plane ID List
1
1
Option: Point
1
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 1 Y
Z X
Point List
Point 3
Apply After:
3
2
1
1
1
Y
Z
X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method-Parametric Option

The Point on Curve method using the Parametric option creates Planes that are normal to a
specified curve at a parametric position along the curve. The plane centroid will be the
parametric position along the curve.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Plane
Method Curve Normal
Plane ID List
1
Used to express the point type to create the plane from.
Options are Point and Parametric.
Option: Parametric
Specify the curves’s ξ 1 ( u ) coordinate value, either by
Parametric Position using the slide bar or by entering the value in the
databox. You can plot the ξ1 direction by pressing the
0.0 1.0 Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric
0.5 Properties form under the menu Display/Display
u Parametric Value

Curve List means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the curves from which the new planes will be

Apply created. Either cursor select the curves or enter the IDs
from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 5, Surface 1.2.
The Curve Select menu that appears can be used to
curves.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Parametric Option Example

Creates a plane on Curve 1 at the specified parametric location. Its normal is parallel to the
tangent of Curve 1 at that location.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Plane
1
Method Curve Normal
Plane ID List
1
Option: Parametric
Parametric Position
0.0 1.0
0.5
1
u Parametric Value Y 2
Z X
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 1 After:
Apply 1 1
1
Y 2
Z X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Planes with the Plane Normal Method

The Plane Normal method creates a plane normal to an existing plane. The line defined by the
projection of the new plane onto the existing plane is defined by selecting a vector; this vector is
projected normally onto the existing plane. The new plane’s normal direction is defined by the
vector cross product of the existing plane normal by the projected vector.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Plane
Method Plane Normal
Plane ID List
1 Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to
Auto Execute
Plane List
Select existing plane that is perpendicular to newly
created plane.
Vector List
Select vector that defines orientation of newly created
plane.
Apply
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method

Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method - Uniform Option
The Interpolate method creates Planes whose normals are in the direction of the curve tangents
at the interpolating points on the curve. Uniform option will space the planes along the curve
based on the equal arc lengths or equal parametric values upon the user’s choice.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Plane
Method Interpolate
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
Plane ID List
Number of Planes Used to define the number of planes to be interpolated. If it is

1, one plane is created at the beginning of the curve. If it is 2,
3
two planes are created at both end of the curve. The default
value is 3.
Used to define the spacing based on equal arc length or
◆
◆ Equal Parametric Values parametric values.
Plane Spacing Method

Used to define the spacing method of Uniform or the ratio for
◆ Uniform Nonuniform spacing.
◆
◆ Nonuniform
the form.
Auto Execute Specify the curves from which the new planes will be created.
Either cursor select the vectors or enter the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: curve 1. The CurveSelect menu that
Curve List
the appropriate curves.
Apply ☞ More Help:

CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Plane Interpolate Example

Creates planes on curve 1 at the interpolating points. The plane’s normals are parallel to the
tangents of Curve 1 at each location.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Plane
Method Interpolate
Plane ID List
1
1
Number of Planes 2
3
1
Y
◆
Z X

◆ Uniform
◆
◆ Nonuniform
After:
2
Auto Execute
Curve List
1
Curve 1 4
1
3
1
Apply 1
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method - Nonuniform Option

The Interpolate method creates Planes whose normals are in the direction of the curve tangents
at the interpolating points on the curve. Nonuniform option will space the planes along the
curve based on the space ratio applied on the arc length or the parametric values upon the user’s
choice.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Plane
Method Interpolate
Plane ID List
Number of Planes Used to define the number of planes to be interpolated. If it is 1,

one plane is created at the beginning of the curve. If it is 2, two
3
planes are created at both end of the curve. The default value is
3.
Used to define the spacing based on equal arc length or
◆
◆ Equal Parametric Values parametric values.

◆
◆ Uniform
Used to define the spacing method of Uniform or the ratio
◆ Nonuniform for Nonuniform spacing.
. L1. . . L2 .
L2/L1 = 1.5 the form.
Auto Execute
Curve List Either cursor select the vectors or enter the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: curve 1. The CurveSelect menu that
the appropriate curves.
Apply
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method

Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Point Option
The Least Squares method using the Point option creates Planes that are a least squares fit to a
set of points that are not co-linear.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Plane
Method Least Squares
Plane ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
1
Option: Point Used to express the entity type to create the plane from.
Options are Point, Curve, and Surface.
Point List
Specify the points from which the new planes will be

created. Either cursor select the points or enter the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Point 1 to 5. The Point Select menu
Apply that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate points.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creates a plane based on the least squares calculated from Point 1:4.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Plane
Method Least Squares 3
Plane ID List
1
1
Option: Point
2
Point List 4
Point 1:4
Y
Apply X
After:
1
1
Y
X
Z
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Curve Option

The Least Squares method using the Curve option creates Planes that are a least squares fit to a
non-linear curve.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Plane
Method Least Squares Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
Plane ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1
Used to express the entity type to create the plane from.
Option: Curve
Curve List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Apply Either cursor select the curves or enter the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Curve 1 5, Surface 1.2. The Curve Select
cursor select the appropriate curves.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Option Example

Creates a plane based on the least squares calculated from Curve 1.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Plane
Plane ID List
2
1
Option: Curve 1
Auto Execute 1
Curve List
Curve 1
Y
Z X
Apply
After:
1
1
1
Z X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Surface Option

The Least Squares method using the Surface option creates Planes that are a least squares fit to
a surface.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Plane
Method Least Squares Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
Plane ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1
Used to express the entity type to create the plane from.
Option: Surface

the form.
Apply Specify the surfaces from which the new planes will be
created. Either cursor select the surfaces or enter the IDs
from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 5, Solid 1.2. The
you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Option Example

Creates a plane based on the least squares calculated from Surface 1.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
2 3
Object: Plane
Plane ID List
1
Option: Surface 1
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1
Y
Apply 1 4
Z X
After:
2 3
1
1
Y
1 4
Z X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Planes with the Offset Method

The Vector Normal method creates Planes whose normal is in the direction of the specified
vector and crosses the vector at a specified offset.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Plane
Method Offset
Plane ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
1
Plane Offset Distance Used to define the plane offset from the input plane.
1.0
Repeat Count Used to define the number of repeat. The number created
planes equals the number of repeat count.
1

Auto Execute
Plane List means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the Planes from which the new planes will be created.
Apply Either cursor select the vectors or enter the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Vector 1 5, Coord 1.2. The Plane Select
cursor select the appropriate planes.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Offset Method Example

Creates planes, which are parallel to Plane 1 but have a offset of 1.0 from each other.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Plane
Method Offset
1
Plane ID List
2

1.0
Repeat Count
3 Y
Z X
Auto Execute
Plane List
Plane 1
After:
Apply
1 2 3 4
Y
Z X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method

Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method - Point Option
The Tangent method using the Point option creates Planes that are tangent to a specified surface
at a specified point on the surface. The plane centroid will be the point location on the surface.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Plane
Method Surface Tangent
Plane ID List
1
Used to express the point type to create the plane from.
Options are Point and Parametric.
Option: Point
Specify the surfaces from which the new planes will be

Point List created. Either cursor select the surfaces or enter the IDs
Apply
Specify the point locations for the new planes. Either cursor
select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The
Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how
you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices,
nodes, or other point locations.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creates a plane which is tangent to Surface 1 at Point 5.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
2 3
Object: Plane
Plane ID List
1
5
Option: Point 1
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1
Point List Y
Z X 1 4
Point 5
Apply
After:
2 3
1
1
Y
Z X 1 4
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method - Parametric Option

The Tangent method using the Parametric option creates Planes that are tangent to a specified
surface at a parametric position on the surface. The plane centroid will be the tangent point on
the surface.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Plane
Option: Parametric Used to express the point type to create the plane from. Options
Parametric Position
0.0 1.0 Specify the surface’s ξ 1 ( u ) and ξ 2 ( v ) coordinate value, either
0.5 by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox.
The directions of ξ1and ξ2 are defined by the connectivity of the
u Parametric Value surface or face. You can plot the ξ1 and ξ2 directions by pressing
the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form
0.0 1.0 under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.
0.5
v Parametric Value
Surface List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the surfaces from which the new planes will be created.
Either cursor select the surfaces or enter the IDs from the
Apply keyboard. Example: Surface 1 5, Solid 1.2. The Surface Select
select the appropriate surfaces.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Parametric Option Example

Creates a plane which is tangent to Surface 1 at the specified parametric locations.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
2 3
Object: Plane
Plane ID List
1
1
Option: Parametric
Parametric Position
0.0 1.0
0.5
u Parametric Value
Y
0.0 1.0 1 4
0.5 Z X
v Parametric Value
Auto Execute After:
Surface List 2 3
Surface 1
Apply
Y
Z X 1 4
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Planes with the 3 Points Method

The 3 Point method creates Planes which pass through three specified points that are not co-
linear. The plane centroid will be average of the first point.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Plane
Method 3 Points

Point 1 List means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Point 2 List
Specify the three point locations for the new planes. Either
cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid
Point 3List 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to
Apply
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
3 Points Method Example

Creates a plane from Point 1:3.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create 2
Object: Plane
Method 3 Points
Plane ID List
1
Auto Execute
Point 1 List
1 3
Point 1
Point 2 List
Point 2 Y
X
Point 3List Z
Point 3
After:
Apply
2
1
1 3
Y
X
Z
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
4.5 Creating Vectors

Creating Vectors with the Magnitude Method
The Magnitude method creates Vectors from a specified vector magnitude, direction and base
point. The base point can be expressed by cartesian coordinates or by an existing vertex, node or
other point location provided by the Point select menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Vector Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be
Method Magnitude Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
Vector ID List
Used to express the coordinate values entered in the Vector
1 Coordinates List and the Point Coordinate List, within the
specified coordinate frame. Default is the global rectangular
Refer. Coordinate Frame frame, Coord 0.
Coord 0
Enter the vector coordinates to define the direction for the new
Vector Direction List vectors. Enter the coordinates either from the keyboard
(Example: <10 0 0>); or cursor define the vector direction
<1 0 0> using the Vector Select menu that appears.
Vector Magnitude List Enter a value to define the magnitude for the new vectors.
1.0 Enter the values from the keyboard. (Examples: 1.0 1.5 .05)

Base Point List means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
[0 0 0]
Specify the base point locations for the new vectors. Either
Apply keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid
10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Magnitude Example
Creates a vector based at point 1 and directing along the X axis. The vector has a magnitude of
1.0.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Vector
Method Magnitude
Vector ID List 1
1

Coord 0
Vector Direction List

<1 0 0> Y
Z X
Vector Magnitude List
1.0
Auto Execute
After:
Base Point List
[0 0 0]
Apply
11
Z
X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Vectors with the Interpolate Method

Between Two Points
The Interpolate method using the Point option will create n points of uniform or nonuniform
spacing between a specified pair of point locations, where n is the number of interior points to
be created. The point location pairs can be existing points, vertices, nodes or other point location
provided by the Point select menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Vector
Method: Interpolate
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next vector
Vector ID List to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the
5 Functions.
Number of Vectors
Enter the number of interior vectors you want to create.
1
◆
Vector Spacing Method

◆ Uniform
◆
◆ Nonuniform

Auto Execute means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Curves List
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Vector Interpolate Method Example

Creates.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Vector
Method: Interpolate
Vector ID List
5
Number of Vectors
1
◆
Vector Spacing Method

◆ Uniform
◆
◆ Nonuniform
After:
Auto Execute
Curves List
-Apply-
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Vectors with the Intersect Method

The Intersect method creates Vectors from the intersections of pairs of Planes. The origins of the
two planes will be projected onto the intersection line to determine the base and tip of the
resulting vector. If the base and tip are not unique, the tip will be assumed.
Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the
form.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Vector
Method Intersect
Vector ID List Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1
Reverse Vector Direction Indicate whether the direction of the resulting vector should
be reversed. The direction may be controlled via the order of
Auto Execute the input planes, except when the projection of the plane
origins onto the intersection line is not unique. In such a case,
Plane 1 List if desired, this toggle may be used to reverse the direction.
Coord 0
Plane 2 List Specify the two planes from which the new intersection vector
<1 0 0> is to be created. Either cursor select the planes or enter the
IDs or definition from the keyboard. Example: Plane 1 5,
x=10, Coord 0.1. The Plane Select menu that appears can be
Apply planes.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Intersect Example
Creates a vector along the intersection of Plane 1 and Plane 2.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Vector
Method Intersect
2
Vector ID List
1
Reverse Vector Direction

Auto Execute 1
Plane 1 List
Plane 1 Z
X
Plane 2 List
Y
Plane 2
Apply After:
Z
1
X 2
Y 1
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Vectors with the Normal Method

Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Plane Option
The Normal method using the Plane option creates Vectors from normal vectors to a Plane;
originating at the plane and passing through a point. The tip point can be expressed by cartesian
coordinates or by an existing vertex, node or other point location provided by the Point select
menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Vector
Method Normal Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to
Vector ID List MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.
1
Option: Plane Used to express the entity type to calculate vector normal
from. Options are Plane, Surface, and Element Face.
Enter a value to define the magnitude for the new vectors.
1
Enter the values from the keyboard. (Examples: 1.0 1.5 .05)
Auto Execute
Plane List Specify the planes from which the new normal vectors will be
created. Either cursor select the planes or enter the IDs or
definition from the keyboard. Example: Plane 1 5, x=10,
Coord 0.1. The Plane Select menu that appears can be used
Point List to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
planes.
Apply
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Plane Option Example

Creates a vector which is directing along the normal of Plane 1.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
Object: Vector
Method Normal
Vector ID List
1 1
Option: Plane

1
Y
Auto Execute
Z X
Plane List
Plane 1
Plane Point List

[0 0 0]
After:
Apply
1 1
Z X
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Surface Option

The Normal method using the Plane option creates Vectors from normal vectors to a Plane. The
base point can be expressed by cartesian coordinates or by an existing vertex, node or other point
location provided by the Point select menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Method Normal created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Vector ID List
1 Used to express the entity type to calculate vector normal
from. Options are Plane, Surface, and Element Face.
Option: Surface
Enter a value to define the magnitude for the new vectors.
Vector Magnitude List Enter the values from the keyboard. (Examples: 1.0 1.5 .05)
1.0
Base at Surface Centroid Default Base Point will not be at the Surface Centroid. If ON,
Auto Execute the surface centroid will automatically be entered in the Base
Point Listbox.
Surface List
Specify the surfaces from which the new normal vectors will
be created. Either cursor select the surfaces or enter the IDs
Base Point List Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how
Apply cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Option Example

Creates a vector which is directing along the normal of Surface 1 at Point 5.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create
3 2
Object: Vector
Method Normal
Vector ID List
1
Option: Surface 1
5
1.0
Base at Surface Centroid

Auto Execute Y
4 1
X
Z
Surface List
Surface 1
Base Point List After:

Point 5 3 2
Apply
1
1 5
Y 4 1
X
Z
CHAPTER 4 3
Create Actions
Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Element Face Option

The Normal method using the Element Face option creates Vectors from normal vectors to an
Element Face. The base point of the vector will be the element face centroid by default, but a
node on the element face may also be specified.
Geometry
Action: Create
Method Normal created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
Vector ID List
1 Used to express the entity type to calculate vector normal from.
Options are Plane, Surface, and Element Face.
Option:Element Face
Enter a value to define the magnitude for the new vectors. Enter
Vector Magnitude List the values from the keyboard. (Examples: 1.0 1.5 .05)
1.0
Base at Surface Centroid Default Base Point will be at the Surface Centroid. If ON, the
surface centroid will automatically be entered in the Base Point
Element Type: 2D List box.
Auto Execute
Used to express the element type to calculate vector normal from.
Options are 2D and 3D.
Element Face List
Specify the element faces from which the new normal vectors will
be created. Either cursor select the element face or enter the IDs
Base Node List from the keyboard. Example: Elm 1.5. The Element Face Select
select the appropriate element faces.
Apply
Specify the base node locations for the new vectors. Either
keyboard. Example: Node 20.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Element Face 2D Option Example

Creates a vector along the normal of the element face at Node 6.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
2 13
Object: Vector 14
13 15
Method Normal
16 3 16
14
Vector ID List 9 17
15
10 18
1 8 11
9 12
7
Option:Element Face 1
5 12
10
6 11
Vector Magnitude List 1 7
1.0 4 8
2 5
11 3
Base at Surface Centroid 2 6
Y 3
Element Type: 2D 4
Auto Execute X 4
Z
Element Face List

After:
Elem 1
Base Node List 2 13

14
Node 6 13 15
16 3 16
14 17
9 15
Apply 10 18
8 11
9 12
7
1
5 12
10
1 11
1 6
7
4 8
2 5
11 3
2 6
Y 3
4 4
Z X
CHAPTER 4 4
Create Actions
Element Face 3D Option Example

Creates a vector along the normal of the element face at Node 2.
Geometry Before:
Action: Create 2
Object: Vector
6 3
Method Normal
7
Vector ID List
1
Option:Element Face

1.0 1
Base at Surface Centroid 5 4

Y
Element Type: 3D 8
X
Auto Execute Z
Element Face List

After:
Elem 8
2
Base Node List
6 3
Node 12
7
Apply 2
1
1
Y 5 4
8
X
Z
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Vectors with the Product Method

The Product method creates vectors of the cross products of two existing vectors. The base point
of the created vector will be the base point of the first vector.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Vector
Method: Product
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next vector to be
Vector ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
1
Auto Execute
Vector 1 List Specify two vectors. Either cursor select the point locations
or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Vector 1.
The vector select menu that appears can be used to define
how you want the cursor to select the appropriate vectors,
Vector 2 List coords, and planes.
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 4
Create Actions
Product Example
Creates Vector 3, which is the cross product of Vector 1 and Vector 2.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
Object: Vector
Method: Product
Vector ID List
3
Auto Execute
Vector 1 List
Vector 1
2
Vector 2 List
Y
Vector 2
Z 1
X
-Apply-
After:
2
1
3
1
Z
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Vectors with the 2 Point Method

The 2 Point method creates vectors between two existing point locations. The point locations can
be existing points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Geometry
Action: Create
Object: Vector
Method 2 Point
Vector ID List created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran
1
Auto Execute
Base Point List Specify the base and tip point locations for the new vectors.
Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid
Tip Point List define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points,
Apply
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 4 4
Create Actions
2 Point Option Example

Creates a vector starting from Point 1 and ending at Point 2.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Create
2
Object: Vector
Method 2 Point
Vector ID List
1
Auto Execute
Base Point List

Point 1
Tip Point List

Point 2 Y
Z 1
X
Apply
After:
2
Y
1
Z
X 1
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
CHAPTER
Delete Actions
5
■ Overview of the Geometry Delete Action
■ Deleting Any Geometric Entity
■ Deleting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes or Vectors
■ Deleting Coordinate Frames

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
5.1 Overview of the Geometry Delete Action

The Geometry Application Delete action can remove any or all geometric entities from the
database. Objects that are available for deletion are listed in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1 Geometry Delete Action Objects and Descriptions
Object Description
Any Deletes different types of geometric entities at the same time.
Point Deletes any number of points.
Curve Deletes any number of curves.
Surface Deletes any number of surfaces.
Solid Deletes any number of solids.
Coord Deletes any number of user defined coordinate frames.
Auto Execute Is Off By Default. By default, the Auto Execute toggle is OFF. For more
information, see Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic
Functions.
Using the Abort and Undo Buttons. When the Delete action form starts to execute, you may
press the Abort key at any time to halt the delete process. You may also press the Undo button
immediately after the Delete action completes to restore the deleted entities back to the database.
See System Icons (p. 24) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran
for more information.
CHAPTER 5 4
Delete Actions
5.2 Deleting Any Geometric Entity

Setting the Object menu to Any deletes any number of points, curves, surfaces, solids or
coordinate frames (except the global coordinate frame, Coord 0) from the database. You can also
delete geometric entities by using the Group/Delete menu.
Geometry
Action: Delete
Object: Any
Delete
Point You can turn ON or OFF any number of these geometry
type toggles. These toggles act like a filter, such that if
Curve a toggle is OFF, none of the specified entities of the
toggle type that are listed in Geometric Entity List will be
Surface
deleted. Example: If Point 1 2 3 are listed in Geometric
Solid Entity List and the Point toggle is OFF, then
MSC.Patran will not delete the specified points.
Coordinate Frame
Plane
Vector
Geometric Entity List execute the form.
Specify the existing geometric entities to be deleted

either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs
-Apply- from the keyboard. Example: Point 3 Surface 5:10 Solid
12 Coord 10. The select menu that appears at the
bottom can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate points, curves, surfaces, solids
and coordinate frames.
☞ More Help:
• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
Introduction to MSC.Patran
• Group Delete (p. 197) in the MSC.Patran
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
5.3 Deleting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes

or Vectors
Setting the Object menu to Point, Curve, Surface, Solid, Plane or Vector removes any number of
specified points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes or vectors from the database.
Geometry
Action: Delete
Set <Type> to either:
Object: <Type> Point, Curve, Surface, Solid, Plane or Vector.

Auto Execute Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is OFF which
means you need to press the Apply button or turn ON Auto
<Type> List Execute to execute the form.
Depending if Object is set to Point, Curve, Surface, Solid,

Plane or Vector specify one or more points, curves,
-Apply-
surfaces, solids, planes or vectors to delete from the
databox. You can either cursor select them by using the
Point Select Menu, Curve Select Menu, Surface Select
Menu, Solid Select Menu, Vector Select Menu,or
Geometry Select Menu (Plane); or by entering the IDs
from the keyboard. Examples: Point 7 10 or Surface 3:10,
Plane 1, Vector 2.
☞ More Help:
• Understanding the List Processor (p. 55)
in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
• Group Delete (p. 197) in the MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 5 4
Delete Actions
5.4 Deleting Coordinate Frames

Setting the Object menu to Coord removes any number of specified user defined coordinate
frames from the database The global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0, cannot be deleted.
Also, a coordinate frame will not be deleted if it is being referenced as a Nodal Reference
Coordinate Frame or Analysis Coordinate Frame, elsewhere in the model.
Geometry
Action: Delete
Object: Coord
Auto Execute
Coordinate Frame List the form.
Specify list of coordinate frames to be deleted either by

-Apply- cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Coord 2 10.
☞ More Help:
• Understanding the List Processor (p. 55) in
the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
• Node Coordinate Frames (p. 50) in the
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite
Element Modeling
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
CHAPTER
Edit Actions
6
■ Overview of the Edit Action Methods
■ Editing Points
■ Editing Curves
■ Editing Surfaces
■ Editing Solids
■ Editing Features
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
6.1 Overview of the Edit Action Methods

Point ❏ Equivalence Finds groups of points which are within global model tolerances of
each other and for each group, equivalences the points into one
point.
Curve ❏ Break Breaks curves into n+1 curves at either a point location or at a
parametric coordinate location.
❏ Blend Creates curves from two or more curves or edges by forcing a first
derivative continuity across the boundaries.
❏ Disassemble Creates curves that represent a specified chained curve.
❏ Extend Extends or lengthens one curve or edge or a pair of curves or edges,
either through a straight line extension, or through a continuous
curvature.
❏ Merge Creates one or more curves from an existing set of curves or edges.
Some of the original curvature may be lost.
❏ Refit Creates Uniformly parameterized Piecewise Cubic curves from
existing curves.
❏ Reverse Redefines the connectivity of a curve or edge by reversing the curve’s
or edge’s positive parametric direction.
❏ Trim Shortens the length of a curve or edge at either a point location or a
parametric coordinate location on the curve.
Surface ❏ Break Breaks a surface or a solid face into two or four smaller surfaces at
either a point, curve or surface location, or at a parametric coordinate
location on the surface.
❏ Blend Creates surfaces from two or more surfaces or solid faces by forcing a
first derivative continuity across its boundaries.
❏ Disassemble Creates surfaces that represent the specified B-rep solid.
❏ Edge Match Recreates a specified surface either by closing a gap between it and
another adjacent surface; or by creating an additional vertex and
converting the surface into a trimmed surface.
❏ Extend Extends or lengthens a surface: by a percentage in the U and/or V
parametric directions, to its intersection with a curve, plane, point or
another surface, or by a fixed length. Also extends a pair of surfaces
to their intersection.
❏ Refit Creates a non-uniformly parameterized network of bicubic patches
from existing surfaces.
❏ Reverse Redefines the connectivity of a surface or solid face by reversing the
surface’s or face’s positive parametric directions.
❏ Sew Combines Edit, Point, Equivalence and Edit, Surface, Edge Match
functionality to equivalence surface vertices and merge edges.
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions

Solid ❏ Break Breaks a solid into two, four or eight smaller solids either at a point,
curve or surface location, or at a parametric coordinate location.
❏ Blend Creates solids from two or more solids by forcing a first derivative
continuity across its boundaries.
❏ Disassemble Creates surfaces that represent a specified B-rep solid.
❏ Refit Creates uniformly parameterized Piecewise Cubic solids from
existing solids.
❏ Reverse Redefines the connectivity of a solid by reversing the solid’s positive
parametric directions.and moving the location of the parametric
origin.
Feature ❏ Suppress Displays the list of CAD features associated with the geometry that
can be suppressed from the geometric model
❏ Unsuppress Displays the list of CAD features associated with the geometry that
can be unsuppressed from the geometric model.
❏ Parameters Displays the list of CAD features associated with the geometry
whose parameters can be edited to be used to regenerate the
geometric model based on the new parameter values.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
6.2 Editing Points

Equivalencing Points
The Point Equivalence method finds groups of points which are within global model tolerance
of each other and for each group and equivalences the points into one point.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Point Specify in Point List, the points to be
Method: Equivalence equivalenced, either by entering the ID from the
keyboard or by cursor selecting the point location.
The Vertex select menu will appear.
Point List
Point 5 6
-Apply-
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Editing Point Equivalence Method Example

Equivalences points 5 and 6 resulting in point 5 at the mid-point between points 5 and 6.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit 2 3
Object: Point
Method: Equivalence
Point List
Point 5 6
1
-Apply-
Y
Z X1 5 6 4
After:
2 3
Y
ZX 1 5 4
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
6.3 Editing Curves

Breaking Curves
Breaking a Curve at a Point
The Break method with the Point option creates n+1 curves by breaking an existing curve or
edge at one or more point locations. The point locations can be defined by either existing points,
nodes, vertices, curve/curve intersections, or curve/surface intersections. Also, the break point
location does not have to lie on the curve or edge.
If ON, after Break completes, the existing curves specified in Curve List will
be deleted from the database.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Break created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Method: Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Curve ID List
Used to express the point type to create the curve from.
1 Options are Point, Parametric and Plane.
Option: Point
Delete Original Curves Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
Curve List
Specify the existing curves or edges to break either by
cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
Break Point List keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The
Curve select menu that appears can be used to define how
you want to cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.
-Apply-
Specify the point break locations along each curve either by
keyboard. Example: Point 1 Node 15. The point locations
may be specified in any order. If an endpoint of a curve is
specified, then MSC.Patran will create a zero length curve.
The Point select menu can be used to define how you want
to cursor select each break point location.
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Curve Break Method At a Point Example

Creates Curves 2 and 3 by breaking Curve 1 at Point 2. Notice that Delete Original Curves is
pressed in and Curve 1 is deleted.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Curve 2
Method: Break 1
1
Curve ID List
2
Option: Point 4
Delete Original Curves
Auto Execute
Y
Curve List
Curve 1 Z X
Break Point List
Point 2
After:
-Apply-
2
2
1
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Break Method Between Two Points Example

Creates Curves 1 and 2 by breaking a curve defined by Points 1 and 2 (by using the Curve select
menu icon listed below) at the break location of Node 1. Notice that Node 1 does not have to be
colinear with Points 1 and 2.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
1 2
Method: Break
Curve ID List
1
1
Option: Point
Auto Execute
Curve List Y
Construct2PointCurve(Eval
Z X
Break Point List
Node 1
-Apply- After:
1 1 3 2 2
Y
Z X

CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Curve Break Method At An Edge Example

Creates Curves 1 and 2 by breaking an edge of Surface 1 (using the Curve select menu icon listed
below) at the break location defined by Node 1.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
5
Method: Break
Curve ID List
1 1 6
Option: Point
1
Auto Execute
1
Curve List Y 4
Surface 1.4
X
Break Point List Z
Node 1
-Apply- After:
1 6
1 1
1
Y 2 4
X
Z

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Breaking a Curve at a Parametric Location

The Break method with the Parametric option creates two curves from an existing curve or edge,
at the curve’s parametric ξ 1 ( u ) coordinate location, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 .
Used to express the point type to create the curve from. Options are
Point, Parametric and Plane.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Break created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Curve ID List
1
Specify the curve’s ξ 1 ( u ) coordinate value, where ξ 1 has a
Option: Parametric range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , either by using the slide bar or by
entering the value in the databox. The direction of ξ 1 is
Break Point defined by the curve’s connectivity. You can plot the x1
0.0 1.0 direction by pressing the Parametric Direction toggle on the
0.5 Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display
u Parametric Value
If ON, after Break completes, the existing curves specified in
Curve List will be deleted from the database.

Curve List means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the existing curves or edges to break either by cursor

-Apply-
Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve select
☞ More Help:
Functions
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Curve Break Method At a Parametric Location Example

Creates Curves 2 and 3 by breaking Curve 1 at ξ 1 = 0.25 . Notice that Delete Original Curves is
pressed in and the Parametric Direction is turned ON.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Break 1 1
Curve ID List
2 1
Option: Parametric
5
Break Point
0.0 1.0
0.25
u Parametric Value Y
Delete Original Curves Z X

Auto Execute
Curve List
After:
Curve 1
-Apply- 1
6
2 3
1
1
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Break Method At a Parametric Location On An Edge Example

Creates Curves 1 and 2 by breaking an edge of Surface 1 (by using the Curve select menu icon
listed below) at ξ 1 = 0.25 .
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Curve 6
Method: Break
Curve ID List 1
7
1
Option: Parametric 2 1
1
Break Point
0.0 1.0
0.25
Y 5
u Parametric Value
X
Z
Auto Execute
Curve List After:
Surface 1.4
6
-Apply-
1
7
2 11 8 1
1 1
2
Y 5
X
Z

CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Breaking a Curve at a Plane Location

The method breaks a curve with a plane. The curve will be broken at each intersection point with
the plane.
Used to express the point type to create the curve from. Options are
Point, Parametric and Plane.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Break
1
Option: Plane
If ON, after Break completes, the existing curves specified in

Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means
Curve List you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the curves to be broken.

Break Plane List
Specify the planes to break the curve. Either cursor select the
planes or enter the IDs or definition from the keyboard.
Example: Plane 1 5, x=10, Coord 0.1. The Plane select menu
-Apply- select the appropriate planes.
☞ More Help:
Basic Functions
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Blending a Curve
The Blend method creates a set of parametric cubic curves from an existing set of two or more
curves or edges by enforcing a first derivative continuity across its boundaries. The set of
existing curves or edges must be connected.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Blend
Blend Parameters
Enter n-1 weighting factors of curve i relative to curve i+1,
Weighting Factors where the factor can be any value. By default, a value of 1.0
will cause all curves to receive equal weight. A large value
1.0 will cause the first curve of the curve pair to dominate the
slope. A small value will cause the second curve of the pair
to dominate the slope.
If ON, after Blend completes, the existing curves specified in
Curve List the Curve listbox will be deleted from the database.
Specify the existing curves or edges to blend either by cursor

-Apply- menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Curve Blend Method At Weighting Factor = 1.0 Example

Creates Curves 6 through 10 by equally blending Curves 1 through 5. Notice that Delete Original
Curves is pressed in.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
1
Method: Blend 5
4 4
Curve ID List 1
3 5
6
Blend Parameters 2 2 3 6
Weighting Factors
1.0
Y
Curve List Z X
Curve 1:5
-Apply- After:
1
9 5
4
6 10
8
2 3 6
7
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Blend Method At Weighting Factors Other Than 1.0 Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except that four weighting factors are used
for the four curve pairs: 1e-6, 1.0, 1.0, 1e6.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
1
Object: Curve
4 4 5
Method: Blend
1
3 5
Curve ID List
6 2 2 3 6
Blend Parameters
Weighting Factors
1e-6 1.0 1.0 1e6
Y
Z X
Curve List
Curve 1:5
After:
-Apply-
1
4 94 5
1 10
6 83 5
2 27 3 6
Z X
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Disassembling a Chained Curve

The Disassemble method operates on one or more chains (composite curves) and breaks them
into the original curves that composed the chain. A chained curve can be created by using
Geometry Application’s Create/Curve/Chain form. Chained curves are usually used in
MSC.Patran for creating trimmed surfaces.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Disassemble
If ON, after Disassemble completes, the existing chained
curves specified in Chain List will be deleted from the
Delete Original Chains
database.
Chain List
Specify the chained curves to disassemble either by cursor
Example: Curve 11.
-Apply-
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
• Creating Chained Curves (p. 131)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Disassemble Method Example

Creates Curves 8 through 13 from chained Curve 7. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed
in and Curve 7 is deleted.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Curve 6 5
7
Method: Disassemble
Delete Original Chains
Chain List
Curve 7
-Apply-
1 Y 2 3 4
Z X
After:
6 12 5
13 11
9
1 Y 8 2 3 10 4
Z X
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Extending Curves
Extending a Curve With the 1 Curve Option
The Extend method with the 1 Curve option extends one or more curves which start at either the
beginning or the end of an existing curve or edge, and moves in the tangent direction for a
defined length. You can either extend curves in a straight line or maintain the same curvature as
the existing curve or edge.
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created (only used if the
curve selected is an edge of a surface or solid). See Output ID List (p. 405) in the
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Extend
Curve ID List
1
Option: 1 Curve Used to express the Extend method to create the curve
from. Options are 1 Curve and 2 Curve.
Extend Method
◆ Straight Line Straight Line - will extend curves in a straight line at an
◆ angle defined by the tangent at the specified endpoint of the
◆ Continuous Curvature
existing curve or edge.
◆
◆ Through Points Continuous Curvature - will extend curves by maintaining
◆
◆ Full Circle the same curvature of the existing curve.
Through Points - will extend the existing curve by fitting
one end of the curve through N-points.
Curve Length
Full Circle - will extend the existing curve by creating a full
◆ Actual circle at the start or end of the curve.
◆
◆ Fraction of Original
Actual - the value entered will be the length to extend the

existing curve.
Auto Execute Fraction of Original - the length to extend the existing curve
will be defined by multiplying the value entered with the
Curve/Point List length of the existing curve. Example: a value of 1.5 means
the length of the new curve will be one and a half times as
long as the existing curve.
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Length
◆ Actual
◆

Curve/Point List
Cursor select the existing curve or edge, followed by the

endpoint that you want to extend from. MSC.Patran will
assemble a “Construct PointCurveUOnCurve...” argument
-Apply- string in Curve/Point List that is recognized by
MSC.Patran’s List Processor. The Curve select menu will
appear, followed by the Point select menu to allow you
alternate methods to cursor define the curve or edge and
the endpoint location for the Extend.
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
• Understanding the List Processor (p. 55)
in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Curve Extend Method For One Curve Example

Extends curve 1 in a straight line by an actual length of 1.0.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Extend 1
Curve ID List
1
1 6
Option: 1 Curve
Extend Method
◆ Straight Line
◆
◆ Continuous Curvature Y
◆
◆ Through Points
◆
◆ Full Circle Z X
Curve Length
◆ Actual
After:
◆
1.0
7
Auto Execute
Curve/Point List
Construct PointCurveUOnCurve
1
-Apply- 1
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Extend Method For One Curve Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except Continuous Curvature is pressed in,
instead of Straight Line, and Fraction of Original is pressed in based on a value of 1.5.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Extend
Curve ID List
1
Option: 1 Curve 1
Extend Method 1 6
◆
◆ Straight Line
◆
◆ Through Points
◆
Z X
◆ Full Circle
Curve Length
◆
◆ Actual
◆ Fraction of Original After:
7
1.5
Auto Execute
Curve/Point List
-Apply-
1
Y
1
Z X
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Curve Extend Method For One Edge Example

Creates Curve 1 by extending it from an edge of Surface 1 (by using the Curve select menu icon
listed below). Both Straight Line and Actual are pressed in, with a length of 1.0 entered.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Extend
Curve ID List 1
1
7 6
Option: 1 Curve
1
Extend Method
8
◆ Straight Line Y
◆
Z X
◆
◆ Through Points
◆
◆ Full Circle
Curve Length
◆ Actual
◆
◆ Fraction of Original After:
1.0
9
Auto Execute
Curve/Point List 1
7 6
1 1
-Apply-
Y 8
Z X

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extending a Curve Using the Through Points Type

The Extend method with the 1 Curve option using the Through Points switch modifies one curve
by extending the curve through N-points.
Used to express the Extend method to create the curve from. Options
are 1 Curve and 2 Curve.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Extend
Option: 1 Curve
Extend Method Straight Line - will extend curves in a straight line at an
angle defined by the tangent at the specified endpoint of
◆
◆ Straight Line the existing curve or edge.
◆
◆ Continuous Curvature Continuous Curvature - will extend curves by
maintaining the same curvature of the existing curve.
◆ Through Points
Through Points - will extend the existing curve by fitting
◆
◆ Full Circle one end of the curve through N-points.
circle at the start or end of the curve.
Auto Execute
Curve
Cursor select the existing curve or edge. The Curve

Point List select menu will appear to allow you alternate methods
to cursor define the curve or edge for the Extend.
Specify the point locations for the curve to extend

through. Either cursor select the point locations or
-Apply-
enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 5,
Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point select
menu that appears can be used to define how you want
to cursor select the appropriate points.
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON • Understanding the List Processor (p. 55)
which means you do not need to press the Apply in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
button to execute the form. Introduction to MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Curve Extend Method For Through Points Example

Extends Curve 1 by passing through the selected screen points.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Extend
1
Curve ID List
2
Option: 1 Curve 2
Extend Method
1
◆
◆ Straight Line
◆
◆ Through Points Z X
◆
◆ Full Circle
Auto Execute
Curve After:
Curve 1
Point List
[0.759383 0.351561 0.00000]
1
-Apply-
Y
Z X 2
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extending a Curve Using the Full Circle Type

The Extend method with the 1 Curve option using the Full Circle switch creates one curve by
extending the curve to a full circle, given the start, end, or interior point of the curve. If the curve
has zero radius of curvature, a circle will not be created.
Used to express the Extend method to create the curve from.
Options are 1 Curve and 2 Curve.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Extend created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Curve ID List
19 Straight Line - will extend curves in a straight line at an
angle defined by the tangent at the specified endpoint of
Option: 1 Curve the existing curve or edge.
Continuous Curvature - will extend curves by maintaining
Extend Method the same curvature of the existing curve.
◆
◆ Straight Line Through Points - will extend the existing curve by fitting
one end of the curve through N-points.
◆
◆
◆ Through Points circle at the start or end of the curve.
◆ Full Circle
Delete Original Curves Toggle to delete original curves after the extension.
Auto Execute
Curve/Point List Cursor select the existing curve or edge, followed by the
endpoint that you want to extend from. MSC.Patran will
assemble a “Construct PointCurveUOnCurve...” argument
string in Curve/Point List that is recognized by
MSC.Patran’s List Processor. The Curve select menu will
-Apply- appear, followed by the Point select menu to allow you
alternate methods to cursor define the curve or edge and
the endpoint location for the Extend.
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the • Topology (p. 10)
Functions is ON which means you do not need to • Understanding the List Processor (p. 55)
press the Apply button to execute the form. in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Curve Extend Method For Full Circle Example

Extends Curve 1 to a full circle by selecting Curve 1 and then Point 1.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
1
Method: Extend
Curve ID List 2
2
Option: 1 Curve
Extend Method 1
◆
◆ Straight Line
◆
◆
◆ Through Points Z X
◆ Full Circle
Auto Execute After:

Curve/Point List
Geometry (Curve1) (Point1)
1
-Apply- 2
2
Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extending a Curve With the 2 Curve Option

The Extend method with the 2 Curve option extends a set of curves in a straight line by
extending them from two existing curves or edges. MSC.Patran will extend the specified
endpoints to where the two curves will intersect. If the distance from the intersection to the
endpoint of one of the existing curves, is within a distance of the Global Model Tolerance, then
MSC.Patran will extend only one curve instead of two. (The Global Model Tolerance is defined
on the Global Preferences form under the Preferences/Global menu).
Used to express the Extend method to create the curve from.
Options are 1 Curve and 2 Curve.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Extend created (used only if the curve to be extended is an edge
of a surface or solid). See Output ID List (p. 405) in the
Curve ID List MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
1 By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Option: 2 Curve means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Auto Execute
Curve 1 List Specify the existing pair of curves or edges that you want to
extend straight curves from by either cursor selecting them or
by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 2
Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve select menu that appears
Curve 2 List can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate curves or edges.
-Apply-
1 3
3
1
Before: After:
☞ More Help:
Example ➠
Basic Functions
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Curve Extend Method For Two Curves Example

Extends Curves 1 and 2 to their point of intersection.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Extend
1
Curve ID List 5
3 2 1
Option: 2 Curve 2
Auto Execute
3
Curve 1 List Y
Curve 2
Z X
Curve 2 List
Curve 1
-Apply-
After:
1
5
2 1
2
3 3
4
6
Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Extend Method For A Curve and An Edge Example

Creates Curve 3 and extends Curve 1 by extending them from Curve 1 and an edge of Surface 1
by using the Curve select menu icon listed below.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Extend
1
Curve ID List 5
2
1
Option: 2 Curve 1 2
7 3
Auto Execute
Curve 1 List
Curve 1 Y 8
Curve 2 List Z X
Surface 1.4
-Apply-
After:
1
5
1
1 2
7 3 3
2
9
Y 8
Z X

CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Merging Existing Curves

The Merge method creates one or more curves from an existing set of curves or edges. The shape
of the new curves, relative to the existing curves or edges, will be preserved to the extent
possible, but, in general, some detail will be lost. The existing curves or edges must be connected.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Merge
1
Merge Parameters
Number of Curves to Create
1 Specify the number of curves to create from the original
curves and the tolerance to use to control the accuracy of
Merge Tolerance the merge process.
0.005
Delete Original Curves If ON, after Merge completes, the existing curves specified in
Curve List
Specify the existing curves or edges to merge either by cursor

-Apply- menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
• Parameterization (p. 5)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Merge Method Example

Creates Curve 6 by merging Curves 1 through 5. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed
and Curves 1 through 5 are deleted.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Merge 12 3
2 8
Curve ID List
4 5
6 1 3 7
Merge Parameters 5 6
1 Y
Merge Tolerance Z X
0.005
Curve List
Curve 1:5
After:
-Apply-
2
3
8
4
1 7
5 6
Y
Z X
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions

This example is the same as the previous example, except that the merge tolerance is 0.00001.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Merge
Curve ID List 12 3
6 2 8
4 5
Merge Parameters 1 3 7
Number of Curves to Create 5 6
1
Merge Tolerance Y
0.00001 Z X
Curve List
Curve 1:5
After:
-Apply-
2
3
8
4
1 7
5 6
Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creates Curves 6 through 8 from merging Curves 1 through 5.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Merge
Curve ID List 12 3
6
2 8
Merge Parameters 4 5
1 3 7
5 6
3
Merge Tolerance Y
0.00001
Z X
Curve List
Curve 1:5
After:
-Apply-
6 9
8
7
1
8
10
Y
Z X
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Refitting Existing Curves

The Refit method using the Uniform option creates uniformly parameterized Piecewise Cubic
curves from existing curves. The number of piecewise cubic segments per curve is input as the
refit parameter.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Refit
1
Used to express the refit option. Options are Uniform and
Option: Uniform Nonuniform.
Refit Parameters
Uniform: Enter a value to define the number of piecewise
Segments per Curve cubic segments to refit the original curve into. Enter the value
1 from the keyboard.
Nonuniform: Displays the refit tolerance.

Specify the existing curves or edges to refit either by cursor

-Apply-
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Reversing a Curve
The Reverse method redefines the connectivity of an existing set of curves or edges by reversing
the positive ξ 1 direction of the curves or edges. You can plot the curve’s ξ 1 direction by selecting
the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form found under the menus
Display/Display Properties/Geometric.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Reverse If ON, MSC.Patran will automatically reverse the
connectivity of any finite elements that are associated with
the curves or edges specified in Curve List. If OFF,
Reverse Associated MSC.Patran retain the original connectivity of the
elements.
Elements
Option:
Curve List means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the existing curves or edges to reverse either by

-Apply- keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The
Curve select menu that appears can be used to define how
you want to cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction
to MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Curve Reverse Method Example

This example reverses Curves 6, 7 and 8. Notice that the parametric direction is displayed for the
curves.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Reverse
6 1
Reverse Associated 1 1
Elements 7
Option: 8
Auto Execute
Curve List Y
Curve 6 7 8 Z X
-Apply-
After:
1
6
7
1 8
1
Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Reverse Method With Associated Elements Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except Curves 7, 8 and 9 have associated bar
elements. Although the node IDs are not reversed, MSC.Patran internally reverses the bar
elements’ connectivities. For example, for Bar 1 the nodes are stored as Nodes 2 and 1, instead
of 1 and 2.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
1
Object: Curve
2 1
Method: Reverse 1
6
2
Reverse Associated
3
Elements
Option:
Auto Execute
Curve List 3
Curve 6 7 8
Y
4 Z X
-Apply-
After:
2 1 1
6
2
13
Y
4 Z X
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Trimming Curves
Trimming a Curve With the Point Option
The Trim method with the Point option modifies an existing set of curves by trimming them at
a specified point location along each curve. The trim point can be defined by either existing
points, nodes, curve/curve intersections, or curve/surface intersections. You cannot trim
existing edges.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Curve Used to express the Trim method to create the curve
Object: from. Options are Point and Parametric.
Method: Trim
Option: By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran

Point Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
Trim Point List
Specify in Trim Point List, the point location either by cursor

selecting the point location or by entering the ID of the point
Curve/Point List or node. Example: Point 11 Node 20.
Specify in Curve/Point List, the existing curves that you want
to trim, along with a point location that defines the end of the
curve that MSC.Patran will discard or trim off. A Curve select
menu will appear, followed by a Point select menu.
-Apply-
Original Curve Trim Point Location
Point Location
of End to
Discard
Discard This Section
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Trim Method At a Point Example

Trims Curve 9 at Point 9, with Point 9 cursor selected in the Curve/Point List as end of the curve
to discard or trim off.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Trim
8
Option: Point 9
1
Auto Execute
Trim Point List
9
Point 9 Y
Curve/Point List Z X
-Apply-
After:
1
9
Z X
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Curve Trim Method At a Point Example

Trims Curve 9 at the intersection of Curves 9 and 10 by using the Point select menu icon listed
below for the Trim Point List. Point 8 is cursor selected for the Curve/Point List as the end of the
curve to trim.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
10
Method: Trim
Option: Point
Auto Execute
9
Trim Point List 10
Construct 2Curve Point(Evalua
1
Curve/Point List
8
Construct PointCurveUOnCurve Y
Z X 9
-Apply-
After:
10
9
10
1 8
Y
Z X 9

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Trimming a Curve Using the Parametric Option

The Trim method using the Parametric option modifies an existing set of curves by trimming
them at a specified ξ 1 parametric coordinate location, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . You
cannot trim existing edges.
Used to express the Trim method to create the curve from. Options
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Trim
Option: Parametric Specify the curve’s ξ 1 coordinate value, where ξ 1 has

a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , either by using the slide bar or by
Trim Point entering the value in the databox. The direction of ξ 1 is
defined by the curve’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ 1
0.0 1.0 direction by pressing the Show Parametric Direction
0.5 toggle on the Geometric Attributes form under the menu
Display/Geometry.
u Parametric Value

Curve/Point List means you do not need to chose the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify in Curve/Point List, the existing curves that you

want to trim, along with a point location that defines the
-Apply-
end of the curve that MSC.Patran will discard or trim off.
A Curve select menu will appear, followed by a Point
select menu.
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
Functions
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Curve Trim Method At a Parametric Location Example

Trims Curve 9 at ξ 1 ( u ) = 0.75 , where Point 8 is cursor selected as the end of the curve to trim.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Trim
1 9
Option: Parametric
Trim Point
0.0 1.0 1
0.75
8
u Parametric Value Y
Auto Execute Z X
Curve/Point List
-Apply- After:
9
1
1 8
Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Curve Trim Method At a Parametric Location Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except Point 1 instead of Point 8 is cursor
selected as the end of the curve to trim in the Curve/Point List box.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Curve
Method: Trim
Option: Parametric 1 9
Trim Point
0.0 1.0
0.75 1
u Parametric Value 8
Y
Auto Execute
Z X
Curve/Point List
-Apply-
After:
11
9
8
Y
Z X
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
6.4 Editing Surfaces

Surface Break Options
Breaking a Surface With the Curve Option
The Break method with the Curve option creates two surfaces by breaking a surface or solid face
at a curve location.The curve location does not have to lie on the surface, but it must intersect on
opposite edges of the surface or face. The curve location can be a curve, an edge or other curve
locations provided on the Curve select menu.
Used to express the surface type to create the curve from. Options are Curve,
Surface, Plane, Point, 2Point and Parametric.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Break
Surface ID List
2
If ON, after Break completes, the existing surfaces specified in
Option: Curve Surface List will be deleted from the database.
Surface List
the form.
Break Curve List Specify the existing surfaces or faces to break either by cursor
Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
-Apply-
Specify one curve break location for each surface or face
specified in Surface List, either by cursor selecting it or by
entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 10,
Surface 11.1. The Curve select menu that appears, can be
used to define how you want to cursor select each curve break
location.
☞ More Help:
• Using the Select Menus (p. 41)
Manual, Part 1: Introduction to
Example ➠
MSC.Patran
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Break Method At a Curve Example

Breaks Surface 1 at Curve 3. Notice that Curve 3 does not lie on Surface 1. Instead, MSC.Patran
projects the curve break location on the surface. Also, Delete Original Surfaces is pressed in and
Surface 1 is deleted.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Surface 9
Method: Break
3
Surface ID List
2
8
Option: Curve
6
Auto Execute 1
7
Surface List Y
Surface 1 1 X
Z
Break Curve List 5
Curve 3
-Apply- After:
9
11
6 3
10 7
2
Y
1
X
Z
5
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Surface Break Method At Two Points Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except the curve break location is defined by
Points 8 and 9 using the Curve select menu icon listed below.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Surface 9
Method: Break
Surface ID List
2
8
Option: Curve

Auto Execute 1
7
Surface List Y
Surface 1 1
X
Z
Break Curve List 5
Construct 2PointCurve(Evalua
-Apply-
After:
9
11
6 3
10 7
2
Y
1
X
Z
5

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Break Method At a Curve on a Face Example

Breaks a face of Solid 1 using the Surface select menu icon listed below, at the break location of
Curve 1.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Break 8
1 13
Surface ID List 12 11
1 9
Option: Curve 10
1
Auto Execute
Surface List 6
Y 7
Solid 1.6
X
Break Curve List Z 1
Curve 1 5
-Apply-
After:
8 1
1 13
12 11
2
9
10
1
6
Y 7
X
Z 1
5

CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Breaking a Surface With the Surface Option

The Break method with the Surface option creates two surfaces by breaking a surface or solid
face at a surface location.The surface break location must intersect the surface or face on opposite
edges. The surface break location can be a surface or a solid face.
Used to express the surface type to create the curve from. Options are Curve, Surface, Plane,
Point, 2Point and Parametric.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Break Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to
2
Option: Surface Surface List will be deleted from the database.
the form.
Specify the existing surfaces or faces to break either by

Break Surface List cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface select
cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.
-Apply-
Specify one surface break location for each surface or face
specified in Surface List, either by cursor selecting it or by
entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 10,
Solid 11.1. The Surface select menu that appears, can be
used to define how you want to cursor select each surface
break location.
☞ More Help:
Example ➠
MSC.Patran
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Break Method At a Surface Example

Creates Surface 4 and 5 by breaking Surface 1 in half with the break location of Surface 3.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
2
Object: Surface
Method: Break 6
Surface ID List
1
4
1
3
Option: Surface
Auto Execute 3
4
Surface List Y
Surface 1 7
Z X
Break Surface List 1
Surface 3
After:
-Apply- 28
6
4
5
1 3
4 3
Y
7
Z
X 1
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Breaking a Surface With the Plane Option

This method breaks a surface with a plane. The surface will be broken along its intersection with
the plane.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Break
Surface ID List
2
If ON, after Break completes, the existing surfaces specified
Option: Plane in Surface List will be deleted from the database.
Surface List
Break Plane List Specify the existing surfaces or faces to break either by cursor
selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example:
Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface select menu that appears can be
surfaces or faces.
-Apply-
Specify the planes to break the surface. Either cursor select the
planes or enter the IDs or definition from the keyboard. Example:
Plane 1 5, x=10, Coord 0.1. The Plane select menu that appears can
planes.
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
MSC.Patran
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Breaking a Surface With the Plane Option Example

Creates Surfaces 3 and 4 by breaking Surface 2 in half with the break location of Plane 1.
Geometry
Before:
2 3
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Break
Surface ID List
3 1
52
Option: Plane
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 2 Y
Z 4
X 1
Break Plane List
Plane 1
After:
-Apply- 3
2 7
1
5 3
4
Y
6 4
Z XX1
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Breaking a Surface With the Point Option

The Break method with the Point option creates two or four surfaces by breaking an existing
surface or solid face defined at a point location. If the point is on an edge, then two surfaces are
created. If the point is located on the interior, then four surfaces are created. The point location
can be a point, a node, a vertex, a curve/curve intersection or a curve/surface intersection.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Break
Surface ID List be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the
2
Option: Point If ON, after Break completes, the existing surfaces

specified in Surface List will be deleted from the database.

Surface List means you do not need to press the Apply button to
Surface 1 execute the form.
Break Point List Specify the existing surfaces or faces to break either by
Point 4
keyboard. Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface
select menu that appears can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.
-Apply-
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
MSC.Patran
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Break Method At a Point Example

Breaks Surface 1 into four Surfaces at Point 5. Notice that Delete Original Surfaces is pressed and
Surface 1 is deleted.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
2
Object: Surface
Method: Break
Surface ID List
2 15
1
Option: Point
Auto Execute 3
Surface List Y
Surface 1 4
Z
X
Break Point List 1
Point 4
After:
-Apply- 2
5
3
7
5
1
6
4
2 3
Y
4
Z
X
1
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Surface Break Method At a Point Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except that the break location is at Point 4
instead of Point 5, and Surfaces 2 and 3 are created instead of four surfaces.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
2
Object: Surface
Method: Break
Surface ID List
2 15
1
Option: Point
Auto Execute 3
Surface List Y
Surface 1 4
Z
X
Break Point List 1
Point 4
After:
-Apply- 2
3
2 5
1
3
Y
4
Z
X
1
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Break Method At a Vertex Example

Breaks Surface 1 along the diagonal into Surfaces 2 and 3 at Point 1 which is located at the vertex
of Surface 1.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
4
Object: Surface
Method: Break 2
Surface ID List
2
Option: Point 1
Auto Execute 3
Surface List Y
Surface 1
Z X
Break Point List 1
Point 1
After:
-Apply-
4
23
3
Y
Z X
1
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Breaking a Surface Using the 2 Point Option

The Break method using the 2 Point option creates two surfaces by breaking an existing surface
or solid face defined by two point locations. The point locations must lie on opposite edges of
the surface or face. The point locations can be points, nodes, vertices, curve/curve intersections,
or curve/surface intersections.
Used to express the surface type to create the curve from. Options are Curve,
Surface, Plane, Point, 2Point and Parametric.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Break Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
2
Option: 2 Point Surface List will be deleted from the database.

Specify the existing surfaces or faces to break either by

Break Point 1 List
menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to
Break Point 2 List cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.
Specify two point break locations for each surface or face

either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from
-Apply- the keyboard. Example: Point 1 Curve 10.1 Node 10. If two
vertices of the surface or face are selected, they must be
diagonal from each other. The Point select menu that
appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor
select each point location.
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
MSC.Patran
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Break Method At 2 Points Example

Breaks Surface 1 into Surfaces 2 and 3 defined by Point 5 and Node 1. Notice that Delete Original
Surfaces is pressed in and Surface 1 is deleted.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Surface
2
Object: 4
Method: Break
Surface ID List
5
2
Option: 2 Point 1
Auto Execute 1
Surface List Y
Surface 1 Z 2 1
X 1
Break Point 1 List 3
Point 5
Break Point 2 List

After:
Node 1
2
4
-Apply-
5
2
1
Y 1
Z 2 1
X 2 16
3
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Breaking a Surface With the Parametric Option

The Break method with the Parametric option creates two surfaces from an existing surface or
solid face. The break location is defined at the surface’s or face’s parametric ξ 1 or ξ 2 coordinate
location, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 and ξ 2 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 .
Select either Constant u Direction or Constant v Direction. The break will either be along the
ξ 1 ( u ) direction for Constant u Direction or along the ξ 2 ( v ) direction for Constant v Direction.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Break be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Surface ID List
1 Used to express the surface type to create the curve from.
Options are Curve, Surface, Plane, Point, 2Point and
Option: Parametric Parametric.
Break Direction
◆ Constant u Direction
Specify the surface’s ξ 1 ( u ) or ξ 2 ( v ) coordinate value,
◆
◆ Constant v Direction either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the
databox. The directions of ξ 1 and ξ 2 are defined by the
Break Curve connectivity of the surface or face. You can plot the ξ 1 and
ξ 2 directions by pressing the Show Parametric Direction
0.0 1.0 toggle on the Geometric Attributes form under the menu
0.5 Display/Geometry.
v Parametric Value
Delete Original Surfaces Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
Surface List Specify the existing surfaces or faces to break either by

menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran
If ON, after Break completes, the surfaces
specified in Surface List will be deleted from the • Connectivity (p. 15)
database. • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Break Method At Parametric Location u=0.25 Example

Breaks Surface 1 into Surfaces 2 and 3 at ξ 1 ( u ) = 0.25 . Notice that Delete Original Surfaces is
pressed and Surface 1 is deleted and that the parametric direction is displayed.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
2
Object: Surface 4
Method: Break
5
Surface ID List
2
Break Direction
◆
◆ Constant u Direction 1
◆ Constant v Direction
Y
Z 2 1
Break Curve
X
0.0 1.0 3
0.25
v Parametric Value
After:
2
Auto Execute 4
Surface List
Surface 1
3
-Apply-
1
2 6
5
Y 11
2
Z 2
X
3
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Surface Break Method At Parametric Location v=0.25 Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except that the break location is at
ξ 2 ( v ) = 0.25 .
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Surface
2
Object: 4
Method: Break
Surface ID List 5
2
Break Direction
◆ Constant u Direction
1
◆
◆ Constant v Direction
Y
Break Curve Z 2 1
0.0 1.0 X
0.25 3
v Parametric Value
After:
Auto Execute 4 62
Surface List
Surface 1
-Apply- 2
3
1
1
Y 21
Z 2 5
X
3
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Break Method On a Face At Parametric Location v=0.25 Example

Breaks a face of Solid 1 by using the Surface select menu icon listed below at ξ 2 ( v ) = 0.25 .
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
9
Object: Surface
Method: Break
6
Surface ID List
1 8
10
3 2
Break Direction 1 1
◆ Constant u Direction 7
◆
◆ Constant v Direction 11
Y
Break Curve
0.0 1.0 Z X
0.25
5
v Parametric Value
After:
9
Auto Execute
Surface List
Solid 1.6 2 6
12 1 2
82 1
-Apply- 10
1 1
3 2
1 1
13 7
11
Y
Z X
5

CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Blending Surfaces
The Blend method creates a set of parametric bi-cubic surfaces from an existing set of two or
more surfaces or solid faces by enforcing a first derivative continuity across its boundaries. The
set of existing surfaces or faces must share at least one edge with another surface or face in the
set.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Blend
Surface ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be
Blend Parameters
Specify in Surface Edge List, a surface edge that the weight

Surface Edge List factor will be applied, either by cursor selecting it or by entering
the ID. Example: Surface 1.2. If left blank, MSC.Patran will
apply the specified weight factor to all surfaces.
Weighting Factors
Specify in Weighting Factors, a value between 0.0 and 1.0 for
0.5 each specified surface edge (a maximum of four per surface or
face). A value of 1.0 will cause the edge to remain rigid as
possible. A value of 0.0 will allow the edge to remain as
Delete Original Surfaces flexible as possible. The default value is 0.5.
Surface List If ON, after Blend completes, the surfaces specified in

Surface List will be deleted from the database.
Specify the surfaces or faces to blend either by cursor

-Apply-
Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface select menu that
the appropriate surfaces or faces.
☞ More Help:
Example ➠
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Blend Method Example

Blends Surfaces 1, 5, 3 and 4 with a default weight factor of 0.5 applied to all surface edges.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Blend 1 2
1
Surface ID List
4 3
6
5
5
Blend Parameters 6 3 7
8
Surface Edge List 4
Y
Weighting Factors 10
Z X
0.5
Surface List After:

Surface 1 5 3 4
1 6 2
-Apply- 4 3
7
5
6 8 7
8
9
Y
10
Z X
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Surface Blend Method Example

Blends Surfaces 1 through 4 with a weighting factor of 1.0 applied to two edges (highlighted in
the “Before” picture).
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Surface 1
Method: Blend 1 2
4
Surface ID List 3
5
3
Blend Parameters 2 7
5 8
Surface Edge List 4
Surface 3.1 4.3 6
Weighting Factors Y
1.0 1.0
Z X
9
Surface List After:

Surface 1:4
1
-Apply- 5 2
4
3
7
6
7
5 8
8
6
Z X
9
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Disassembling Trimmed Surfaces

The Disassemble method operates on one or more trimmed surfaces and creates the parent
surface that has the same curvature as the trimmed surface. A trimmed surface can be created
either by using the Geometry Application’s Create/Surface/Trim form or by using the
Create/Surface/Planar Trim form.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Disassemble
Delete Original Surfaces If ON, after Disassemble completes, the surfaces specified in
Trimmed Surface List will be deleted from the database.
Trimmed Surface List

Specify the trimmed surfaces to disassemble either by cursor
Example: Surface 11.
-Apply-
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Surface Disassemble Method Example

Operates on Surface 2 which is a general trimmed surface. Surface 3 is the new parent surface.
Notice that new curves associated with Surface 2 are also created.
Before:
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Disassemble 15
Trimmed Surface List

16 2 13
Surface 2
18
-Apply-
Y
Z
X 17
After:
2015
1 4
16 5 23
13
19 2 18 21
3
Y
Z 17
X
22
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Disassemble Method Example

Operates on Surface 1 which is a planar trimmed surface. Notice that the new parent surface,
Surface 2, is also planar and that new curves associated with Surface 1 are created.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Surface 5 8
Method: Disassemble

1
Trimmed Surface List 1
Surface 1
-Apply-
Y
6 7
Z X
After:
9
5 4 8
12
1
1 21 3
5
10
6 2 7
Y
Z X
11
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Matching Surface Edges

Matching Surface Edges with the 2 Surface Option
The Edge Match method with the 2 Surface option recreates the second surface of a specified pair
that share two common vertices but has a gap or unmatched edges. The gap must be less than
10 times the Global Model Tolerance or else MSC.Patran will not close the gap. The existing pair
of surfaces or faces do not need to have matching parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2 orientations. This
method is useful for correcting topologically incongruent surface pairs so that they are
congruent before you mesh. Also see Matching Adjacent Surfaces (p. 270).
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Edge Match
Option: 2 Surface By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran

the form.
Surface 1 List
Specify the first and second surfaces or faces of the pair to match
in Surface 1 List and in Surface 2 List, respectively. The Surface
Surface 2 List
select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
-Apply-
Vertices are Shared, Edges are Not
Gap must be less than10 times

the Global Model Tolerance.
☞ More Help:
• Topological Congruency and
Meshing (p. 12)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Edge Match Method Example

Edits Surface 2 which is specified as the second surface of the pair and closes the gap between
Surfaces 1 and 2.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Edge Match

2 3 6
Option: 2 Surface
Auto Execute 1 2
Surface 1 List
Surface 1 1 4 5
Y
Surface 2 List
Z X
Surface 2
-Apply-
After:
2 3 6
1 2
1 4 5
Y
Z X
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Surface Edge Match Method Example

This example is the same as the previous example, except Surface 1 is specified as the second
surface of the surface pair.
Before:
Geometry
Action: Edit
Method: Edge Match
1 2
Option: 2 Surface
Auto Execute 1 4 5
Surface 1 List Y
Surface 2 Z X
Surface 2 List
Surface 1
-Apply-
After:
2 3 6
1 2
1 4 5
Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Matching Surface Edges with the Surface-Point Option

The Edge Match method with the Surface-Point option recreates a specified surface as a trimmed
surface that includes an additional cursor defined vertex point. This method is useful for
correcting topologically incongruent pairs of surfaces so that they are congruent before you
mesh.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Edge Match
Option: Surface-Point
Surface the form.
Specify in the Surface listbox, the existing surfaces or faces,

Point List either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
-Apply- Specify in Point List, the vertex point locations along an edge
of each specified surface, either by entering the ID from the
keyboard or by cursor selecting the vertex point location. The
Vertex select menu will appear.
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
• Topological Congruency and Meshing
(p. 12)
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Surface Edge Match Method With Surface-Point Example

Recreates Surface 1 which was a parametric bi-cubic surface, into a trimmed surface which has
the vertices Points 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 so that Surface 1 is congruent with Surfaces 2 and 3. The
additional vertex specified in the Point List was cursor selected at Point 5 by using the Vertex
select menu icon listed below.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object: 2 3 8
Surface
Method: Edge Match
3
Option:Surface-Point
Auto Execute
Surface 1 5 6
Surface 1
Point List
2
Surface 1 (u1.000000) (v 0.4 Y
-Apply-
Z X
1 4 7
After:
2 3 8
1 5 6
2
Y
Vertex Select Menu Icon
Z X
1 4 7
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extending Surfaces
Extending Surfaces with the 2 Surface Option
This form is used to extend two surfaces to their line of intersection.
Geometry
Geometry Specify the extend option to use:
2 Surface
Action: Edit
To a Curve
Object: Surface To a Plane
Method: Extend To a Point
To a Surface
Percentage
Fixed Length
Choose between editing all associated surfaces or editing only

selected surfaces.

Surface 1 to Extend Specify the first surface to extend to the second surface either
by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the keyboard.
Example: Surface 1. The Surface select menu that appears
Surface 1 Edge appropriate surface.
Specify the edge of the first surface to start the extension from
either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the
Surface 2 to Extend keyboard.Example: Surface 1.1. The Edge select menu that
the appropriate edge.
Surface 2 Edge Specify the second surface to extend to the first surface either
appropriate surface.
-Apply- Specify the edge of the second surface to start the extension
from either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the
keyboard.Example: Surface 1.2. The Edge select menu that
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Extending a Surface With the 2 Surface Option Example

Extend surface 1 to the line of intersection of surface 2.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Extend
2
1
Z X
Auto Execute
Surface 1 to Extend
Surface 1
Surface 1 Edge
Surface 1.3
Surface 2 to Extend
Surface 2
2
Surface 2 Edge 1
Surface 2.2
-Apply-
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extending Surfaces to a Curve

This form is used to extend a surface to an intersecting curve.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Edit 2 Surface

To a Curve
Object: Surface
To a Plane
To a Surface
Percentage
Fixed Length

selected surfaces.

the form.
Surface to Extend
Specify the surface to extend to the intersecting curve either
by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the
keyboard. Example: Surface 1. The Surface select menu
Surface Edge that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate surface.
Specify the edge of the surface to start the extension from

Intersecting Curve
-Apply- Specify the Intersecting Curve to extend the surface to either

Example: Curve 1. The Curve select menu that appears can
be used to define how you want to cursor select the
appropriate curve.
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Extending a Surface to a Curve Example

Extend Surface 1 to the edge of Surface 2.
Geometry
Geometry
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Extend
1 2
Y
Auto Execute
Z X
Surface to Extend
Surface 1
After:
Surface Edge
Surface 1.3
Intersecting Curve
Surface 2.4
1 2
-Apply-
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extending Surfaces to a Plane

This form is used to extend a surface to an intersecting plane.
Geometry
Geometry
2 Surface
Action: Edit
To a Curve
Object: Surface To a Plane
To a Surface
Percentage
Fixed Length

selected surfaces.

the form.
Surface to Extend
Specify the surface to extend to the intersecting plane either
Surface Edge keyboard. Example: Surface 1. The Surface select menu
Intersecting Plane Specify the edge of the surface to start the extension from
-Apply- Specify the Intersecting Plane to extend the surface to either
Example: Plane 1. The Plane select menu that appears can
appropriate plane.
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Extending a Surface to a Plane Example

Extend Surface 1 to Plane 1.
Geometry
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Extend
Auto Execute Y
Surface to Extend Z X
Surface 1
Surface Edge
After:
Surface 1.3
Intersecting Plane
Plane 1
-Apply-
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extending Surfaces to a Point

This form is used to extend a surface to an intersecting point.
Geometry
Geometry
To a Curve
Object: Surface
To a Plane
To a Surface
Percentage
Fixed Length

selected surfaces.

the form.
Surface to Extend
Specify the surface to extend to the intersecting point either
keyboard. Example: Surface 1. The Surface select menu
Surface Edge that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor

Intersecting Point either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the
-Apply- Specify the Intersecting Point to extend the surface to either

Example: Point 1. The Point select menu that appears can be
point.
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Extending a Surface to a Point Example

Extend Surface 1 to Point 1.
Geometry
Geometry
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Surface 3 4
Method: Extend
Auto Execute
2 5 1
Surface to Extend Y
Surface 1 Z X
Surface Edge
Surface 1.3 After:
Intersecting Point 3 6
Point 1
-Apply-
2 1
Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extending Surfaces to a Surface

This form is used to extend a surface to an intersecting surface.
Specify the extend option to use:
Geometry
Geometry
Geometry 2 Surface
Action: Edit To a Curve
To a Plane
Object: Surface
To a Point
Method: Extend To a Surface
Percentage
Fixed Length

selected surfaces.

Surface ID List
By default, the Intersecting Surface will be broken at the line of
1 intersection of the two surfaces.
Break Intersecting Surface By default, the Intersecting Surface will be deleted after the
break operation which creates two new surfaces.
Delete Original Surfaces By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
the form.
Surface to Extend
Specify the surface to extend to the intersecting surface either
Surface Edge can be used to define how you want to cursor select the
Intersecting Surface Specify the edge of the surface to start the extension from
-Apply-
Specify the Intersecting Surface to extend the surface to either
Example ➠
☞ More Help:
MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Extending a Surface to a Surface Example

Extend Surface 1 to the line of intersection of Surface 2 and break Surface 2 at the line of
intersection to create Surface 3 and 4, then delete Surface 2.
Geometry
Geometry
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Extend
Surface ID List
3 Y
X
Break Intersecting Surface Z

After:
Auto Execute
Surface to Extend
Surface 1
Surface Edge
Surface 1.3
1
Intersecting Surface 3
Surface 2
4
-Apply-
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extending Surfaces with the Percentage Option

This form is used to extend a surface by a percentage in the U and/or V parametric directions.
Geometry
Geometry
To a Curve
Object: Surface
To a Plane
To a Surface
Percentage
Fixed Length
This button toggles between Display Parametric Direction

of the geometry in the viewport and Show Parametric
Display Direction to visualize the parametric direction of the surface
Parametric Direction to extend.
Percent Change of U V
Define the percentage of u-min, u-max, v-min, and v-max to
-99 100 change in order to alter the parametric extents of the surface
0.0 by using the slidebar or entering a value in the databox.
U-Min Valid range is -99 to +100.
-99 100
0.0
U-Max
-99 100
0.0
V-Min
-99 100 By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
0.0 means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
V-Max the form.
Reset Specify the surface to extend either by cursor selecting it or

by entering the ID from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1.
The Surface select menu that appears can be used to
Auto Execute define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
surface.
Surface List
☞ More Help:
-Apply- • Using the Select Menus (p. 41)
MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Extending a Surface With the Percentage Option Example

Extend Surface 1 by 100% in the U direction starting at U-Max = 1 and shrink Surface 1 by 50%
in the V direction starting at V-Max=1.
Geometry
Geometry
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Extend
Display
Parametric Direction
Percent Change of U V
-99 100
0.0 Y
U-Min
Z X
-99 100
100.0
U-Max After:
-99 100
0.0
V-Min
-99 100
-50.0 1
V-Max
Reset
Auto Execute
Surface List
Y
Z X
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Extending Surfaces with the Fixed Length Option

This form is used to extend a surface by a fixed length.
Geometry
Geometry
To a Curve
Object: Surface
To a Plane
To a Surface
Percentage
Fixed Length
Choose between editing all associated surfaces or editing

only selected surfaces.
Specify the length to extend the surface starting at the

Length surface edge selected.
1.0
Auto Execute
the form.
Surface to Extend
Specify the surface to extend either by cursor selecting it or
by entering the ID from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1.
The Surface select menu that appears can be used to
Surface Edge
surface.

-Apply- either by cursor selecting it or by entering the ID from the
keyboard.Example: Surface 1.1. The Edge select menu
select the appropriate edge.
☞ More Help:
MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 6 4
Edit Actions
Extending a Surface With the Fixed Length Option Example

Extend Surface 1 by a fixed length of 5.0 units in the X direction.
Geometry
Geometry
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Extend
Length
Y
5.0
Z X
Auto Execute
Surface to Extend After:
Surface 1
Surface Edge
Surface 1.3
-Apply-
1
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Refitting Surfaces
The Refit method creates a non-uniformly parameterized network of bicubic patches from
existing surfaces. The Refit Tolerance is input as the refit parameter.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Refit
Surface ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface
to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the
2
Surface Type Functions.
Allows the refit surface, if the toggle is ON, to be created
NURBS as a NURB Surface or a Piece Wise Rational Polynomial
Surface. This depends on the Geometry Preferences
Refit Parameters (p. 296) toggle, NURBS Accelerator value.
Refit Tolerance
0.005 Enter a value to define the Refit Tolerance to use for the
refit process. Enter the value from the keyboard.

Surface List means you do not need to press the Apply button to
execute the form.
Specify the surfaces to refit. Either cursor select the

surfaces or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example:
-Apply-
Surface 1 5, Solid 10.4. The Surface select menu that
appears can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the appropriate surfaces.
☞ More Help:
to MSC.Patran
• Topological Congruency and Meshing (p. 12)
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Reversing Surfaces
The Reverse method redefines the connectivity of an existing set of surfaces or solid faces by
exchanging the positive ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions of the surfaces or faces. You can plot the ξ 1 and
ξ 2 directions for the surfaces by pressing the Show Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric
Attributes form found under the menu Display/Geometry.
When pressed, MSC.Patran draws the positive surface normal vector for each specified surface or
solid face. The positive normal direction is based on its parametrization. The normal vectors can
also be shown using the Show/Surface/Attributes form.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Reverse If ON, MSC.Patran will automatically reverse the connectivity
of the finite elements that are associated with the surfaces or
faces that are specified in Surface List. If OFF, MSC.Patran
retains the original connectivity of the elements.
Reverse Associated
Elements
Surface List
the form.
Specify the existing surfaces or faces to reverse either by

Draw Normal Vectors cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
Reset Graphics menu that appears can be used to define how you want to
-Apply-
Erases the normal vectors and reverts the model back to
the last display type, such as wireframe, after a MSC.Patran
form was executed, as defined on the Display menu forms.
☞ More Help:
• Showing Surface Attributes (p. 588)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Reverse Method Example

Reverses the parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions for Surface 1. Notice that the parametric directions
are displayed on the surfaces. Also, notice that Auto Execute is not on so that you can press the
Draw Normal Vectors button without executing the form.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
15
Object: Surface
Method: Reverse 11
3
13
Reverse Associated
1
Elements 14 2 4
Auto Execute
10
Surface List 1
YX 2
Surface 3 4 12
Z
Draw Normal Vectors
Reset Graphics
After:
-Apply-
15
11
3 13
2
14 1 4
10
1
YX 2
Z 12
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Sewing Surfaces
The Sew method sequentially combines the actions of the Edit/ Point/ Equivalence method to
equivalence surface vertices and the Edit/ Surface/Edge Match method to merge edges. The
composite action is a "sewing" of the surfaces. Vertices and edges are both equivalenced
according to the restrictions of the previously mentioned methods; however, since the operation
is sequential, vertices will already be equivalenced before doing the edge merging.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Sew Specify the surfaces to sew. The Surface select menu that
the appropriate surfaces.
Surface List
-Apply-
Gap must be less than10 times

the Global Model Tolerance.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Surface Sew Method Example

Edits surfaces 1 and 2 by closing the gap between edges which share common vertices.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Sew
Surface List
Surface 1 2
2 3 6
-Apply- 1 2
1 4 5
Y
Z X
After:
2 3 6
1 2
1 4 5
Y
Z X
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Trimming Surfaces to an Edge

This form is used to trim a Surface with one of its edges and optionally delete the surface with
the smallest surface area after the trim.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Trim
By Default, Delete Sliver Surface toggle is on which will delete
the surface with the smallest surface area as a result of the trim
operation.
Delete Sliver Surface By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Surface to Trim the form.
Specify the surface to trim from either by cursor selecting them

or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1.
The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define
Trimming Edge
how you want to cursor select the appropriate surface.
Specify the edge of the surface to trim the surface with either by
Example: surface 1.1. The Edge select menu that appears can
-Apply- be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
edge.
☞ More Help:
MSC.Patran
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Trim Surface To Edge Example

Trim the sliver from surface 5 by selecting the surface edge surface 5.4.
Geometry
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Trim
Delete Sliver Surface 5
Auto Execute
Surface to Trim
Surface 5
Trimming Edge
Z
Surface 5.4 Y
X
-Apply-
After:
Z
Y
X
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Adding a Fillet to a Surface

This form facilitates the creation of a fillet edge between two existing edges sharing a given
vertex. This operation, when successful will replace the input vertex with a new edge.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Add Fillet
Fillet Radius
Fillet Radius specifies the real value of the fillet to be created
0.5
between edges sharing a given vertex.
Auto Execute
Vertex List
Trimmed Surface identifies the surface that is to be modified.

Trimmed Surface Note that only one surface will be processed at a time.
Vertex List identifies the vertices that are to be replaced by
fillet edges.
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Removing Edges from Surfaces

Removing Edges from Surfaces with Edge Option
This form allows the user to remove a given edge of a trimmed surface. This process differs from
the vertex removal function which was topological in nature. This operation is both topological
and geometrical in that the shape of the trimmed surface will be altered as well as the topology.
The edges adjacent to the removed edge will be extended until they intersect. This intersection
must take place within the domain of the parent surface.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Remove Edge
Option: Edge
This option allows the user to identify the specific edges of a
surface that he wishes removed.
Auto Execute
Edge List
Trimmed Surface Edge List contains the edges to be removed.

Trimmed Surface identifies the surface to be modified. Note
that only a single surface may be processed for each
application.
-Apply-
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Removing Edges from Surfaces with Edge Length Option

This form allows the user to automatically remove all edges whose length is less than a specified
value.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Remove Edge
Option: Edge Length

This option allows the user to specify a minimum edge
Min Edge Length length. This results in the removal of all edges whose length
is smaller than this value.
Auto Execute
Min Edge Length - all edges shorter than this are to be
Trimmed Surface removed.
Trimmed Surface - identifies the surface to be modified.
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Adding a Hole to Surfaces

Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Center Point Option
The Add Hole method using the Center Point option adds a circular hole to a Surface. The
circular hole is defined in the tangent plane of the supplied, manifolded center point.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Add Hole Used to express the options available for adding a hole.
Options are Center Point, Project Vector, and Inner Loop.
Option: Center Point
Specify the Hole Radius.
Hole Radius
1.0 If ON, the inner loop list will be checked for interference with
each other and existing loops of the surface. Default = ON
Loop Interference Checker

Center Point List means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Surface Specify the center point for each circular hole either by cursor
Example: Point 1 Curve 10.1. The Point select menu that
appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate points.
-Apply-
Specify the surface or face either by cursor selecting them
or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface
1 or Solid 10.1. The Surface select menu that appears, can
be used to define how you want to cursor select the surface
location.
☞ More Help:
MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Adding a Hole to a Surface with the Center Point Option Example

This will add nine circular holes to surface 1 using points 52:60. Warning messages will be
generated for the other points due to interference of holes at these points with surface edges.
Geometry
Action:
Before:
Edit
Object: Surface
38 39
Method: Add Hole
Option: Center Point

48 58 59 60 51
Hole Radius
.0625
47 55 1
56 57 50
Auto Execute
46 52 53 54 49
Center Point List
Point 37:40 46:60
Y
37 40
Surface Z X
Surface 1
After:
-Apply-
38 39
73 74 75
48 58 59 60 51
70 71 72
47 55 1
56 57 50
67 68 69
46 52 53 54 49
Y
37 40
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Project Vector Option

The Add Hole method using the Projection Vector option adds a circular hole to a Surface. The
circular hole is defined in the plane of the supplied vector and vector-projected onto the surface.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Used to express the options available for adding a hole.
Object: Surface Options are Center Point, Project Vector, and Inner Loop.
Method: Add Hole
Specify the Hole Radius.
Option: Project Vector
Hole Radius If ON, the inner loop list will be checked for interference with
each other and existing loops of the surface. Default = ON
1.0
Loop Interference Checker By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
the form.
Vector List
Specify the projection vector for each circular hole either by
keyboard. Example: Vector 1 Coord 0.3. The Vector select
Center Point List menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the appropriate vectors.
Specify the center point for each circular hole either by cursor
Surface selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
Example: Point 1 Curve 10.1. The Point select menu that
the appropriate points.
-Apply- Specify the surface or face either by cursor selecting them

location.
☞ More Help:
• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in
the MSC.Patran Reference Manual,
Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Adding a Hole to a Surface with the Project Vector Option Example

This will add two holes to surface 6 using points 78 and 82 and the projection vector defined by
the x axis of Coordinate Frame 0.
Geometry
Action:
Before:
Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Add Hole 75
77
Option: Project Vector
82
Hole Radius
.0625 78
Auto Execute 76 74
Vector List
Coord 0.1 Y
Center Point List Z X
Point 78 82
Surface
After:
Surface 6
77 75
-Apply-
8285
83
78 86
84
74
76
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Inner Loop Option

The Add Hole method using the Inner Loop option adds a hole to a Surface. The hole is defined
by the supplied closed, chained curves which will define inner loops for the creation of a
Trimmed Surface.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Add Hole Used to express the options available for adding a hole.
Options are Center Point, Project Vector, and Inner Loop.
Option: Inner Loop
Hole Radius
The Hole Radius databox is disabled for this option.
1.0
Loop Interference Checker If ON, the inner loop list will be checked for interference with
each other and existing loops of the surface. Default = OFF
Auto Execute
Inner Loop List By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
the form.
Surface
Specify a closed, chained curve (inner loop) for each hole
either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Curve 1. The Curve select menu that
-Apply- the appropriate curves.
Note: The Inner Loop List must consist of closed, chained
curves. For curves that are closed, but not circles or chains,
use the Create,Curve,Chain method to define a valid inner
loop.
Specify the surface or face either by cursor selecting them

location.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Adding a Hole to a Surface with the Inner Loop Option Example

This will add 5 new holes to surface 6 using curves 14, 15, 16, 29, and 30.
Geometry
Action: Edit Before:
Object: Surface
Method: Add Hole
Option: Inner Loop

16 15
Hole Radius 17
1.0
14
Loop Interference Checker 29 6
Auto Execute 30
Inner Loop List
Curve 14:17 29 30
Surface Y
Surface 6 Z X
-Apply- After:
17
Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Removing a Hole from Trimmed Surfaces

The Remove Hole method removes a hole from a Trimmed Surface. The hole to remove can be
any edge-curves which are inner loops of a Trimmed Surface.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Remove Hole By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Inner Loop List Specify the edge-curve (inner loop) for each hole either by
keyboard. Example: Surface 1.1. The Curve select menu that
Trimmed Surface
the appropriate edge-curves.
Specify the trimmed surface by either by cursor selecting

them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example:
-Apply- Surface 1 or Solid 1.1. The Surface select menu that
appears, can be used to define how you want to cursor
select the surface location.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Removing a Hole from a Trimmed Surface Example

This will remove all the small inner loops from surface 2.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Remove Hole
Auto Execute
Inner Loop List
Surface 4.15 4.16 4.17 4.18
4
Trimmed Surface
Surface 4
-Apply-
Y
Z X
After:
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Adding a Vertex to Surfaces

The Add Vertex method adds a vertex to a surface. The point used to create a vertex can be any
point which is on the edge of the selected surface. If a hardpoint is converted to a surface vertex
in the process of adding a vertex to a surface, then this point(vertex) cannot be reassociated to
the surface as a hardpoint.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
Method: Add Vertex By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Point List Specify the point for each vertex either by cursor selecting
Point. The Point select menu that appears, can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points.
Surface
Specify the surface by either by cursor selecting them or by

entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 or
Solid 1.1. The Surface select menu that appears, can be
-Apply- used to define how you want to cursor select the surface
location.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Adding a Vertex to a Surface Example

This will add a vertex to surface 2 using point 3. The result is surface 2 becomes a trimmed
surface with five vertices.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: 5 6
Surface
Method: Add Vertex
Auto Execute
2 3
Point List
Point 3 2
Surface 1
Surface 2
Y1 4 7
-Apply-
Z X
After:
5 6
2 3
Y1 4 7
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Removing a Vertex from Trimmed Surfaces

The Remove Vertex method removes a vertex from a Trimmed Surface. The vertex to remove
can be any vertex of a Trimmed Surface with the exception that one vertex per loop must remain.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Surface
By default, Delete Associated Point is ON which means that
Method: Remove Vertex all points associated to a vertex to be removed and that is not
volatile to the trimmed surface will be deleted.
Delete Associated Point
Vertex List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the vertices by either by cursor selecting them or by

entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface
1.1.1. The vertex select menu that appears, can be used to
-Apply- define how you want to cursor select each vertex location.
☞ More Help:
Removing a Vertex from a Trimmed Surface Example

This will remove vertex 3.4.2 from trimmed surface 3. The result is a parametric bicubic surface.
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Method: Remove Vertex
Delete Associated Point
Auto Execute
Vertex List 3
Surface 3.4.2
-Apply-
Y
41 44
Z X
After:
42 43
Y
41 44
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
6.5 Editing Solids

Breaking Solids
Breaking Solids with the Point Option
The Break method with the Point option breaks an existing solid into two or four smaller solids
at a point location. The point location can be on or within the solid.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Solid ID List
1
Used to express the surface type to create the curve from.
Options are Point, Parametric, Plane and Surface.
Option: Point
Delete Original Solids If ON, after Break completes, the solids specified in Solid List
will be deleted from the database.
Solid List Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not
Specify in Solid List the existing solids to break either by

Break Point List
keyboard. Example: Solid 11 3. The Solid select menu that
the appropriate solids.
-Apply- Specify in Break Point List the point break location, either by
cursor selecting the point location or by entering the IDs from
the keyboard. The Point select menu will appear. If the point
location is on the face, four solids will be created. If it is on an
edge, two solids will be created. And if it is inside the solid,
eight solids will be created.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Solid Break Method with the Point Option Example

Breaks Solid 1 into eight solids by referencing Point 9. Notice that Delete Original Surfaces is
pressed and Surface 1 is deleted.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object:
8
Solid
7
Method: Break
Solid ID List
2
Option: Point 2
3 1
Delete Original Solids 9
Auto Execute Y 5
Solid List
Z1 X 6
Solid 1
4
Break Point List
Point 9
After:
-Apply- 8
12
7
19
16 313
17 2
11
2 10
26
7
18 3 6
15 5149
27 4
Y 25 24 5
9
23 8 20
Z1 X 22 6
28 4 21
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

This example is similar to the previous example, except that the break point is on a face instead
of inside of Solid 1, and four solids are created instead of eight.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
7
Object: Solid
6
Method: Break
9
Solid ID List
2 3
2
Option: Point
1
Delete Original Solids
Auto Execute
Y 8
Solid List
X4 Z
Solid 1 5
1
Break Point List
Point 9
After:
-Apply- 7
17
6
15
9
13
3 10
2
5
4
3
2
Y 8
16 18
X4 Z 14
11 5
1 12
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions

This example is similar to the previous example, except that the break point is on an edge instead
of on a face of Solid 1, and two solids are created instead of four.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
7
Object: Solid
6
Method: Break
Solid ID List 9
3
2
2
Option: Point 1
Auto Execute Y 8
Solid List
X4 Z
Solid 1 5
1
Break Point List
Point 9
After:
-Apply- 7
6
11
3 9
2
3
2
Y 8
X4 Z 12 5
1 10
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Breaking Solids with the Parametric Option

The Break method with the Parametric option creates two, four or eight solids from an existing
solid. The break location is defined at the solid’s parametric ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 coordinate locations
where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , ξ 2 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 and ξ 3 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 3 ≤ 1 .
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Break

Solid ID List
Option: Parametric Used to express the surface type to create the curve from.
Break Point
0.0 1.0
0.5 Specify the solid’s ξ 1 ( u ) , ξ 2 ( v ) and ξ 3 ( w ) coordinate
values of the Break Point, either by using the slide bar or by
u Parametric Value entering the value in the databox. If the break point will be
0.0 1.0 located on the solid’s face, four solids will be created. If it is
0.5 on an edge, two solids will be created. And if it is inside the
solid, eight solids will be created.
v Parametric Value
The directions of ξ 1 , ξ 2 and ξ 3 are defined by the solid’s
0.0 1.0 connectivity. You can plot the x1 and x2 directions by
0.5 pressing the Show Parametric Direction toggle on the
Geometric Attributes form under the menu
w Parametric Value Display/Geometry.

Auto Execute
Solid List
-Apply -
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Break Point
0.0 1.0
0.5
u Parametric Value
0.0 1.0
0.5
v Parametric Value
0.0 1.0
0.5
w Parametric Value If ON, after Break completes, the solids specified in
Solid List will be deleted from the database.
Solid List you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the solids to break either by cursor selecting them or by

-Apply - entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 10 11. The
Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the appropriate solids.
☞ More Help:
to MSC.Patran
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Break Method with the Parametric Option Example

Breaks Solid 1 into eight smaller solids at ξ 1 = 0.5 , ξ 2 = 0.5 , and ξ 3 = 0.5 . Notice that Delete
Original Surfaces is pressed and Surface 1 is deleted and that the parametric direction is
displayed.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
8
Object: Solid
7
Method: Break
Solid ID List
2
11 1
Break Point
2
0.0 1.0 3 5 1
0.5
Y
6
u Parametric Value X
Z9
0.0 1.0 12
0.5
v Parametric Value
0.0 1.0
After:
0.5
8
7
Auto Execute 24 3
217
8
Solid List
131 21636
1
28
Solid 1 29
102133425 3
1 211 2 2183
-Apply -
1 19 2193
1 7
23 2143 5
Y 1 5 215 3 30
261 3 6
21
Z 9 X 20 22
12
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions

This example is similar to the previous example, except ξ 1 = 0 instead of ξ 1 = 0.5 , and Surface
1 is broken into four solids instead of eight.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit 8
Object: Solid 7
Method: Break
Solid ID List
2
Option: Parametric
10
11 1
2
Break Point
0.0 1.0 3 5 1
Y
0.0 6
u Parametric Value Z9 X
0.0 1.0 12
0.5
v Parametric Value
After:
0.0 1.0
0.5 2
w Parametric Value
3
Auto Execute 15
2 3 16
Solid List
9
3 1
Solid 1 10
6 2
312157
13
-Apply - 2 2
17 31 1
Y 2 418
3111 4
Z 5X 14
8
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

This example is similar to the first example, except ξ 1 = 0 and ξ 2 = 0 instead of ξ 1 = 0.5 and
ξ 2 = 0.5 , and Surface 1 is broken into two solids instead of eight.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
8
Object: Solid
7
Method: Break
Solid ID List
2
11 1
Break Point 2
0.0 1.0 3 5 1
0.0 Y
u Parametric Value 6
Z9 X
0.0 1.0 12
0.0
v Parametric Value
0.0 1.0 After:
0.5
2
w Parametric Value
3
Auto Execute 10
Solid List
11
Solid 1
2
6
7
-Apply -
2
3
2 31 1
Y
39 1 4
Z 5X 12
8
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Breaking Solids with the Curve Option

The Break method with the Curve option breaks an existing solid into two solids at a curve break
location. The curve location must completely lie on and bisect a face of the solid.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Break
Solid ID List
4
If ON, after Break completes, the solids specified in Solid List

Option: Curve will be deleted from the database.
Delete Original Solids By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
the form.
Solid List
Specify in Solid List, the solids to break either by cursor
Break Curve List Example: Solid 11 3. The Solid select menu that appears can
appropriate solids.
Specify in Break Curve List, the curve break location, either
by cursor selecting the location or by entering the ID from the
-Apply- keyboard. The Curve select menu will appear.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Break Method with the Curve Option Example

Breaks Solids 2 and 3 into two solids each at Curve 1. Notice that Delete Original Solids is
pressed and Solid 1 is deleted.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
9
Object: Solid 15 17
Method: Break 16
Solid ID List 10
14 18
4
Option: Curve 31
2
Auto Execute 13 12
Solid List Y 1 20
11
Solid 2 3 Z
X 19
Break Curve List
3
Curve 1
After:
-Apply- 9
15 17
16
10 6
14 18
4 24
122
23
7
21
13 5 12
Y 1 20
11
Z
X 19
3
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Breaking Solids with the Plane Option

The method breaks a solid with a plane. The solid will be broken along its intersection with the
plane.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Break Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created.
See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran Reference
Solid ID List Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
2
Option: Plane Options are Point, Parametric, Plane and Surface.

If ON, after Break completes, the solids specified in Solid List will
be deleted from the database.
Auto Execute
Solid List
Solid 1 Specify the solids to be broken.
Break Plane List
Point 9 Specify the planes to break the surface. Either cursor select the
planes or enter the IDs or definition from the keyboard.
Example: Plane 1 5, x=10, Coord 0.1. The Plane select menu
-Apply- that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate planes.
By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran ☞ More Help:

Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which • Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
execute the form.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Breaking a Solid with the Plane Option Example

Creates Solids 2 and 3 by breaking Solid 1 along its intersection with Plane 1. Notice that Delete
Original Solids is pressed and Solid 1 is deleted.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
2 3
Object: Solid
Method: Break 9
1 11
Solid ID List 7
6
2
1
Option: Plane 12 4
10 1
13
Auto Execute
Solid List
Y 8
Solid 1 X 5
Z
Break Plane List
Plane 1
After:
-Apply- 3
2
9
7 1 11
6
2
10 13 4
12
1
3
14 8
Y
X 5
Z
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Breaking Solids with the Surface Option

The Break method with the Surface option breaks an existing solid into two smaller solids at a
surface break location. The surface break location must completely pass through the solid.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Solid ID List
4
Option: Surface If ON, after Break completes, the solids specified in Solid List
will be deleted from the database.
Solid List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify in Solid List, the solids to break either by cursor

Break Surface List selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard.
solids.
-Apply- Specify in Break Surface List, the surface break location, either
by cursor selecting the location or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. The Surface select menu will appear.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Break Method with the Surface Option Example

Breaks Solid 1 into two solids at Surface 1. Notice that Delete Original Solids is pressed and Solid
1 is deleted.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Solid 2
3 1
Method: Break 4
11
Solid ID List
2
11 12
10
Option: Surface

9 6
Auto Execute Y 7 5
Solid List 8
Z X
Solid 1
Break Surface List

Surface 1
After:
-Apply- 2
3 1
4
2
14 13
15 16
3
6
Y 5
7
8
Z X
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Solid Break Method with the Surface Option Between Two Surfaces Example
This example is the same as the previous example, except that the solid is defined by Surfaces 2
and 3 by using the Solid select menu icon listed below.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Solid 22
3 1
Method:
4
Break
11
Solid ID List
2
12
1
Option: Surface 10
9
Auto Execute 6
Y 5
Solid List 7 3
Construct 2SurfaceSolid(Eva Z X 8
Break Surface List
Surface 1
After:
-Apply-
2
3 1
4
2
14 13
15 16
3
6
Y 5
7
Solid Select Menu Icon
8
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Blending Solids
The Blend method creates a set of parametric tri-cubic solids from an existing set of two or more
solids, such that the first derivative continuity is maintained across the surface boundaries
between adjacent solids. The existing solids can have any parametrization, but they must share
common faces.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Blend
Blend Parameters Enter n-1 Weighting Factors of solid i relative to solid i+1. By
default, a value of 1.0 will cause all solids to receive equal
Weighting Factors
weight. A large value (~1E+6) will cause the first solid of the
1.0 solid pair to dominate the slope. A small value (~1E-6) will
cause the second solid of the pair to dominate the slope.
Delete Original Solids If ON, after Blend completes, the solids specified in Solid
Solid List
Specify the solids to blend either by cursor selecting them or
by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 10 11
13. The Solid select menu that appears can be used to define
how you want to cursor select the appropriate solids.
-Apply-
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Solid Blend Method Example

Creates Solids 4, 5 and 6 by blending Solids 1, 2 and 3. Notice that Delete Original Solids is
pressed and Solids 1, 2 and 3 are deleted.
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
2
Object: Solid
6
Method: Blend
8
Solid ID List
13
5 1 11
2 15
10 39 1 2
1.0
Y 12 31413
17
16
Delete Original Solids Z X
18
Solid List
Solid 1 2 3
After:
-Apply-
2
6
8
13
4 11
2 15
7
3 1 25
10 39 1 2
Y 12 31416
17
16
Z X
18
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Blend Method Example

This example is similar to the previous example, except that weighting factors, 1e6 and 1e-6, are
used so that Solids 1 and 3 dominate the slope.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Solid 2
Method: Blend 6
Solid ID List 8
5
13
1 11
7
3 1
1e6 1e-6 10 39 1 2
Y 12 31413
17
Z X
18
Solid List
Solid 1 2 3
After:
-Apply-
2
6
8
13
4 11
2 15
37 1 2
5
10 39 1 2
Y 12 31416
17
16
Z X
18
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Disassembling B-rep Solids

The Disassemble method operates on one or more boundary represented (B-rep) solids and
breaks them into the original surfaces that composed each B-rep solid. A B-rep solid can be
created by the Geometry Application’s Create/Solid/B-rep form.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
By Default, Convert to Simply Trimmed toggle is on which
Method: Disassemble will convert all surfaces to Simply Trimmed (green) surfaces
that satisfy the requirements for a “green” surface. These
Convert to Simply Trimmed surfaces can be used for creating TriParametric Solids (blue).
Delete Original Solids By default, Delete Original Solids toggle is ON which means
that the original B-rep Solid will be deleted after it has been
Solid List disassembled.
Specify the solid(s) to disassemble from either by cursor

Example: Solid 1. The Solid select menu that appears can be
-Apply- used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate
solid.
☞ More Help:
• Using the Select Menus
(p. 41) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Disassemble a B-rep Solid Example

Disassemble solid 1 into its constituent surfaces and convert all possible surfaces into Simply
Trimmed surfaces (green). If “Conver to Simply Trimmed” toggle was OFF, the resulting
surfaces would maintain their original type; (magenta).
Geometry
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Disassemble
Convert to Simply Trimmed

1
Solid List
Solid 1
-Apply-
Y
Z X
After:
44 48
26
2728 15 14
29 10
17 25
9
40 22 2324
4546 12
47 30 13
18
21 41 4243 11 38
20 16
5 7
31 32 6 4
39 34 36
19
2 8
33 3 1
Y 35 37
Z X
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Refitting Solids
Refitting Solids with the To TriCubicNet Option
This form is used to refit a solid to alternative mathematical solid representations. The form
provides three Options; To TriCubicNet, To TriParametric, and To Parasolid.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Refit
Solid ID List
Option: To TriCubicNet
Refit Parameters The To TriCubicNet option creates uniformly
parametrized Piecewise Cubic solids from existing solids.
u Density The u,v, and w Grid Density is input as the Refit
1 Parameters. The solid must satisfy the requirement of
having 5 or 6 faces and no interior regions on any face.
v Density Enter values to define the u,v,w Grid Density of the new
1 solids. Enter the value from the keyboard.
w Density
If ON, after Refit completes, the solids specified in Solid
1 List will be deleted from the database.
Delete Original Solids By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
execute the form.
Solid List
Specify the solids to refit. Either cursor select the solids or

enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 1 5. The
Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how
-Apply- you want to cursor select the appropriate solids.
☞ More Help:
• Solids (p. 24)
• Creating a Boundary Representation
(B-rep) Solid (p. 338)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Refitting Solids with the To TriParametric Option

Geometry
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Refit
1
Option: To TriParametric
The To TriParametric option creates uniformly
Refit Parameters parametrized tri-cubic solids from existing solids. The solid
must satisfy the requirement of having 5 or 6 faces and no
Refit Tolerance
interior regions on any face.
0.005
Enter a value specifying the tolerance to use for refitting

the solids.
Auto Execute If ON, after Refit completes, the solids specified in Solid
Solid List
execute the form.
-Apply-

you want to cursor select the appropriate solids.
☞ More Help:
• Solids (p. 24)
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Refitting Solids with the To Parasolid Option

Geometry
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Refit
1
Option: To Parasolid
The To Parasolid option creates Parasolid B-rep solids
Refit Parameters from existing non Parasolid solids.
Refit Tolerance
0.005
Enter a value specifying the tolerance to use for refitting

the solids.
Auto Execute If ON, after Refit completes, the solids specified in Solid
Solid List
execute the form.
-Apply-

you want to cursor select the appropriate solids.
☞ More Help:
• Solids (p. 24)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Reversing Solids
The Reverse method redefines the connectivity of an existing set of solids by exchanging the
positive ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions of the solids. Then, to maintain a positive parametric frame,
MSC.Patran translates the parametric origin up the original ξ 3 axis and then reverses the ξ 3
direction. You can plot the ξ 1 , ξ 2 and ξ 3 directions for the solids by pressing the Show
Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Attributes form found under the menu
Display/Geometry.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Reverse
Auto Execute Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means
you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Solid List
Specify the solids to reverse either by cursor selecting them

or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 11
-Apply- 20.
☞ More Help:
Basic Functions
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Solid Reverse Method Example

Reverses the parametric directions for Solid 1 (only the top half of Solid 1 is shown). Notice that
the parametric origin is relocated.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
11 7
Object: Solid
Method: Reverse
Auto Execute
10 6 1
Solid List 3
Solid 1
2
-Apply-
X
Y
Z
1
After:
11 7
10 2 6
3
X
Y
Z 1
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Boolean Operation Add

This form is used to perform a Solid boolean of “Add”.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the MSC.Patran
Method: Boolean
Specify the boolean operation type:
Solid ID List
1. Add
1
2. Subtract
3. Intersect
Specify the solids to perform an Add Boolean operation on

Solid List either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Solid 10 11. The Solid select menu that
the appropriate solids.
Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON) This button, by default is disabled since updates of an existing
after the boolean operation is completed. If the Geometry
-Apply- Preference toggle, Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off,
then this button will be enabled and the label will be, “Update
Solid Mesh/LBC”. Pressing this button after the boolean
operation is complete will update the existing mesh on the
solid.
☞ More Help:
MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Solid Boolean Operation Add Example

Add Solids 2 and 3 to Solid 1.
Geometry
Action:
Before:
Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Boolean
Solid ID List
8
Solid List
Solid 1:3
Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON)

Y
Z X
-Apply-
After:
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Boolean Operation Subtract

This form is used to perform a Solid boolean operation of “Subtract”.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Edit
Method: Boolean
Solid ID List Specify the boolean operation type:

1. Add
1
2. Subtract
3. Intersect

the form.
Target Solid
Specify the target solid to perform a Subtract Boolean operation
on either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from
the keyboard. Example: Solid 10. The Solid select menu that
Subtracting Solid List appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select
the appropriate solid.
Specify the solid(s) to subtract from the Target Solid either by

Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON) Example: Solid 10 11. The Solid select menu that appears can
solids.
-Apply-
This button, by default is disabled since updates of an existing
Preference toggle, Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off,
solid.
☞ More Help:
MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Solid Boolean Operation Subtract Example

Subtract solids 2 and 3 from solid 1.
Geometry
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Boolean
Solid ID List
1
Auto Execute
Target Solid
Solid 1
Y
Subtracting Solid List Z X
Solid 2 3
Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON) After:
-Apply-
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Boolean Operation Intersect

This form is used to perform a Solid boolean operation of “Intersect”.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Method: Boolean
Solid ID List Specify the boolean operation type:

1. Add
1
2. Subtract
3. Intersect

Target Solid
Specify the target solid to perform a Intersect Boolean operation
on either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from
Intersecting Solid List the keyboard. Example: Solid 10. The Solid select menu that
the appropriate solid.
Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON) Specify the solid(s) to intersect with the Target Solid either by
-Apply- solids.

Preference toggle, Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off,
solid.
☞ More Help:
MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Solid Boolean Operation Intersect Example

Intersect solids 2 and 3 with solid
Geometry
Geometry Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Boolean
Solid ID List
1
Auto Execute
Target Solid
solid 1
Y
Intersecting Solid List
solid 2 3 Z X
Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON) After:
-Apply-
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Solid Edge Blends

Creating Constant Radius Edge Blends from Solid Edges
This form is used to create a constant radius edge blend on an edge(s) of a solid.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Edge Blend Specify which of the two Edge Blend types to create:
1. Constant Radius
2. Chamfer
Blend Parameters
Constant Radius Specify the constant radius for the blend.
0.25
Specify which of the three options to create an edge blend
from:
Edges to Blend 1. Edge - Create blend on the input edge(s).
2. Face - Create blend on all edges of the input face(s).
3. Solid - Create blend on all edges of the input solid(s).
Solid Edge List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the edge(s) of a solid which are to blended, either by

entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Solid 10.1.1),
or cursor define the edge locations using the Edge Select
Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON) Menu.

-Apply- mesh and LBC on a parasolid solid will occur automatically
after the edge blend is created. If the Geometry Preference
toggle, Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off, then this
button will be enabled and the label will be, “Update Solid
Mesh/LBC”. Pressing this button after the edge blend operation
is complete will update the existing mesh on the solid.
☞ More Help:
MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Creating Constant Radius Edge Blend from Solid Edges Example

Create an Edge Blend of Radius 0.25 on Solid 7 edges Solid 7.1.5 7.3.6 7.11.1 and 7.3.1.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Edge Blend
Blend Parameters
Constant Radius
0.25
Edges to Blend
Z
Y
X
Auto Execute
Solid Edge List

Solid 7.1.5 7.3.6 7.11.1 7.
After:
-Apply-
Z
Y
X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Creating Chamfer Edge Blend from Solid Edges

This form is used to create a constant angle chamfer on an edge(s) of a solid.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Specify which of the two Edge Blend types to create:
Method: Edge Blend 1. Constant Radius
2. Chamfer
Chamfer Parameters Specify the chamfer size on the face to offset.

Offset
0.25 Specify the chamfer angle.
Angle Specify which of the three options to create a chamfer from:

45.0 1. Edge - Create chamfer on the input edge(s).
2. Face - Create chamfer on all edges of the input face(s).
Edges to Blend 3. Solid - Create chamfer on all edges of the input solid(s).

Auto Execute
Solid Edge List
Specify the edge(s) of a solid which are to be chamfered, either
by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Solid
10.1.1), or cursor define the edge locations using the Edge
Select Menu.
after the edge blend is created. If the Geometry Preference
-Apply- toggle, Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off, then this
Mesh/LBC”. Pressing this button after the edge blend operation
☞ More Help:
MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Creating Chamfer Edge Blend from Solid Edges Example

Create Chamfers with offset of 0.02 and angle of 45 degrees on Solid 1 edges Solid 1.1.3 1.1.12
1.1.6 1.1.4 1.2.4 and 1.4.4.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Edge Blend Z
Y
1
X
Chamfer Parameters
Offset
0.02
Angle
45.0
Z
Edges to Blend Y
X
Auto Execute After:

Solid Edge List
Solid 1.1.3 1.1.12 1.1.6 1.
Z
Y
Update Solid Mesh/LBC (ON) 1
X
-Apply-
Z
Y
X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Imprinting Solid on Solid

This form is used to imprint solid bodies on solid bodies.

Specify the solids to imprint onto a solid body either by cursor

Example: Solid 1. The Solid select menu that appears can be
solids.
Specify the solids to be imprinted onto either by cursor selecting

them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid
10 11. The Solid select menu that appears can be used to
define how you want to cursor select the appropriate solids.

after the imprinting is completed. If the Geometry Preference
Mesh/LBC”. Pressing this button after the imprinting operation
☞ More Help:
MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Imprint Solid on Solid Example

Imprint Solid Cylinders 2 and 3 onto the faces of Solid Block 1. The Cylinders have been deleted
to show the results of the imprint.
Before:
Z X
After:
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Solid Shell Operation

This form is used to create a void in a solid by shelling the selected faces.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Solid
Method: Shell
Specify the wall thickness of the resulting solid to be edited.
Thickness
0.25
Auto Execute Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which means
Solid Face List
Specify the face(s) of a solid to be shelled, either by entering
the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Solid 10.1), or cursor
define the face locations using the Face Select Menu.

-Apply- after the shelling is completed. If the Geometry Preference
Mesh/LBC”. Pressing this button after the shelling operation is
complete will update the existing mesh on the solid.
☞ More Help:
MSC.Patran
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Solid Shell Operation Example

Shell solids 1t4 with a wall thickness=0.25 using faces solid 4.1 4.2 3.6 2.1 2.4 2.5 1.4 and 1.2.
Geometry
Geometry
Action: Edit Before:
Object: Solid
Method: Shell
Thickness
0.25
Auto Execute
Solid Face List
Y
-Apply-
X Z
After:
X Z
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
6.6 Editing Features

Suppressing a Feature
The Edit,Feature,Suppress method displays the list of CAD features associated with the
geometry that can be suppressed from the geometric model.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Feature
Method: Suppress
Filter * The “Filter” button and databox widgets are used to filter the
Feature List features to be displayed in the Feature List. Enter the filter
string in the databox and then either select the “Filter”
button or press the return key.
Select which features to suppress from the Feature List.

Selecting a feature name will highlight the feature in the
MSC.Patran viewport for easy identification.
Geometric Entity List When a geometric entity is selected in the MSC.Patran

viewport, the geometric id will be echoed in the
selectdatabox and the feature name that the geometric entity
is associated with will be highlighted in the Feature List.
-Apply-
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Unsuppressing a Feature
The Edit,Feature,Unsuppress method displays the list of CAD features associated with the
geometry that can be unsuppressed from the geometric model.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Feature
Method: Unsuppress
Filter * The “Filter” button and databox widgets are used to filter the
Feature List features to be displayed in the Feature List. Enter the filter
string in the databox and then either select the “Filter” button
or press the return key.
Select which features to unsuppress from the Feature List.
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Editing Feature Parameters

The Edit,Feature,Parameters method displays the list of CAD features associated with the
geometry whose parameters can be edited to be used to regenerate the geometric model based
on the new parameter values.
Geometry
Action: Edit
Object: Feature
Method: Parameters
Filter * The “Filter” button and databox widgets are used to filter
Feature List the features to be displayed in the Feature List. Enter the
filter string in the databox and then either select the “Filter”
[Unassociated Parameters] button or press the return key.
Select which features to edit from the Feature List. Selecting

a feature name will highlight the feature in the MSC.Patran
viewport for easy identification. Multiple features can be
selected. A parameters subform will be displayed for each
feature selected, showing the features parameters and their
values. The Unassociated Parameters entry is displayed
whenever there are parameters available for editing that are
not directly associated to a feature.
Geometric Entity List When a geometric entity is selected in the MSC.Patran

viewport, the geometric id will be echoed in the
selectdatabox and the feature name that the geometric
entity is associated with will be highlighted in the
Feature List.
-Apply-
CHAPTER 6 5
Edit Actions
Feature Parameter Definition

The Feature Parameter Definition form allows the parameters of a CAD feature to be displayed
and modified for regeneration of a CAD model.
When the “Definition” column of a parameter is selected,

the definition is copied to the “Input Parameter
Definition” databox for editing. Once the definition is
modified, press return to update the “Definition” column
with the new parameter definition. When all the desired
parameter definitions are modified, press the OK button
to save the changes.
Feature Parameter Definition
Input Parameter Definition
Feature Description Name Definition Value

BLOCK(0) Size X p8 0.55 0.55000001
BLOCK(0) SIZE Y p10 p8 * 0.75 0.41249999
CYLINDER> Diameter p9 0.25 0.25
OK Reset Cancel
Feature: Identifies which feature a parameter belongs to.

Description: Describes the feature type.
Name: The name of the parameter in the CAD system. This is the left-hand side of the
expression for the feature.
Definition: This is the right-hand side of the expression for the feature which is editable.
Value: The value of the parameter.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
CHAPTER
Show Actions
7
■ Overview of the Geometry Show Action Methods
■ The Show Action Information Form
■ Showing Point Locations
■ Showing Point Distance
■ Showing the Nodes on a Point
■ Showing Curve Attributes
■ Showing Curve Arc
■ Showing Curve Angle
■ Showing Curve Length Range
■ Showing the Nodes on a Curve
■ Showing Surface Attributes
■ Showing Surface Area Range
■ Showing the Nodes on a Surface
■ Showing Surface Normals
■ Showing Solid Attributes
■ Showing Coordinate Frame Attributes
■ Showing Plane Attributes
■ Showing Vector Attributes

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
7.1 Overview of the Geometry Show Action Methods

Figure 7-1

Point ❏ Location Shows the coordinate value locations for a list of specified
points or vertices. You may enter a reference coordinate
system ID to express the coordinate values within.
❏ Distance Shows the distance and the x, y and z offsets between one or
more pairs of points and/or vertices.
❏ Node Lists the IDs of the nodes that are located on a specified
point or vertex that is within the Global Model Tolerance
value.
Curve ❏ Attributes Lists the geometric type, length, and starting and ending
points for a list of specified curves or edges.
❏ Arc Shows the total number of Arcs in the model, total number
of Arcs in the current group and the geometric modeling
tolerance.
❏ Angle Shows the angle between two curves for a list of specified
curves or edges.
❏ Length Range Shows the Start and End Point, Length, and Type for a list of
specified curves or edges which are in the Minimum and
Maximum Curve Length Range specified.
curve or edge that is within the Global Model Tolerance
value.
Surface ❏ Attributes Lists the number of vertices and edges associated with each
specified surface or solid face, as well as the area and
geometric type.
❏ Area Range Shows the Vertices, Edges, Area, and Type for a list of
specified surfaces or faces which are in the Minimum and
Maximum Surface Area Range specified.
surface or solid face that is within the Global Model
Tolerance value.
Solid ❏ Attributes Lists the number of vertices, surfaces (or faces) associated
with each specified solid, as well as the solid’s volume and
geometric type.
Coord ❏ Attributes Shows the ID, the xyz coordinate location of the origin and
the type for each specified coordinate frame.
Plane ❏ Attributes
Vector ❏ Attributes
CHAPTER 7 5
Show Actions
The Show Action Information Form

When a Show action is executed, MSC.Patran will display a spreadsheet form at the bottom of
the screen. This form displays information on the geometric entities that were specified on the
Show action form.
Cells on the form that have a dot (.), means there is additional information associated with that cell.
If a cell with the dot is pressed with the cursor, associated information is displayed in the textbox
at the bottom of the form.
The dot means there is additional information associated with the particular cell. The
additional information can be displayed in the textbox below by pressing the cell with the
cursor.
Show <Object_Method> Information
Entity ID Title 1 Title 2 Title 2 Reference CID

• 7 2. 1. 0.
• (Global) Recta
• • (Global) Recta
8 2. 2. 0.
• • (Global) Recta
9 3. 2. 0.
Reset Cancel
This is a scrollable textbox. Information associated with a cell

Reset erases the information stored in
is displayed here. You can copy and paste information from
the form. Cancel will make the form
this textbox into any MSC.Patran form. Copy the information
disappear.
by pressing the left mouse button and dragging the cursor
over the information. Place the cursor over a databox in
another MSC.Patran form and press the middle mouse button
to paste the information.
☞ More Help:
• Show Point Distance Information
Spreadsheet (p. 572)
• Show Point/Curve Distance Information
• Show Point/Surface Distance Information
• Show Curve Angle Information Spreadsheet
(p. 585)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
7.2 Showing Points

Showing Point Locations
Setting Object to Point and Info to Location will show for a list of specified point locations, the
coordinate value locations that are expressed within a specified reference coordinate frame. Point
locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Point
Info: Location
Point Summary
Last ID:
0 The Point Summary table shows:
The last (or highest) point ID used in the database.
Total in Model:
The total number of points in the database.
0
The total number of points in the current group.
Total in 'default_group' : The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.
0
Tolerance:
You can specify an alternate coordinate frame ID for
0.0049999999 the Reference Coordinate Frame. MSC.Patran will
display the point or vertex location within the specified
Reference Coordinate Frame. Default is the global
rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0.
Coord 0

Point List execute the form.
Specify the points, vertices or nodes either by cursor

Apply Examples: Point 5 10, Node 10, Surface 5.5.3. The Point
select menu that appears can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the point locations.
☞ More Help:
• Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18)
• The Show Action Information Form (p. 569)
CHAPTER 7 5
Show Actions
Showing Point Distance

Showing Point Distance with the Point Option
Show the distance between two points. A multi-page spreadsheet is used to display the distance,
direction cosine and point location data for each point pair.
The distance may be shown between a point-point pairs, point-curve pairs, or point-surface
pairs. Use the Option menu to specify the type of opposing entity, Showing Point Distance
with the Point Option, Showing Point Distance with the Curve Option, Showing Point
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Point
Info: Distance
Point Summary
Last ID:
0
Total in Model: The Point Summary table shows:
0 The last (or highest) point ID used in the database.
Total in 'default_group' : The total number of points in the database.
0 The total number of points in the current group.
The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Specify a reference coordinate frame in which the
distance information is to be shown (example Coord 3).
Option: Point Defaults to the Default Coordinate Frame preference.

Coord 0
execute the form.
First Point List
Point 2 Specify the points either by entering the IDs from the
keyboard (examples: Point 5 10 Surface 4.2.1); or by
Second Point List cursor selecting them by using the Point select menu.
Curve 7.1
☞ More Help:
Apply • Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the
Upon execution, the Show Point Distance
Information Spreadsheet (p. 572) form is launched.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Show Point Distance Information Spreadsheet
Page 1 of 3
Show Point Distance Information
From Point ID To Point ID Distance Delta <x y z> Reference CID Cancel
Reset
• .2 • Curve 7.1 7.34937645 <1.23 3.45 2.13> • (Global) Rectan>
Page 1 of 3 Distance
Reset Cancel
Page 2 of 3
From Point ID To Point ID Direction Cosines Reference CID Cancel

Reset
Page 3 of 3
From Point ID To Point ID From Location To Location Reference CID Cancel

Reset
Cell Callback Actions

From Point ID Highlights the point using the secondary highlight color; displays general
information about the point (type, location, etc.) in the textbox.
To Point ID Highlights the point using the secondary highlight color; displays general
Reference CID Highlights both points using the secondary highlight color; displays
general information about the reference frame (type, origin, etc.) in the
textbox.
Other columns Highlights both points using the secondary highlight color; displays the
long (un-abbreviated) form of the data in the textbox.
CHAPTER 7 5
Show Actions
Showing Point Distance with the Curve Option

Show the distance between point/curve pairs. A multi-page spreadsheet is used to display the
distance, direction cosine and minimum point location data for each point/curve pair.
The distance may be shown between a point-point pairs, point-curve pairs, or point-surface pairs.
Use the Option menu to specify the type of opposing entity, Showing Point Distance with the Point
Option, Showing Point Distance with the Curve Option, Showing Point Distance with the
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Point
Info: Distance
Point Summary
Last ID:
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Specify a reference coordinate frame in which the distance
Option: Curve information is to be shown (example Coord 3). Defaults to the
Default Coordinate Frame preference.
Coord 0 By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
execute the form.
First Point List
Specify the points either by entering the IDs from the
Point 2
keyboard (examples: Point 5 10 Surface 4.2.1); or by
Second Point List cursor selecting them by using the Point select menu.
Curve 7
☞ More Help:
Apply
Upon execution, the Show Point/Curve • Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18)
Distance Information Spreadsheet (p. 574)
form is launched.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Show Point/Curve Distance Information Spreadsheet
Page 1 of 4
Show Point/Curve Distance Information
To Point ID From Curve ID Minimum Distance Delta <x y z> Reference CID
Cancel
Reset
• .2 • 7 7.34937645 <1.23 3.45 2.13> • (Global) Rectan>
Reset Cancel
Page 2 of 4
To Point ID From Curve ID Direction Cosines Angle to Curve Reference CID

Cancel
Reset
Page 3 of 4
Show Point /Curve Distance Information
To Point ID From Curve ID Point Location Min Point Location Reference CID
Cancel
Reset
Page 4 of 4
To Point ID From Curve ID Parametric Loc Reference CID

Cancel
Reset
From Point ID Highlights the point using the secondary highlight color; displays general
From Curve ID Highlights the curve using the secondary highlight color; displays
general information about the curve (type, etc.) in the textbox.
Reference CID Highlights both entities using the secondary highlight color; displays
general information about the reference frame (type, origin, etc.) in the
textbox.
Other Columns Highlights both entities using the secondary highlight color; displays the
long (un-abbreviated) form of the data in the textbox; and displays a
marker on the curve where the minimum distance occurs.
CHAPTER 7 5
Show Actions
Showing Point Distance with the Surface Option

Show the distance between point/surface pairs. A multi-page spreadsheet is used to display the
distance, direction cosine and minimum point location data for each point/surface pair.
The distance may be shown between a point-point pairs, point-curve pairs, or point-surface pairs. Use the
Option menu to specify the type of opposing entity, Showing Point Distance with the Point Option,
Showing Point Distance with the Curve Option, Showing Point Distance with the Surface Option,
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Point
Info: Distance
Point Summary
Last ID:
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Option: Surface Specify a reference coordinate frame in which the distance

information is to be shown (example Coord 3). Defaults to the
Coord 0

First Point List
Point 2
keyboard (examples: Point 5 10 Surface 4.2.1); or by cursor
Second Point List selecting them by using the Point select menu.
Surface 7
☞ More Help:
Apply MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1:
Upon execution, the Show Point/Surface Distance • Global Model Tolerance & Geometry (p. 18)
Information Spreadsheet (p. 576) form is launched. • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Show Point/Surface Distance Information Spreadsheet
Page 1 of 4
Show Point/Surface Distance Information
To Point ID From Surface ID Minimum Distance Delta <x y z> Reference CID
Cancel
Reset
• .2 • 7 7.34937645 <1.23 3.45 2.13> • (Global) Rectan>
Reset Cancel
Page 2 of 4
To Point ID From Surface ID Direction Cosines Angle to Normal Reference CID

Cancel
Reset
Page 3 of 4
Show Point /Surface Distance Information
To Point ID From Surface ID Point Location Min Point Location Reference CID
Cancel
Reset
Page 4 of 4
To Point ID From Surface ID Parametric Loc Reference CID

Cancel
Reset
To Point ID Highlights the point using the secondary Highlight color; displays general information
about the point (type, location, etc.) in the textbox.
From Surface ID Highlights the surface using the secondary Highlight color; displays general information
about the surface (type, etc.) in the textbox.
Reference CID Highlights both entities in the secondary Highlight color; displays general information
about the reference frame (type, origin, etc.) in the textbox.
Other columns Highlights both entities in the secondary highlight color; displays the long (un-
abbreviated) form of the data in the textbox; and displays a marker on the surface
where the minimum distance occurs.
CHAPTER 7 5
Show Actions
Showing Point Distance with the Plane Option

Show the distance between point/Plane pairs. A multi-page spreadsheet is used to display the
distance, direction cosine and minimum point location data for each point/plane pair.
The distance may be shown between a point-point pairs, point-curve pairs, or point-surface pairs.
Use the Option menu to specify the type of opposing entity, Showing Point Distance with the
Point Option, Showing Point Distance with the Curve Option, Showing Point Distance with
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Point
Info: Distance
Point Summary
Last ID:
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Option: Plane Specify a reference coordinate frame in which the distance

Coord 0
Point List
Point 2
keyboard (examples: Point 5 10 Plane 4.2.1); or by cursor
Plane List selecting them by using the Point select menu.
Plane 7
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Show Point/Curve Vector Information Spreadsheet
Page 1 of 4
Show Point/Vector Distance Information
To Point ID From Vector ID Minimum Distance Delta <x y z> Reference CID
Cancel
Reset
• .2 • 7 7.34937645 <1.23 3.45 2.13> • (Global) Rectan>
Reset Cancel
Page 2 of 4
To Point ID From Vector ID Direction Cosines Angle to Normal Reference CID

Cancel
Reset
Page 3 of 4
Show Point /Vector Distance Information
To Point ID From Vector ID Point Location Min Point Location Reference CID
Cancel
Reset
Page 4 of 4
To Point ID From Vector ID Parametric Loc Reference CID

Cancel
Reset
From Vector ID Highlights the plane using the secondary Highlight color; displays general information
about the vector (type, etc.) in the textbox.
Other columns Highlights both entities in the secondary highlight color; displays the long
(unabbreviated) form of the data in the textbox; and displays a marker on the surface
CHAPTER 7 5
Show Actions
Showing Point Distance with the Vector Option

Show the distance between point/vector pairs. A multi-page spreadsheet is used to display the
distance, direction cosine and minimum point location data for each point/vector pair.
The distance may be shown between a point-point pairs, point-curve pairs, point-surface pairs,
point-plane pairs or point-vector pairs. Use the Option menu to specify the type of opposing entity,
Showing Point Distance with the Point Option, Showing Point Distance with the Curve
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Point
Info: Distance
Point Summary
Last ID:
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Option: Vector Specify a reference coordinate frame in which the distance

Coord 0
Point List
Point 2
keyboard (examples: Point 5 10 Vector 4.2.1); or by cursor
Vector List selecting them by using the Point select menu.
Vector 7
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Show Point/Curve Distance Information Spreadsheet
Page 1 of 4
Show Point/Plane Distance Information
To Point ID From Plane ID Minimum Distance Delta <x y z> Reference CID
Cancel
Reset
• .2 • 7 7.34937645 <1.23 3.45 2.13> • (Global) Rectan>
Reset Cancel
Page 2 of 4
To Point ID From Plane ID Direction Cosines Angle to Normal Reference CID

Cancel
Reset
Page 3 of 4
Show Point /Plane Distance Information
To Point ID From Plane ID Point Location Min Point Location Reference CID
Cancel
Reset
Page 4 of 4
To Point ID From Plane ID Parametric Loc Reference CID

Cancel
Reset

From Plane ID Highlights the plane using the secondary Highlight color; displays general information
about the plane (type, etc.) in the textbox.
Other columns Highlights both entities in the secondary highlight color; displays the long
(unabbreviated) form of the data in the textbox; and displays a marker on the surface
CHAPTER 7 5
Show Actions
Showing the Nodes on a Point

Setting Object to Point and Info to Node will show the IDs of the nodes that lie on at specified
point locations that are within the Global Model Tolerance. Point locations can be points, vertices,
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Point
Info: Node
Point Summary
Last ID: The Point Summary table shows:
Total in Model: The total number of points in the database.
Total in 'default_group' :
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Not used for this form.

Coord 0
execute the form.
Point List
Specify the points, vertices or nodes either by cursor

Examples: Point 5 10, Node 10, Solid 4.5.3.1. The Point
Apply select menu that appears can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the point locations.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
7.3 Showing Curves

Showing Curve Attributes
Setting Object to Curve and Info to Attributes will show the geometric type, length, and the
starting and ending points for a list of specified curves or edges.
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Curve
Info: Attributes
Curve Summary
Last ID:
0
The Curve Summary table shows:
Total in Model:
0 The last (or highest) curve ID used in the database.
The total number of curves in the database.
The total number of curves in the current group.
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999

Curve List means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Specify the curves or edges either by entering the IDs from

the keyboard (examples: Curve 5 10 Surface 4.2); or by
Apply cursor selecting them by using the Curve select menu.
☞ More Help:
• Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran (p. 19)
CHAPTER 7 5
Show Actions
Showing Curve Arc

Setting Object to Curve and Info to Arc will show the total number of Arcs in the model, total
number of Arcs in the current group and the geometric modeling tolerance.
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Curve
Info: Arc
Arc Summary
Total in Model:
0
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
execute the form.
Curve List
Specify the curves or edges either by entering the IDs

from the keyboard (examples: Curve 5 10 Surface 4.2);
or by cursor selecting them by using the Curve select
Apply menu.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Showing Curve Angle

Setting Object to Curve and Info to Angle will show the angle between pairs of curves. The point
on each curve where the angle is calculated from is shown via a primary graphics marker in the
graphics marker color. This is useful if the two curves do not intersect.
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Curve
Info: Angle
Curve Summary
Last ID:
0
Total in Model: The last (or highest) curve ID used in the database.
0 The total number of curves in the database.
Total in 'default_group' : The total number of curves in the current group.

0 The current value of the Global Model Tolerance.
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
First Curve List the form.
Surface 1.2
Second Curve List
Curve 7 Specify the curves or edges either by entering the IDs from the
keyboard (examples: Curve 5 10 Surface 4.2); or by cursor
selecting them by using the Curve select menu.
Apply
☞ More Help:
Upon execution, the Show Curve Angle Information

Spreadsheet (p. 585) form is launched.
CHAPTER 7 5
Show Actions
Show Curve Angle Information Spreadsheet
Page 1 of 2
Show Curve Angle Information
First Curve ID Second Curve ID Angle Minimum Distance Minimum Location 1

CancelReset
• Surface 1.2 • 7 90.0 0. [1.23.3.45.2.13] >
Page 1 of 2 Angle
Reset Cancel
Page 2 of 2
Show Curve Angle Information
First Curve ID SecondCurve ID Minimum Loc 2 Minimum Param1 Minimum Param2

Cancel
Reset
First Curve ID Highlights the curve using the secondary highlight color; displays general information
Second Curve ID Highlights the curve using the secondary highlight color; displays general information
about the curve (type, etc.) in the textbox.
Other Columns Highlights both curves in the secondary highlight color; displays the long (un-
abbreviated) form of the data in the textbox; and displays a marker on each curve at the
respective locations where the minimum distance occurs.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Showing Curve Length Range

Setting Object to Curve and Info to Length Range will show the Start and End Point, Length, and
Type for a list of specified curves or edges which are in the Minimum and Maximum Curve
Length Range specified.
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Curve
Info: Length Range
Curve Summary
Last ID:
0
Total in Model: The last (or highest) curve ID used in the database.
0 The total number of curves in the database.
Total in 'default_group' : The total number of curves in the current group.
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Curve Length Range

Minimum Curve Length Specify the Minimum and Maximum Curve Length to define
0.005 the Curve Length Range for filtering curves.
Maximum Curve Length

5.0
the form.
Curve List

the keyboard (examples: Curve 5 10 Surface 4.2); or by
cursor selecting them by using the Curve select menu.
Apply
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 7 5
Show Actions
Showing the Nodes on a Curve

Setting the Object to Curve and Info to Node will show the IDs of the nodes that lie on the
specified curves or edges that are within the Global Model Tolerance.
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Curve
Info: Node
Curve Summary
Last ID:
0
The last (or highest) curve ID used in the database.
Total in Model: The total number of curves in the database.
0 The total number of curves in the current group.
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999

Apply the keyboard (examples: Curve 5 10 Surface 4.2); or by
cursor selecting them by using the Curve select menu.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
7.4 Showing Surfaces

Showing Surface Attributes
Setting the Object to Surface and Info to Attributes will list the number of vertices and edges
associated with each specified surface or solid face, as well as the its area and geometry type.
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Surface
Info: Attributes
Surface Summary
Last ID: The Surface Summary table shows:
1
The last (or highest) surface ID used in the database.
Total in Model: The total number of surfaces in the database.
7 The total number of surfaces in the current group.
1
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Specify the surfaces or solid faces, either by entering the IDs
Auto Execute from the keyboard (examples: Surface 5 10 Solid 4.2); or by
cursor selecting them by using the Surface select menu.
Surface List
Solid 1.6
If pressed, MSC.Patran draws the positive surface normal
vector for each specified surface or solid face. The positive
Draw Normal Vectors normal direction is based on the surface’s or solid face’s
parametrization.
Reset Graphics
If pressed, MSC.Patran erases the normal vectors and
reverts the model back to the last display type, such as
Apply wireframe, after a MSC.Patran form was executed. (This
includes the Display menu forms.)
☞ More Help:
Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON • The Show Action Information Form (p. 569)
which means you do not need to press the Apply
button to execute the form.
CHAPTER 7 5
Show Actions
Showing Surface Area Range

Setting Object to Surface and Info to Area Range will show the Vertices, Edges, Area, and Type for
a list of specified surfaces or faces which are in the Minimum and Maximum Surface Area Range
specified.
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Surface
Info: Area Range
Surface Summary
Last ID:
The Surface Summary table shows:
1
The last (or highest) surface ID used in the database.
1
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Surface Area Range

Minimum Surface Area
0.005
Specify the Minimum and Maximum Surface Area to define
Maximum Surface Area the Surface Area Range for filtering surfaces.
5.0
Auto Execute
the form.
Surface List
Specify the surfaces or faces either by entering the IDs from

the keyboard (examples: Surface 5 10 Solid 4.2); or by
Apply
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Showing the Nodes on a Surface

Setting the Object to Surface and Info to Node will show the IDs of the nodes that lie on the
specified surfaces or solid faces that are within the Global Model Tolerance.
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Surface
Info: Node
Surface Summary
Last ID:
0 The Surface Summary table shows:
Total in Model: The last (or highest) surface ID used in the database.
0 The total number of surfaces in the database.
The total number of surfaces in the current group.
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Surface List
the form.
Surface 1 2
Specify the surfaces or solid faces, either by entering the IDs

Apply from the keyboard (examples: Surface 5 10 Solid 4.2); or by
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 7 5
Show Actions
Showing Surface Normals

Setting the Object to Surface and Info to Normals enables the user to display surface normals of
varying densities on the surface.
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Surface
Info: Normal
Surface Summary
Last ID: The Surface Summary table shows:
1 The last (or highest) surface ID used in the database.
1
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Normal Vector Display

◆ Surface Interior Defines whether the normals are to be displayed on the interior
and boundary of a surface or only on the boundary edges of
◆
◆ Surface Boundary the surface.
Normal Vector Density

Allows the user to input the density of normals on a surface.
1 21 For the density n the normals are displayed as an n by n set of
1 normals unless the surface is trimmed. If the surface is
trimmed, the normals which do not lie on the surface are
displayed on the nearest edge.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Normal Vector Display

◆ Surface Interior
◆
◆ Surface Boundary
Normal Vector Density

1 21
1
Set Normal Vector Length Allows the user to define the length of the surface normal
vectors. By default, the normal vectors are proportional to
Normal Vector Length the surface area. The vector length is set in the Normal
1.0 Vector Length databox.

Surface List Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
execute the form.
If pressed, MSC.Patran erases the normal vectors and

Reset Graphics
reverts the model back to the last display type, such as
wireframe, after a MSC.Patran form was executed. (This
includes the Display menu forms.)
Apply
Specify the surfaces or solid faces, either by entering the IDs from the
keyboard (examples: Surface 5 10 Solid 4.2); or by cursor selecting them by
using the Surface select menu.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 7 5
Show Actions
7.5 Showing Solids

Showing Solid Attributes
Setting the Object to Solid and Info to Attributes will list the number of vertices and faces associated
with each specified solid, as well as the volume and the geometry type.
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Solid
Info: Attributes
Solid Summary
Last ID: The Solid Summary table shows:
0 The last (or highest) solid ID used in the database.
Total in Model: The total number of solids in the database.

0 The total number of solids in the current group.
0
Tolerance:
0.0049999999

Solid List
execute the form.
Specify the solids either by cursor selecting them or by

Apply entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 4 11.
☞ More Help:
• Solids (p. 24)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
7.6 Showing Coordinate Frames

Showing Coordinate Frame Attributes
Setting the Object to Coord and Info to Attributes will list the ID, the coordinate value location of
the coordinate frame’s origin and the coordinate frame type for each specified coordinate frame.
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Coord
Info: Attributes
Coordinate Frame Summary

Last ID:
0 The Coordinate Frame Summary table shows:
The last (or highest) coordinate frame ID used in the database.
Total in Model:
The total number of coordinate frames in the database.
1
The total number of coordinate frames in the current group.
1
Tolerance:
0.0049999999
Coordinate Frame List the form.
Specify the coordinate frames either by cursor selecting them

or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Coord 10
13.
Apply
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 7 5
Show Actions
7.7 Showing Planes

Showing Plane Attributes
Setting Object to Plane and Info to Attributes will show for a list of specified plane, displaying
the plane origins and the plane normal that are expressed within a specified reference coordinate
frame.
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Plane
Choices are Attributes, Angle and Distance.
Info: Attributes
Vector Summary
Last ID:
0
Total in Model:
0 The Plane Summary table shows:
The Last (or highest) plane 1D used in the database.
Total in 'default_group' : The total number of planes in the database.
0 The total number of planes in the current group.
Tolerance: The current value of the global model tolerance.
0.0049999999
Coord 0
See Showing Point Locations.

Auto Execute
Plane List
Specify the planes either by cursor or by entering the ID’s

from the keyboard. Example: Plane 1 4:7 9.
Apply
☞ More Help:
• Showing Point Locations (p. 570)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Showing Plane Angle

Setting Object to Plane and Info to Angle will show the angle between pairs of planes.
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Plane
Info: Angle
Plane Summary
Last ID:
2
The Plane Summary table shows:
Total in Model: The last (or highest) plane ID used in the database.
2 The total number of planes in the database.
Total in 'default_group' : The total number of planes in the current group.
Global Model Tolerance

0.0049999999 By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
First Plane List Specify the planes either by entering the IDs from the keyboard
(examples: Plane 1); or by cursor selecting them by using the
Plane select menu.
Second Plane List
Apply Upon execution, the Show Plane Angle/Distance Information

Spreadsheet (pg ) form is launched.
CHAPTER 7 5
Show Actions
Show Plane Angle/Distance Information Spreadsheet
Show Plane Show

Angle/Distance Information
Curve Angle Information
First Plane ID Second Plane ID Angle Minimum Distance

1 2 * 90.0 0.
Reset Cancel
First Plane ID Highlights the plane using the secondary highlight color.
Second Plane ID Highlights the plane using the secondary highlight color.
Other Columns Highlights both planes in the secondary highlight color; displays
the long (unabbreviated) form of the data in the textbox.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Showing Plane Distance

Setting Object to Plane and Info to Distance will show the distance between pairs of planes.
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Plane
Info: Distance
Plane Summary
Last ID:
2
The Plane Summary table shows:
Total in Model: The last (or highest) plane ID used in the database.
2 The total number of planes in the database.
Total in 'default_group' : The total number of planes in the current group.
Global Model Tolerance By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
0.0049999999 Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
the form.
Auto Execute
First Plane List Specify the planes either by entering the IDs from the keyboard
(examples: Plane 1); or by cursor selecting them by using the
Plane select menu.
Second Plane List
Upon execution, the Show Plane Angle/Distance Information

Apply Spreadsheet (pg ) form is launched.
CHAPTER 7 5
Show Actions
7.8 Showing Vectors

Showing Vector Attributes
Setting Object to Vector and Info to Attributes will show a list for a specified vector displaying
the vector origins and the vector directions that are expressed within a specified reference
coordinate frame.
Geometry
Action: Show
Object: Vector
Info: Attributes
Vector Summary
Last ID:
0
Total in Model:
0 The Vector Summary table shows:
The Last (or highest) plane 1D used in the database.
The total number of planes in the database.
0
The total number of planes in the current group.
Tolerance: The current value of the global model tolerance.
0.0049999999
Coord 0
See Showing Point Locations.

Auto Execute
Vector List
Specify the vectors either by cursor or by entering the ID’s from

the keyboard. Example: Vector 1 4:7.
Apply
☞ More Help:
• Showing Point Locations (p. 570)
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
CHAPTER
Transform Actions
8
■ Overview of the Transform Methods
■ Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors
■ Transforming Coordinate Frames

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
8.1 Overview of the Transform Methods

Point ❏ Translate Create points by successively offsetting them through a translation vector
from an existing set of points, nodes or vertices.
❏ Rotate Create points by performing a rigid body rotation about a defined axis from
an existing set of points, nodes or vertices.
❏ Scale Create points by scaling an existing set of points, nodes or vertices.
❏ Mirror Create points by a defined mirror plane of an existing set of points, nodes or
vertices.
❏ MCoord Creates points by translating and rotating them from an existing set of
points, nodes, or vertices by referencing coordinate frames.
❏ Pivot Creates points from existing points, nodes or vertices by using a planar
rotation defined by three point locations.
❏ Position Creates points by translating and rotating existing points, nodes or vertices,
using a transformation defined by three original and three destination point
locations.
❏ Vsum Creates points by performing a vector sum of the coordinate locations of
two sets of existing points, nodes or vertices.
❏ MScale Creates points by simultaneously moving, scaling, rotating and/or warping
an existing set of points, nodes or vertices.
Curve ❏ Translate Create curves by successively offsetting them through a translation vector
from an existing set of curves or edges.
❏ Rotate Create curves by performing a rigid body rotation about a defined axis from
an existing set of curves or edges.
❏ Scale Create curves by scaling an existing set of curves or edges.
❏ Mirror Create curves by a defined mirror plane of an existing set of curves or edges.
❏ MCoord Creates curves by translating and rotating them from an existing set of
curves or edges by referencing coordinate frames.
❏ Pivot Creates curves from existing curves or edges by using a planar rotation
defined by three point locations.
❏ Position Creates curves by translating and rotating existing curves or edges, using a
transformation defined by three original and three destination point
locations.
❏ Vsum Creates curves by performing a vector sum of the coordinate locations of
two sets of existing curves or edges.
❏ MScale Creates curves by simultaneously moving, scaling, rotating and/or warping
an existing set of curves or edges.
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions

Surface ❏ Translate Create surfaces by successively offsetting them through a translation vector
from an existing set of surfaces or solid faces.
❏ Rotate Create surfaces by performing a rigid body rotation about a defined axis
from an existing set of surfaces or solid faces.
❏ Scale Create a set of curves by scaling an existing set of curves or edges.
❏ Mirror Create surfaces by a defined mirror plane of an existing set of surfaces or
solid faces.
❏ MCoord Creates surfaces by translating and rotating them from an existing set of
surfaces or solid faces by referencing coordinate frames.
❏ Pivot Creates surfaces from existing surfaces or solid faces by using a planar
rotation defined by three point locations.
❏ Position Creates surfaces by translating and rotating existing surfaces or solid faces,
using a transformation defined by three original and three destination point
locations.
❏ Vsum Creates surfaces by performing a vector sum of the coordinate locations of
two sets of existing surfaces or solid faces.
❏ MScale Creates surfaces by simultaneously moving, scaling, rotating and/or
warping an existing set of surfaces or solid faces.
Solid ❏ Translate Create solids by successively offsetting them through a translation vector
from an existing set of solids.
❏ Rotate Create solids by performing a rigid body rotation about a defined axis from
an existing set of solids.
❏ Scale Create solids by scaling an existing set of solids.
❏ Mirror Create solids by a defined mirror plane of an existing set of solids.
❏ MCoord Creates solids by translating and rotating them from an existing set of solids
by referencing coordinate frames.
❏ Pivot Creates solids from existing solids by using a planar rotation defined by
three point locations.
❏ Position Creates solids by translating and rotating existing solids, using a
locations.
❏ Vsum Creates solids by performing a vector sum of the coordinate locations of two
sets of existing solids.
❏ MScale Creates solids by simultaneously moving, scaling, rotating and/or warping
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Coord ❏ Translate Create rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frames by
successively offsetting them through a translation vector from an existing
set of coordinate frames.
❏ Rotate Create rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frames by
performing a rigid body rotation about a defined axis from an existing set of
coordinate frames.
Plane ❏ Translate Create solids by successively offsetting them through a translation vector
locations.
Vector ❏ Translate Create solids by successively offsetting them through a translation vector
locations.
❏ Scale Create solids by scaling an existing set of solids.
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
8.2 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and

Vectors
Translating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors
The Translate method creates a set of points, curves, surfaces, solids planes or vectors which are
successively offset from each other by a defined Translation Vector <dx dy dz>. Points can be
translated from points, vertices or nodes. Curves can be translated from curves or edges. Surfaces
can be translated from surfaces or solid faces. Solids are translated from solids.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: <Type> Set <Type> to either: Point, Curve, Surface, Solid, Plane or
Vector.
Method: Translate
Point ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point, curve,
surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in
1
the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
Type of Transformation
◆ Cartesian in Refer. CF
◆
◆ Curvilinear in Refer. CF Cartesian in Refer. CF means the Translation Vector
coordinates will be applied along the Refer. Coordinate Frame’s
principal axes.
Refer. Coordinate Frame Curvilinear in Refer. CF means the Translation Vector
Coord 0 coordinates will be interpreted as R,θ,Z if the Refer. Coordinate
Frame is cylindrical, and R,θ,Φ if the Refer. Coordinate Frame is
spherical.
Used by the Translation Vector to express the direction and distance of the translation. Specify a
cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame if you chose the Curvilinear in Refer. CF toggle.
Example: Coord 5. Default is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Coord 0 The distance and direction to translate the new set of
points, curves, surfaces or solids from the existing set. The
coordinate values will be defined within the Refer.
Translation Vector Coordinate Frame. Example: <10 0 0>. If Cartesian in
Refer. CF is selected, then the Vector select menu will
<1 0 0>
appear to allow you alternate ways to cursor define the
vector.
Translation Parameters
Repeat Count The number of times to translate the existing set of entities
1 and create new points, curves, surfaces or solids.
Delete Original Points If ON, after Translate completes, the existing points, curves,
surfaces or solids specified in <Type> List will be deleted
Auto Execute from the MSC.Patran database.
Point List
Specify the existing entities either by cursor selecting them
[0 0 0] or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 5
10 Surface 5.5.1 Solid 12. The select menu that appears at
the bottom can be used to define how you want to cursor
-Apply- select the appropriate points, vertices, curves, edges, faces
or solids.

☞ More Help:
• Translating or Scaling Geometry Using
Curvilinear Coordinate Frames (p. 66)
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Translating Points Radially

Creates Points 8 through 14 by translating Points 1 through 7, three units radially outward
within the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100. Notice that Curvilinear in Refer. CF is
pressed.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Point
4
Method: Translate
5 3
Point ID List
8
6 2
◆
◆ Curvilinear in Refer. CF
T
Y
Refer. Coordinate Frame 7 Z100R 1
Z X
Coord 100
Translation Vector
<3 0 0>
After:
Repeat Count
1
11
Delete Original Points 12 10
Auto Execute
Point List
13 9
Point 1:7
5 4 3
-Apply-
6 T 2
Y
14 7 Z100 R 1 8
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Translating Points
This example is the same as the previous example, except Cartesian in Refer. CF is pressed
instead of Curvilinear in Refer. CF.
Geometry Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Point
4
Method: Translate
5 3
Point ID List
8
Type of Transformation 6 2
◆
T
Y
Refer. Coordinate Frame 7 Z100R 1
Z X
Coord 100
Translation Vector
<3 0 0>
After:
Repeat Count
1

5 4 11
3 12 10
Auto Execute
6 T 2 13 9
Point List
Point 1:7
7 Z100R 1 14 8
Y
-Apply-
Z X
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Translating Curves
Creates Curves 2 through 6 by translating Curves 1 three times - two units in the X direction and
one unit in the Y direction within the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Curve 1
Method: Translate
Curve ID List
2
Type of Transformation 1
◆

Coord 0 Y 2
Translation Vector Z X
<2 1 0>
After:
Repeat Count
5
Delete Original Curves 11

Auto Execute 9 6
Curve List 7 5 12
Curve 1 5 4 10
3 3 8
-Apply- 1 2 6
Y
1 4
Z X
2
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Translating Curves Radially

Translates Curve 1 three times and radially one unit outward within the cylindrical coordinate
frame, Coord 100. Notice that Curvilinear in Refer. CF is pressed.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
Method: Translate 1
Curve ID List
2
◆
T
Y
Refer. Coordinate Frame 2 Z100 R 1
Coord 100 Z X
Translation Vector
<1 0 0>
After:
Repeat Count
3 4

3
Auto Execute
Curve List 2
curve 1
1
T
-Apply-
Y
8 6 4 2 Z100 R 1 3 5 7
Z X
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Translating Edges
Creates Curve 2 by translating the outside edge of Surface 1, two units radially outward within
cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Curve 4
Method: Translate
Curve ID List
2
3 1
◆

Y
Coord 100
Z X
Translation Vector
1 2
<2 0 0>
After:
Repeat Count
6
1

Auto Execute 2
Curve List
surface 1.3 4
-Apply-
3 1
Y
T
Z X
Z100 R 1 1 2 5
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Translating Surfaces
Creates Surfaces 2 and 3 by translating Surface 1 two times - one unit in the X direction and two
units in the Y direction within the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 10.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Surface 3
Method: Translate
Surface ID List
2
4
1
◆ Cartesian in Refer. CF 2
◆

Coord 10 Y
Y X
Z X Z
10
Translation Vector
<1 2 0>
After:
Repeat Count 11
2 12
3
10
Auto Execute
9 7
Surface List 8
2
surface 1 6
5 3
-Apply-
4
1
Y 2
Z X Y X1
10
Z
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Translating Surfaces Radially

Creates Surfaces 2 through 4 by translating Surface 1 three times and one unit radially outward
within the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Surface
4
Method: Translate
Surface ID List
2
3 1
◆

Y
Coord 100
Z X
1 2
Translation Vector
<1 0 0>
After:
Repeat Count 9
1
7
Auto Execute 4
5
Surface List
3
surface 1
4
2
-Apply-
Y 3 1
T
Z X
Z100 R 1 2 6 8 10
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Translating Solid Faces

Creates Surfaces 1 through 4 by translating the top faces of Solids 1 through 4, 0.5 units radially
outward within the spherical coordinate frame, Coord 20. Notice that Curvilinear in Refer. CF is
pressed.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Surface
3
Method: Translate
Surface ID List
1 2 41
◆
◆ Cartesian in Refer. CF T
◆ Curvilinear in Refer. CF 5
1 R
20
Z 2
Coord 20 X
Z 6
Translation Vector
<.5 0 0>
After:
Repeat Count
1 8
3 4
3
Auto Execute
2 1
Surface List
solid 4.6 3.6 2.6 1.6 2 11 1

34 4
P
-Apply- 10 5 120 R 2 9
T
Y
6
X 7
Z
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Translating Solids
Translates Solids 1 through 4, 1.5 units in the X direction and 1.5 units in the Y direction, within
the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Notice that Delete Original Solids is pressed
and Solids 1:4 are deleted.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Solid
3
Method: Translate
Solid ID List
5 2 41
◆ Cartesian in Refer. CF T
◆
1 R
20
Z 2
Coord 0 X
Z 6
Translation Vector
<1.5 1.5 0>
After:
Repeat Count 9
1
6 105
7 8
Auto Execute
11 7 8
Solid List
solid 1:4
12
-Apply-
Y
P X
Z20 R
T
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Translating Solids
Creates Solid 2 by translating Solid 1, 90 degrees within the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord
1. Notice that Curvilinear in Refer. CF is pressed.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Solid 6
Method: Translate 7
Solid ID List
2
5
◆
8
Refer. Coordinate Frame T

Y
Coord 1
1 R 1
Z X Z 2
Translation Vector 4 3
<.5 0 0>
After:
Repeat Count
1
6
Auto Execute
Solid List
2 5 1
Solid 1 8
-Apply- T
10 9
11 Y
12 Z1 R 1 2
4 3
Z X
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Translating Planes
Translates Plane 1 2 units in the Z direction with the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord
0. Note that Delete Original Plane is not pressed and Plane 1 is kept.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Plane
Method: Translate
Plane ID List
1
◆

Z
X
Coord 0 Y
Translation Vector
<.5 0 0>
After:
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Plane

Auto Execute
Plane List
plane 1
-Apply-
Z
X
Y
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Translating Vectors
Translates Vector 1 2 units in the X direction with the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord
0. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Vector
Method: Translate
Vector ID List
1
◆

Coord 0 Y
Z X
Translation Vector
<.5 0 0>
After:
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Vector

Auto Execute
Vector List
Vector 1
-Apply-
Z X
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Rotating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Creates a set of points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes or vectors by a rigid body rotation about
a defined axis from an existing set of entities. Points can be rotated from other points, vertices or
nodes. Curves can be rotated from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be rotated from other
surfaces or solid faces. Solids are rotated from other solids.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: <Type> Set <Type> to either Point, Curve Surface, Solid, Plane or
Vector.
Method: Rotate
<Type> ID List Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point, curve,
Coord 0 Used by the defined rotation Axis to express the axis’

beginning and ending coordinates values. Example: Coord
Axis 5. Default is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0.
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
This is the rotation axis that the new points, curves,

Rotation Parameters surfaces or solids will be rotated about from the existing set
Rotation Angle of entities. If coordinate values are entered, they will be
defined within the Refer. Coordinate Frame. Example: {[0
90.0 0 0][0 0 1]} . An Axis select menu appears to allow you
alternate methods to cursor define the rotation axis. When
Offset Angle an axis is specified using a non-default coordinate frame,
0.0 e.g., Coord 5.2, the Reference Coordinate Frame should
be set to the default Coordinate Frame, Coord 0.
Repeat Count
1 Point 3
Point 2
Delete Original <Types>
θr
Auto Execute θr
Point List
Axis θo
Point 1
Repeat Count = 2
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Point 3
Point 2
The Rotation Angle (θr) defines how many
θr
degrees to rotate the existing set of entities
about the axis. θr
Axis θo
Point 1
Rotation Parameters
Rotation Angle Repeat Count = 2
90.0
The Offset Angle (θo) defines how many degrees to
Offset Angle offset from the starting point of rotation.
0.0
The Repeat Count defines the number of times to rotate
IfRepeat Count
ON, after Rotate completes, the
the existing set of entities within θr to create new ones.
points,
1 curves, surfaces or solids
specified in <Type> List will be
deleted from the database.
Auto Execute
Point List execute the form.
[0 0 0]
Specify the entities to rotate, either by cursor selecting
Point 5 10 Curve 10.1 Surface 5.5 Solid 10. The select
-Apply- menu that appears can be used to define how you want
to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, curves,
edges, faces or solids.
☞ More Help:
If ON, after Rotate completes, the points, Introduction to MSC.Patran
curves, surfaces or solids specified in <Type> • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)
List will be deleted from the MSC.Patran
database.
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Rotating Points and Nodes

Creates Points 7 through 14 from Point 1 and Node 10 by rotating them six times, 30 degrees
about the global rectangular coordinate frame’s Z axis, Coord 0.3, with an offset angle of 60
degrees. (Coord 0.3 can be cursor defined by using the Axis select menu icon listed below and
cursor selecting Coord 0.)
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Point
Method: Rotate
Point ID List
7 1 10

Y
Coord 0
Axis Z X
coord 0.3
Rotation Parameters
30.0
Offset Angle
60.0 After:
Repeat Count
6 8
10
Auto Execute
Point List
12 7
9
Point 1 Node 10
11
-Apply- 14 13 1 10
Y
Axis Select Menu Icon Z X
3
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Rotating Curves
Creates Curves 2 through 7 by rotating Curve 1 six times, 30 degrees about the axis defined by
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}. Notice that the axis definition is equivalent to Coord 0.3 from the previous
example.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
Method: Rotate
Curve ID List
2
1 1 2
Coord 0 Y
Axis
Z X
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Rotation Parameters
Rotation Angle
30.0
Offset Angle
0.0 After:
Repeat Count
6
8
Delete Original Curves 10 6
Auto Execute
4
5 3
Curve List
12 7 4
curve 1 9 5
6 2
11 3
-Apply- Y
14 7 13 1 1 2
Z X
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Rotating From An Edge

This example is the same as the previous example, except that Curves 1 through 6 are rotated
from an edge of Surface 1.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
Method: Rotate
Curve ID List
1
1 2
Coord 0 Y 1
Axis Z X 3 4
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
Rotation Parameters
Rotation Angle
30.0
Offset Angle
0.0 After:
Repeat Count
6
10
3
Auto Execute 4 2
Curve List 14 9 6
11 7
surface 1.4 5 1
13 5
-Apply- 16 6 15 1 2
Y
1
Z X 3 4
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Rotating Surfaces
Creates Surfaces 4 through 18 by rotating from Surfaces 1, 2 and 3, five times, 30 degrees each
about the axis defined by Points 4 and 1. The axis is defined by cursor selecting the points using
the Axis select menu icon listed below.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Surface
Method: Rotate
5
Surface ID List
4 3
2 3
4 6
1
Coord 0 1 2
Y
Axis Z X
Construct 2PointAxis(Ev
Rotation Parameters
Rotation Angle
30.0
Offset Angle
0.0
After:
Repeat Count
5
10
Delete Original Surfaces 12 12 8 9
9
14 11 8 5
Surface List 14 5
13 10 7 3
surface 1 2 3 17
18 2 13 43
16 4 6
16 1
Y 15 1 2
-Apply-
Z X

CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Rotating From Solid Faces

This example is the same as the previous example, except that Surfaces 1 through 16 are rotated
from the outside faces of Solid 1.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Surface
Method: Rotate
Surface ID List 5
1
3
Coord 0 4 61
Axis
Construct 2PointAxis(Eva
1 2
Y
Rotation Parameters Z X
Rotation Angle
30.0
Offset Angle
0.0 After:
Repeat Count
5
9
Delete Original Surfaces 8 115 7
10
12 11
Auto Execute
138 7 24
Surface List 5
14 10 1
surface 1.5 1.2 1.6 14 9
12
6
133
153
15 14 6
-Apply- 16 1
Y 2
Z X

PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Rotating Solids
Creates Solids 2 through 4 by rotating from Solid 1, three times, 90 degrees each about the global
Z axis, Coord 0.3. Coord 0.3 is cursor defined by using the Axis select menu icon listed below.
Geometry Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Solid
Method: Rotate 5
Solid ID List
3
2
Refer. Coordinate Frame 4 61

Coord 0.3
1 2
Axis Y
Construct 2PointAxis(Eval
Z X
Rotation Parameters
Rotation Angle
90.0
Offset Angle
After:
0.0
Repeat Count 8
10
3 7
9
2 3
Auto Execute
Solid List 1
4 6
solid 1 12 1 2
14
3
-Apply-
11 4
Y 13
Z X 15
17
16
Axis Select Menu Icon 18
3
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Rotating Planes
Rotates Plane 1 90 degrees around the Y Axis in the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord
0. Notice that Delete Original Plane is not pressed and Plane 1 is kept.
Geometry Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Plane
Method: Rotate
Plane ID List
1

Coord 0
Axis
Coord
Y
X
Rotation Parameters
Rotation Angle Z
90.0
Offset Angle
After:
0.0
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Planes
Auto Execute
Plane List
plane 1
-Apply-
Y X
Axis Select Menu Icon Z
3
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Rotating Vectors
Rotates Vector 1 90 degrees around the Z Axis in the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord
0. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept.
Geometry Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Vector
Method: Rotate
Vector ID List
1

Coord 0
Axis
Coord
Y
Rotation Parameters
Rotation Angle Z X
90.0
Offset Angle
After:
0.0
Repeat Count
1
Auto Execute
Vector List
vector 1
-Apply-
Y
Z X
3
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Scaling Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids and Vectors

The Scale method creates a set of points, curves, surfaces, solids or vectors by scaling an existing
set of entities. Points can be scaled from other points, vertices or nodes. Curves can be scaled from
other curves or edges. Surfaces can be scaled from other surfaces or solid faces. Solids are scaled
from other solids.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: <Type> Set <Type> to either Point, Curve Surface, Solid or Vector.
Method: Scale
Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point, curve,
<Type> ID List surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in
◆ Cartesian in Refer. CF Cartesian in Refer. CF means the Scale Factor values
◆
◆ Curvilinear in Refer. CF will be applied along the Refer. Coordinate Frame’s
principal axes.
Refer. Coordinate Frame Curvilinear in Refer. CF means the Scale Factor values will
be interpreted as R,θ,Z if the Refer. Coordinate Frame is
Coord 0 cylindrical, and R,θ,Φ if the Refer. Coordinate Frame is
spherical.
Used by the Origin of Scaling and Scale Factor to express

the scale origin’s coordinate values and the scale factors.
Example: Coord 5. Specify a cylindrical or spherical
coordinate frame if you chose the Curvilinear in Refer. CF
toggle.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Enter the coordinate location of the origin to scale the existing entities from. The coordinate values
are expressed in the Refer. Coordinate Frame. Example: [10 0 0] . If Cartesian in Refer. CF is
selected, the Point select menu appears to allow you alternate ways to cursor define the point
location.
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0] The Scale Factor are three scaling factor values to be
applied along the three principal axes of the Refer.
Scale Parameters Coordinate Frame. A scale factor of one means no scaling
will take place along the specific coordinate frame axis.
Scale Factor Example: 10 20 1. The Repeat Count defines the number of
1.0 1.0 1.0 times to scale the existing set of entities to create the new
ones.
Repeat Count
1 If ON, after Scale completes, the points, curves, surfaces or
solids specified in <Type> List will be deleted from the
MSC.Patran database.

Point List
[0 0 0] the form.
Specify the entities to scale, either by cursor selecting them

-Apply- or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 5
10 Surface 5.5 Solid 11. The select menu that appears can
appropriate points, nodes, vertices, curves, edges, faces or
solids.
☞ More Help:
• Translating or Scaling Geometry Using
Curvilinear Coordinate Frames (p. 66)
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Scaling Points and Nodes

Creates Points 6 through 9 by scaling them from Points 1, 2, 5 and Node 100 two times along the
global X and Y axes, with Point 4 as the origin of scaling.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Point
2
Method: Scale
Point ID List
6
1
◆
Refer. Coordinate Frame Y 5

Coord 0
Z X
Origin of Scaling
Point 4
After:
Scale Parameters
8
Scale Factor
2 2 1
Repeat Count
2
1
7
Delete Original Points 1
4
Auto Execute 100
9
Point List
5
Point 5 1 2 Node 100 Y
Z X
-Apply- 6
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Scaling Points Radially

Creates Points 25 through 44 by scaling them from the points on the outside edge of Surfaces 1
through 4, two times radially within the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100. Notice that
Curvilinear in Refer. CF and Delete Original Points are pressed.
Geometry Before:
Action: Transform
13 4 12
Object: Point
14 11
Method: Scale
15 2 1 10
Point ID List 3
25 16 9
T
6 5 100 R
Z 1 2
◆
17 24
Refer. Coordinate Frame 3 7 4
Y 18 23
Coord 100
Z X 19 22
20 8 21
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0] After:
Scale Parameters 43 44 28
Scale Factor 42 27
2 1 1
41 26
Repeat Count 4
1 40 2 3 1 25
Delete Original Points 39 6 5 100 1 2 30

Auto Execute 7
38 3 4 31
Point List
8
Point 2 4 6 8 9:24 Y 37 29
Z X 36 32
-Apply- 35 34 33
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Scaling Curves
Creates Curve 2 by scaling them from Curve 1, 1.5 times along the X axis of rectangular
coordinate frame, Coord 20. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed and Curve 1 is
deleted.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
Method: Scale
Curve ID List 1
2
Y X
20
Z
◆
1
Coord 20
Z X
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0]
After:
Scale Parameters
Scale Factor
2
1.5 1 1
Repeat Count
1
Y X
Delete Original Curves 20
Z
Auto Execute
Point List
curve 1 Y
2
Z X
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Scaling From An Edge

Creates Curves 1 through 4 by scaling them from the outside edges of Surfaces 1 through 4, 1.5
times radially outward within the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 20. Notice that
Curvilinear in Refer. CF is pressed.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
4
Object: Curve
Method: Scale
Curve ID List
2 3 1
1
T
6 5 20 R
Z 1 2
◆
3 7 4
Coord 20
Z X
8
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0]
After:
Scale Parameters 11
Scale Factor
1.5 1 1 3 4 2
Repeat Count
1 2 3 1
T
12 6 5 20 R 1
Z 2 10
Auto Execute
Curve List 3 7 4
surface 3.3 4.3 1.3 2.3 Y
4 8 1
Z X
-Apply-
9
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Scaling Surfaces
Creates Surfaces 5 through 8 by scaling Surfaces 1 through 4 1.5 times along the radial axis of
cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 20. Notice that Cartesian in Refer. CF and Delete Original
Surfaces are pressed.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Surface 4
Method: Scale
5
T
6 5 20 R
Z 1 2
◆
Refer. Coordinate Frame 3 7 4

Y
Coord 20
Z X
8
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0]
After:
Scale Parameters
Scale Factor
1.5 1 1
Repeat Count 4
1
6 3T 5
12 11 20 R
Z 9 10
Auto Execute
7 7 8
Surface List
surface 1:4 Y 8
Z X
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Scaling Surfaces Radially

This example is the same as the previous example, except that Curvilinear in Refer. CF is selected
instead of Cartesian in Refer. CF.
Geometry
Transform
Before:
Action:
Object: Surface
Method: Scale
4
Surface ID List
5 2 3 1
Type of Transformation T
◆
◆ Cartesian in Refer. CF 6 5 20 R 1
Z 2
3 7 4
Y
Z X
Coord 20 8
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0]
After:
Scale Parameters
11
Scale Factor
1.5 1 1
Repeat Count 6 10 5
1
T
14 13 20 R
Z 9 12
Auto Execute
Surface List
surface 1:4 7 15 8
Y
-Apply-
Z X
16
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Scaling From Solid Faces

Creates Surface 1 by scaling it from the top face of Solid 1, 1.5 times in the X, Y and Z directions
of the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0.
Geometry
Transform
Before:
Action:
Object: Surface
Method: Scale
Surface ID List
1
8 11
9 1 10
1 5
◆
6 7
Coord 0
Z X
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0]
After:
Scale Parameters
Scale Factor
1.5 1.5 1.5
Repeat Count
1 15 14
1
12 13
8 11
Auto Execute 9 1 10
1 5
Surface List 6 7
solid 1.3 Y
Z X
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Scaling From Solids

Creates Solids 5 through 8 by scaling them from Solids 1 through 4, two times in the X and Y
directions of the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Solid
Method: Scale
Solid ID List
5 2
◆

Y
Coord 0
Z X
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0]
Scale Parameters
After:
Scale Factor
2 2 1
Repeat Count 6
1

7
3
Auto Execute 1
5
Curve List 4
solid 1:4
Y 8
-Apply-
Z X
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Scaling From Vectors

Scales Vector 1 with a scale factor of 2 in the X direction in the global rectangular coordinate
frame, Coord 0. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept.
Geometry Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Vector
Method: Scale
Vector ID List
1
◆

Coord 0 Y
Z X
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0]
After:
Scale Parameters
Scale Factor
2 0 0
Repeat Count
1
Auto Execute
Vector List
vector 1
-Apply- Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Mirroring Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Creates a set of points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes or vectors by a defined mirror plane of an
existing set of entities. Points can be mirrored from other points, nodes or vertices. Curves can be
mirrored from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be mirrored from other surfaces or solid faces.
Solids are mirrored from other solids.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Set <Type> to either Point, Curve, Surface, Solid, Plane
Object: <Type>
or Vector.
Method: Mirror
<Type> ID List surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405)
in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic
1 Functions.
These are the three global x,y,z coordinates that define
Define Mirror Plane Normal the location and direction of the mirror plane’s normal
vector. The new entities will be mirrored on the opposite
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}
side of the mirror plane. An Axis select menu appears to
allow you alternate methods to cursor define the normal
Offset Parameters vector.
Offset The number of units to offset the Mirror Plane in the
direction defined by Define Mirror Normal, and from the
0.0
starting point of that normal vector. Default is zero.
Delete Original <Types> If ON, after Mirror completes, the points, curves, surfaces or
solids specified in <Type> List will be deleted from the
Auto Execute MSC.Patran database.
Point List
[0 0 0]
the form.
-Apply-
Specify the entities to mirror, either by cursor selecting them or by
entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 5 10 Surface
5.5 Solid 11. The select menu that appears can be used to define
how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices,
nodes, curves, edges, faces or solids.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Mirroring Points and Nodes

Creates Points 7 through 12 by mirroring them from Points 1 through 6 and Node 100, about the
mirror plane whose normal is the global X axis, Coord 0.1. Coord 0.1 can be cursor defined by
using the Axis select menu icon listed below.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Point
Method: Mirror
2
Point ID List 1
7
3
Define Mirror Plane Normal 5
Coord 0.1
6 100
Offset Parameters
Offset
Y
0.0 Z X
Auto Execute
Point List After:

Point 1 2 3 5 6 Node 100
-Apply-
8 7 1 2
9 3
10 5
12 11 6 100
Y
Z X
1
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Mirroring Curves
Creates Curves 3 and 4 by mirroring them from Curves 1 and 2 about the plane whose normal
is the global Y axis, Coord 0.2, and with an offset of Y=-1.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
Method: Mirror 2
Curve ID List
2 1
3
Define Mirror Plane Normal
Coord 0.2
Offset Parameters 3 1
Y
Offset
-1
Z X
Reverse Curve
Auto Execute After:

Curve List
2
Curve 1 2 2 1
-Apply- 3 1
6 4
Y
Z X 4 3
5
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Mirroring From Edges

Creates Curves 1 through 8 by mirroring them from the inner and outer edges of Surfaces 5
through 8 about the plane whose normal is rectangular coordinate frame 1’s Y axis, Coord 1.2.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
5
Object: Curve
Method: Mirror 7 6 5 3
Curve ID List 6
1 8 4
7
Define Mirror Plane Normal Y X
Coord 1.2
9 10 1
Z
Offset Parameters 8
12
Offset
0.0
Y
11
Reverse Curve
Z X
Auto Execute
After:
Curve List 5
Surface8.47.46.45.45.26.27.2
7 6 5 3
6
-Apply- 5
8 4
7
Y X 4
9 10 1
Z 15 16
3
8
12 14 6
1 13 2
Y
11 17
Z X
8 7
18
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Mirroring Surfaces
This example is similar to the previous example, except that Surfaces 9 through 12 are mirrored
from Surfaces 5 through 8.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
5
Object: Surface
Method: Mirror 7 6 5 3
Surface ID List 6
1 8 4
7
Y X
9 10 Z
1
Coord 1.2
Offset Parameters 8
12
Offset
Y
0.0
11
Z X
Reverse Surface

After:
Auto Execute
5
Surface List
Surface 5:8 7 3
6 5
6
-Apply- 8 4
7 9
Y X
9 10 1Z 14 13
8 10
12 16
Y 18
11 12 11 15
Z X
17
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Mirroring Solids
Creates Solid 2 by mirroring Solid 1 about the plane whose normal is defined by {[0 0 0][1 0 0]}.
Notice that the mirror plane normal definition is the same as entering the global X axis, Coord
0.1.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Solid
Method: Mirror
Solid ID List
2

1
{[0 0 0][1 0 0]}
Offset Parameters
Y
Offset Z X
0.0
Reverse Solid
Auto Execute After:

Solid List
Solid 1
-Apply-
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Mirroring Planes
Mirrors Plane 1 against the X-Y plane and with an offset of 1 unit in the Z direction in the global
rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Notice that Delete Original Plane is not pressed and
Plane 1 is kept. Also, the Reverse Plane is not pressed and Plane 2 is not reversed.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Plane
Method: Mirror
Plane ID List
1
Coord 0
Offset Parameters
Offset
Y
1
Z X
Reverse Plane
Auto Execute After:

Plane List
Plane 1
-Apply-
Y
Z X
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Mirroring Vectors
Mirrors Vector 1 against the X-Y plane and with an offset of 1 unit in the Z direction in the global
rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and
Vector 1 is kept. Also, the Reverse Vector is not pressed and Vector 2 is not reversed.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Vector
Method: Mirror
Vector ID List
1
Coord 0
Offset Parameters
Offset
1 Y
Z X
Reverse Vector
Delete Original Vectors
Auto Execute After:

Vector List
Vector 1
-Apply-
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Moving Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors by

Coordinate Frame Reference (MCoord Method)
Translates and rotates a new set of points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes or vectors from an
existing set of entities by referencing coordinate frames. The new entities’ local position with
respect to the To Coordinate Frame is the same as the local position of the original entities with
respect to the From Coordinate Frame. Points can be moved from other points, nodes or vertices.
Curves can be moved from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be moved from other surfaces or
solid faces. Solids are moved from other solids.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: <Type> Set <Type> to either Point, Curve, Surface, Solid, Plane or
Vector.
Method: MCoord
<Type> ID List surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the
1 MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
From Coordinate Frame

From Coordinate Frame is the coordinate frame ID defining
Coord 0 the orientation of the existing entities. Default is the global
rectangular frame, Coord 0.
To Coordinate Frame
To Coordinate Frame is the coordinate frame ID defining the
orientation of the new entities. Example: Coord 5.
Delete Original <Types> If ON, after MCoord completes, the points, curves, surfaces or
solids specified in <Type> List are deleted from the MSC.Patran
Auto Execute database.
Point List
[0 0 0] Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions is ON which
the form.
-Apply-
Specify the entities to move, either by cursor selecting them or
by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 5 10
Surface 5.5 Solid 11. The select menu that appears can be used
nodes, vertices, curves, edges, faces or solids.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Moving Points and Nodes

Creates Points 7 through 12 from Points 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 and Node 100 by moving them from the
global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0, to the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 100.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Point Y X
Method: MCoord 100
Z
Point ID List
7

Coord 0
To Coordinate Frame
Coord 100 Y 1 3 4 5 6 100
Delete Original Points Z X

Auto Execute
Point List
Point 1 3:6 Node 100
After:
8
-Apply-
12
11
10
Y 9X
7Z
100
Y
Z X
1 3 4 5 6 100
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Moving Curves
Creates Curves 7 through 12 by moving Curves 1 through 6 from cylindrical coordinate frame,
Coord 200 to cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 300.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
Method: MCoord
T
Curve ID List
7 4 300 R
Z
3
From Coordinate Frame T 2
Coord 200 5
Z a R 6
To Coordinate Frame 1
Coord 300
Y
Z X
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 1:6 After:
-Apply-
9
10
8
T
12
4 11 300R
Z
3
2 7
T
200
Y 5
Z R 6
1
Z X
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Moving From Edges

This example is similar to the previous example, except that Curves 1 through 8 are moved from
the outside edges of Surfaces 1 through 4, from Coord 200 to Coord 300.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
Method: MCoord
Curve ID List T
1 4 300R
Z
From Coordinate Frame 1
Coord 200 T
3
To Coordinate Frame Z 200
R
2
Coord 300 Y
Z X
Auto Execute
Curve List
Surface 1:4 After:
-Apply- 6
5
7
1
8 T
4
4 300R
2 Z
1
T 3
3
Z Y200R
2
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Moving Surfaces
Creates Surfaces 5 through 8 by moving from Surfaces 1 through 4 from cylindrical coordinate
frame, Coord 200, to cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 300.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Surface
Method: MCoord
Surface ID List T
5 4 300R
Z
From Coordinate Frame 1
Coord 200 T
3
To Coordinate Frame Z 200
R
2
Coord 300 Y
Z X
Auto Execute
Surface List
Surface 1:4 After:
-Apply-
8
7
5 T
4 300R
6 Z
1
T
3
Z Y200R
2
Z X
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Moving Solids
Creates Solids 5 through 8 by moving Solids 1 through 4 from the global coordinate frame,
Coord 0, to the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 1.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Solid
Method: MCoord
Z
Solid ID List
1
2 X
5 Y
1
Coord 0
To Coordinate Frame
Coord 1 Y 3
X 4
Delete Original Solids Z
Auto Execute
Solid List
Solid 1:4 After:
7
-Apply-
8
Z
1
2 X
Y 6
1
5
Y 3
X 4
Z
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Moving Planes
Moves Plane 1 from the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0, to the rectangular coordinate
frame, Coord 1. Notice that Delete Original Plane is not pressed and Plane 1 is kept.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Plane
Method: MCoord
Y X
Plane ID List
2 Z1 X Z 2
Y
Coord 0
To Coordinate Frame
Coord 1
Y
Z X
Auto Execute
Plane List
Plane 1 After:
-Apply-
Y X
Z1 X Z 2
Y
Z X
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Moving Vectors
Moves Vector 1 from the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0, to the rectangular coordinate
frame, Coord 1. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Vector
Method: MCoord
Vector ID List
1

X
Coord 0
Y
Z 1
To Coordinate Frame
Coord 1
Y
X
Delete Original Vectors
Z
Auto Execute
Vector List
Vector 1 After:
-Apply-
X
Y
Y Z 1
X
Z
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Pivoting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Creates points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes and vectors by using a planar rotation defined by
a specified Pivot Point about which the entity will be rotated, and a Starting Point and Ending
Point for the rotation. Points can be pivoted from other points, nodes or vertices. Curves can be
pivoted from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be pivoted from other surfaces or solid faces. Solids
are pivoted from other solids.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: <Type> Set <Type> to either Point, Curve, Surface, Solid, Plane or Vector.
Method: Pivot
<Type> ID List
1 surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the
Pivot Point
[0 0 0]
Starting Point
Pivot Point defines the location about which the specified entities
[0 0 0]
will be rotated. (Example: [10 0 0] ).
Ending Point Starting Point defines the location that the rotation will begin from.
(Example: Surface 1.1.2).
[0 0 0]
Ending Point defines the location that the rotation will end at.
(Example: Point 12). A Point select menu will appear that allows
you to define how you want to cursor define these point locations.
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
If ON, after Pivot completes, the points, curves, surfaces or

solids specified in <Type> List are deleted from the
Auto Execute
Point List you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
Specify the entities to pivot, either by cursor selecting them or by

-Apply- entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 5 10 Surface
5.5 Solid 11.
The select menu that appears can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the appropriate points, nodes, vertices,
curves, edges, faces or solids.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Pivoting Points
Creates Point 4 from Point 3 by pivoting at the global origin, [0 0 0], from Node 100 to Point 2.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Point
Method: Pivot
Point ID List
4
2
Pivot Point
[0 0 0]
100 3
Starting Point
Node 100 Y
Ending Point Z X
Point 2
Delete Original Points After:

Auto Execute
Point List 4
Point 3
2
-Apply-
100 3
Y
Z X
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Pivoting Curves
Creates Curves 9 through 15 from Curves 1 through 6 by pivoting them at Point 12, from Point
14 to Point 13. (Curves 7 and 8 are for illustration and are not used for the pivot.)
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
12
Object: Curve
Method: Pivot
Curve ID List 3
42
9 2
5
7 8
Pivot Point
3
Point 12 6
4
Starting Point 5
Point 14
Y71 6
14
X 8 1
Ending Point
13
Point 13 Z
Delete Original Points After:

Auto Execute 12
Curve List
Curve 1:6
3
42 18 16
2 20
-Apply- 5
7 10
22
8
3
6 11 12
4
5 14 13
Y71 6
14
X 8 1 1713 15
Z 9
21 19
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Pivoting From Edges

Creates Curves 9 through 16 by pivoting from the outside edges of Surfaces 1 through 4, at Point
12, from Point 14 to Point 13. Curves 7 and 8 are for illustration and are not used for the pivot.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
12
Method: Pivot
Curve ID List
9
Pivot Point
7 8
Point 12
4 3
1 2
Starting Point
Point 14
Y
Ending Point 14
X 13
Point 13 Z

After:
Auto Execute
12
Curve List
Surface1.3 2.33.34.3 2.1 1.1 3.1
11 17
18 10
-Apply- 12 16
7 15 9
8
4 3
1 2
Y
14 16
X 2213
15
Z 21 14 19
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Pivoting Surfaces
This example is similar to the previous example, except that Surfaces 1 through 4 are pivoted to
create Surfaces 5 through 8. Curves 7 and 8 are for illustration and are not used for the pivot.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
12
Object: Surface
Method: Pivot
Surface ID List
5
7 8
Pivot Point
4 3
Point 12
1
Starting Point 2
Point 14
Y
14
Ending Point X 13
Z
Point 13
Delete Original Surfaces After:

Auto Execute 12
Surface List
Surface 1:4
22 20
-Apply- 18 17
7 8
4 3 7
1 6
2 8
5
Y
X
14 2113 19
Z 15 16
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Pivoting Solids
Creates Solid 2 by pivoting from Solid 1 at Point 1, from Point 2 to Point 3. Curves 1 and 2 are for
illustration and are not used for the pivot.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Solid
Method: Pivot
Solid ID List
2
2
Pivot Point
Point 1
1 5
Starting Point Y 6
9
Point 2 4110
X 8 7
Z 2
Ending Point 11
Point 3
Delete Original Solids After:
Auto Execute 3
Solid List
Solid 1 1418
1519
2
-Apply- 1317 2
1216
1 5
Y 9 6
4110
X 8 7
Z 2
11
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Pivoting Planes
Pivots Plane 1 using the 3 pivoting point, Point 1 through 3. Notice that Delete Original Plane is
not pressed and Plane 1 is kept.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
2 3
Object: Plane
Method: Pivot
Plane ID List
1
Pivot Point
Point 1
Starting Point
Point 2 Y
Ending Point Z X 1
Point 3
Delete Original Planes After:
Auto Execute
2 3
Plane List
Plane 1
-Apply-
Y
Z X 1 1
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Pivoting Vectors
Pivots Vector 1 using the 3 pivoting point, Point 1 through 3. Notice that Delete Original Vector
is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Vector
Method: Pivot 2 3
Vector ID List
1
Pivot Point
Point 1
Starting Point
Point 2
Y
Ending Point
Z X 1
Point 3
Delete Original Vector After:
Auto Execute
Vector List
Vector 1 2 3
-Apply-
Y
Z X 1 1
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Positioning Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors

Creates points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes and vectors by translating and rotating an existing
set of entities using a transformation defined by three original point locations to three destination
point locations.
The original points and destination points need not match exactly; however, if either the original
point locations or the destination point locations lie in a straight line, the transformation cannot
be performed. Points can be repositioned from other points, nodes or vertices. Curves can be
repositioned from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be repositioned from other surfaces or solid
faces. Solids are repositioned from other solids.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: <Type> Set <Type> to either Point, Curve, Surface, Solid,

Plane or Vector.
Method: Position
<Type> ID List
5 Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point, curve,
Original Position Point 1 the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.
[0 0 0]
Original Position Point 2

[0 0 0] The Original Position Points 1, 2 and 3 define the original
position and orientation. (Examples: [0 10 0], Surface 5.3.1,
Original Position Point 3 Point 10.) A Point select menu appears which allows you to
[0 0 0] define how you want to cursor select each point location.
Destination Position Point 1

[0 0 0]
The Destination Position Points 1,2 and 3 define the three point
Destination Position Point 2 locations onto which the original group of entities are to be
transformed. (Examples: [10 0 0], Surface 4.3.1, Point 20.) A
[0 0 0] Point select menu appears which allows you to define how you
want to cursor select each point location.
[0 0 0]
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

[0 0 0]

[0 0 0]
If ON, after Position completes, the points, curves, surfaces
or solids specified in <Type> List are deleted from the
Delete Original <Types> MSC.Patran database.
Auto Execute
Point List
[0 0 0] means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
-Apply-
Specify the entities to reposition, either by cursor selecting them
or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 5 10
Surface 5.5 Solid 11. The select menu that appears can be used
nodes, vertices, curves, edges, faces or solids.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Positioning Points
Creates Points 9 through 12 from Points 1through 4 by repositioning them based on the original
and destination point locations listed on the form.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Point
4
Method: Position
3
Point ID List
5
9
Original Position Point 1 1 6

8
Point 1 1
7
Original Position Point 2 2
Point 2
Original Position Point 3 Y

Point 3
Z X
[0 1 0]

After:
[0 1 1] 12
Destination Position Point 3 9
11
[-1 1 1] 4
10
3
Auto Execute
5
Point List 1 6
8
Point 1:4 1
7
2
-Apply-
Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Positioning Curves
Creates Curves 25 through 32 by repositioning Curves 13 through 24 from Points 9, 13 and 12,
to destination Points 2, 6 and 3. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed and Curves 13
through 24 are deleted.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
10 23 11
15
Method: Position
14 24 1519
16 20
Curve ID List
14 18
25

9 21 12
13
Point 9 13 22 1617
2
11 3
3
Point 13 6 12 7 7
4 8
Y
1 69 4
Point 12 Z X1
5 10 8 5
Point 2

After:
Point 6
18 31 20
26 29
Destination Position Point 3 17 32 19
Point 3
27 30
Auto Execute
Curve List
2 11 3
3 7
Curve 13:24 6 12 7
4 8
-Apply- Y 2
1 6
9 4
X 1 5
Z 5 10 8
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Positioning From Edges

This example is similar to the previous example, except that the edges of Solid 1 are repositioned
to the new location to create Curves 13 through 20.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Curve 10 11
Method: Position 14 15
Curve ID List
1
13
Original Position Point 1 9 12

Point 12 13 16
Original Position Point 2 2 11 3
3 7
Point 9 6 12 7
4 8
Original Position Point 3 Y 2
Point 13
1 69 4
Z X 1 5
5 10 8
Point 3
Destination Position Point 2 After:

Point 2 10 11
Destination Position Point 3 14 15
Point 6 19 16 17
17 13 1
20 18 18
20 14 9
Auto Execute 12
Curve List
19 15 13 16
Solid1.2.31.2.41.2.21.4.111.4 2 11 3
3 7
6 12 7
4 8
-Apply- Y 2 69
1 4
Z X 1 5
5 10 8
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Positioning Surfaces
Creates Surface 5 from Surface 4 by positioning it from Points 8, 9 and 11 to the destination
Points 7, 2 and 3.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
9
Object: Surface 10
Method: Position
2
Surface ID List 4 3
5 7
3 1
Point 8 8
11
1
Point 9
Y 4
5 2
Point 11 Z X
6
Point 7
After:
Point 2 9
10
2
Point 3
12
4 5 3
13
Auto Execute
3 1
Surface List
8
11
Surface 4
1
-Apply - Y 4
5 2
Z X
6
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Positioning Solids
Creates Solid 3 by repositioning it from Solid 2, based on the original and destination points
listed on the form. Notice that Delete Original Solids is pressed and Solid 2 is deleted.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Solid
Method: Position 10
14 11
9 2 15
Solid ID List 13 12
3 16
2
3
Point 13
6
7
Point 16 1
Y 4
Point 9 Z X 8

Point 2

After:
Point 6

21
Point 3 18
22 2
Delete Original Solids 193 17
3
6
Auto Execute 20
7
Solid List
1
Solid 2 1
4
-Apply-
5Y
8
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Positioning Planes
Positions Plane 1 from where defined by the position Point 1 through 3, to where defined by the
position Point 4 through 6. Notice that Delete Original Plane is not pressed and Plane 1 is kept.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
6
Object: Plane
Method: Position 4 5
Plane ID List
2

Point 1

Point 2 2 3

Y
Point 3
Z X 1
Point 4

After:
6
Point 5

4 5
Point 6
Delete Original Plane
Auto Execute
Plane List
Plane 1
2 3
-Apply-
Y
Z X 1 1
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Positioning Vectors
Positions Vector 1 from where defined by the position Point 1 through 3, to where defined by the
position Point 4 through 6. Notice that Delete Original Vector is not pressed and Vector 1 is kept.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
6
Object: Vector
Method: Position
4 5
Vector ID List
2

Point 1

Point 2
2 3
Point 3
Y
Z X 1
Point 4
Destination Position Point 2 After:

Point 5 6

4 5
Point 6
Auto Execute
Vector List
Vector 1
2 3
-Apply-
Z X 1 1
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Vector Summing (VSum) Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creates points, curves, surfaces or solids by performing a vector sum of the coordinate locations
of two sets of existing entities to form one set of new entities. Points can be created from the
summation of other points, nodes or vertices. Curves can be created from the summation of other
curves or edges. Surfaces can be created from the summation of other surfaces or solid faces. Solids
are created from the summation of other solids.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: <Type> Set <Type> to either Point, Curve, Surface or Solid.
Method: Vsum
<Type> ID List
1 surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405)
Origin of Vector 1 Functions.
[0 0 0]
Origin of Vector 2 Origin of Vector 1 is a point location for the base of the
vectors to the entities specified in <Type> 1 List.
[0 0 0]
Origin of Vector 2 is a point location for the base of the
vectors to the entities specified in <Type> 2 List.
Vsum Parameters A Point select menu appears that allows you alternate
methods to cursor define the vector point locations.
Multiplication Factor 1
1.0 1.0 1.0
Multiplication Factor 2 Multiplication Factors 1 and 2 are multiplying factors on
the global X, Y and Z components of the entities
1.0 1.0 1.0
specified in <Type> 1 List and <Type> 2 List,
respectively.
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Vsum Parameters
1.0 1.0 1.0
1.0 1.0 1.0

Point 1 List means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
[0 0 0]
Point 2 List <Type> 1 List is a list of entities which MSC.Patran will sum with
the specified entities in <Type>2 List to form the new points,
[0 0 0] curves, surfaces or solids.
The select menu that appears can be used to define how you
want to cursor select the appropriate points, nodes, vertices,
-Apply- curves, edges, faces or solids for both listboxes.
☞ More Help:
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Vector Summing Points

Creates Points 7, 8 and 9 by summing the vectors drawn from the origin, [0 0 0], to Points 1 and
4, 2 and 5 and 3 and 6. The “After” picture below has the vectors drawn to Points 2 and 5 to show
how Point 8 was created.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Point 4
Method: Vsum
5
Point ID List
7 6
Origin of Vector 1
[0 0 0]
Origin of Vector 2 1
[0 0 0]
Y 2
Vsum Parameters Z X
Multiplication Factor 1 3
1.0 1.0 1.0
After:
1.0 1.0 1.0
7
Auto Execute
Point 1 List
Point 1 2 3 4 8
Point 2 List 5
Point 4 5 6
6 9
-Apply-
1
Y
2
Z X
3
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Vector Summing Points

This example is the same as the previous example, except that a Multiplication Factor 2 is
increased from “1 1 1” to “2 2 2”.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Point 4
Method: Vsum
5
Point ID List
7 6
Origin of Vector 1
[0 0 0]
[0 0 0]
Y 2
Vsum Parameters Z X
1.0 1.0 1.0
After:
2 2 2
7
Auto Execute
Point 1 List
8
Point 1 2 3
Point 2 List
9
Point 4 5 6
4
5
-Apply- 6
Y
1
Z X 2
3
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Vector Summing Curves

Creates Curves 20 through 27 which are summed between Curves 12 through 19 and Curves 1
through 4. Notice that in order to create the spiral, Curve 1:4 must be entered twice in the Curve
2 List to match the eight curves listed in the Curve 1 List.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Curve 19
Method: Vsum
18
Curve ID List 17
20
16
Curve Type
15
PATRAN 2 Convention
14
Origin of Vector 1
2 13
[0 0 0] Y
12 1
Z X
[0 0 0] 4
Vsum Parameters
Multiplication Factor 1 After:
1.0 1.0 1.0
1.0 1.0 1.0 25 27
26 18
Auto Execute 17
Curve 1 List 24
16
Curve 12:19
15
Curve 2 List 21 23
22 14
Curve 1:4 1:4
2 13
Y 20
-Apply- 12 1
3
Z X
4
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Vector Summing Curves

Creates Curve 3 by summing Curves 1 and 2. Notice that the multiplication factors of “.5 .5 .5”
are entered for both Multiplication Factors 1 and 2 and Curve 3 becomes the “average” of Curves
1 and 2 in length and in curvature.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
Method: Vsum
Curve ID List
7 2 8
3
Curve Type
PATRAN 2 Convention
1 6
[0 0 0]
Y
Origin of Vector 2
[0 0 0]
Z X
Vsum Parameters
.5 .5 .5
.5 .5 .5
Auto Execute
7 2 8
Curve 1 List
Curve 1
9 3 10
Curve 2 List
Curve 2
1 1 6
-Apply-
Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Vector Summing Surfaces

This example creates Surface 4 from vector summing the coordinate locations of Surfaces 1 and 3.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Surface
Method: Vsum 10
Surface ID List 9
4
2 3
Surface Type
4
PATRAN 2 Convention
1
7
Origin of Vector 1
8
[0 0 0]
Y 1
Origin of Vector 2
[0 0 0] Z X 3
Vsum Parameters
1 1 1
14
1 1 1
13
Auto Execute
4
Surface 1 List
10
Surface 1 9
Surface 2 List 3
2
Surface 3 4
1
7 11
-Apply- Y 8
X 1 12
Z
3
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Vector Summing With Solid Faces

This example is similar to the previous example, except that Surface 4 is created by vector
summing the coordinate locations of the outside face of Solid 1 and Surface 3.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Surface 10
Method: Vsum
9
Surface ID List 2 3
4
Surface Type 4
PATRAN 2 Convention 7
Origin of Vector 1 1 8
[0 0 0] Y 11 1
Origin of Vector 2 Z X
12 3
[0 0 0]
Vsum Parameters
After:
1 1 1
1 1 1
15
Auto Execute
4
Surface 1 List 10
Solid 1.5 9
2 3
Surface 2 List
Surface 3
4
7 13
Y 1 8
-Apply-
Z 11 X 1 14
12 3
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Vector Summing Solids

Creates Solid 3 by vector summing the coordinate locations of Solids 1 and 2.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Solid
13
Method: Vsum 17 14
18
2
Solid ID List 12
16 15
3 19
Solid Type
PATRAN 2 Convention
Origin of Vector 1
Y 21
[0 0 0] 25 20 22
Z X 126
Origin of Vector 2 24 23
27
[0 0 0]
Vsum Parameters
1 1 1
13
Multiplication Factor 2 14 29
17
1 1 1 18 30
2 33
12
Auto Execute
16 15 34
Solid1 List 19 283
Solid 1 31
32
Solid 2 List
35
Solid 2
Y 21
25 20 22
-Apply-
Z X 126
24 23
27
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Moving and Scaling (MScale) Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids

Creates a set of points, curves, surfaces and solids by simultaneously moving, scaling, rotating
and/or warping an existing set of entities. Points can be moved and scaled from other points,
nodes or vertices. Curves can be moved and scaled from other curves or edges. Surfaces can be
moved and scaled from other surfaces or solid faces. Solids are moved and scaled from other solids.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Set <Type> to either Point, Curve, Surface or Solid.
Object: <Type>
Method: MScale Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point, curve,
surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405)
<Type> ID List Functions.
1
Used by the Origin of Scaling and Translation Vector to express
Refer. Coordinate Frame the coordinate location of the scale origin and the orientation of
the translation vector. (Example: Coord 5.)
Coord 0
Origin of Scaling Enter the point location of the origin to scale the existing entities
from. If coordinate values are entered, they will be expressed in
[0 0 0]
the Refer. Coordinate Frame. (Example: [10 0 0].) The Point
Translation Vector select menu appears that allows you alternate methods to cursor
define the point location.
<1 0 0>
Rotation Matrix The distance and direction to move the new set of points, curves,
Column 1 surfaces or solids from the existing set. If coordinate values are
entered, they will be expressed in the Refer. Coordinate Frame.
1.0 0.0 0.0 (Example: <10 0 0>.) An Axis select menu appears that allows
Column 2 you alternate methods to cursor define the translation vector.
0.0 1.0 0.0

Column 3
0.0 0.0 1.0 Rotation Matrix is a 3 by 3 transformation matrix in column sort.
See next page for more information.
Point List need to press the Apply button to execute the form.
[0 0 0]
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
The suggested values for the Rotation Matrix, Q, and their results are
the following (do not enter all zeros):
Translation Only (No Effect) - Enter values of +1 on the positive
diagonal to produce a translation of the entities only. That is, “1 0 0” for
Column 1, “0 1 0” for Column 2 and “0 0 1” for Column 3. This is the
Rotation Matrix default for the Q matrix.
Scale - Enter positive non-zero values less than or greater than 1.0
Column 1
which are the scale factors for the diagonal and zero’s for the
1.0 0.0 0.0 remaining positions. That is, “Sx 0 0” for Column 1, “0 Sy 0” for Column
Column 2 2 and “0 0 Sz” for Column 3.
Mirror - Enter +1 on the diagonal, with a -1 for the axis that is normal
0.0 1.0 0.0
to the mirror plane, which is either the Reference Coordinate Frame’s
Column 3 XY, YZ or XZ mirror plane. For example, “-1 0 0” in Column 1, “0 1 0”
0.0 0.0 1.0 for Column 2 and “0 0 1” for Column 3 will mirror across the YZ plane.
Rotation About an angle, θ - The table below shows the appropriate
values for Columns 1, 2 and 3 to rotate the entities about the
Reference Coordinate Frame’s X, Y or Z axis.
Axis Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
X [1 0 0] [0 cosθ sinθ] [0 -sinθ cosθ]
Y [cosθ 0 sinθ] [0 1 0] [-sinθ 0 cosθ]
Z [cosθ sinθ 0] [-sinθ cosθ 0] [0 0 1]
Simultaneous Scale, Mirror and Rotation - Calculate a
resulting Q matrix which is the matrix product of each
action: Q = [qscale] [qmirror] [qrotate]
Warp - A non-orthogonal Q matrix will warp the entities as
a function of position. Use with caution.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Translating and Mirroring Points

Creates Points 8 through 13 by simultaneously translating and mirroring Points 1 though 7, two
units in the global X direction and mirroring about the global YZ plane.
Geometry
Transform
Before:
Action:
Object: Point
7 6
Method: MScale 5
Point ID List
4
8 3
Coord 0
1
Origin of Scaling
[0 0 0]
Translation Vector
<2 0 0>
Y
Z X
Rotation Matrix
Column 1
-1.0 0.0 0.0 After:
Column 2
0.0 1.0 0.0
Column 3
0.0 0.0 1.0
7 6 12 13
Delete Original Points 5 11
Auto Execute 4 10
Point List
3 9
Point 1:7
28
-Apply-
Y
1
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Mirroring and Scaling Curves

Creates Curves 7 through 12 by simultaneously scaling and mirroring Curves 1 through 6. The
curves are scaled two times in the global Y direction and they are mirrored about the global XZ
plane.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
Method: MScale
Curve ID List 6
7
6 4 3
Coord 0 5 2 2
Origin of Scaling 4 1
[0 0 0]
Y
Translation Vector 9 8 7 1 3 5
<0 0 0> Z X
Rotation Matrix
Column 1
1.0 0.0 0.0 After:
Column 2
0.0 -1.5 0.0 6
Column 3 6 4 3
0.0 0.0 1.0 5 2 2
4 1
9 8 7 1 3 5
Auto Execute
Curve List
Curve 1:6 10 7
11 10 8
-Apply-
Y 12 9
11
Z X
12
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Mirroring and Scaling Curves

This example is similar to the previous example, except that the curves are mirrored and scaled
within the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 100.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Curve
Y
Method: MScale
Z 100 X
Curve ID List
4 3
Coord 100 2
Origin of Scaling
1
[0 0 0]
Translation Vector Y
<0 0 0> 6 4X 2 1 3 5
Z
Rotation Matrix
Column 1
1.0 0.0 0.0 After:
Column 2
0.0 -1.5 0.0 12 108 7 9 11
Column 3
0.0 0.0 1.0
4
5
Auto Execute
Curve List
6
Curve 1:3
Z 100 X
-Apply- 3
Y 2
1
Z X
6 42 13 5
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Translating and Rotating Surfaces

Creates Surfaces 5 through 8 from Surfaces 1 through 4 by translating them 10 units in the global
Z direction and rotating them -120 degrees about the global X axis.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Surface
Method: MScale
Surface ID List
5

Coord 0
Origin of Scaling 22
3 1
[0 0 0]
Y 1
4 3
4
Translation Vector Z X 1
5
<0 0 10>
Rotation Matrix
Column 1
1.0 0.0 0.0 After:
Column 2
0.0 -.5 -.87
Column 3
0.0 .87 -.5
22
Delete Original Surfaces 11 3 1
1
4 3
4
Auto Execute 107
8 5 1
Surface List
7 8
Surface 1:4 6
9 5
-Apply- Y
Z X
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Translating, Mirroring and Scaling Solids

This example simultaneously translates, mirrors and scales Solids 5 through 8 from Solids 1
through 4, by translating them 1.57 units in the global X direction and 1.0 unit in the global Y
direction; mirroring them about the global XZ plane; and scaling them .5 in the X direction and
.5 in the Y direction.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Solid
Method: MScale
Solid ID List
5 1
Coord 0 4
Origin of Scaling
2
[0 0 0]
Y 3
Translation Vector
<1.57 1 0> Z X
Rotation Matrix
Column 1
.5 0.0 0.0
After:
Column 2
0.0 -.5 0.0 6
Column 3 7
5
0.0 0.0 1.0
8
1
Auto Execute
Solid List
Solid 1:4
4
2
-Apply- 3
Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
8.3 Transforming Coordinate Frames

Translating Coordinate Frames
Creates coordinate frames which are successively offset from each other by the Translation Vector
<dx dy dz>, starting from an existing set of specified coordinate frames.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Coord Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate
Translate frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 405) in the
Method:
Coord ID List
1 Used by the Translation Vector to express the direction and
distance of the translation.
Coord 0 This is the distance and direction to translate the new set of
coordinate frames from the existing set. If coordinate values
Translation Vector are entered, they will be defined within the Refer. Coordinate
Frame. Example: <10 0 0>. An Axis select menu will appear
<1 0 0> to allow you alternate methods to cursor define the vector.
Repeat Count Defines the number of times to translate the existing
coordinate frames to create ones.
1
If ON, after Translate completes, the coordinate frames

Delete Original Coords specified in Coordinate List will be deleted from the
Auto Execute
Coordinate Frame List By default, Auto Execute (p. 402) in the MSC.Patran
Coord 0 means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
-Apply- Specify the coordinate frames either by cursor

selecting them or by entering the IDs from the
keyboard. Example: Coord 5.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions

Creates the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 2, from coordinate frame, Coord 1, by
translating it two units in the global X direction.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Coord
Method: Translate
Y
Coord ID List
Z 1 X
2
Coord 0
Translation Vector
<2 0 0> Y
Z X
Repeat Count
1
After:
Delete Original Coords
Auto Execute
Coordinate Frame List
Coord 1
Y
-Apply-
Z1 X
Y
Z2 X
Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creates the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 2, from coordinate frame, Coord 1, by
translating it through a translation vector defined by Points 1 and 2, using the Vector select menu
icon listed below.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Coord
Method: MScale Y
Coord ID List Z1 X
2
1
Coord 0
5
Translation Vector
Construct 2PointVector(Ev Y
Z X
Repeat Count
1

After:
Auto Execute

Coord 1
Y
-Apply- Z1 X
1
Y
Z2 X
Y
Z X
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions
Rotating Coordinate Frames

Creates a set of coordinate frames which are formed from a specified set of existing coordinate
frames by a rigid body rotation about a defined axis.
Geometry
Action: Transform
Object: Coord
Method: Rotate
1
Refer. Coordinate Frame Used by the defined rotation Axis to express the axis’
beginning and ending coordinates. Example: Coord 5.
Coord 0
Axis This is the rotation axis that the new coordinate frames will be
rotated about from the existing set. If coordinate values are
{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} entered, they will be defined within the Refer. Coordinate
Frame. Example: {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}. An Axis select menu
Rotation Parameters appears to allow you alternate methods to cursor define the
rotation axis.
Rotation Angle
90.0
Offset Angle Rotation Angle (θr) defines how many degrees to rotate the
existing set of coordinate frames about the axis.
0.0
Offset Angle (θo) defines how many degrees to offset from
Repeat Count the starting point of rotation.
1 Repeat Count defines the number of times to rotate the
existing set of coordinate frames to create the new coordinate
frames.
Coord 2
Coord 3 θr
θr
Axis θo
Coord 1
Repeat Count = 2
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Rotation Parameters
Rotation Angle
90.0
Offset Angle
0.0
Repeat Count
If ON, after Rotate completes, the coordinate frames
1 specified in Coordinate List will be deleted from the

Coordinate Frame List means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute
the form.
Coord 0
Specify the coordinate frames either by cursor selecting them or

-Apply- by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Coord 5.
☞ More Help:
CHAPTER 8 6
Transform Actions

Creates the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 2, from coordinate frame, Coord 1, by rotating
it 45 degrees about the axis listed on the form.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Coord
Method: Rotate
Coord ID List Y
2
1
Z X
Coord 0
Axis
Y
{[0 0 0][1 1 1]}
Rotation Parameters Z X
Rotation Angle
45.0
Offset Angle After:
0.0
Repeat Count
1
Delete Original Coords Y

Y
X
Auto Execute 1
Z X
Z
Coord 1
-Apply- Y
Z X
PART 2
Geometry Modeling

Creates the cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 200, from cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord
100, by rotating it 90 degrees about Coord 100’s Z axis, Coord 100.3, using the Axis select menu
icon listed below. Notice that Delete Original Coords is pressed and Coord 100 is deleted.
Geometry
Before:
Action: Transform
Object: Coord
Method: Rotate
Coord ID List
1
200
T 2
Z 100 R 1
Coord 0 1
Axis
Coord 100.3
Y
Rotation Parameters
Rotation Angle Z X
90.0
Offset Angle
0.0 After:
Repeat Count
1
Auto Execute
1
R 2
Coord 100
T 200 1
Z
1
-Apply-
Y
Z X
3
CHAPTER
Verify Actions
9
■ Verify Action
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
9.1 Verify Action

Verifying Surface Boundaries
The Boundary method for surfaces will allow you to plot the free or non-manifold edges for a
list of specified surfaces or solid faces. A free edge is any edge that is not shared by at least one
other surface or solid face. A non-manifold edge is shared by more than two surfaces or solid
faces. Non-manifold often indicates a geometry which is not manufacturable; it may be alright
for surface models or on shared solid faces, but is illegal in a B-rep solid.This method is
recommended for verifying cracks in the model, or more specifically in a surface set to be used
in creating a B-rep solid.
Geometry
Action: Verify
The free edges are highlighted in the primary color.
Primary markers mark free edges and secondary
Object: Surface markers indicate non-manifold edges. Both the
primary color choice and the marker sizes are
Method: Boundary controlled by the Graphics Preferences form under the
menu Preferences/Graphics.
Verification Criteria
◆ Topology The Topology Verification Criteria will not plot a free
◆
◆ Geometry edge if two adjacent surfaces or solid faces are
topologically congruent. The topology of the geometric
Tolerance model is created and stored in the MSC.Patran
database at the time the geometry is created and
0.005 therefore, the tolerance is only dependent on the
geometric tolerance at that time. Thus, the tolerance is
not applicable.
The Geometry Verification Criteria will compare an edge to an adjacent surface or solid
face and see if they are coincident within a specified tolerance. If two edges are not coincident
then a free edge is displayed. The geometry toggle allows the user to run the verification
process in a more complete manner. Any existing topological gaps can be checked at various
tolerances to determine at which tolerance the edges may be equivalenced.
CHAPTER 9 6
Verify Actions
◆ Topology
◆
◆ Geometry
Tolerance
0.005 Should be set to a value that is smaller than the smallest
dimension in the model. The default is the current global
geometric tolerance.
Update Graphics...
Brings up a smaller Update Graphics subordinate form
that is described on page 701.
Surface List
Specify the surfaces or solid faces either by cursor

Example: Surface 4 10 Solid 5.4. The Surface select
Apply menu that appears, can be used to define how you want to
cursor select the surfaces or solid faces.
☞ More Help:
• Using the Select Menus (p. 41) in the MSC.Patran
Reference Manual, Part 1: Introduction to MSC.Patran
• Graphics Preferences (p. 291) in the MSC.Patran
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Verifying Surfaces for B-reps

The B-rep method for surfaces will allow you to plot the free or non-manifold edges for a list of
specified surfaces or solid faces. A free edge is any edge that is not shared by at least one other
surface or solid face. A non-manifold edge is shared by more than two surfaces or solid faces.
Non-manifold often indicates a geometry which is not manufacturable; it may be alright for
surface models or on shared solid faces, but is illegal in a B-rep solid.This method is
recommended for verifying cracks in the model, or more specifically in a surface set to be used
in creating a B-rep solid.
Geometry
Action: Verify
Object: Solid The free edges are highlighted in the primary color. Primary
markers mark free edges and secondary markers indicate non-
Method: B-rep manifold edges. Both the primary color choice and the marker
sizes are controlled by the Graphics Preferences form under the
Verification Criteria menu Preferences/Graphics.
Tolerance
The Verification Criteria will not plot a free edge if two adjacent
0.005
surfaces or solid faces are topologically congruent. The topology of
the geometric model is created and stored in the MSC.Patran
database at the time the geometry is created and therefore, the
Surface List tolerance is only dependent on the geometric tolerance at that time.
Thus, the tolerance is not applicable.
- Apply -
Specify the surfaces or solid faces either by cursor selecting them or
by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 4 10 Solid
5.4. The Surface select menu that appears, can be used to define
how you want to cursor select the surfaces or solid faces. (Note:
similar functionality to the Verify/Surface/Boundary option.)
Should be set to a value that is smaller than the smallest dimension in the model. The
default is the current global geometric tolerance.
CHAPTER 9 7
Verify Actions
Update Graphics Subordinate Form

The Update Graphics subordinate form is displayed when the Update Graphics button is pressed
on the Verify/Surface/Boundaries form. This subordinate form allows you to erase or plot in the
current viewport, groups of congruent or incongruent surfaces.
This form is useful for checking for surface cracks, topologically incongruent surfaces, or non-
manifold edges shared by more than two surfaces. MSC.Software Corporation suggests you use
either the Edit/Surface/Edge Match form (see Matching Surface Edges (p. 481)) or the
Create/Surface/Match form (see Matching Adjacent Surfaces (p. 270)) to correct any incongruent
surfaces that have a gap between them.
Update Graphics Plots only the surfaces that are incongruent or non-
manifold. All other surfaces are erased from the viewport.
MSC.Patran will plot markers along the edges of the
Plot Incongruent Surfaces incongruent surfaces.
Plot All Geometry
Erase Markers Plots all geometry that are associated with the
current viewport’s posted groups.
Erase Congruent Surfaces
Erases the markers that were plotted along the edges of
the incongruent surfaces.
OK
Press OK to erase the form.
If ON, MSC.Patran will automatically erase any surface that becomes

congruent in the model. You do not need to select the Plot Incongruent
Surfaces button to update the display of the viewport.
☞ More Help:
• Building a Congruent Model (p. 31)
• Group Create (p. 159) in the MSC.Patran Reference
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Verify - Surface (Duplicates)

Surfaces in the entire model are checked for being duplicate.
Geometry
Action: Verify
Object: Surface
Test: Duplicates
Test Control
MSC.Patran gives the option to highlight any duplicate
surfaces found, or, if you select the icon, you may
Display Only choose to have MSC.Patran automatically eliminate
any duplicates found. When delete duplicates is
◆ Delete Higher ID selected you may choose which surface ID of the two
to remove from the database.
◆
◆ Delete Lower ID
Reset Graphics Returns your graphic display back to the way it was
when the form was opened.This will unhighlight
duplicate elements. Exiting this form will also reset
Apply
graphics.
CHAPTER
Associate Actions
10
■ Overview of the Associate Action
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
10.1 Overview of the Associate Action

The Associate action causes a geometric entity to become embedded on another geometric
entity. Surfaces with associated geometry will not get trimmed (i.e., a four sided iso parametric
patch will remain so even after associations are made to the patch).
Associations allow the mesher to create nodes on or along the associated geometry.
Loads or boundary conditions may be applied to associated geometries.
Mesh seeds can be placed on the associated geometry.
The nodes lying on the associated geometry have the associated geometry as topological
associations (i.e., nodes that lie on a curve associated to a surface will have their topological
associations to the curve rather than with the surface).
Associations are marked by filled blue triangles for points and filled yellow triangles for curves.
Table 10-1 Geometry Associate Action Objects and Descriptions

❏ Point Curve Associate point to a curve.
Surface Associate point to a surface.
❏ Curve Curve Associate curve to a curve.
Surface Associate curve to a surface.
Important: The iso-mesher will not generate meshes that conform to hard geometries, if the
hard geometries lie interior to the surface. The iso-mesher ignores the interior
hard geometries to mesh the surface.
CHAPTER 10 7
Associate Actions
Associating Point Object

Figure 10-1
Geometry
Action: Associate
Object: Point
Method: <Type> Set <Type> to either Curve or Surface.
Auto Execute
Point List
List of points to be associated to curves or
surfaces.
<Type> List
List of curves or surfaces to which the points must be

associated. Points not within global geometric tolerance
will not be associated.
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Figure 10-2
Geometry
Before:
Action: Associate
2 5 6 3
Object: Point
Method: <Type>
7
Auto Execute
Point List
8
10 1
<Type> List
-Apply- Y
Z X1 4
After:
2 5 6 3
8
10 1
Y
Z X1 4
CHAPTER 10 7
Associate Actions
Associating Curve Object

Figure 10-3
Geometry
Action: Associate
Object: Curve
Method: <Type> Set <Type> to either Curve or Surface.
Auto Execute
Curve List
List of curves to be associated to curves or
surfaces.
<Type> List
List of curves or surfaces to which curves in the first list must

be associated. Curves not within global geometric tolerance
will not be associated.
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Figure 10-4
Geometry Before:
Action: Associate
2 11 3
Object: Curve
Method: <Type>
6
Auto Execute
5 10
Curve List
2
<Type> List
-Apply- Y
Z 1X 4
After:
2 11 3
5 10
Y
Z X1 4
CHAPTER
Disassociate Actions
11
■ Overview of the Disassociate Action Methods
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
11.1 Overview of the Disassociate Action Methods

The disassociate action causes the association records to be deleted. All other information such
as mesh seed and loads and boundary conditions will be preserved on the disassociated entity,
if there are any.
The disassociate action causes the filled blue triangles and yellow triangles that mark the
association of points and curves respectively, to be removed.
Object Description
❏ Point Remove all point associations.
❏ Curve Remove all curve associations.
❏ Surface Remove all surface associations.
CHAPTER 11 7
Disassociating Points
Figure 11-1
Geometry
Action: Disassociate
Object: Point
Auto Execute
Point List
List of points whose associations must be removed. No
action will be taken if the point(s) are not associated.
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Disassociating Curves
Geometry
Object: Curve
Auto Execute
Curve List
List of curves whose associations must be removed. No
action will be taken if the curve(s) are not associated.
-Apply-
CHAPTER 11 7
Disassociating Surfaces
Figure 11-2
Geometry
Object: Surface
Auto Execute
Surface List
List of surfaces in which all associations must be
removed.
-Apply-
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
CHAPTER
The Renumber Action...
12 Renumbering Geometry
■ Renumber Forms
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
12.1 Introduction
Most often, ID numbers (IDs) for geometric entities are chosen and assigned automatically. The
Renumber Action permits the IDs of points, curves, surfaces, solids, planes, or vectors to be
changed. This capability is useful to:
• Offset the IDs of a specific list of entities.
• Renumber the IDs of all existing entities within a specified range.
• Compact the IDs of an entity type sequentially from 1 to N.
IDs must be positive integers. Duplicate IDs are not permitted in the List of New IDs, or in the
selected Entity List (old IDs). A Starting ID or a List of New IDs may be entered in the input
databox. If a geometric entity outside the list of entities being renumbered is using the new ID,
the renumber process will print a warning message stating which ID is already in use and
proceed to use the next highest avaliable ID since each entity must have a unique ID. The default
is to renumber all the existing entities beginning with the minimum ID through the maximum
ID consecutively starting with 1.
If only one ID is entered, it is assumed to be the starting ID. The entities will be renumbered
consecutively beginning with the starting ID.
If more than one ID is entered and there are fewer IDs in the List of New IDs than there are valid
entities in the selected Entity List, renumbering will use the IDs provided and when the list is
exhausted, the next highest available ID will be used thereafter to complete the renumbering.
The List of New IDs may contain a # signifying to use the maximum ID + 1 as the Starting ID.
However, the list may have more IDs than needed.
The IDs in the selected Entity List may contain a #. The value of the maximum existing ID is
automatically substituted for the #. There may be gaps of nonexisting entities in the list but there
must be at least one valid entity ID in order for renumbering to take place.
A percent complete form shows the status of the renumber process. When renumbering is
complete, a report appears in the command line indicating the number of entities renumbered
and their new IDs. The renumber process may be halted at any time by pressing the Abort button
and the old IDs will be restored.
CHAPTER 12 7
The Renumber Action... Renumbering Geometry
12.2 Renumber Forms

When Renumber is the selected Action the following options are available.
Object Description
❏ Point The point menu selection provides the capability to renumber
or change the IDS of points.
❏ Curve The curve menu selection provides the capability to renumber
or change the IDs of curves.
❏ Surface The surface menu selection provides the capability to renumber
or change the IDs of surfaces.
❏ Solid The solid menu selection provides the capability to renumber or
change the IDs of solids.
❏ Plane The plane menu selection provides the capability to renumber
or change the IDs of planes.
❏ Vector The vector menu selection provides the capability to renumber
or change the IDs of vectors.
PART 2
Geometry Modeling
Renumber Geometry
Use this option to renumber points, curves, surfaces, solids,
Geometry planes, or vectors. See Introduction (p. 716).
Action: Renumber
Object: <Type>
Set <Type> to either: Point, Curve, Surface,Solid, Plane, or
Vector.
<Type> Summary
Total in Model: Shows how many <Type> exist in the model and
2713 minimum⁄ maximum values of <Type> IDs. Note: All <Type>
are numbered sequentially when the Maximum ID is equal to
Minimum ID Total in Model.
21
Maximum ID Specifies the option to use for renumbering <Type> Starting
2733 ID(s) is used to input the new ID(s) for the existing <Type>
and Offset ID is used to offset the existing ID(s) by the
specified value ( inputting a value of 10 for Offset ID will
Numbering Option change an ID of 1 to 11 ).
Starting ID(s) 1
Specifies the starting ID, or a list of new <Type> IDs to
<Type> List assign. <Type> IDs must be positive integers. The # is a
valid entry here. If the number of IDs is less than the number
<Type> 21:2733 of valid <Type>, renumbering will not take place.
Node List
-Apply-
Specifies which old <Type> are to be renumbered. A list of
<Type> can be entered here or an active group of <Type> can
be selected from the viewport.
The default is to renumber all <Type> (<Type> minimum ID to
maximum ID) consecutively beginning with the Start ID. The
entry, <Type> 1:#, is also valid to indicate all <Type>. There
may be gaps of nonexisting <Type> in the list, but there must be
at least one valid <Type> in order for renumbering to take place.
Duplicate IDs are not permitted.
If a <Type> outside the list of <Type> being renumbered is
using the new ID, the renumber process will use the next
highest available ID since each <Type> must have a unique ID.
7
I N D E X
MSC.Patran Reference Manual
Part 2: Geometry Modeling
I N D E X
MSC.Patran
Reference
Manual
Part 2:
Numerics C
Geometry 3 point method CAD access modules, 47
Modeling overview, 63 CAD user file, 2, 20, 46, 47
CADDS 5, 2, 47
capabilities, 2
A Cartesian in Refer. CF button, 66
CATIA, 2, 47
accuracy, 2
chain method
any geometry entity
curve, 131
delete action, 409
chained curve, 20, 21
arc center
Computervision, 2, 47
point, 79
conic method
arc3point method
curve, 133
curve, 128
connectivity
axis method
curve, 15
overview, 64
definition, 15
modifying, 16
solid, 16
B surface, 15
bi-parametric surface, 19, 20 coordinate frame
blend method angles, 60
curve, 426 attributes
solid, 538 show action, 594
surface, 475 create method overview, 63
body, 10 definitions, 60
break method delete action, 411
curve, 418, 422, 425 rotate method, 693
example, 31 translate method, 690
solid, 522, 526, 531, 533, 534, 535 create action, 27
surface, 457, 461, 465, 469, 471 overview, 70
B-rep method, 40
B-rep solid, 8, 19, 24, 40
exterior shell, 40
shell, 24
building a B-rep solid, 40
building a congruent model, 31
example, 31
building a degenerate solid, 41
building a degenerate surface, 41
building optimal surfaces, 33
INDEX
curve
arc3point method, 128 D
blend method, 426 Dassault Systemes, 2, 47
break method, 418, 422, 425 Decompose method, 37
chain method, 131 decomposing trimmed surfaces, 37
conic method, 133 example, 37
delete action, 410 default colors, 19, 20, 21, 24
disasemble method, 429 degenerate surfaces and solids, 41
extend method, 431, 436, 438, 440 delete action
extract method, 137, 142 any geometry entity, 409
fillet method, 144 coordinate frame, 411
fit method, 148 curve, 410
intersect method, 150, 154 overview, 408
manifold method, 160 plane, 410
mcoord method, 648 point, 410
merge method, 443 solid, 410
mirror method, 640 surface, 410
mscale method, 683 vector, 410
offset method constant, 171 DGA, 2, 47
offset method variable, 173 Direct Geometry Access, 2, 47
pivot method, 656 disasemble method
point method, 117, 119, 123 curve, 429
position method, 665 surface, 478
refit method, 447 disassemble method
reverse method, 448 solid, 541
rotate method, 619 display lines, 33, 39
scale method, 629
translate method, 605
trim method, 451, 454 E
vsum method, 674 edge, 10
XYZ method, 199 edge match method, 31
curve 4 point parametric positions closing gaps, 13
subordinate form, 127 surface, 481, 484
curve angle edge method, 41
show action, 584 edge refit method
curve arc surface, 500
show action, 583 edit action, 27
curve attributes overview, 414
show action, 582 EDS/Unigraphics, 2, 47
curve length range element connectivity, 34
show action, 586 element properties, 2
curve method, 41 equivalence method
curvilinear coordinate frame, 66 point, 416
examples using translate and scale, 66 EUCLID 3, 2, 47
scale method, 66 euler method
translate method, 66 overview, 64
Curvilinear in Refer. CF button, 66
cylindrical coordinate frame
definition, 61
INDEX 7
examples 456
arc3point curve, 129, 130 mirror
ArcCenter point, 80 curve, 642, 643
blend plane, 646
curve, 427, 428 point, 641
solid, 539, 540 solid, 645, 647
surface, 476, 477 surface, 644
break mscale
curve, 419, 420, 421, 423, 424 curve, 686, 687
solid, 523, 524, 525, 528, 529, 530, 532, point, 685
536, 537 solid, 689
surface, 458, 459, 460, 462, 466, 467, surface, 688
468, 470, 472, 473, 474 offset curve, 172, 175
chain curve, 132 offset point, 108
conic curve, 135, 136 offset surface, 273
disassemble pierce point, 110, 111
curve, 430 pivot
surface, 479, 480 curve, 659, 660
edge match surface, 482, 483, 485 plane, 663
equivalencene point, 417 point, 658
extend curve, 433, 434, 435, 437, 439, 441, solid, 662
442 surface, 661
extend surface, 487, 489, 491, 493, 495, vector, 664
497, 499 point curve, 118, 121, 122, 125, 126
extract position
curve, 139, 140, 141, 143 curve, 668, 669
point, 82, 83 point, 667
point from surface, 85 solid, 671, 672, 673
point from surface diagonal, 87 surface, 670
point from surface parametric, 89 project point, 114, 115, 116
fillet curve, 146, 147 reverse
fit curve, 149 curve, 449
interpolate point, 92, 93, 95, 96 solid, 547
interpolate vector, 392 surface, 502
intersect rotate
curve, 151, 152, 153, 155, 156 coordinate frame, 695, 696
point at edge, 98 curve, 622, 623
point with curve and plane, 102 plane, 627
point with two curves, 99, 100, 101 point, 621
point with vector and curve, 103, 104 solid, 626
point with vector and plane, 106 surface, 624, 625
point with vector and surface, 105 vectors, 628
manifold curve, 162, 163 scale
mcoord curve, 633, 634
curve, 650, 651 point, 631, 632
plane, 654 solid, 638
point, 649 surface, 635, 636, 637
solid, 653 vector, 639
surface, 652 sew surface, 504
vector, 655 translate
merge curve, 444, 445, 446, 450, 453, 455, coordinate frame, 691, 692
curve, 609, 610, 611
INDEX
plane, 617
point, 607, 608 I
solid, 615, 616 IGES, 2, 20, 25, 46
surface, 612, 613, 614 interpolate method
vector, 618 point, 91, 94
trim curve, 452 vector, 391
vsum intersect method
curve, 678, 679 curve, 150, 154
point, 676, 677 intersect parameters subordinate form,
solid, 682 157
surface, 680, 681 point, 97
XYZ intersect parameters subordinate form, 157
curve, 200 IsoMesh, 17, 24, 37
point, 75, 76, 77, 78
solid, 202
surface, 201 L
extend method line, 25
curve, 431, 436, 438, 440 load/BC, 2
surface, 486, 488, 490, 492, 494, 496, 498 loads/BC, 2
extract method
curve, 137, 142
multiple points, 86, 88
point, 81
M
single point, 84 manifold method
curve, 160
match method
F closing gaps, 13
mathematical representation, 2
face, 10 Matra Datavision, 2, 47
face method, 42 mcoord method
field function, 4, 17
curve, 648
fillet method plane, 648
curve, 144 point, 648
fit method solid, 648
curve, 148 surface, 648
vector, 648
merge method
G curve, 443
general trimmed surface, 20 refit, 447
geometry types, 19 meshing, 12
global coordinate frame, 60 mirror method
global model tolerance, 18 curve, 640
surface gaps, 13 plane, 640
grid, 25 point, 640
solid, 640
surface, 640
H vector, 640
MSC.Patran CADDS 5, 47
hyperpatch, 25
MSC.Patran CATIA, 47
MSC.Patran EUCLID 3, 47
INDEX 7
MSC.Patran ProENGINEER, 47, 55 parameterized geometry, 3

.geo intermediate file, 56 parametric axes, 15
executing from MSC.Patran, 55 plotting, 16
executing from Pro/ENGINEER, 55 parametric cubic equation, 25
MSC.Patran Unigraphics, 47 parametric cubic geometry, 57
features, 47 definition, 25
global model tolerance, 48 limitations, 25, 26
user tips, 48 recommendations, 25, 26
mscale method subtended arcs, 26
curve, 683 parametric curve, 19
point, 683 Parametric Technology, 2, 47
solid, 683 Parasolid
surface, 683 tips for accessing, 49
multiple points patch, 25
extract method, 86, 88 PATRAN 2 Convention, 27, 28, 29
PATRAN 2 Convention button, 25, 27
Paver, 37
N pentahedron, 41
pierce method
native geometry, 3
point, 109
neutral file, 3, 25, 46, 57
pivot method
nodes, 718
curve, 656
renumber, 718
plane, 656
nodes on curve
point, 656
show action, 587
solid, 656
nodes on point
surface, 656
show action, 581
vector, 656
nodes on surface
plane
show action, 590
mcoord method, 648
normal method
mirror method, 640
overview, 65
pivot method, 656
position method, 665
rotate method, 619
O translate method, 605
offset method plane angle
constant curve, 171 show action, 596
point, 107 plane distance
surface, 272 show action, 598
variable curve, 173
P
p3_proe, 55
parameterization
B-rep solid, 8
curve, 5
definition, 5
point, 5
solid, 8
surface, 7
trimmed surface, 7
INDEX
point, 19 rotate method

delete action, 410 coordinate frame, 693
equivalence method, 416 curve, 619
extract method, 81 point, 619
interpolate method, 91, 94 solid, 619
intersect method, 97 surface, 619
mcoord method, 648
mirror method, 640
mscale method, 683 S
offset method, 107
scale method
pierce method, 109
curve, 629
pivot method, 656
point, 629
solid, 629
project method, 112
surface, 629
rotate method, 619
vector, 629
scale method, 629
sew method
surface, 503
vsum method, 674
show action
XYZ method, 74
coordinate frame attributes, 594
point distance
curve angle, 584
show action, 571
curve arc, 583
point location
curve attributes, 582
show action, 570
length range, 586
point method
nodes on curve, 587
curve, 117, 119, 123
nodes on point, 581
curve 4 point parametric positions
nodes on surface, 590
subordinate form, 127
overview, 568
position method
plane angle, 596
curve, 665
plane distance, 598
plane, 665
point distance, 571
point, 665
point location, 570
solid, 665
showing plane attributes, 595
surface, 665
showing vector attributes, 599
vector, 665
solid attributes, 593
pressure load, 4, 17, 34
surface area range, 589
Pro/ENGINEER, 2, 47
surface attributes, 588
project method
surface normals, 591
point, 112
show action information form, 569
simply trimmed surface, 21
single point
R extract method, 84
rectangular coordinate frame
definition, 60
refit method
solid, 543
renumber
action, 717
reverse method, 16, 34
curve, 448
solid, 546
surface, 501
INDEX 7
solid surface attributes

blend method, 538 show action, 588
break method, 522, 526, 531, 533, 534, 535 surface boundaries
delete action, 410 verify action, 698
disassemble method, 541 surface method, 42
mcoord method, 648 surface normals, 17, 34, 40
mirror method, 640 example of aligning, 35
mscale method, 683
pivot method, 656
position method, 665 T
refit method, 543
TetMesh, 24, 40
reverse method, 546
tetrahedron, 41
rotate method, 619
topologic entities
scale method, 629
edge, 10
face, 10
vsum method, 674
vertex, 10
XYZ method, 199
topological congruency, 31
solid attributes
definition, 12
show action, 593
gaps, 13
solids
topology
type of, 24
definition, 10
spherical coordinate frame
ID assignment, 11, 17
definition, 61
transform action
suface normals
overview, 602
show action, 591
translate method
surface
coordinate frame, 690
blend method, 475
curve, 605
break method, 457, 461, 465, 469, 471
plane, 605
delete action, 410
point, 605
disassemble method, 478
solid, 605
edge match method, 481, 484
surface, 605
extend method, 486, 488, 490, 492, 494,
vector, 605
496, 498
trim method
mcoord method, 648
curve, 451, 454
mirror method, 640
trimmed surface, 19
mscale method, 683
decomposing, 37
offset method, 272
default colors, 20
pivot method, 656
definition, 20
general trimmed, 20
refit method, 500
parent surface, 20
reverse method, 501
simply trimmed, 21
rotate method, 619
tri-parametric solid, 8, 19, 24
scale method, 629
types of geometry, 27
sew method, 503
curves, 27
sharp corners, 33
solids, 29
top and bottom locations, 34
surfaces, 28
vsum method, 674
XYZ method, 199
surface area range U
show action, 589 update graphics subordinate form, 701
INDEX
V
vector
interpolate method, 391
mcoord method, 648
mirror method, 640
pivot method, 656
rotate method, 619
scale method, 629
verify action
surface boundaries, 698
update graphics subordinate form, 701
vertex, 10
volume solid, 19
vsum method
curve, 674
point, 674
solid, 674
surface, 674
W
wedge solid, 42
X
XYZ method
curve, 199
point, 74
solid, 199
surface, 199

Geometry Modeling, Patran

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Geometry Modeling, Patran

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

C O N T E N T S

MSC.Patran Reference Manual

■ Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran, 19

■ Building An Optimal Geometry Model, 30

■ PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry, 57

■ Creating Planes, 363

■ Creating Vectors, 389

■ Editing Curves, 418

■ Editing Features, 562

■ Showing Points, 570

■ Showing Surfaces, 588

■ Showing Solids, 593

■ Showing Coordinate Frames, 594

■ Showing Planes, 595

■ Showing Vectors, 599

■ Transforming Coordinate Frames, 690

INDEX ■ MSC.Patran Reference Manual, 719

■ Concepts and Definitions

■ Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran

■ Building An Optimal Geometry Model

1.1 Overview of Capabilities

Direct Application of Loads/BCs and Element Properties to Geometry. All loads,

• PATRAN 2 Neutral File

1.2 Concepts and Definitions

Point. A Point in MSC.Patran is a point coordinate location in three-dimensional global XYZ

Figure 1-1 Point in MSC.Patran

Curve. A Curve in MSC.Patran is a one-dimensional point set in three-dimensional global XYZ

Figure 1-2 Curve in MSC.Patran

The parameter, ξ 1 , has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , where at ξ 1 = 0 , P is at endpoint V1 and at

P = ( 1.0 – ξ 1 )V1 + ξ 1 V2 Eq. 1-1

Figure 1-3 Mapping Function Phi for a Curve

Eq. 1-1 of our straight curve can be represented as:

Φξ 1 = ( 1.0 – ξ 1 )V1 + ξ 1 V2 Eq. 1-2

Surface. A surface in MSC.Patran is a two-dimensional point set in three-dimensional global

Figure 1-4 Surface in MSC.Patran

Figure 1-5 Mapping Function Phi for a Surface

∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 = T ξ1 and ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 2 = T ξ2 Eq. 1-4

Solid. A solid in MSC.Patran is a three-dimensional point set in three-dimensional global XYZ

Figure 1-6 Solid in MSC.Patran

A solid can be represented by a mapping function, Φ ( ξ 1 ,ξ 2 ,ξ 3 ) , which maps the parametric

Figure 1-7 Mapping Function Phi for a Solid

If we take the first order derivatives of Φ ( ξ1 ,ξ 2 ,ξ 3 ) , we get three partial derivatives, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 ,

* Surface A is not connected to Surface D

Figure 1-8 Topologically Equivalent Surfaces

Vertex Defines the topologic endpoint of a curve, or a corner of a surface or a solid. A

V2 ED2 V3 ED6 ED11 V8

The vertex, V4, in Figure 1-9 would be displayed as:

V4 has a vertex ID of 1 that belongs to edge 3 on surface 11.

The edge, ED10, in Figure 1-10 would be displayed as:

ED10 has an edge ID of 3 that belongs to face 1 on solid 100.

V6 has a vertex ID of 2 that belongs to edge 2 on face 1 on solid 100.

Topological Congruency and Meshing

Topologically Incongruent Topologically Congruent

Figure 1-11 Topologically Incongruent and Congruent Surfaces

Gaps Between Adjacent Surfaces. Another type of topological incongruence is shown in

Gap > Global Model

Vertices are Shared, Edges are Not

Figure 1-12 Topologically Incongruent Surfaces with a Gap

MSC recommends two methods for closing surface gaps:

Non-manifold Topology. Non-manifold topology can be simply defined as a geometry that is

Figure 1-13 Non-manifold Topology at an Edge

Figure 1-14 Connectivity Possibilities for a Curve